Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http: //books .google .com/I
A SPANISH GRAMMAR
WITH PRACTICAL INTRODUCTORY
LESSONS
BY
ALFRED COESTER, Ph.D.
(I
GINN AND COMPANY
BOSTON • NEW YORK • CHICAGO • LONDON
ATLANTA • DALLAS • COLUMBUS • SAN FRANCISCO
• • • •' »
• • < •• •
PRESERVATION
COPYJ^DOED / ,
^^ / ' ^ . ^ <r •^
/<y ^^'<' X /
COPYRIGHT, 191 2, BY
ALFRED COESTER
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
4X5-I2
GINN AND COMPANY • PRO-
PRIETORS • BOSTON • U.S.A.
PREFACE
This book is the outcome of teaching Spanish for several years
to different types of pupils. The author's purpose has been to
supply a useful book to English-speaking students of Spanish.
Usefulness has therefore been the standard in determining the
arrangement of the material. The introductory lessons are easy
and progressive, assuming little or no general knowledge of gram-
mar and language. They attempt to take advantage of the strength
of first impressions ; for example, the use of usted is given prom-
inence at the outset so that the pupil will be less likely at a later
period to employ tti and the second singular in business corre-
spondence. Other features of the book are, (i) exercises specially
designed for drill on peculiarities of grammar that require habit to
fix ; (2) ample material for oral work ; (3) a progressive vocabu-
lary that attempts to include the commonest and hence most im-
f>ortant words and phrases with many colloquial expressions that
are necessary in social intercourse; (4) an order of development
that has been proved of practical value.
In the first few lessons, sentences illustrative of the grammatical
topic of the lesson have been given before the explanation, as it is
intended that these sentences should be committed to memory be-
fore proceeding to the explanation. Special vocabularies to each
lesson have been omitted because the preparation of such a special
vocabulary is a useful exercise which is too often sacrificed in ele-
mentary books.
Part I furnishes an introduction to the chief characteristics of
Spanish and is sufficient for a good working knowledge of the
language. Part II takes up in systematic order those details of
m
esasoo
iv SPANISH GRAMMAR
grammar which were neglected or hastily passed over in the first
part. As the second part will not be studied until the pupil finds
his reading in a continued text, no Spanish exercises are given.
On the other hand, abundant material is provided for the transla-
tion of English to Spanish. The sentences in these exercises are
short, according to the author's principle of presenting to the pupil
only a few difficulties at one time with ample practice on the point
under discussion. As the English sentences are mainly translations
of colloquial or literary Spanish, their rendering by the student
should result in characteristically idiomatic expression.
The author wishes to thank Mr. E. S. Harrison for his sugges-
tions and kindness in reading the manuscript and proof.
ALFRED COESTER
CONTENTS
PART I ^
(
INTRODUCTORY LESSONS
LESSON PAGE
I. Conjugation, Present Indicative. Exercise i . . . . lo
II. Gender and Number of Nouns. Articles. Exercise 2 . 13
III. Ser. Estar. Exercise 3 16
IV. Agreement of Adjectives. Exercise 4 18
V. Possession. Demonstratives. Exercise 5 2i_
VI. Personal Subject "Pronouns. Possessive Adjectives.
Tener. Exercise 6 24
VII. Numerals. Days. Months. Seasons. Exercise 7 . . . 27
VIII. Comparison of Adjectives. Exercise 8 32
IX. Radical-Changing Verbs. Indirect Object. Personal
. a. Exercise 9 36
X. Reflexive Verbs. Exercise 10 41
XI. Preterit Tense. Exercise ii 45
XII. Imperfect Tense. Exercise 12 49
XIII. Participles. Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses. Rela-
tives. Exercise 13 52
XIV. Future Tense and Conditional. Exercise 14 ... . 57
XV. Personal Pronouns. Adverbs. Exercise 15 61
XVI. Irregular Verbs. Exercise 16 66
XVII. Imperative Mood. Present Subjunctive as Imperative.
Exercise 17 71
XVIII. Two Objective Pronouns. Possessive Pronouns. Exer-
cise 18 , 76
XIX. Infinitive Mood. Exercise 19 83
XX. Subjunctive Mood in Dependent Clauses. Exercise 20 92
XXI. Subjunctive Mood, Imperfect Tense. Exercise 21 . . 96
XXII. Letter-Writing. Exercise 22 100
v
vi SPANISH GRAMMAR
PART II
SYSTEMATIC ACCIDENCE AND SYNTAX
CHAPTER PAGE
I. Order of Words. Exercise 23 107
II. Articles. Exercise 24 iii
III. Nouns. Exercise 25 118
IV. Adjectives. Exercise 26 126
V. Adjectives, Continued. Exercise 27 131
VI. Numerals. Exercise 28 139
VII. Possessives and Demonstratives. Exercise 29 ... . 147
VIII. Relative Pronouns. Exercise 30 152
IX. Interrogative Pronouns. Exercise 31 159
X. Indefinite Expressions. Exercise 32 163
XI. Personal Pronouns. Exercise 33 171
XII. Adverbs. Exercise 34 179
XIII. Prepositions, Conjunctions, Interjections. Exercise 35 190
XIV. Verb Forms. Exercise 36 204
XV. Syntax of Verb. Tenses. Impersonals. Exercise 37 . 241
XVI. Passive Voice. Participles. Exercise 38 ....'.. 248
XVII. Infinitive and Subjunctive Moods. Exercise 39 . . . 255
XVIII. Idiomatic Uses of Verbs. Exercise 40 263
Appendix I. Verb List 271
Appendix II. Prepositions used with Certain Verbs
BEFORE Dependent Infinitives 277
SPANISH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 285
ENGLISH-SPANISH VOCABULARY 305
INDEX 329
- J » . * - "
SPANISH GRAMMAR
' ."^ •
" • J J *
PART I
INTRODUCTION
1. The Alphabet
. The Spanish alphabet has thirty different signs.
Letiers
Names
Leti'ers
Names
Letfers
; Names
A a
a
J
i
jota
R
r
ere
B b
be
K
k
ka
—
rr
erre
C c
ce
L
1
ele
S
8
ese
Ch ch
die
LI
U
die
T
t
te
D d
de
M
m
erne
U
U
u
£ e
e
W
n
ene
V
V
ve (or u de corazdn)
(u consonante)
F f
efe
W
n
efte
W
w
doble u (or ve doble)
G g
ge
o
X
z
equis
H h
(h)ache
P
P
pe
Y
y
y gnega (or ye)
I i
•
1
Q
q
cu
Z
z
zeta
a. The names of the Spanish letters are feminine : nna b larga a long
b (that is, b not i/).
b. The letters k and w are found chiefly in words adopted from f ordgn
languages ; the sound of rr at the beginning of words is represented by r.
2. Vcnvels. Spanish vowels have approximately the following
values: a as in/z/>i^; Ana
e as d in gate ; Pepe
i as in machine ; Anita, Maria
as in note ; Manolo, Pedro
tt as ^^ in moon ; Tula
I
2 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. At the enfl*bf 's^ word. ^4 ^^^ jstanding alone i is written y:
rey, king\ y, and,* '•* • '"' * •* • '••*
b. The Spdni^^&c^iHKjs.of'e;^, ^f^d.'P ^^^ simple and not diphthon-
gal as frequently* isf £tiglKslT:'4<is.AQVKke*V ^^ ^^^y^ is not like o
in no^ u is not like u in ^2/^^. Learners should try to acquire an accu-
rate pronunciation of the simple sounds without the final glide which
characterizes the English vowels.
^. In certain positions, especially before 1 and r, Spanish e has a more
open sound like e of met : papel,^^/^r ; tener, to have ; ella, she ; perro,
dog ; este, this. The quality of the other vowels varies somewhat accord-
ing as they stand in an accented syllable or not, but fine distinctions are
unnecessary to the learner.
d. The quantity of Spanish vowels is short. The stressed syllable is
not prolonged but merely pronounced with greater force.
e. The vowels a e o are called strong ; i and u weak.
f. Spoken Spanish contracts two identical vowels into one syllable
without lengthening : as, de este = deste, cree = ere, la alta = lalta.
3. Diphthongs. The strong vowels a, e, and o unite with the
weak vowels i and u to form one syllable, called a diphthong.
The weak vowels also combine with each other. Though each
vowel keeps its own sound, the stress falls on the strong vowel,
while the weak one is uttered rapidly: of two weak vowels, the
last is stressed. The possible combinations are
ai (ay) Maracaibo, Garay
au Cauca, Bautista
ei (ey) Leiro, Caney
eu Ceuta, Eoropa
oi (oy) oiga, Alcoy
ou Bouzas
iu LiuTa, ciudad
a. Two strong vowels form distinct syllables : Bil-ba-o, Le-6n, Lis-bo^,
Nar-Y^-ez.
b. If two vowels which commonly form a diphthong are pronounced
separately, an accent mark is written over the vowel which bears the
stress : Garcia, Maria, Valparaiso, Niobe, oido, fldido, Tliy.
ia
Santiago, Colombia
ua
Juan, Managua
ie
Oviedo, Cienfuegos
ue
Buenos Aires
io
Dios, Antonio
uo
cuota, antiguo
ui (uy)
Luis
INTRODUCTION 3
4. Triphthongs. A strong vowel between two weak ones forms
a combination which is pronounced as one syllable :
iai fiais uai (uay) La Goaira, Paraguay
iei fieis uei (uey) acentu^is, buey
5. Consonants, b denotes the same sound as v. It resembles
English b only at the beginning of a word and after m or n : bala,
tambi^n, enviar (pronounce embiar): In other positions b (or v)
represents a bilabial sound not consciously used in English. To
produce it, bring the lips together as if to pronounce ^, but, instead
of closing them, allow thq breath to issue continuously as in utter-
ing V, Avoid English v^ which is produced by allowing the breath
to issue between the lower lip and the upper teeth. This sound
does not exist in Spanish. Ex. — Bilbao, bilbaino, bebe. Before
8 and t, b has the value of p or is silent : obscuro (often spelled
oscuro), subterraneo, absoluto.
C represents two sounds :
1 . A voiceless spirant, th in thin^ before e and i : Cervo, Ponce ;
Cid, Cicerdn.
2. A voiceless guttural, k^ before a, 0, u, or another consonant,
or when final : Costa Rica, Cuba, Ciara, Tepic, leccion.
ch is pronounced like English ch in church : Child, chileno.
d represents the voiced sound of th in though : Toledo, Granada ;
but approaches English //at the beginning of words or after 1 or n :
don, saldo, anda. When final, d is usually silent : Madrid, usted ;
but some speakers give the voiceless sound of th in thin : sed.
Intervocalic d is often silent, especially in the termination ado:
Prado = lyaOy comprado = comprao,
f is equivalent to English/: Flandes, flamenco.
g denotes two sounds :
I. A voiced guttural, g as in "English go, before a, 0, u, or another
consonant : Galida, gallego, gusto, grande. To indicate this sound
before e or i, a silent u is inserted : Portugal, portugues ; guia.
4 SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. A strong aspirate before e and i, similar to German or
Scotch ch in loch but frequently softened to a strong English h
(see Spanish j) : G^nova, genovis, Gibraltar.
h is a silent letter in Castilian Spanish : la Habana, habanero.
It is sometimes lightly pronounced before ue : huevo.
j (Jota) denotes a strong aspiration, the same as g before e and i :
Jalisco, J^rez, Gij6n. When final, it is nearly or quite silent : reloj
often written rel6.
• In some words the letter x used formerly to represent this sound,
hence MMco, in Spain now spelled M^jico ; Xatixa = Janja.
k is not a Spanish letter but is used in a few borrowed foreign
words with the value of English k : Idlo, kodak.
I is equivalent to an English / when pronounced clearly in the
forward part of the mouth as in bill-, Lisboa, lisbonense.
II denotes a sound similar to /// in million : Castilla, castellano.
At the beginning of a word this sound is difficult for English
speakers, who had better practice the vulgarism pronounced like y
rather than allow the sound to lapse into a simple 1 : Llanos, llaye,
lleno, lluvia, llorar.
m is equivalent to English m : Manila, manil^o.
n is more clearly pronounced than English n : Napoles, napolitano.
Before the guttural sounds k and g^ before " jota" (j, and g before e
and i), and before hue, n becomes the velar nasal represented by
ng in thing \ bianco, blanquear, angel, naranja, un huevo. The
same value is often given to emphatic monosyllables : ten, pon.
Si is a sign having a value similar to ni in onion. The Spanish
name for the mark over the letter is tilde. EspaSa, espanol.
p is like English p : Panamil, panam^o. Before s and t, p is
commonly silent: psicologia, s^ptimo, septiembre (usually spelled
8^mo and setiembre).
q is used only before ue and ui, with the sound of k : lorqueSo
(from Lorca), Quito, quiteno. After q the u is silent
INTRODUCTION 5
r at the beginning of a word represents the value of rr (see
below); but in the middle or at the end of a word it has a reduced
value of the same sound, being pronounced with a single flick of
the tongue. Care should be taken not to slur the sound at the end
of a word but to pronounce it distinctly. Ex. — pero, comprar.
rr is a strong trill with the tip of the tongue, produced just back of
the upper teeth : perro, Navarra, navarro, Puerto Rico, portorrique&o.
s initial, between vowels, and final, has the sharp hissing sound
of English s, never the value of English z. Compare English
president with Spanish preside&te, rose with roaa. Before a con-
sonant, and sometimes when final, s tends to be reduced to a breath-
ing and even to become silent : las niSas = lath nifias or la^ niHaSy
mks rico = ma^ rico, dos = do\ inismo = mVmo, Before d, g, and m
in the same word, s sometimes resembles English z : desde, musgo.
But students had better pronounce s as a sharp hiss in all positions :
Solis, Paso, I08 rusos.
t is equivalent to English /, but more forcibly pronounced by
bringing the tongue close to the upper teeth : Trinidad, trinitario.
V has the same values as b : Valdivia, beber, vivir.
w, used only in foreign proper names, has the foreign value :
Washington, Wagner.
X is equivalent to English x pronounced like ks ; before conso-
nants, however, the sound tends to become a simple s and is so
written in some words : sexto (sesto), ezcelente. Between vowels
X is sometimes given the sound of gs : examen.
y as a vowel, see i. As a consonant y is like English y in yes^
though strongly enunciated, not unlike the y in DorCt you : yo,
Yucatin, yucateco.
z has the sound of English M in Mn (see c before e and i), and
occurs before a, 0, and u, final, and sometimes before another con-
sonant : Zamora, Zorita, Zurbarim, Vera Cruz, Guzman.
6. Peculiarities. In Spanish America and in parts of Spain the
following peculiarities in pronunciation are common.
SPANISH GRAMMAR
C before e and i is pronounced like s : oonocer, cita, = conoser
and sita,
d is silent between vowels : matado = matao, vivido = vivio,
iiada== na,
11 is like English^ or even/ in Jest: caballo = cabayo or cabajo,
XLegei=yega or jegq,
r final is often silent : mujer = muje.
s is reduced to a breathing or is silent : ties = tre, usted = ute,
lefresco = refre^co,
z is pronounced like s : Zulia, Diaz.
Dialectical peculiarities that are often heard are
bue = giie : bueno = gueno
gua = wa : agua = awa
7. How to Spell certain Consonant Sounds. The following table
of spellings for certain consonant sounds before the five vowels
and when final will be found useful for reference when forming
plurals or derivatives of nouns and in conjugating verbs.
Sound
a
e
i
U
Final
th
za
ce
ci
zo
zu
z
as in thin
Zamora
andaluces
Andalucia
Arizona
Zurita
andaluz
k
ca
Caracas
que
caraqueno
qui
Turquia
CO
turco
> cu
Cuba
c
Tepic
as in go
ga
Mdlaga
gue
malagueho
gui
Guillermo
go
Vigo
gu
Guzmdn
jota
ja
Jamaica
je, ge
Jirez^ Ginova
Mijico^Gijdn
jo
Jorge
. Julio
gw
gua
Guatemala
giie^
Maydguez
gui^
GUines
guo
antiguo
kw
cua
cue
cui
cuo
Ecuador
Cuenca
Cuico
cuota
^ The sign •• over a letter is called a diaeresis, and is used in Spanish to
indicate that the a of the syllables gue and gui is not silent but pronounced.
INTRODUCTION 7
6. Accent. One syllable of a Spanish word receives greater em-
phasis or stress of voice as in English, but without the slurring of
other syllables peculiar to English. The accent falls regularly on —
I. The final syllable of words ending in a consonant except n
or 8 : aeilor, espulol, usted.
~' ' " e penult) of words ending in .
a leu.
ule have the stress indicated
bi idto, ingl^B, Guzm£ii.
lark is used —
coord with the general rule^
U U
; elements : Uo, seria, aUn.
use of certain pronouns and
ac £c6tno? ^dtode? £cuil?
: of the demonstratives iste,
iM, A< Aas (3d sing. pres. ind. of
hater)
be, / Aave {1st sing. prea. ind. of ht, behold
BUS, but (conjunction) mis, more
mi, my (possessive adjecdve)
M, «y (reflexive pronoun)
f words identical in spelling :
give (pres. subj. of dar)
I gave ( 1 St sing. pret. ind. of dai)
he^ him (personal pronoun)
(pers<^i pronoun)
A, if
Mlo, alone (adjective;
te, thee (personal pronoun)
tn, thy (posseswve adjective)
T», he sees (3d sing. pres. ind. of
«r)
s£, / know (IS
■I, yes \ self (acfvsative of •>, 1
junctive form)
■6I0, only (adverb)
ti, tea
Ml, thou (personal pronoun)
T<, go (imperative sing, of Ir)
8 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. Monosyllabic preterits bear written accents : tI, vld, faf .
6. The Spanish Academy authorizes the omission of accents from
the words a, fo ; e, and; o, or, except between figures, 364; u, or.
6. Plurals require the mark when the addition of es causes the
accent to fall on the third syllable from the end of the word:
examen, ezimeneB ; orden, drdenes.
a. On the other hand, the addition of eo to .words ending in n
or s accented on the final syllable will cause the mark to be un-
necessary : ingUs, Ingleses ; nacl6n, n&cioiKB.
7. Verb-forms to which pronouns are added require the accent
mark whenever the stress falls on the third or fourth syllable from
the end of the combination : dfgalo, did^ndolo, dedrselo, higamelo.
a. But the addition of proj marks does
not cause the removal of the r
8. Adverbs formed by the lound words,
retain the stress and the accei onent parts :
Bfilidamente, espantapijaros, d<
10. Diviaion of Syllables. contains as
many syllables as it has vow ussible each
syllable should begin with a sii the digraphs
ch, 11, rr, and combinations of a consonant plus 1 or r (except rl,
Bl, tl, and bt) are not separated :
a. The prefixes ab, des, and sub are kept intact : aub-le-va-dfin,
ab-to-gar, des-a-mor.
i. The letter b before a consonant is kept with the preceding
syllable : In-cons-ton-te, Ins-truc-do-neB, en-hies-to.
Note. In printing observe the following.
I. A syllable consisting of a single vowel should not stand at the be-
ginning nor at the end of a line. Thus, a-gndo and ef«ctA-a are not
permissible.
INTRODUCTION 9
2. Compound words which are distinctiy felt as such may be divided
accordingly : nos-otros, extra-ordinario, cari-acontecido ; but derivation,
except as indicated here and in section 10 a, is not considered : de-lante,
ma-lestar.
3. The separation of contiguous vowels, even when not forming a
diphthong, should be avoided, according to the general rule that each
syllable should Ipegin with a consonant : geo-logia, arquea-do, poe-sla.
11. Punctuation. Different from English is the use of the follow-
ing marks of punctuation :
1. Inverted interrogation and exclamation points before ques-
tions and exclamations: ^Qui^n es? Who is it? |Qu^ hermosa!
How beautiful /
2. Three dots (. . .) to indicate an incomplete sentence where
English uses a dash.
3. A dash at the beginning of each speech in conversational
matter where English uses quotation marks. See Exercise 6,-5, 2.
The Spanish names of the marks of punctuation are
• pun to final . . • puntos suspensivos ** dieresis
I coma I ? interrogacidn « » comillas or cita
; punto y coma j I admiracidn - gui6n
; dos puntos ( ) parentesis — raya
12. Capitalization in Spanish differs from its use in English
mainly as follows. Not capitalized are
The pronoun yo, /.
Names of days and months.
Geographical adjectives (except sometimes when used as nouns
denoting human beings).
PRACTICAL INTRODUCTORY LESSONS-
LESSON I
13.
^Habla Juan espaSol? Does John speak Spanish ?
Si, seSor, habla espaSol. Yes^ sir^ he speaks Spanish,
^Qu^ idioma habla uated? What language do you speak f
Hablo ingles. / speak English, •
Carlos y Maria hablan espafiol. Charles and Mary speak Spanish,
^No hablan ingles? Doh*t they speak English ?
No, seSor, no hablan ingles. No^ sir, they do not speak English,
^Vive usted en EspaSa? Are you living in Spain ?
No iiYO en EspaSa. / do not live in Spain,
I D6nde vivimos ? Where are we living ?
Viyimos en Nueva York. We live in New York,
Y hablamos ingl^. And we speak English,
14. Personal Endings. Observe that the endings of the verb in
the Spanish sentences above vary and correspond to the English
pronouns. Note that no pronouns appear in the Spanish sentences,
except usted, meaning you, which is used with the same ending as
he. Usted is generally abbreviated to V. or Vd. The plural ustedes
(W. or Vds.) takes the same ending as they,
15. Conjugations. Verbs are divided into three classes or con-
jugations according to the endings of their infinitives ; thus,
I. hablar, to speak
II. vender, to sell
III. vivir, to live
If the ending of the infinitive is dropped, the stem, or radical,
remains, to which are added the personal endings.
Note. — The infinitive is the name of the verb and is the form given
in dictionaries.
lO
LESSON I
16. Pxesent Tense Indicative Mood.
II
I
hablo
I speak
I am speaking
do I speak ?
habla
he speaks
he is speaking
does he speak f
habla usted
you speak
you are speaking
do you speak ?
hablamos
we speak
we are speaking
do we speak ?
hablan
they speak
they are speaking
do they speak f
hablan ustedes
you speak
you are speaking
do you speak f
vendo
I sell
II
/ am selling
do I sell?
vende
he sells
he is selling
does he sellf
vende Vd.
you sell
you are selling
do you sellf
vendemos
we sell
we are selling
do W sellf
vend en
they sell
they are selling
do they sellf
vend en Vds.
you sell
you are selling
do you sellf
vivo
I live
III
I am living
do I live f
vive
he lives
he is living
does he live f
vive Vd.
you live
you are living
do you livef
vivimos
we live
we are living
do we live f
viven
they live
they are living
do they live f
viven Vds.
you live
you are living
do you live f
a. Observe that the three English forms correspond to the one
form of the Spanish verb. The simple form^ " He speaks," is not
used in English questions or negative statements ; but instead, either
^^ progressive form, ** Is he speaking ? " " He is not speaking," or
the emphatic form, " Does he speak ?" " He does not speak."
17. Interrogative Sentences. Questions are asked in Spanish by
placing the subject of the sentence after the verb.
^ Habla Juan? Does John speak f Is John speaking f
a. As the subject is frequently placed after the verb even in
affirmations, an inverted question mark i precedes a question.
12 SPANISH GRAMMAR
18. Negation. To make a sentence negative, place no, notj
before the verb.
No hablo. / am not speakings I do not speak,
VOCABULARY
a, to
leer, to re<id
aUi, there
mal, badly
aprender, to learn
mucho, much^ a great deal
bien, well
papel, m., paper
carta, f., letter
poco, httle
comprar, to buy
qu^, what?
comprender, to understand
qui^n, who?
con, with
seSora, £., madam
escribir, to write
tambi^n, also
Inglaterra, £., England
tinta, £., ink
EXERCISE 1
A, 1, I Comprende Vd. bien ? No, senor, comprendo mal.
2. ^Comprenden Carlos y Juan ? Sf, comprenden. 3. ^Qu6 compra
Juan? Compra papel y tinta. 4. ^Qui^n vende papel? Carlos
vende papel. 5. ^Que compran Vds.? Compramos tambidn pa-
pel. 6. ^Leen Vds. mucho? No, sehora, . leemos poco. 7. ^Qu^
aprende Vd. ? Aprendo a hablar espaiiol. 8. ^Vive Vd. en Ingla-
terra? No vivo allf. 9. ^-Con qu^ escriben? Escriben con tinta
en papel. i o. ^ A qui^n escribe Juan ? Escribe a Carlos.
JB. Answer in Spanish with a sentence containing a verb:
I. ^Qu^ idioma habla Marfa? 2. ^-Habla Carlos ingles.? 3. ^'Vive
Vd. en Inglaterra? 4. ^'Ddnde viven Vds.? 5. ^Qui^n compra
papel? 6. iQu^ compran Juan y Carlos? 7. ^'Escribe Vd. mucho
en espanol ? 8. ^ A quidn escribe Vd. ? 9. i Qu^ lee Vd. ? 10.^ t)6nde
venden tinta ?
C I. Do you speak Spanish? No, sir, I speak English. 2. Do
they understand ? They do not understand. 3. Where do Charles
and John live? They live in Spain. 4. Where do you {plural)
live ? We live in New York. 5. What does Charles buy ? He is
LESSON II
rs
buying paper and ink. 6. What language does he speak ? He
speaks Spanish. 7. To whom are you reading? I am reading to
Mary. 8. Who understands ? I understand ; they understand.
9. We are writing to Charles. 10. They^ are learning to speak
Spanish. 11. Are you writing to John? No, sir, I am not writing
to John. 12. Who reads a great deal in Spanish ? Mary and John
read in Spanish.
19.
LESSON II
Un hermano.
A brother.
Una hermana. A sister.
Un libro.
A book.
Una pluma. A pen.
£1 hombre.
The man.
Los hombres. The men.
La mujer.
The woman.
Las mujeres. The women.
£1 ingles.
The Englishman,
Los ingleses. The Englishmen,
£1 idioma de la inglesa.
The language of the English
woman.
£1 idioma de las inglesas.
£1 color del papel.
Los colores de los papeles.
Juan escribe ana carta k la seSora.
^Escribe Vd. cartas al seSor?
The language of the English
women.
The color of the paper.
The colors of the papers,
fohn writes a letter to the lady.
Do you write letters to the
gentleman f
20. Gender. Every Spanish noun is grammatically masculine or
feminine.
1. Names of male beings are masculine: el artista, the artist \
el rey, the king\ of female beings feminine : la mujer, the woman ;
la reina, the queen.
2. Nouns ending in are generally masculine ; in a, feminine :
el Ubro, the book\ la pluma, the pen.
a. But there are many exceptions : el dia, the day ;- la mano, the
hand. These, like the gender of nouns ending in other letters than
or a, must be learned individually.
3. Nouns denoting persons, emplo)nnents, or nationality may
often be made feminine by changing final to a, or by adding a :
14
SPANISH GRAMMAR
hermano, brother \ hermaiia, sister \ espftfiol, Spaniard \ espftfiola,
Spanish woman.
21. Articles. Spanish has two articles, Indefinite and Definite.
Each must agree in gender and number with the noun which it
modifies.
I. Indefinite article.
Masculine
Feminine
un
una
un libro, a book
una carta, a lei
finite article.
Masculine
Feminine
Neuter
Sing. el
U(el)
lo
Plur. lOS
las
(lacking)
a. Feminine el is an old form of the article which is still used
before nouns beginning with a stressed syllable in a or ha : el agua,
the water \ el hacha, the ax ; but la America, America.
b. The form el combines with de, qfoxfromy to form del, of the
ox from the ; and with a, to, to form al, to the,
c» The neuter article is used only with adjectives not modifying
a noun : lo mismo, the same,
22. Plural of Nouns. To form the plural of nouns, add s to
words ending in a vowel, es to words ending in a consonant.
el hombre, the man los hombres, the men
la mujer, the woman las majeres, the women
Note. — For exceptions, see section 130.
a. Observe change of spelling: el ULpiz, the pencil \ los ULpices,
the pencils. The sound of th must be written c before es. See
section 7.
b. Final 7 is treated as a consonant : el rey, the king\ los re3res,
the kings ; la ley, the law ; las leyes, the laws.
LESSON II 15
23. Idiomatic Expressions. No two languages correspond pre-
cisely in their methods of expressing ideas. Expressions which do'
not appear to follow a rule of grammar, or which vary from our
own method, we term idiomatic : thus,
A Spanish letter^ una carta en espaSol
A Spanish lesson^ ana lecci6n de espaSol' ^
EXERCISE 2
A, Give the feminine with the definite article^ singular and plural :
El abuelo, grandfather. El pgiRO, cousin. El tfo, uncle. El hijo,
son. El sobrino, nephew. El muchacho, boy. El panadero, the baker.
El alemdn, the German, El francos, the Frenchman.
Give the plural and translate: i. El abuelo de la mujer. 2. El
hermano del ingles. 3. Al tfo del espanol. 4. La prima del senor.
5. Al hijo de la panadera.
B, (The meaning of new words must henceforth be looked for in
the vocabulary in the latter part of the book^ Translate : i. El her-
inano del espanol vive en Espana ; no vive aquf. 2. i Escribe cartas
al ingles ? 3. Las hermanas del sefior no viven en el pafs. 4. No
comprendemos el idioma de la senora. 5. Escribimos una carta en
espanol a un espanol. 6. Una mujer compra un libro y a^rendf a
J^r.el espanol. 7. Escribo en el papel con una pluma y tinta. 8. Los
ingleses viven en Inglaterra, los franceses en Francia, y los norte-
americanos en la America del Norte. 9. El^ tfo lee la carta del ale-
man. 10. La tfa habla al panadero.
C Answer in Spanish : i, lA qui^n habla el tfo de la inglesa }
2. 1 A qui^n escribe el seiior ? 3. ^ Qu^ lee la mujer ? 4. ^ D6nde
viven los ingleses } 5 . ^ Qui^n vive en la America del Norte ? 6. ^ En
qu^ pafs viven los* franceses? 7. i Con qu^ escribe Vd. la carta?
8. I Qa6 escriben Vds. al espanol ? 9. ^ En qu^ idioma habla Vd.
al seiior ? 10. ^ No comprende Vd. el idioma del hombre ?
Z>, I. To whom are you writing the letter ? 2. Does John write
Spanish letters to the Spaniards? 3. I do not understand the
i6
SPANISH GRAMMAR
language of the gentlemen. 4. We live in North America; the
Frenchmen live in France. 5. Charles is writing to the girl cousiju^
6. John and Maiy write English letters to the grandfather. 7. Does
he read the books of the Frenchman ? 8. What language are you
learning from the Spaniard ? 9. The baker speaks German to the
boy. 10. We write the Spanish lesson with pencils on the paper.
24.
LESSON III
Soy americano.
Bstoy en la America del Horte.
^Qni^n es el profesor ?
Bs el seffor Blanco.
^Qai6ne8 son Yds.?
Somos espafioles, pero estamos en
Nueva York.
Buenos dlas, ^c6mo estil Yd. ?
Estoy muy bien, gracias.
y 4 Yd.?
Sin noyedad.
25. Present Indicative.
/ am an American,
I am in North America.
Who is the teacher f
He is Mr. Blanco,
Who are you f
We are Spaniards^ but we are
in New York.
Good mornings how are you ?
I am very well, thank you.
And you f
Same as usual (literally, without
novelty).
S%x
to be
Estar
soy
I am
estoy
es
he is
estil
es Yd.
you are
esUYd.
somos
we are
estamos
son
they are
estin
son Yds.
you are
estAn Yds
a. Ser and estar both correspond to the English verb to be, but
each has its distinctive meaning. Estar denotes position : Estd en
M^jico, He is in Mexico. Ser denotes character; hence must be
used before all nouns standing in the predicate : Es espaliol, He is
a Spaniard (see section 26, i).
LESSON III 17
d. With adjectives estar indicates a condition temporary in dura-
tion : "Esti enf ermo, ^e is sick ; while ser implies an essential quality
of a person or thing : El papel es bianco, The paper is white,
c. When an adjective is used in the predicate with the meaning
of a noun, the proper verb is ser : Es rico, He is rich (that is, He
is a rich man) ; Ella es joven, She is young (that is, a young woman),
d. With bueno, good^ and malo, bad^ estar refers to health, while
ser refers to character : Es bueno, pero estd malo. He is a good man^
but he is sick,
e. Idiomatic:
EstiL blen. All right,
]EstiL bueno! Good / Excellent /
26. Use of Articles, i. Before a predicate noun omit the in-
definite article : Es alem&n. He is a German,
2. Before a title use the definite article: el se&or Gonzalez,
Mr, Gonzalez ; el general O'Donnell, General O^Donnell,
3. Before the name of a language, except after hablar and en,
use the definite article :
Aprendemos el espaSol. We are learning Spanish.
YX general G6mez habla espi^ol. General Gdmez speaks Spanish,
EXERCISE 3
A. Insert the correct form of the verb ser or estar in thefolloTV-
ing : I . Juan en M^jico. 2 . Carlos un muchacho cubano.
3. I Qui^n Vd. ? 4. i Vd. en Espafta? 5. Los mucha-
chos ingleses, pero no en Inglaterra. 6. i Marfa
y Juana muchachas espanolas? 7. i D6nde las muchachas?
8. YX agua no caliente, frfa. 9. El hombre no
rico, pobre. 10. ^ C6mo el senor ?
B, Estamos ahora en una sala de clase. Arriba esta el techo.
Abajo esti el suelo. Las ventanas estan al lado de la sala. Al otro
lado estdn las puertas. Contra las paredes estdn las pizarras. Es-
cribimos en la pizarra con tiza.
1 8 SPANISH GRAMMAR
Somos discfpulos del sefior Blanco. £s el profesor de la clase.
Delante del profesor estd una mesa. Ei profesor esta sentado en
una silla. £1 discfpulo debe estar de pie, cuando habla al profesor.
C I. i D6nde esta Vd. ahora ? 2. ^ Qu6 clase es ? 3. ^ En qu^
clase estamos } 4. i Qui^n es el profesor ? 5. ^* De quidn son Vds.
discfpulos ? 6. I Estd Vd. de pie o sentado ? 7. ^' Estoy de pie o sen-
tado ? 8. ^ Soy discfpulo o profesor ? 9. ^' Esta Vd. sentado delante
o al lado del profesor ? 10. ^ D6nde esta el techo ? ^ el suelo ? i la
puerta ?
£>, I. They are Cubans, but they live in New York. 2. Are you
a Cuban or a Spaniard ? 3. Where is Mexico ? It is in North
America. 4. I am not the teacher of the Spanish class. 5. Where
are you seated ? I am sitting in front of the table. 6. Good morn-
ing 1 How is Mr. Blanco ? He is very well, thank you. 7. Are the
letters from the German ? Where are they ? 8. They are on the
chair on the other side of the room. 9. Is the ceiling above or be-
low ? The floor is below, the ceiling above, i o. We are Americans,
but Mr. Romero is a Spaniard. 1 1 . The brother of Mr. Gonzalez
is a merchant, not a physician. 12. They are not writing on the
walls, but ^ on the blackboards. 13. We stand when we speak to the
teacher. 14. We are not rich men. 1 sino. See section 232, 4.
gy LESSON IV
£1 libro bianco. TAe white book.
La casa blanca. The white house,
J«08 libros son blancos. The books are white.
Las casas son blancas. The houses are white,
£1 libro estil cerrado. The book is shut.
La puerta estd abierta. The door is open,
^Est^ abiertas las ventanas ? Are the windows open ?
No, seSor, estdn cerradas. iVb, sir^ they are shut,
28. Agreement of Adjectives. Spanish adjectives take the gen-
der and number of the nouns which they modify. This rule is true
LESSON IV 19
also when the adjective is used after ser and estar. See section
27 for examples.
a. The attributive adjective is usually placed after the noun:
el hombre cort^s, the polite man ; la mujer hermosa, the beautiful
woman,
29. Gender of Adjectives. If a masculine adjective ends in 0,
the feminine substitutes a for : bianco, blanca, white ; negro,
negra, black.
Adjectives ending in e or a consonant have the same form in
both genders :
el papel verde, the green paper la casa yerde, the green house
el color azttl, the blue color la loz aztd, the blue light
a. Exception. Adjectives of nationality add a to words ending in
a consonant : ingles, inglesa, English ; alemiin, alemana, German,
(For other exceptions see section 135.)
30. Plural of Adjectives. Like the plural of nouns, the plural of
adjectives is formed by adding s to words ending in a vowel and
es to words ending in a consonant : los papeles verdes, the green
papers ; las luces azules, the blue lights,
31. Idiomatic Expressions, a. There is or there are^ hay.
There are two doors here. Hay dos puertas aqid.
There is no paper. No hay papel. (The negative must
precede the verb.)
b, A question introduced by ^por qu4? why^ may be answered
by poique, because^ with a clause, or by "^dxdi^for or in order to, fol-
lowed by an infinitive.
^Por qu^ aprende Vd. el espi^ol? Why are you learning Spanish f
Porqne voy a BspaSa. Because I am going to Spain.
Para escribir cartas en espa&ol. In order to write Spanish letters.
20 SPANISH GRAMMAR
EXERCISB 4
A. I. From each of the folloimng^
un papel una casa
Los papeles son Las casas son
make four phrases or sentences {sixteen in all) by substituting for
the da^h the correct form of the adjectives
bianco, white azul, blue
negro, black verde, green
2. Use both adjectives in tum^
,. . r ^ f El papel esti
hmpao .J.«,|^ J El suelo esti
sucio, dirty. J L.
^ 1^ La casa esta
3. Put the finished sentences of 2 in the plural,
4. Explain why ser and estar are the proper verbs in the respeC"
tive sentences of i and 2.
B, Para estar bien de salud es preciso habitar una casa sana.
£n tal casa admitimos el aire y la luz del sol por anchas ventanas.
Si no hay luz, las habitaciones estdn oscuras y vemos mal. £n los
Estados Unidos alumbramos la casa por medio del gas o de la luz
eMctrica y entonces todo esta claro. Como el sentido de la vista
esti en los ojos, debemos tener bastante luz para ver bien sin hacer
dano a los ojos. Una madre cubre los tiemos ojos del nino, cuando
hay demasiada luz en la habitacidn, para guardar el nino de la
ceguedad. Los hombres que no ven son ciegos.
C I. ^' C6mo esta Vd. de salud ? 2. ^ Por que admitimos el aire
en la casa ? 3. ^ Por qu^ necesitamos la luz ? 4. i Cudl sentido esta
en los ojos ? 5. ^ Estd oscura la sala ? 6. ^' C6mo estd alumbrada ?
7. 1 Por qu^ alumbramos la casa ? 8. ^ Hay bastante luz aquf para
ver bien ? 9. i Cuando ven Vds. bien ? 10. ^ Qu^ es un ciego ?
D, I. The gentlemen are English, the ladies German. 2. Are
the little children happy or unhappy ? 3. The light of the sun is
LESSON V 21
very bright and gives bright colors to the worid. 4. There are
many electric lights in the house. 5. In a clean house the floors
of all the rooms are clean. 6. The president of the United States
lives in the White House. 7. We are not blind, because we see
very well. 8. We need the air in order to breathe. 9. Is there air
enough? 10. The room is too dark to see well. 11. The collar
and cuffs of the shirt are dirty. 12. He'wears a brown cap to pro-
tect his head. 13. The nuts are yellow because they are not ripe.
14. There is no soap nor clean towel. 15. The ladies are sad
because the children are sick. 16. The Spanish flag is yellow with
red stripes.
^ LESSON V
32.
^De quidn es eate sombrero? Whose is this hatt
^£s el sombrero de Juan? Is it John's hatf
Este yiejo sombrero es de Juan. This old hat is John's,
I Ddnde compra Vd. un sombrero Where do you buy a new hat f
nnevo?
En casa de Wanamaker. At Wanamaker^s,
Ese libro es de Pedro. That book (near you) is Peter's.
Aqnel libro es de Carlos. That book (over there) is Charleses.
La familia de un hombre. A man's family,
33. Possession is expressed in Spanish by the preposition de be-
fore the name of the possessor: el lApiz de Paco, Frank's pencil \
I08 zapatos de mi abuelo, my grandfather^ s shoes,
a, English, ix/ may be rendered en casa de, when at is followed
by a noun in the possessive case without the name of the thing
possessed ; as, at Henrys^ meaning at Henrys house^ office^ orstore^
en casa de Enrique.
b. The possessive interrogative pronoun whose is expressed in
Spanish by de qui^n, which is usually separated from the name of
the thing possessed by the verij :
£ De quidn es el cortaplumas ? Whose penknife is it f
I De quito es aquella casa ? Whosfi house is that t
Sing.
68t6
68t4l
Plur.
68t08
68ta8
Sing.
686
1
e8a
Plvr.
6808
68a8
Sing.
aquel
aqa6lU
Plur.
aquell08
aqueUas
22 SPANISH GRAMMAR
34. Demonstratiyes. The demonstrative adjectives are
Masculine Feminine ^^euter
6l|to this
(lacking) these
680 \ thai (near you)
(lacking) those
aqa6l^o that (yonder)
(lacking) those
a. Distinguish carefully between esc, \meaning that near the
person addressed, and aquel, that, distant from both speaker and
person addressed.
b. Corresponding to the adjectives this and that are the adverbs
here and there :
68t6 libro aqui, this book here
686 libro ahl, that book there (near you)
aqu6l libro alii, that book (over) there
c. When the demonstratives are not followed by a noun, they
are pronouns, taking the gender and number of the noun to which
they refer, and are marked by an accent.
Aqui tengo dos plumas : ^ta 6S de Here I have two pens : this one
Juan, aqu^lla de Maria. is John^s^ that one is Mary^s,
d. The neuter forms stand for things not mentioned by name :
^Qu6 es esto? What is this? or for clauses or ideas: jEso not
Not that (what you say). Por too^for that (reason), therefore.
EXERCISE 5
A, a. Substitute Spanish for the English in these sentences and
translate : i. Esta pequena casa aquf es Henry ''s, 2. Aquellos li-
bros allf son Mary^s, 3. La familia John^s esta aquf. 4. Vivo at
Charleses, 5. i Whose son estos cuellos ?
b. Put the Spanish words for this and that (both forms) with each
of the following words ; also give plurals : i. puerta cerrada.
2. ventana abierta. 3. muchacho ingMs. 4. casa
verde. 5. papel azul.
LESSON V 23
c. In the expressions written for b, insert the proper form of wx
or estar between the noun and the qualifying adjective. '
B, Esta parte del cuerpo es el brazo. Al extremo de los brazos
estan las manos. £sta es la mano derecha y ^sta ot^ la izquierda.
£stos son dedos. Con los dedos tocamos las cosas para sentir si
son blandas o duras, suaves o asperas; pero el sentido del tacto
esta en la piel suave que cubre todo el cuerpo. Si toco la madera,
hallo que es dura, pero si tomo el pan fresco en la mano, es blando.
Si compro pan en casa del panadero, pregunto si esta fresco.
Tambi^n las partes interiores del cuerpo conocen el tacto con
otras substancias : y por eso sentimos las comidas y bebidas f rfas
o calientes cuando bajan por la garganta al estdmago. El tacto
ayuda al sentido de la vista : por eso sabemos que todos los obje-
tos no esj&n a igual distancia, sino que uno estA delante y otro
detras, que los unos estan cerca y los otros ^ejos.
C, 1. I Cual es la mslno derecha ? i* y la izquierda ? 2. i Q\i6 esta
en las manos de Enrique ? 3. ^* Qui^n esta sentado a la derecha de
Vd. ? 4. I Son de Carlos o de Marfa aquellos libros allf ? 5. i Cual
sentido estk en la piel ? 6. i C6mo sentimos si una cosa es blanda ?
7. I D6nde compra Vd. pan fresco ? 8. ^* Estd duro o blando aquel
pan ? 9. ^' Estdn abiertas esas ventanas ? 10. ^ De qui^n son esos
sombreros ahf ?
Z>. t. These windows are open ; those (yonder) are closed.
2. That door (near you) is locked. Is the key there ? 3. There is
no key for this door. 4. He asks if this child lives in that house.
5. John's brother lives in Mexico. 6. Henry is seated at Mary's
right hand. 7. That baker's bread is not fresh; I buy Genaro's
bread. 8. This is a child's hat. 9. Whose new books are these ?
Charle s' books. 10. Who is at that gentleman's? ;ii. The serv-
ant deans Alfred's shoes. 12. That penknife does not cut well.
13. These matches do not bum; they are no good. 14. Whose
napkin is this here on the floor ?
24 SPANISH GRAMMAR
,, LESSON VI
To tengo mi libro. / Aavs my book.
T^ tianes ta libro. Thou hast thy book.
' tiane su libro. She
Ella
//
ho^*
{his^
her
its
> book.
Usted (Yd.) tiene su libro. You have your book.
Nosotros tenemos'nuestro libro. We have our book,
Vosotros tenuis ynestro libro. You have your book,
Ellos, ellas tienen su libro. They have their book,
Ustedes (Yds.) tienen su libro. You have your book,
36. Personal Subject Pronoans have the following forms :
Singular Plural
1. 70, / nosotros "I
- >we
j(fem.) nosotras J
2. tti, thou vosotros^
(fem.) Yosotras y
3. ^yhe '\ . ellosi ,
ella, she j (fem.) ellas J "^
a. The pronoun ttl and its plural vosotros, with their correspond-
ing verb-endings, are used in speaking to members of the family, to
children, or to inferiors. Foreign speakers must use usted (Vd.) with
the 3d person singular of the verb. Usted is a contraction of vuestra
merced, your grace, which was formerly used in polite intercourse.
b. The personal subject pronouns, commonly omitted, are used —
(i) When there is no verb : ^Qui^n es? Yo. IVho is it? I,
(2) To emphasize the subject of the verb, since it is not possible
to stress the verb-ending: ^ Tiene €1 mi libro? Ifas he my hook?
(3) To mark a contrast between two persons: ^1 es alem^,
pero ella es espa&ola, He is Germany but she is Spanish,
37. Possessive Adjectives.
mi (mis), my nnestro (-a, -os, -as), our
tu (tus), j/^«r vuestro (-a, -os, -as), your
sn iaua),his, her, its j your (ioxxa^M) su (sus), their j your{ioT ustedes)
LESSON VI 25
a. These adjectives must be plural before plural nouns: mis
zapatos, my shoes ; sus pantalones, his trousers,
b, Nuestro and vuestro have feminine forms : nuestra casa, our
house ; vtiestras familias, your families.
€, Possessive adjectives pust be repeated before each noun
modified : mi padre 7 mi madre, my father and mother.
For exceptions see section 141.
38. Idiomatic Expressions, a. A statement about one's resi-
dence may be made by tener su casa, to have one^s house^ reside.
Tengo mi casa en el Hotel Inglaterra. / live at the Hotel Inglaterra.
b. Note the idiomatic meaning of the subject pronouns when
used with ser.
Soy yo. It is I. ^ Es Vd. ? Is it you f
Somos nosotros. // is we. i Son ellos ? Is it they f
The pronoun may also precede :
£1 es. // is he. To soy. // is I.
c. Reference to a person's relatives is politely made by prefix-
ing the tides sefior, sefiora : su se&or padre, your father.
d. To inquire if another agrees with a statement you have just
made :
^ No es verdad ? or simply i verdad ? IstCt it true f
Viene maSana, i no es verdad ? He comes to-morrow^ doesn't he f
e. Leave-takings: hasta maSana, till to-morrow \ hasta luego,
farewell for a little while ; adi5s, good-by.
EXERCISE 6
A. a. Learn the complete conjugation of the present tense^ indica-
tive^ with and without the personal subject pronouns^ of comprar,
vender, vivir, ser, and estar. See sections 240 and 2^0.
b. Insert subject pronouns and possessive adjectives for the blanks
in the following sentences: i. i Tiene Vd. libro en la mano?
2. no tengo libro. 3. Juan tiene lapices. 4.
vivimos en casas. 5. no viven en casas. 6. Marfa
26 SPANISH GRAMMAR
escribe a madre pero no contesta. 7. i Estd Juan o
Marfa a la puerta ? Es y no . 8. tengo
libros pero no pluma. 9. Carlos escribe a hermano
pero no contesta. 10. ^ Tienen Vds. libros espanoles ?
B. I. Nuestra familia consta del jHidre, de la madre y de los
hijos, dos ninos y una nina. Mi abuelo es el padre de mi madre ; por
esO) soy su nieto. £1 hermano de mi padre es mi tfo, y su esposa es
mi tla. Yo soy su sobrino y sus hijos son mis primos. Tenemos
nuestra casa en la calle de Fulton, ndmero dos, de esta dudad.
2. — I Qui^n es ?
— Soy yo, Juan. Su sefior padre esta en casa, ^ no es verdad ?
— No estA. Estamos todos malos aqui y esta d en la fabrica.
-^ I Qui^nes son todos ?-
— Somos nosotros la madre, el hermano y yo.
— I Esti visible su madre ?
— Ella no, porque esta en cama muy enferma.
— Es lastima. Hasta maiiana.
N. — Adi6s.
C. I. i'De qui^nes consta su familia? 2. ^* Tiene Vd. un tfo?
I y primos ? 3. ^ De quidn son sus primos los hijos ? 4. i Qui^n es
el padre de su padre ? ^ y la madre de su padre ? 5. ^ Esta en casa
su sefiora madre ? 6. ^ Qu^ tiene Vd. en la mano ? 7. i* De quidn
tiene Vd. el lapiz ? 8. ^ D6nde tienen Vds. su casa en esta dudad ?
9. I En qu^ ciudad tenemos nuestra casa ? 10. ^ De qui^n es la
casa en que vive Vd. ?
Z>. I. I have John's pencil and he has my pen. 2. What has
Charles in his right hand ? He has Peter's books. 3. Is your father
at home ? No, sir, he is at my aunt's. 4. Their children are my
father's nephews. 5. Our family consists of the father and^ the
mother and* my brothers. Our grandmother resides with us.*
6. Where do you reside ? We reside on Macon St. 7. Mary writes
to her cousin Jane, but she does not answer. 8. Who are you ? It
^ Insert de. * nosotros.
LESSON VII
27
is I, Peter, with my cousin. He has a letter for* you. 9. This house
has all the windows shut. 10. These United States have many
large cities. 11. Who has George's cap? Have you the cap?
12. Whose Spanish letter is this here in the yellow envelope?
13. This umbrella is a gift from your father, isn't it ? 14. My shirts
and collars and all my clean clothes are in my brother's trunk.
15. You have my grammar and he has my Spanish dictionary.
> para.
LESSON VII
39. The Cardinal Numerals are
cere
1 un-o, -a
2 dos
3 tres
4 cuatro^
5 dnco
6 seis
7 siete
8 ocho
9 nueve
10 diez
11 once
12 doce
13 trace
14 catorce
15 quince
16 diez y seis (diecis^s)
1 7 diez y siete (diecisiete)
18 diez y ocho (diedocho)
19 diez y nueve (diecinueve)
20 veinte
21 veinte y uno (veintiuno)
. 22
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1,000
2,000
100,000
200,000
1 ,000,000
veinte y dos (veintidos)
treinta
cuarenta
«
cincuenta
sesenta
setenta
ochenta
noventa
ciento
doscientos (-as)
trescientos (-as)
cuatrocientos (-as)
quinientos (-as)
seisdentos (-as)
setecientos (-as)
ochocientos (-as)
novedentos (-as)
mil
dos mil, etc,
cien mil
doscient-os (-as) mil, etc,
un milldn
a. The cardinal numerals are invariable except uno (una casa,
am house) and the compounds of ciento (doscientas mujeres, two
hundred women).
28 SPANISH GRAMMAR
b. Uno drops o before masculine nouns even in compound nu-
merals : un hombre, one man ; treinta y un libros, thirty-one books.
c. Ciento becomes cien before nouns : cien pesos, one hundred
dollars ; cien mil, one hundred thousand. But loi, ciento uno, etc.
d. Wi^i ciento and mil the indefinite article is not used : ciento,
one hundred'^ mil, one thousand,
e. Above 900, Spanish speakers do not count by hundreds ; 1200^
for example, is mil doscientos.
f. The conjunction y, and, is used only before the last numeral
in a series : iSSS, mii quinientos cincuenta y cinco.
g. After un mill5n, the preposition de is required : un mill5n de
duros, a million dollars,
40. The Ordinal Numerals are
1st primero 5th quinto 9th noveno (<?rnono)
2d segundo 6th sexto {or sesto) loth d^cimo
3d tercero 7th sdptimo (^r s^timo) nth unddcimo
4th cuarto 8th octavo 12th duod^mo
a. Abbreviations according to gender and number are 1°, 2*,
3<>», 4*^*, etc.
b. In titles of sovereigns, chapters of books, names of streets,
etc., the ordinals are used only to tenth :
Carlos Quinto, Charles the Fifth. la avenida tercera, Third Avenue,
Alfonso Trece, Alfonso XIII, la calle catorce al este, East Four-
pdgina yeinticinco, page twenty- teenth St.
five, la calle 42 al oeste, West 42d St,
\
c. In giving dates, primero is used for the first day of the month,
but the cardinal numerals are used for the other days. The proper
form for writing a date is el 2 de mayo de 1808, May 2d, 1808,
In letters, the name of the place and the date appear in the same
line without the article : Madrid, 8 de abril de 1910.
d. To inquire the date : i A cuimtos estamos ? In replying, be-
gin with a : a quince de octubre, the fifteenth of October,
LESSON VII 29
41. Vez expresses repetition : ^
una vez, once cuiLntas veces, how often
dos yeceSy twice muclias yeces, often
tres yeceSy three times algunas yeces, sometimes
la primera yez, the first time raras yeces, seldom
cada yez, ^^z^^ //>»^ repetidas yeces, repeatedly
a. The English indefinite article after such expressions is ren-
dered by al, por, or the definite article : i cuiUitas Veces la semana,
al dia, por afio ? how often a week, a day, a year 1
42. Los doce meses del aSo, the twelve months of the year :
ener6, January julio, July
febrerOy February agosto, August
marzOy March septiembre, September
abrily April octubre, October
mayOy May noyiembre, November
junio, June diciembre, December
43. Los siete dias de la semana, the seven days of the week :
J luneSy Monday jueyes, Thursday
martes, Tuesday yiemes, Friday
midrcoles, Wednesday silbadOy Saturday
domingo, Sunday
el lunesy on Monday el jueyes pasado, last Thursday
I08 mattes, on Tuesdays el tiltimo dla del mes, the last day
el mi^rcoles que yiene, next of the month
Wednesday
a. The names of the months, days, and seasons are usually writ-
ten without capitalization.
b. The definite article is required before expressions of time that
are modified by afi' adjective : la semana pasada, last week,
c. In expressions of time the definite article appears where Eng-
lish uses the preposition on : el viemes, on Friday, El vapor sale
el quince del mes, The steamer leaves on the fifteenth of the month.
3d. SPANISH GRAMMAR
44. Las estaciones del aSo, the seasons of the year :
la primayera, spring el otoSo, autumn
el yerano, summer el inyiemo, winter
45. Las divisiones del dia, the divisions of the day :
la maSana, morning ajtiy yesterday
el dia, day hoy, to-day
la tarde, afternoon maffana, to-morrow
la noche, night anoche, last night
de dla, by day esta noche, to-night
maSana por la maffana, to-morrow morning
EXERCISE 7
A, I. Read in Spanish, Add in Spanish,
5 21 i6 105
/ 2 zz 45 250
8 15 62 500
7 18 75 725
4 9 26 375
2. Read, El 4 de julio de 1776.
El 12 de octubre de 1492.
El 1° de enero de 191 1.
3. Give in Spanish the date of to-day.
Give in Spanish the date of your birthday (dfa de cumpleafios).
B. I. Medimos el tiempo asf : sesenta segundos hacen un mi-
nuto ; sesenta de dstos componen una hora ; veinticuatro horas un
dfa ; siete dfas una semana ; cuatro semanas y media un mes ; doce
meses un ano y cien anos un siglo.
2.
Amigo mfo : ^^^^^ ^^^^' ^ 7 de mayo de 1 9 1 2
Por la noche estudio mis lecciones de aritm^tica y de espaiiol
para la manana. Pero esta noche no estudio porc^ue tengo un pe-
riddico de hoy. Leo que este es el dfa de cumple^anos de Alfonso
LESSON VII 31
Trece, rey de Espaiia. Su esposa y Jorge Quinto de Inglaterra son
primos. Dice el peri6dico que los reyes van a estar juntos en Lon-
dres el verano que viene desde el martes hasta el sabado. ^
C. J. I Cudles son los dfas de la semana ? i los meses del afto ?
I las estaciones ? 2. i Cudntos dfas tiene una semana ? ^ el mes de
enero ? 3. ,; Cuantos dfas hay en el ano ? 4. i Qu6 dfa de la se-
mana tenemos hoy ? 5. ^ A cuantos estamos hoy ? 6. i Quien es
el rey de Espana? i el rey de Inglaterra? 7. i Cual es su dfa de
cumpleanos ? 8. ^ Cudl es la fecha del periodico de hoy ? 9. ^ Qu^
lecciones tiene Vd. el lunes por la manana ? 10. ^ Estudian Vds. sus
lecciones por la tarde o por la noche ? 11.^ Cuantas veces lee Vd.
cada frase ? 12. ^ Cuantas veces al dfa sale un tren para Chicago ?
Z>. I . The months of spring are March, April, and May ; of
summer, June, July, and August. 2. There are three hundred and
sixty-five days in this year. Next year has three hundred and sixty-
six days because it is leap year. 3. To-day's paper has the date
Wednesday, the second of May. 4. I am living at 245 East 3d St.
5. On Tuesday morning we have lessons in (de) arithmetic and
Spanish. 6. My brother's birthday is July 7, 1898. 7. The father
of the king of Spain, Alfonso the Twelfth, was the son of Isabella
the Second. 8. This is the twentieth century. 9. Summer begins
on the twenty-first of June. 10. August is the eighth month of the
year. 11. There are a hundred days from January first to the tenth
of April. 12. When we study the Spanish lesson, we read each
sentence several times. 13. My brother comes home twice a day.
14. December is the last month of the year. 15. These children
are in their seventh year. 16. The lesson is on page forty-five, from
the third to the thirtieth line. 17. The magazine comes on Fridays.
18. The office is at number fifty East 23d St. 19. He is sick for
the first, time in (de) his life. 20. The steamer leaves to-morrow
morning. 21. The steamer for Malaga leaves twice a week. 22. It
is the third of October. 23. A million dollars is enough for any
(coalquier) man. 24. The year 1492 is in the fifteenth century.
32
SPANISH GRAMMAR
LESSON VIII
46. Shortened Form of Adjectiyes. i. Before a masculine sin-
gular noun the following adjectives drop the final o :
buenOf good primero,^r^/
malo, dad * tercero, third
postrero, last
OHO, one, an or a
alguno, some
ningano, nq, none, no one
nn buen hombre, a good man
mal tiempo, bad weather
dXffoL dia, some day
el primer mes, the first month
But
un hombre malo, a bad man
el primero del mes, the first of the
month
2. Grande becomes gran before either a masculine or a feminine
singular noun that begins with a consonant :
nn gran 8e9or, a great lord
una gran casa, a great house
But grande hombre, great man
nn grande amigo, a great friend
a. When grande refers to size it is frequently placed after the noun :
el rlo grande, the big river casa grande, big house
47. Comparison of Adjectiyes. The comparative degree of Span-
ish adjectives is formed by using m&s, more, with the positive. The
superlative is made by prefixing the definite article to the com-
parative.
Positive
rich
rico
rica
ricos
ricas
Comparative
richer
m&A rico
mkA rica
m&8 ricos
mAs ricas
Superlative
richest
el mis rico
la mis rica
los mis ricos
las mis ricas
a. In forming the superlative degree, a possessive adjective may
be substituted for the definite article :
mi caballo mis fuerte, my strongest horse
nuestra mejor tinta, our best ink
LESSON VIII 33
48. IrregolAr Comparison.
baeno, mejor, el mejor, good^ better^ best
malo, peor, el peor, bad^ worse, worst
grande, mayor, el mayor, great, greater, greatest j older, oldest
peqae9o, menor, el menor, small, smaller, smallest; younger, youngest
a. Grande and peque&o are also compared regularly. In speak-
ing of persons mayor means older, menor younger^ while the regu-
lar comparison refers to size. Mi hermano mayor, my older brother.
Mi hermano es mk% grande que yo, My brother is taller than /.
b. Corresponding to these adjectives are the foUowing adyerbs :
bien, mejor, well, better or best
mal, peor, badly ^ worse or worst
mucho, mAs, much (a great deal), more or most
poco, menos, little, less or least -^
1. Macho and poco are also adjectives.
2. The superlative of an adverb is usually the same as the compara-
tive. See section J45, 6.
49. Than after comparatives is que; but when the comparison
means a greater number than or a less number than, de must be used.
Tiene m^ dinero que yo. He has more money than L
Tiene m^ de mil pesos. He has more than a thousand dollars,
50. Comparison of Equality. The comparison of things by the
correlative words as , , . as, as (so) much . , , as, as (so) many , . .
asy is called the comparison of equality. Before nouns as (so) much,
as (so) many, are adjectives ; hence tanto and its feminine and plu-
ral forms tanta, tantos, tantas are used. Before adjectives as (so)
is an adverb and the short invariable form tan is required. The
invariable come introduces the second term of the comparison.
Tengo tanto pan y tantas manza- / have as much bread and as
nas como Juan. many apples as John.
Son tan ricos como reyes. They are as rich as kings.
51. Agpreement of Adjectives. An adjective agreeing with two
nouns is put in the plural.
34 SPANISH GRAMMAR
If the nouns are of different genders, the masculine plural adjec-
tive is generally used.
El hombre y la mujer son ricos. The man and the woman are rich,
£1 presidente y sua hijas estAn The president and his daughters
enfermos. are ill,
52. Position of Adjectives. Spanish adjectives are usually placed
after their nouns ; but common adjectives like bueno, malo, pequefio,
grande, mucho, and numerals generally precede the noun :
un libro rojo, a red book
el pequeSo sombrero, the little hat
cinco hombres^y^z/^ men
a. An adjective modified by an adverb is usually placed after its
noun : un buen caballo, a good horse, but un caballo muy bueno, a
very good horse,
b. A superlative adjective has the article before the noun while
the remainder may follow the noun :
la roca m&s elevada, the highest rock
el buey m&s fuerte, the strongest ox
c. Some adjectives have a different meaning according as they
precede or follow the noun. For these and for further discussion
of the position of adjectives see section 139.
53. Idiomatic Expressions, a. After a superlative adjective, use
the preposition de :
the youngest in the family, el menor de la familia
the prettiest girl in the town, la niSa mis linda de la ciudad
b. To express age, use the verb tener, to have,
I Qu^ edad tiene Vd. ? (lit. What age have you T) "1
I Cuintos aSos tiene Vd. ? (lit. How many years \ How old are you f
have you f) J
Tengo veinte aflos. / am twenty years old.
Mi padre es mayor que mi madre, My father is older than my mother,
pero no tiene tantos aSos como but not so old as my uncle,
mi tio.
LESSON VIII 35
EXERCISE 8
A, a. Use the Spanish adjectives for good, bad, great, first, best,
richest, with each of the following ; then ^ put in the plural.
El hombre La casa
La mujer El libro
b. Supply the proper word for than and translate .• i . Es mas rico
yo. 2. Tiene mas cinco perros. 3. Un peso vale mas
una peseta. 4. Yo tengo menos una peseta. 5. Carlos
tiene diez afios mas yo. 6. Juana es menor su hermano.
B, I. La tierra no tiene la superficie plana sino cortada por altu-
ras que son las montaiias. Los terrenos llanos entre dos Cordi-
lleras son valles. Los montes estan formados "en su interior de
piedra, de don(Je sacan los hombres las varias clases de minerales y
metales como el carbdn, el hierro, la plata y el oro. Los montes
dan origen a las fuentes y a los rfos que riegan los bosquesy las
selyas que suministran al hombre la madera para su casa, y los
pastes de muchos animales.
2. Algunos animales son muy litiles. El elefante es el animal mds
grande del mundo ; pero el caballo es mejor para el trabajo, aun-
que menos fuerte. Son tambidn buenos el buey y la vaca. De la
piel de estos animales hace el hombre la mejor clase de cuero para
los zapatos que protegen sus pies. Para abrigar su cuerpo contra
el tiempo frfo, el hombre emplea la lana de la oveja, de la cual hace
vestidos, un sombrero para la cabeza, una jaqueta para cubrir la
espalda, el pecho y los brazos, pantalones para las piemas. El hom-
bre come la came de los animales, especialmente la came de vaca,
de camero y de cerdo. La leche es tambidn un alimento de grande
importancia.
C I. i Qu6 clase de metales saca el hombre de las montafias.?
2. ^'De d6nde sacan los hombres el pro y la plata? 3. ^ Sacan
tanto hierro como oro ? 4. i Que saca el hombre de los bosques ?
5. I Cual es el animal mas grande del mundo ? 6. ^ Qud vestidos
hace el hombre de la lana? 7. ^ Tiene Vd. un hermano mayor?
36 SPANISH GRAMMAR
I una hermana menor ? 8. ^ Cuantos aflos tiene ella ? 9. ^ £s un
hombre tan fuerte como un caballo? 10. ^'Qu^ dase de came
comen Vds. ? 11.^ Beben Vds. tanta leche como agua ? 12. i Cual
es^l mejor alimento para los hombres ?
' I?, I. From the forests (the) men get wood for their houses.
2. They do not get as much gold as silver. 3. My older brother
has a better horse than I. 4. We use sheep's wool for our best
garments. 5. What animal is as strong as the ox ? 6. Do you eat as
much meat as bread ? 7. Bad work is worse than no work. 8. A
man wears a hat to protect his head. 9. I have more animals than
you. I have more than a hundred. 10. A good cow and a good
horse are very useful for men. yii. John is the oldest boy in the
dass. His sister is the prettiest girl in the town. 12. A great man
does not always live in a large house. 13. January is the first month
in the year. 14. Beef and mutton are a better food than pork.
15. Our richest friends live in London.
LESSON IX
54. Radical-changing Verbs. Many Spanish verbs having the
radical vowel e or change the vowel in the present tense when
the radical is stressed in pronunciation : e becomes ie, becomes
ue. The radical in the present tense is stressed in the ist, 2d, and
3d person singular, and the 3d person plural.
(To find the radical of a Spanish verb, drop the ending of the infinitive :
e.g. pensar, radical pens.)
Present Indicative
Pensar, io think ^ intend Encontrar, tofind^ meet
Sing. I . pienso, / think Sing, i . encuentro, I find
2. piensas, thou thinkest 2. encuentras, thoufindest
3. piensa, he thinks 3. encuentra, he finds
Plur. I. pensamos, we think Plur. i. encontramos, we find
2. pensdis,^^^ think 2. tiox^axAxhSA^ you find
3. piensan, they think 3. encuentran, they find
I Piensa Vd. ? Do you intend f ^Eflcaentra Vd. ? Do you find f
LESSON IX
37
Qnerer, to desire^ nOish^ be willing
Sing. I. f\pxtx% I wish^am willing
2. quieres, thou wishest
3. quiere, he wishes
Plur. I. queremos, we wish
2. qu^r^is, you wish
3. quieren, they wish
iQuiereVd.? Will you f
Sentir, to feel, perceive, ^^g^^t,
be sorry
Sing. I . siento, I feel, am sorry
2. sientes, thoufeelest, art sorry
3. siente, he feels, is sorry
Plur. I. sentimos, we feel, are sorry
2. s/tnMs^ you feel, are sorry
3. sienten, they feel, are sorry
I Siente Vd. ? Do you feel f
Poder, to be able, can
Sing. I. puedo, I can
2. puedes, thou canst
3. puede, he can
Plur. I. podemos, we can
2. pod^is, you can
3. pueden, they can
I Puede Vd. ? Can you f
Dormir, to sleep
Sing. I. duermo, I sleep
2. duermes, thou steepest
3. duerme, he sleeps
Plur. I. dormimos, we sleep,
2. dormls, you sleep
3. duermen, they sleep
I Duerme Vd. ? Do you sleep f
Some verbs of the ir conjugation change e to i, as
Pedir, to ask for
Sing. I. pido, I ask
2. pides, thou askest
3. pide, he asks
Plur. I. pedimos, we ask
2. pedis, you ask
3. piden, they ask
I Pide Vd. ? Do you ask ?
55. The Infinitive. A verb depending on another verb is fre-
quently put in the infinitive mood ; sometimes with a connecting
preposition, but many verbs, such as poder, querer, sentir, pensar,
ver, oir, are followed directly by the infinitive.
Pienso ir a Cuba. / intend to go to Cuba,
^ Puede Vd. dormir? Can you sleep f
Queremos saber. We wish to know.
38 SPANISH GRAMMAR
56. Indirect Object. The indirect object of a verb is that person
or thing interested in the action expressed by the verb, but neither
performing the action nor receiving it directly ; thus, in He writes
Charles a letter^ " Charles " is the indirect object. In English the in-
direct object is often indicated by merely placing it before the direct
object. If the indirect object is placed elsewhere in the sentence, it
is preceded by some preposition, usually to : thus, Ife writes a letter
to Charles. In Spanish, Escribe una carta a Carlos ; but the preposi-
tion a must always precede the indirect object in Spanish no matter
what its position in the sentence : thus, Escribe a Carlos una carta.
a. Verbs denoting separation require the preposition a before the
name of the person from whom things are obtained just as though it
were an indirect object. Hence a translates ' from ' in such expressions
as the following :
comprar a un espaSol, to buy from a Spaniard
pedir un favor a mi padre, to ask my father a favor
olr el cuento a una gitana, to hear the story from a gypsy woman
robar el dinero al ciego, to steal the money from the blind man
b, \n speaking of the person or clothing, the definite article is used
instead of the possessive adjective, and the indirect object indicates the
person if necessary :
Salv5 la vida al hombre. He saved the man^s life.
El viento llev6 el sombrero a mi The wind carried off my father's
padre. hat.
En vez de contestar: — No puedo Instead of replying^ "/ cannot
ir, — tomo el sombrero y voy. go^'' I take my hat and go.
Romper^ la cabeza a quien quiera / will break the head of any one
oponerse a mi entrada. who tries to oppose my entrance.
57. Direct Object. Personal a. The direct object of a verb is
that person or thing which suffers the action of the verb. In Span-
ish, when the direct object denotes a definite person or personified
thing, or is a proper noun, the preposition a must precede it.
Encuentran un peso. They find a dollar.
Encuentran a su padre. They find their father.
Visitan a Valparaiso. They visit Valparaiso.
LESSON IX 39
The use of the preposition a before the direct personal object is
very important in Spanish. It permits placing the direct object be-
fore the verb. A Eduardo S^ptimo sigue Jorge Quinto, George the
Fifth succeeds Edward the Seventh,
58. Idiomatic Expressions, a. In regard to the weather, use the
impersonal verb hace, it makes :
I Qu^ tal tiempo hace ? What kind of weather is it ?
Hace mal tiempo. // is bad weather.
Hace buen tiempo. // is good weather
Hace macho calor. // is very warm,
Hace mucho frio. // is very cold,
Hace yiento. // is windy,
b. When the conditions of the weather concern visible objects,
hay, there is^ introduces the expression :
Hay sol. The sun is shining. Hay lodo. // is muddy,
H&j polyo. // is dusty. Hay neblimi. // is foggy.
Hay lumi esta noche. There is a moon to-night.
c. Statements concerning the person commonly employ tener,
to have, instead of the verb to be, as in English.
Tengo frio. / am cold. Tengo hambre. / am hungry,
Tenemos sueSo. We are sleepy. Tengo sed. / am thirsty.
Tengo macho calor. / am very warm.
Tienen prisa. They are in a hurry.
Tiene los ojos azules. His eyes are blue.
d. As the words calor, frio, etc. used with hace, hay, and tener
are nouns, the adverb muy, very, cannot be used, but instead of it
the adjective mucho, which must agree with the noun : thus, Tengo
mucho calor y mucha sed, / am very hot and thirsty,
e. Querer is a very important verb. Its general meaning, to de-
sire, to wish, includes all kinds of willing.
Will you ?
Are you willing? I = ^Quiere Vd.? If you piecLse. Si Vd. quiere.
Will you have?
To mean, querer decir; as, What does this word mean? ^Qu^
quiere decir esta palabra ?
40 SPANISH GRAMMAR
EXERCISE 9
A, a. Find in the vocabulary the infinitive of despierta, muere,
▼istes, sirvo, cuentan.
b. Insert the preposition a in the following sentences. Tell why it
is necessary, i. La madre da una manzana su nino. 2. El
chico pide un vaso de agua su madre. 3. Juan ama su
madre. 4. Este senor escribe su sobrino. 5. No encontra-
mos nuestra hermana.
c. Translate: i. He asks for an apple. 2. We can see. 3. I
wish to ask. 4. I can sleep. 5. They are sorry. 6. We are cold.
7. They are very hungry. 8. It is warm. 9. What will you have ?
10. I intend to study. 11. How much does he ask ? 12. What do
you mean? 13. Is the sun shining? 14. It is not cold. 15. I am
very warm.
£, Cuando Enrique toca una campanilla u otro instrumento,
suena ; y ^1 oye el sonido porque tiene el sentido del ofdo. Un so-
nido confuso es un ruido. Algunas veces no podemos ofr bien a
causa del ruido de la calle.
Los demas sentidos son la vista, el gusto, el olfato y el tacto.
Los ojos son los 6rganos del sentido de la vista. Hay hombres
que no pueden ver : estos pobres son ciegos. Y en la obscuridad
estamos todos ciegos, porque sin luz no es posible ver.
Enrique siente el sabor de los alimentos en la boca donde tocan
la lengua. Pues el chico no quiere el cafe amargo, ni la fruta dcida,
pide a su madre aziicar que es dulce. Ella da el aziicar a su hijo.
La nariz de Enrique sirve para sentir los olores. Puede percibir
que una flor huele bien o mal, y que la habitaci6n huele a tabaco.
El sonido que de la garganta viene a la boca es la voz ; recibe va-
rias modulaciones de la lengua, de los dientes y de los labios. Enri-
que grita o habla en voz alta a su abuelo porque dste es sordo : pero
a su madre puede hablar en voz baja porque ella no tiene el ofdo
duro^ y esti cerca. Pero si esta lejos, habla en voz alta tambidn
a su madre.
^ tener el oido duro = ser sordo.
LESSON X 41
C. I. ^Cudntos sentidos tienen Vds. ? ^-Cuales son? 2. ^ Oye
Vd. el sonido del piano ? 3. ^ Cuindo hay mucho ruido en la calle ?
4. I Quiere Vd. la fruta dcida o dulce ? 5. ^ Qu6 pide Enrique a
su madre para hacer dulce el cafd ? 6. i Para qud sirve la nariz ?
7. I Cdmo huele una rosa ? 8. ^ Qu6 es un sordo ? 9. i Qud quiere
decir la palabra sordid ? 10. ^ Puede Vd. ofr si hablo en voz baja ?
11. I Tiene Vd. fiio o calor ? i Mucho ? 12.^ Por qud tienen Vds.
fiio ? 13. ^ Hace fiio cuando hay sol ? 14. ^ A quidn sigue Jorge
Quinto ?
£>, I. When the bell rings, John opens the door. 2. A deaf man
cannot hear so well as you. 3. When the coffee is bitter, I ask for
sugar. 4. Do you wish sugar in your coffee ? 5. I do not sleep well
when there is a great noise in the street. 6. In the street there is
a man who ^ says,^ " Who wants oranges ? " How much does he
ask? 7. I wish to give my sister a sweet orange. 8. I can hear
Henry's voice; he is shouting. 9. Can you see Charles? He is
ringing the bell. 10. The Spanish word la voz means the sound
which comes from the throat, but the plural las voces means
'words.* II. Will you give this poor man a dollar? He is blind.
12. When I am hungry I wish to eat, and when I am thirsty I
wish to drink. 13. John's eyes are blue. 14. If you visit London,
you will see * the king. 15. On account of the darkness we cannot
see the persons in the room.
1 que dice. ^ verA.
LESSON X
59. Reflexive Verbs. A reflexive verb is one which represents
the subject as acting on itself : as, Ife cuts himself.
a. The Spanish reflexive pronoun for the third person is se, which
is appended to the infinitive : cortarse, to cut oneself.
b. In Spanish many verbs are reflexive in form though not so
in English: levantar, to raise \ levantarse, to raise oneself i.e.
to get up.
42 SPANISH GRAMMAR
c. In conjugating a reflexive verb, the pronouns are usually put
before the verb ; but the infinitive, the present participle, and the
imperative without no, add the pronoun as another syllable.
Levant^dose. Getting up, Sent^dome. Sitting down,
LevAntese Vd. Get up. No se levante Vd. Don't get up,
Si^ntese Vd. Sit down. No se siente Vd. DonH sit down,
60. Present Indicative.
Levantarse, to get up Ir a levantarse, to be going to get up
me levanto, I get up yoy a lerantarme, / am going to get up
te levai^tas, you get up yas a levantarte, you are going to get up
se levanta, he gets up ya a levantarae, he is going to get up
nos leyantamos, we get up vamos a levantamos, we are going to get up
OS levantAis, you get up yais a levantaros, you are going to get up
se levantan, they get up van a levantarse, they are going to get up
I Se levanta Vd. 1 Do ^ Va Vd. a levantarse ? Are you going
you get up ? to get up f
■
a. It is always necessary to learn the special meaning of a reflexive
verb, as it often differs in translation from the simple verb ; as, ir, to go,
irse, to go away ; morir, to die, morirse, to be dying.
61. The Spanish reflexive verb is often used in a general sense
where English uses the passive voice.
Aqui se habla espaSol. Spanish {is) spoken here,
£1 muchacho se llama Juan. The boy is called John.
I C6mo se llama Vd. ? How are you called? or, more idio-
matically. What is your name f
Me llamo Francisco. My name is Francis.
62. Idiomatic Expressions, a. When referring to parts of the
body or clothing it is customary to use the definite article instead
of the possessive adjective. A pronoun before the verb shows what
person is meant whenever necessary : Se pone el sombrero, He puts
on his hat\ Me quito el sombrero, I take off my hat\ Se corta el
dedo. He cuts his finger, (See section 56, ^.)
LESSON X 43
b. To express the time of an action al with the infinitive is com-
mon : Al leyantarme, me lavo la cara, On getting up (or When I
get up\ I wash my face ; Al cerrar yo la puerta, gritaron, Upon
my closing the door (or When I closed the door), they shouted,
EXERCISE 10
A, a. Write the conjugation and then translate the present tense
indicative of Uamarse, sentarse, acostarse, ir a sentarse (sentarse
and acostarse are radical-changing),
b. Supply reflexive pronouns and translate : i. Juan sienta
a la mesa. 2. Sidnte Vd. aquf. 3. Los muchachos Ua--
man Pablo y Pedro. 4. llamamos Juany Marfa. 5. El hom-
bre lava la cara. 6. Voy a lavar — las manos. 7. Yo
acuesto temprano. 8. i acuesta Vd. tarde ? 9. sentamos
a la mesa. 10. ^ Cdmo llama ella ? 1 1. Al levantar , Pe-
dro lava la cara.
c. After reading Exercise lOy B, 7, change the Spanish verbs into
the third person singular,
d. Translate: i. I cut myself. 2. They cut themselves. 3. He
gets up. 4. Do you get up? 5. We sit down. 6. I go to bed.
7. We go to bed. 8. We are going to sit down. 9. They are called
{or, they call themselves). 10. He takes off his hat. 11. Pedro
does not wash his face. 12. On sitting down. 13. On washing
my face. 14. Why don't you wash your face? 15. Why don't
you sit down?
B. I. Por la noche me quito los vestidos y me acuesto. Al des-
pertarme por la manana, despierto a mis hermanos. Nos levan-
tamos, nos lavamos la cara y las manos con jab6n y agua, nos
secamos con una toalla, y nos ponemos los vestidos. Entonces me
siento a la mesa para el almuerzo. Tomo caf^ con leche, pan y
mantequilla, huevos o came. Para el servicio de la mesa me sirvo
de im cuchillo, un tenedor y una cuchara. Despuds me marcho al
despacho. AUf no me divierto mucho.
44 SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. La tierra se mueve alrededor del sol, inclinindose * un poco
hacia una parte, de lo cual ^ resulta que una mitad del ano los pue-
blos de la mitad superior de la tierra tienen los dfas mas largos que
las noches. En la otra parte del ano sucede lo contrario y de este
modo se verifican las estaciones del ano. El inviemo es cuando los
rayos del sol vienen mas inclinados y son los dfas cortos ; por esto
hace mudio frfo. En la primavera crecen la hierba y las plantas.
En el verano hace mucho calor. En el otorio se cogen los frutos
del campo mientras caen las hojas de los irboles.
3. El hombre nace, vive y muere sobre la tierra. En su figura
se asemeja dsta bastante a una naranja un poco aplastada por los
dos extremos, que en geograffa se llaman los polos. Los rayos del
sol alumbran y calientan la tierra, que da vuelta alrededor del sol, y
con este movimiento se determinan cuatro puntos cardinales que
son norte, sur, este y oeste. Se llama este aquella parte del cielo
en que vemos el sol al amanecer. Oeste se llama la parte opuesta
por donde se oculta el sol al anochecer.
C. I. ^ Se despierta Vd. temprano o tarde ? 2. i Qu^ hace Vd.
despuds de despertarse ? 3. j D6nde se sienta Vd. para el almuerzo ?
4. I De qu^ se sirven Vds. para el servicio de la mesa ? 5. ^ A ddnde
se marcha Vd. despu^s del almuerzo ? 6. ^ Se divierten Vds. mucho
en el colegio ? 7. ^* Cuando tenemos los dfas mas cortos que las
noches ? 8. i Por qud tenemos el dfa y la noche } g. i Qu6 estacidn
del ano tenemos ahora ? 10. ^ Por qud hay estaciones ? 1 1. ^- Qu^
tal tiempo hace en el inviemo ? i en el verano ? 12. ^*C6mo se lla-
man los puntos cardinales ?
£>. I . In the morning we wake up early and wake up our friends.
2. The bell wakes John ; he cannot wake up without the bell. 3. My
brother does not have a good time at the office : he works. 4. We
have (the) day and (the) night because the earth moves around the
sun. 5. We have seasons because the earth is inclined towards one
side. 6. It is very cold this winter, but in the spring it is much
^ inclinindose, present participle of indinarse. ^ de lo ctialf/rom which.
LESSON XI 45
warmer. 7. The two ends of the earth are called the North Pole
and the South Pole. 8. When I face the north, the east is on the
right, and the west on the left. 9. French is spoken in France, but
English is spoken here. 10. What is your name? — My name is
Peter Lucas, but they call me Uncle ^ Licurgo. 1 1. In this season
I wake early, but when it is cold weather I rise late. 12. During
this part of the year, the nights are longer than the days.
^ Add the definite article ; do not capitalize.
LESSON XI
63. Preterit Tense. The Spanish preterit tense, indicative mood,
denotes that a single act was performed and completed in past time.
It corresponds to the English past tense : He saw^ Vi6. Did you
seel iVi5Vd.?
-ar VERBS -er AND -ir verbs
Sing. I. corner i^ I bought Sing. I . vcndi, I so/d
2. compraste,^^« bought 2. vendiste,>'^« sold
3. compr6, he bought 3. vend 16, he sold
Plur. I. compramos, we bought Plur. i. vendimos, we sold
2*. comprasteis, j/^« bought 2. vendisteis, ^^« sold
3. compraron, they bought 3. vendieron, they sold
I Compr6 Vd. ? Did you buy f i Vendi6 Vd. ? Did you sell f
a. Note the importance of the written accent : compro, present
tense, I buy\ compr6, preterit tense, he bought,
b. In conjugating the preterit tense, certain changes of spelling
must be borne in mind. The radical of a verb must keep the same
final consonant sound which it has in the infinitive : consequently
verbs ending in car, gar, and zar are spelled in the first person
singular of the preterit like the following models :
sacar : saqu^, / drew out, sacaste, etc.
Uegar : llegu^, / arrived, llegaste, etc.
empezar : empec^, / began, empezaste, etc.
See table of spellings, section 7 ; and also section 242.
46 SPANISH GRAMMAR
c. Verbs of the -ir conjugation that change the radical in the
present tense change e to i, and o to u, in the third person singu-
lar and plural of the preterit tense.
Sentir, to feel Pedir, to ask for
Sing. I. sentf, I felt Sing. I. pedl, I asked
2. ^TL\Xst<t, you felt 2. pediste, ^^72/ asked
3. 8inti6y he felt 3. pidi6, he asked
Plur. I. sentimos, we felt Plur. i. pedimos, we asked
2. wtvM2\Ki!&y you felt 2. pedisteis,^^^ asked
3. sintieron, they felt 3. pidieron, they asked
iSinti6Vd.? Did you feel f iPidi6Vd.? Did you ask f
Dormir, to sleep
Sing. I . dorml, / slept Plur. I . donnimos, we slept
2. dormiste, you slept 2. dormisteis, you slept
3. durmi6, he slept 3. durmieron, they slept
I Durmi5 Vd. ? Did you sleep f
d, Spanish spelling requires that the letter i unaccented should
not stand between two vowels; consequently, verbs whose stem
ends with a vowel have y in the third person singular and plural of
the preterit tense.
Creer, to believe, to think
Sing. I . crel, / believed Plur. i . creimos, we believed
2. creiste, you believed 2. creisteis, you believed
3. crey6, he believed 3. creyeron, they believed
I Creyd Vd. ? Did you believe ?
64. Idiomatic Expressions, a. The verb hace, it makes, is used
with expressions of time to convey the same idea as the English
word ago :
hace an aSo, a year ago hace una hora, an hour ago
b. In reckoning time the Spanish count the day on which the
calculation is made ; hence,
ocho dias, a week hace quince dias, a fortnight ago
LESSON XI 47
c. iQu6 hay de nuevo? What^s the newsf
Nada de particular. Nothing special,
d, Muchas gracias, seSor. Many thanks^ sir.
No hay de qu6. Quite welcome,
EXERCISE 11
A, a. Conjugate^ with English meanings the preterit tense ofixh
mar, escribir, sentarse, servir (Jike pedir), ofr, pagar, tocar.
b. Read Exercise lO^ B, inputting the verbs in the preterit tense,
c. Translate: i. How much did he ask six months ago ? 2. How
did you sleep ? 3. What did they sell ? 4. He took coffee. 5. Where
was he bom ? 6. I felt cold an hour ago. 7. I went to bed. 8. They
went away. 9. I got up. 10. How was he called? 11. His name
was John. 12. They asked for oranges. 13. Did you hear the bell ?
14. Did they read the newspaper?
B, I. Ayer por la maiiana me levantd — me lav^ — medio me
vestf — lef los periddicos — escribf dos cartas — almorcd — acab^
de vestirme — me marchd a casa de un amigo.
Por la tarde volvf a casa. En la calle me encontrd con un pobre
— saqu^ una moneda de cobre del bolsillo — df diez centavos al
pobre — llegud a casa sin otra novedad.
Por la noche comf. Despu^s de la comida me sentd al balcdn al
fresco, y ahora tengo sueno y voy a acostarme.
2. Heman Cortes, conquistador de Mejico, nacio en 1485. Con
once navfos y algunos centenares de soldados, desembarcd en el
puerto de San Juan de Uliia en 15 19, fundd la fortaleza de Vera-
cruz, quemd sus naves y marchd sobre Mdjico. Vencid a sus ene-
migos; sitid y tomd a Mejico donde se apoderd de Montezuma.
El emperador Carlos Quinto, rey de Espana, nombrd a Cortes
capitan general de Nueva Espana, nombre que did^ al pafs que
conquistd. Cortds volvid a Espana a contestar a las acusaciones
dirigidas^ contra ^1, y murid allf en 1547.
1 di6, preterit of dar. ^ directed.
48 SPANISH GRAMMAR
3. Francisco Pizarro, cdebre conquistador espanol, tenfa mds
de cincuenta anos cuando emprendid la conquista del mds grande
y rico imperio del nuevo mundo. Descubrid las costas del Peni
en 1526. El ejdrcito del inca Atahualpa atacd a los espanoles, pero
^stos salieron vencedores en aquel encuentro y quedaron duefios
del imperio y de sus riquezas. Pizarro se casd con la hermana del
inca Atahualpa. Fundd a Lima, capital desde entonces del Peni,
donde murid en 1541 asesinado por sus enemigos.
C I. I Cuil periddico leyd Vd. ayer ? 2. ^* A quidn escribid Vd.
las cartas hace ocho dfas ? 3. ^' Con qui^n se encontrd Vd. en la
calle ? 4. I Cuando did el senor el dinero al pobre } 5. ^* Qu^ hizo^
Vd. despuds de la comida ? 6. i Cuindo nacid Heman Cortes ?
7. I Cudntos soldados desembarcaron con 6\ en Mdjico ? 8. ^ A
ddnde marcharon ? 9. ^ Qu6 nombramiento hizo el rey ? 10. ^' Qu^
nombre tiene ahora el pafs de Nueva Espafia? 11. ^En qu^ afio
murid Cortes ?
£>, I . Many years ago, Hemdn Cortes and his soldiers besieged
Mexico and conquered the country. 2 . Charles the ^ Fifth appointed
Cortes captain-general of New Spain. 3. My friend rose early in
the morning and dressed himself. 4. In the evening he dined at
home, and after dinner sat in the open air. 5. Yesterday he read
two newspapers and wrote his brother a letter. 6. When I arrived
in New York,* I took my book from my pocket. 7. When he sat
down to the table,' he found his newspaper at his place. 8. With
our breakfast this morning we took coffee with milk and sugar.
9. Did you sleep well last night ? Yes, I slept till my brother ar-
rived. 10. Did you pay the bill ? I paid the tailor's bill a fortnight
ago. II. The soldiers died in defense of the city, April 25, 1695.
12. He washed his face and hands and went to bed. 13. Cortds
gave the name of New Spain to the country which is now called
Mexico. 14. Pizarro was bom in the province of Estremadura, in
the little village of Trujillo.
^ hizo, preterit of hacer. ^ Omit the article.
• Translate the clause in two ways.
LESSON XII 49
LESSON XII
65. Imperfect Tense. The Spanish imperfect tense, indicative
mood, denotes a past action, either continuous or habitual in char-
acter. He was singings Cantaba. He used to write every day, Escri-
bia todos los dias.
-ar VERBS
Sing. I. compraba, / was buying, used to buy
2. comprabas,^^?« were buying, used to buy
3. compraba, he was buying, used to buy
Plur. I. comprAbamos, we were buying, used to buy
2. comprabais, you were buying, used to buy
3. compraban, they were buying, used to buy
' -er AND -ir verbs
Sing. I. vend la, / was selling, used to sell
2. vend las, ^^« were selling, used to sell
■3. vend la, he was selling, used to sell
Plur. I. vendlamos, we were selling, used to sell
2. vendlai8,^^?« were selling, used to sell
3. vend Ian, they were selling, used to sell
a. To understand the imperfect tense, contrast its meaning with
the preterit.
Escribid una carta. He wrote one letter,
Escribla cuando yo entr^. He was writing when I entered,
EstAbamos a la mesa cuando 8on6 We were at table when the bell
la campanula. rang.
b. This tense is frequent in descriptive matter. Though usually
translated as above, the simple form of the English past tense may
occur: as, When I lived in Cuba, I spoke Spanish, As the verbs
denote continued or habitual acts, the Spanish uses the imperfect
tense, Cuando yiyla en Cuba, hablaba espaSoL
66. Idiomatic Expressions, a, Habia, there was, there were, im-
perfect tense corresponding to hay, there is, there are.
50 SPANISH GRAMMAR
b. With expressions of time todo, all^ in the plural means every :
todos l08 dias, every day ; todos los domingos, every Sunday, But
note in the singular todo el mundo, everybody,
c, Spanish uses the singular, not the plural, when speaking of
objects one of which belongs to each member of a group. The
boys raised their heads ; as each boy has but one head, the Spanish
says, Los muchachos levantaron la cabeza. The servants did not
occupy seats, Los criados no ocupaban asiento.
EXERCISE 12
A, a. J^ead Exercise lO, B, i, substituting the impetfect tense,
b. Translate: i . He was sleeping. 2. They used to read. 3. We
were reading. 4. The bell was ringing. 5. Who was talking ? 6. I
was eating. 7. I was cold and hungry. 8. Every Monday he used
to rise early. 9. In Spain we rose late. 10. It was cold. 11. How
many were here ? 1 2 . The enemy (^plural) were marching. 1 3 . There
were five apples on the plate. 14. He used to drink milk. 15. We
took coffee every morning.
B, I . Juanito cuando tenfa hambre, querfa comer ; cuando tenfa
sed, querfa beber. Cuando estaba cansado por haber corrido mucho,
o tenfa suefio, deseaba la cama para descansar : cuando tenfa frfo,
deseaba el abrigo. Luego que satisfacfa estas necesidades quedaba
bien y contento.
2. Hace muchos anos ( i como que yo tenfa siete I ) que al obs-
curecer de un dfa de inviemo me dijo ^ mi padre : — Pedro, esta
noche no te acuestas a la misma hora que las gallinas: ya eres
grande y debes cenar con tus padres y con tus hermanos mayores.
Esta noche es Nochebuena,
Un enorme tronco de encina chisporroteaba en medio del hogar ;
la negra y ancha campana de la chimenea nos cobijaba; en los
rincones estaban mis dos abuelas, que aquella noche se quedaban
1 dijo, preterit of decir.
LESSON XII 51
en nuestra casa ; en seguida se hallaban mis padres, luego noso
tros, y entre nosotros los criados — porque en aquella fiesta todos
representabamos la Casa^ y a todos debfa calentamos un mismo
fuego. Los criados estab2in de pie y las criadas de rodillas. Su res-
petuosa humildad les vedaba ocupar asiento. Los gatos dormfan
en el centro. Algunps copos d^ nieve cafan por el canon de la
chimenea. Y el viento silbaba a lo lejos. Mi padre y mi hermana
mayor tocaban el arpa. Las criadas se encargaron de la parte vocal
y cantaron coplas como la siguiente :
« Esta noche es Nochebuena
Y mafiana Navidad.»
C. \, I Qu^ deseaba Juanito cuando estaba cansado ? 2. ^ Tenfa
Vd. hambre ayer? 3. ^'Cuando es Nochebuena? 4. ^ Qui^nes se
quedaban en casa de Pedro la Nochebuena ? 5. ^ C6mo se calen-
taban? 6. ^ Por que no estaban sentados los criados? 7. jQu^
hacfan los gatos ? 8. ^ Qud hacfa el padre de Pedro ? 9. j Que
instrumento toca Vd. ? 10. ^* Habfa nieve y viento la Nochebuena ?
1 1. J Qu^ cantaron las criadas ? 12. ^ Donde estaban Vds. hace un
ano?
D, I . Johnny went to bed early because he was sleepy. 2. When
he was reading the newspaper he found his name on the first page.
3. The snow was falling because it was very cold. 4. I know ^ that
the sun was not shining because it was snowing. 5. On Christmas
Eve they used to sing verses. 6. We were standing in the comer
near the fire when they sang the verse. 7. The maidservants did
not occupy seats that night. 8. Peter was seven years old when
he dined with his older brothers. 9. Peter's cat used to sleep in
front of the fire. 10. We used to sing when my sister played the
piano. II. I was in Mexico two years ago, when he bought the
mine. 12. I was getting up when he called. 13. His older brother
used to write Paul a letter every week. 14. We were washing our
faces when our friends came in.
1 1 know = 8^.
52 SPANISH GRAMMAR
LESSON XIII
67. Participles. Spanish verbs have two participles, the present
(or gerund) and the past
-«r VERBS -er and -ir verbs
Present comprando vendiendo
Past comprado vendido -
68. Present Participle. The Spanish present participle is inva-
riable, and is used to express all sorts of relations much more freely
than the present participle in English : Siendo nilio, vi al ley, When
I was a child (lit. being a child)^ I saw the king. See section 274.
a. The pronouns are appended to the present participle as an
additional syllable, in which case an accent mark must be written
over the stressed vowel of the ending : levant&ndose, getting up,
69. Past Participle. The past participle may be used like an
adjective, and agrees with its noun in gender and number.
las puertas cerradas, the closed doors
las yentanas abiertas, the open windows
a. Some past participles are irregular in form :
abrir; abierto to open j opened
cubrir ; cubierto to cover; covered
descubrir ; descubierto • to discover; discovered
escribir ; escrito to write; written
imprimir ; impreso to print ; printed
romper; roto to break; broken
b. The principal use of the past participle is in forming com-
pound tenses with the auxiliary verb haber. The past participle
remains unchanged in form.
70. Perfect Tense. The present tense of haber combined with
the past participle of any verb gives the perfect tense of that verb.
LESSON XIII 53
-ax VERBS
Sing. I. he comprado, I have bought
2. has compradOy you have bought •
3. ha compradOy he has bought
Plur. I. hemos comprado, we have bought
2. hab^is compradOy you have bought
3. han comprado, they have bought
^Ha comprado Yd. ? Have you bought f
-ex AND -ir VERBS
Sing. I. he vendido, I have sold
2. has vendidOy you have sold
3. ha vendidOy he has sold
Plur. I. hemos vendido, we have sold
2. hab^s vendido, you have sold
3. han yendido, they have sold
I Ha yendido Vd. ? Have you soldf
71. Pluperfect Tense. The imperfect tense of haber combined
with the past participle of any verb gives the pluperfect tense of
that verb.
-or VERBS
Sing. I. habla comprado, I had bought
2. habias comprado, you had bought
3. habla comprado, he had bought
Plur. I. habiamos comprado, we had bought
2. hablais comprado, you had bought
3. habian comprado, they had bought
I Habla comprado Yd. ? Had you bought f
-ex AND -ir VERBS
Sing. I. habla yendido, I had sold
2. habias yendido, you had sold
3. habla yendido, he had sold
Plur. I . habiamos yendido, we had sold
2. hablais yendido, you had sold
3. habian yendido, they had sold
^ Habla yendido Yd. ? Had you soldf
54 SPANISH GRAMMAR
72. The Parts of a Compound Tense must not be separated by
other words as in English.
Have you written f ji Ha escrito Vd. ?
/ have not written. No he escrito.
Ha^ John always lived here f ^ Ha yiyido Juan siempre aqnl ?
73. Use of Perfect Tense. The perfect and the preterit tenses
both refer to action in past time. The perfect is used —
1. When the action is recent :
Ha UoYido mucho esta maSana. // rained hard this morning,
2. When the action, though performed in the past, still continues
or affects the present :
La EspaSa ha producido grandes Spain has produced great men,
hombres.
La Inglaterra se ha hecho seSora England has become mistress of
del mar. the sea.
If these acts were ascribed to a definite past time the preterit
would be used.
La EspaSaprodujo grandes hombres Spain produced great men in the
en el siglo XVI. sixteenth century.
La Inglaterra se hizo seSora del England became mistress of the
mar por la victoria de Nelson. sea through Nelson'' s victory,
3. When the verb merely asserts the existence of a fact without
referring the action to a definite time :
Lo he dicho muchas veces. / have often said so,
Lo dije ayer. / said so yesterday,
74. Adverbs and Prepositions with Verbs, i . In English some
verbs have their meaning so modified by adverbs as to form a
class by themselves. Such compounds are expressed in Spanish by
verbs having different roots and not by the same verb modified
by different adverbs: as,
go into^ entrar go up^ subir
go out, salir go down, bajar
LESSON XIII 55
2. In both Spanish and English some verbs require a prepo-
sition before the object, but not necessarily the same verb in both
languages. Examine the following :
to answer a question^ oontestar a una pregunta
to enter the house, entrar en la caaa
to ask for an answer, pedir una contestaci6n
to ask (i.e. to inquire), preguntar
to go out of the room, salir de la habitacidn
75. Relative Pronouns. The commonest relative pronouns are
que, which, who, that ; referring to both persons and things
qnien (quienes), who ; referring only to persons
a. After prepositions, que is used only to refer to things, quien
to persons.
£1 Upiz que tengo. The pencil which I have.
La mujer que vl. The woman whom I saw.
La casa en que vivo. The house in which I live.
£1 hombre a quien di6 el dinero. The man to whom he gave the
money.
Lo6 seSoies de quienes habUbamos. The gentlemen of whom, we were
speaking.
EXERCISE 13
A. a. Form and translate the perfect tense ^estar, mandar, ser,
vivity tener, escribir.
b. Form and translate the pluperfect tense of the same verbs.
c. Translate: i. What has he sold? 2. They have bought.
3. He had bought. 4. Where has Charles lived? 5. I have not
been in Spain. 6. We have been here. 7. He had been a soldier.
8. They have covered the table. 9. I have had a present. 10. Writ-
ing a letter. 11. Having written a letter. 12. Having two dollars,
I bought a book. 13. Being at home. 14. We had been there.
d. After reading Exercise ij,B^2, explain the use of the various
tenses.
56 SPANISH GRAMMAR
B. I. Quiero un viaje de un modo raro, por eso voy a recapitu-
lar mis viajes.
Yo he viajado ya en barco de vela y en vapor. Tambi^n he via-
jado en ferrocarril, en coche, a caballo y en mula. He patinado y
andado en trineo. He sido llevado a cuestas para pasar algunos
rfos. He bajado a algunas minas colgado de una cuerda. He ca-
balgado siendo nino en cameros merinos y en perros de Terranova.
Tambien he nadado. He volado en suenos. He cafdo de una al-
tura. He saltado mas de cuatro arroyos.
Hasta aquf no he viajado en aeroplano, pero tengo esperanzas
de viajar de esta manera. Tampoco he caminado sobre un camello
como los drabes, ni sobre el lomo de un elefante como los indios.
2. Rodolfo tomd su sombrero, bajd la escalera y sali6 de la casa.
Abajo al aire libre recobrd su presencia de espfritu. — } Caramba !
no he tratado la cuestidn de mas importancia.
Entrd en la casa y subfa la escalera en el momento en que
bajaba Dona Emesta. — Senora, dispense Vd. Quiero preguntar,
I Ustedes han tenido gastos considerables ; la educacidn y mante-
nimiento de ese joven ha producido desembolsos considerables ?
La senora no contestd a la pregunta, levanto una mano y i zas !
la mejilla derecha de Rodolfo se puso encardenada^ y el sombrero
cayo rodando por la escalera de arriba abajo.
C I. ,1 Cuindo ha viajado Vd. en vapor? 2. ^ De qu^ manera
ha viajado el senor ? 3. ^ Cuantos viajes ha hecho ^ Vd. en ferro-
carril ? 4. i Cuando ha pasado Vd. el rfo del Norte ? 5. ^ A quien
han escrito Vds. hoy ? 6. ^ Cuantos gastos han tenido Vds. ayer ?
7. I Por qud entrd Rodolfo en la casa ? 8. ^ A qui^n ha encontrado
en la escalera ? 9. <; Qud ha preguntado a D.* Emesta ? 10. ^ Qu^
contestacidn ha recibido ?
Z>. I. Have you ever skated on the North River? 2. This man
has traveled in many ways. 3. The Arabs travel on camels. Have
^ se puso encardenada, turned red.
2 hechOy past participle of hacer.
LESSON XIV 57
you ever traveled in this manner ? 4. When he was {use pres, part ^
in India, he rode on an elephant's back. 5. When he was {use
pres.part^ a child, he had ridden on dogs and sheep and jumped
brooks. 6. We had opened all the windows before he came into
the room. 7. He asked who had come down stairs. 8. They an-
swered that they had been in the room an hour. 9. Rodolfo had
gone up stairs because he had not discussed the question of most
importance, i o. We have not had much presence of mind. 1 1 . The
lady who had answered the question went out of the room. 12. The
man who has crossed the river (by)^ swimming is my brother.
13. The soldiers who have traveled by rail arrived yesterday.
14. The boys of whom I have spoken are the best in the class.
15. The ladies, to whom we had spoken, were cold and hungry.
1 Omit.
LESSON XIV
76. Future Indicative.
Sing. i. comprar^, I shall buy
2. comprarAs, j^« will buy
3. comprar A, he will buy
Plur. I. compraremos, we shall buy
2. comprar6is,^^« will buy
3. comprar An, they will buy
I ComprarA Vd. ? Shall you buy f
Sing. I wen6er 6^ I shall sell Sing. \ . viwir i^ I shall live
2. vender As, you will sell 2. vivir As, you will live
3. vender A, he will sell 3. vivir A, he will live
Plur. I. vender emos, we shall sell Plur. i. vivir emos, we shall Jive
2. vender ^is,_y^« will sell 2. vivir ^is,^;'^^ will live
3. vender An, they will sell 3. vivir An, they will live
I VenderA Vd. ? Shall you sell f i VivirA Vd. ? Shall you live f
a. The future tense, indicative mood, of a Spanish verb is formed
from the infinitive by adding the present tense of haber. The accent
58 SPANISH GRAMMAR
falls on the ending, and (except in the first person plural) is written. The
h, being a silent letter, is not written, nor the hab of the second person
plural : comprar(h)^, comprar(hab)^i8.
b. Frequently the expressions will you, I will, etc. mean are you
willing, I wish, etc., in which case they should be rendered by the
proper forms of querer : will you buyf ^qniere Vd. comprar?
77. Conditional.
Sing. I. comprsr Ul^ / should buy
2. comprar las, ^^« would buy
3. comprar la, he would buy
Plur. I. comprar iamosy we should buy
2. comprar iaisy^<7» would buy
3. comprar ian, they would buy
^Compraria Vd.? Should you buy?
Sing. I. vender la, I should sell Sing. I. vivirla, I should live
2. vender las, _y^« would sell 2. vivirlas,^^« would live
3. vender la, he would sell 3. vivirla, he would live
Plur. 1. wtn6.txit^m.o%yWe should sell Plur. i. viviriaxios,we should live
2. vender laiSj^^'^w would sell 2. vivirlais,^^^ would live
3. vender Ian, they would sell 3. vivirlan, they would live
I Venderla Vd. ? Should you sell ? i Vivirla Vd. ? Should you live f
a. The conditional is formed from the infinitive by adding the endings
of the imperfect tense of haber : comprar(hab)la.
b. The conditional takes the name from its frequent use in the con-
clusion of a condition: Si tuyiese dinero, oomprarla el perro. If I had
money, I should buy the dog. The conditional is only used in connec-
tion with some verb in a past tense ; hence, it stands for the future in a
quoted statement depending on a verb denoting past time : Comprard el
perro, He will buy the dog ; Dijo que comprarla el perro. He said that
he would buy the dog.
c. Should in the sense of ought is rendered by some form of deber,
or other word expressing obligation : / should go because my father is
sick, Debo ir porqne estd malo mi padre.
78. Idiomatic Expressions. The Spanish word for time in the
sense of hour, or 6^ clock, is la hora.
LESSON XIV
59
I Qu6 hora es ?
Es la una.
Son las d08.
Son las tres y cuarto.
Son las cnatro y diez minntos.
En mi reloj son las cinco y media.
Son las seis menos cuarto.
I A qu6 hora ?
A las doce del dia.
A las doce de la noche.
A la media noche.
De la madrugada.
De la magana.
De la tarde.
De la noche.
Por la maSana.
:}
}
What time (lit. what hour) is it f
It is one o^clock, (Note the omis-
sion of hora.)
// is two o^ clock. (Note the plural
of verb and article. The verb
may be omitted, but never the
article.)
It is a quarter past three. ,
// is ten minutes past four. (The
word minutos may be omitted.)
By my watch it is half past five.
It is a quarter to six (lit six less a
quarter. Between half past and
the hour to come, state the next
hour, less, menos, the minutes).
When ? (cuAndo meaning when is
more general, referring to any
time except time of day.)
At twelve noon.
At twelve of the night.
At midnight.
A M /(^^^"^ midnight till dawn.)
*\ (From dawn till noon.)
P M /(^^^"^ noon till sunset.)
' \ ( From sunset till midnight.)
In the forenoon. (When the time
is indefinite use por, otherwise'de.)
EXERCISE 14
A. a. Conjugate and translate the future and the conditional of
hablar, comer, escribir, marcharse.
b. Translate: i. He will speak. 2. He would speak. 3. Shall
you write ? 4. Will you write ? 5. Would you write ? 6. When will
he arrive ? 7. He will arrive at five o'clock. 8. When shall you go
away? 9. I shsdl go away at hsdf-past seven. 10. They shall go
at once (en seguida). 11. Will you go with our family? 12. I do
not wish to go to-morrow. 13. How much will you pay ? 14. I am
willing to pay ten dollars.
6o SPANISH GRAMMAR
B, I. Ano nuevo. Hoy los hombres saludan y felidtan a sus
amigos escribiendo en la tarjeta de visita — Feliz ano nuevo. En
un ano nuevo pueden suceder muchas cosas nuevas. Entre manana
y ayer esta la vida. Ayer — esperaba : manana — recordard. Este
ano seri tan largo como el pasado. Despuds veremos la fecha en
la moneda. Pronto vendrd ^ la Primavera. Los valles y las laderas
de los montes abriran al piiblico sus perf umerfas. Del Sur llegaran
companfas de pdjaros a cantar; se tenderan alfombras de hierba
en los campos: doseles de verdura cubrirdn los bosques. Todo
sera luz, aroma y armonfa.
2.
,, . , NuEVA York, 2 de abril de 1012
Muy senor mlo y amigo :
En contestaci6n a su tarjeta postal de ayer, tengo el gusto de
participarle ^ que el cartero entregd la tarjeta a las once y media de
la manana. Me dijo • dste que si Vd. echaba sus cartas en el co-
rreo mas temprano, llegarfan con el tren correo de la noche y se-
rlan entregadas aquf a las ocho de la manana.
Si Vd. manda valores, debe certificar la carta. En tal caso debe
Vd. escribir su nombre y direccidn en el sobre. El gasto del certi-
ficado importa diez centavos ademas del franqueo, que se paga en
sellos pegados sd sobre.
Saludo a Vd. y quedo como siempre su afJ"°* amigo.
Carlos RoDRfcuEz
C I. ^ A qud hora sde el tren para Sevilla? 2. jA qu^ bora
principia la clase ? 3. j Que hora es en su reloj t 4. i Cuindo Ue-
gara su padre de Venezuela? 5. ^ Cuando quiere Vd. ir a casa.?
6. I Como felicitara Vd. a sus amigos el dfa de Ano Nuevo .?
7. I Cuando sera Ano Nuevo ? 8. ,; Cuando se cubriran los arboles
de verdura ? 9. ^ A qu6 hora Uegara el correo ? 10. ^ Qui^n traerd
las cartas ? 11. Explique Vd.* en espaiiol la palabra " correo."
1 vendrd, future of venir, to come, * af ."•, abbreviation for afectf-
^ le = astedy^^M. siino, sincere.
* dijo, preterit of dedr, he told, ^ Expliqae Vd., explain.
LESSON XV 6 1
D, I. The concert will begin at 8.30 p.m. 2. He will write
Wednesday. He said that he would write Wednesday. 3. Mr. L6-
pez went away yesterday. His daughter will go away to-morrow.
4. When will the train arrive from Madrid ? My brother has writ-
jten that he would arrive to-day. 5. It is ten o'clock by the cathe-
drsd clock ; but by my watch I have seven minutes to ten. 6. I
shsdl post my letters at nine p.m. 7. What should you send John ?
I should send money. 8. My friends will arrive in the morning.
I shall go to the station at a quarter past eight. 9. The mail will
be here at 10.30 a.m., and will be delivered at the post-office.
10. Where shall I buy stamps for these letters ? 11. We shall send
the money by registered letter on Wednesday. 12. How many
stamps shall I stick on the envelope ?
79.
LESSON XV
^Tiene Vd. el liteo ? Have you the book ?
Lo tengo. / have it.
I Tiene Vd. la pluma ? Have you the pen f
La tengo. / have it.
£ Tiene Carlos los libros? Has Charles the books?
Los tiene. He has them,
I Tiene ^1 las plumas ? Has he the pens ?
Las tiene. He has them.
i Vi6 Vd. ayer a su madre? Did you see your mother yesterday f
La vl. / saw her.
^Me vid Vd. ayer? Did you see me yesterday f
No le vl, seSor. / did not see you^ sir.
I Qu6 mand6 Vd. a su padre ? What did you send to your father f
Le mand6 una carta. / sent him. a letter.
I Qu6 mand6 Vd. a su madre ? What did you send to your mother f
Le mand^ una carta. / sent her a letter.
I A ella tambi^n ? To her also f
SI, seSor, a ella y a ^1. Yes^ sir^ to her and to him.
Le liabl6 a usted, no a 61. / spoke to you, not to him.
Note. The arrow indicates the word to which the pronoun refers.
62 SPANISH GRAMMAR
80. The Personal Pronouns have the following forms.
Singular
subject direct object indirect object prepositional
1 . yb, / me, me me, {to) me ml, me
2. tu, thou te, thee te, {to) thee ti, thee
3. ^1, he 1 . le or lo, him\ . le, (to) him'\{to) 61, him \ .
eUaifShej Ia, her J U, (to) her J it ella, ^^r J
Plural
1 . nosotros(-a8), we nos, us nos, (to) us no80tro8(-a8), us
2. vosotros(-as),^tf« os, you os, (to) you YoaoUoaC-asyyyou
3. ellos, /^^ los, them les, (/^) /^^/» ellos, them
ellas, M^y las, /A^/;^ les, (to) them ellas, M/?/;^
a. Usted is represented by the pronouns of the third person ac-
cording to gender and number.
viatdd,you -I, :r /I le,(to)you uaied,you
'"^ \l8L, you (fem.) j ' ^ -'•' '-^
d. The reflexive pronoun se has the prepositionsd form si : Dios
me llama a si, Go^ calls me to himself.
81. The Objective Forms of the personal pronouns are placed
before the verb, except the infinitive mood, the present participle,
and the positive imperative. The pronouns follow these verb forms,
and are written as one word with them. If the addition of this ex-
tra syllable causes the spoken accent to fall on any syllable farther
back than the second from the end of the combination, the accented
syllable must be marked by a written accent.
Me habla. He speaks to me.
H^bleme Vd. Speak to me.
No me hable Vd. Don't speak to me.
Quiere hablarme. He wishes to speak to me.
Habl^ndome. Speaking to me.
a. The objective pronouns have no accent of their own, but are
pronounced as a part of the verb to which they belong. Me lo da,
LESSON XV 63
He gives it to me, is pronounced as if written melodd. No me ha
dadO; He has not given me, pronounced Nomehadddo,
b. On account of their close relation to the verb, the objective
forms of the personal pronouns are sdso called " conjunctive."
82. The Prepositional Forms are used after prepositions: una
carta para ^1, a letter for him. They may be stressed in pronun-
ciation, so are used to explain or emphasize the unaccented objec-
tive forms : Nos e8cribi6 a mi y a mi hermano (explanatory). He
wrote to us, (that is) me and my brother \ Me lo da a mi, no a ti
(emphasis). He gives it to tne, not to you.
a. The forms mi, ti, and si are not used after con. Instead,
note the special forms conmigo, with m^ ; contigo, with thee ; con-
sigo, with himself.
b. Being used apart from the verb, the prepositional forms are
also called " disjunctive."
83. Adverbs in Spanish are formed from adjectives by the addi-
tion of mente to the feminine singular : seguramente, safely. Re-
member that the feminine of adjectives which do not end in in
the masculine, with a few exceptions (see section 135), is like the
masculine : hence, cort^smente, politely ; alegremente, joyfully,
a. li two or more adverbs follow each other, mente is added only to
the last : Oi el toque clara y distintamente, / heard the signal clearly
and distinctly.
b. From nouns, adverbial expressions are formed by the use of prepo-
sitions : con alegria, joyfully ; sobre todo, especially, above all ; en
seguida, at once, immediately.
c. Adjectives are sometimes used as adverbs : Vivian dichosos, They
lived happily.
EXERCISE 15
A. a. Supply the pronouns and translate: 1. To me mandd mi
padre una carta. It recibf yo ayer. 2. Voy a contestar — him.
3. Tengo un buen libro. i It quiere Vd. } 4. i Qui^n quiere mis pe-
rros? 77iem quiero yo. $* lUs v\6 su padre ayer? i You vi6 ^1
tambi^n? 6. No mev'i6. Quiere ver — you. y* i Us espera Juan?
64 SPANISH GRAMMAR
Sf, us espera. 8. Him esperamos. To him escriW, no to her, 9. To
her escribimos la carta. It redbi6 ella ayer. 10. ^Tiene Vd. una
carta para me} 11. ^Quiere Vd. venir con mel Sf, quiero ir con
thee,
b. Translate: i. J^ef erring to a house (una casa). I saw it. He
sold it. He wishes to sell it. We live in it.
2 . lief erring to some books (libros). We have them. I am not read-
ing them. Do you wish to read them ? I gave two dollars for them.
3. Referring to a horse (un caballo). We have bought it. He
has sold it They did not buy it How much did he pay for it ?
4. Referring to some flowers (unas flores). He does not have
them. I wish them. I wish to see them. How many are there of
them?
5. Referring to human beings, I met you. I met her. What did
he give you? He gave her some flowers. I shall send you my
book. We met them (masc). What did he give them? I saw them
{fem,), I gave them the letter. I did not sell him the horse. He
will send her a present. I wish to sell you my house.
c. Make adverbs from these adjectives and give meanings : lento,
fidl, claro, feliz, elegante, perfecto.
Supply two adverbs to modify habl6, he spoke ; escribe, he writes,
B, I. Hace muchos anos un campesino regresd de un viaje a
casa donde tenfa una mujer hermosa y una pequefia nina muy bo-
nita. A ti — dijo a su mujer — te he traldo un espejo. Mfrale^ y dime ^
qud ves dentro. Le did ' entonces una caja de madera donde, cuando
la abrid ella, encontrd el espejo. AUf vid la joven esposa una cara
que la miraba y le sonrefa alegremente. — i Qu^ ves ? preguntd el
marido. — Veo a una linda moza que me mira y lleva un vestido
azul exactamente como el mfo. — Tonta, es tu propia cara, le con-
testd el marido. Encantada la mujer con el regalo pasd algunos
dfas mirandose. Considerd el espejo como una alhaja de sobrado
^ look at it. ' tell me. ^ he gave.
LESSON XV 65
precio ; la guard6 en su caja y la ocultd entre sus tesoros. Como
no hablaba nunca del espejo, el padre lo olvidd completamente.
Pasaron anos y marido y mujer vivfan muy dichosos. Pero llegd
un dfa en que la madre cay 6 enferma y aunque la hija la cuidd cx)n
tiemo afecto se fue^ empeorando cada vez mas. Cuando conocid
ella que pronto debfa abandonar a su marido y a su hija, se afligfa
por ellos, sobre todo por la nina. La llamd pues y le dijo^ : — Que-
rida hija mfa, ya ves que estoy muy enferma y pronto voy a morir
y a dejairqs solos a ti y a tu padre. Prom^teme que miraras en el
espejo todos los dfas al despertar y al acostarte. En ^1 me veras y
conoceras que estoy siempre velando por ti. Entonces le ensend el
sitio donde estaba oculto el espejo y la nina prometid con lagrimas
lo que su madre le pedfa, y ^sta expird a poco. En adelante la nina
tomaba cada maiiana y cada tarde el espejo del lugar donde estaba
oculto y miraba en ^1 por largo rato e intensamente. Allf vefa la
cara de su perdida madre. A ella confiaba de noche sus disgustos
del dfa y en ella sd despertar buscaba aliento y caririo.
2.
Muy seiior mfo, Santiago de Chile, 14 de juHo
Adjunto le devuelvo el libro que me prestd Vd. hace ocho dfas.
El portador de la presente le entregara tambi^n algunas cartas que
nos escribid a mf y a mi hermano nuestro padre. Si le interesan,
puedo enviarle otras. Al mismo tiempo si Vd. me manda otros
libros, le quedarfa muy agradecido. Dandole gracias anticipadas,
quedo de Vd., . ,. to c c
^ Su amigo y at. S.S.
Andres Romero
C. Answer with pronouns for the italicized nouns : i. { Qud ha
trafdo el seiior a su mujer ? 2, { Abrid ella la caja ? 3. ^ Que estaba
en la caja ? 4. ^ Qu^ vid la joven esposa en el espejo ? 5. ^ Vid ella
su propia cara ? 6. ^ Ddnde guardd la mujer el espejo ? 7. ^ Hablaba
el padre del espejo} 8. En la bora de su muerte, ^qu^ dijo la
^86... mAB, k^t getting constantly worse, ^ said.
66 SPANISH GRAMMAR
mujer a su hija ? 9. ^ Qu^ prometid la hija a su madre ? 10. ^ Vi<5
la nina en el espej'o la cara de su madre ?
Z>. I . The young wife took the wooden box and opened it at once.
2. In it she found a mirror. 3. She used to hide it securely among
her treasures. 4. She used to take it and look at herself every day.
5. As the father forgot the mirror completely, the mother did not
speak to him about it. 6. The mother said : "I am going to leave
you and your father alone." 7. The mother showed the little girl
the place where she had hidden it. 8. She gave her the mirror and
said : " In it you will see me." 9. The girl promised her that she
would look at it. 10. Will you lend me a pencil ? I shall send you
one this afternoon. 11. Did I lend you a book yesterday? Yes,
you lent me Don Quixote. 12. When will you send ipe the flowers ?
I shall send you the flowers to-morrow morning. 13. Will^ you go
to the theater with me to-night ? A friend has presented me with^
two tickets to the performance. 14. Mr. Gonzalez spoke to us at
once because he recognized us as' two young Americans. 15. We
answered him politely but firmly that we could not accept his offer
to * accompany us.
1 See § 76, b. - 2 Omit. » por. * de.
LESSON XVI
84. Irregular Verbs. Many common verbs are irregular in their
conjugation. These are conveniently memorized by considering
their forms as derived from six principal parts. See section 243.
85. Social Forms.
Para servir a N^.\At your service, (When speaking of one's self or
Servidor de Vd. J instead of answering one's own name.)
I Tengo el gusto de hablar con Don Have I the pleasure of speaking
Juan L6pez ? with Mr, John Ldpez ?
Servidor de Vd. At your service,
I Con qui^n tengo el honor de With whom have I the honor of
hablar ? speaking ?
Con Juan L6pez, para servir a Vd. With John Ldpez ^ at your service.
LESSON XVI
67
These forms may seem stilted. But as the Spanish are formal
and cxjurteous in their intercourse with strangers, the foreigner who
wishes to succeed with them should cultivate their manners.
Quiero presentarle a mi amigo, el / wish to introduce you to my
SeSor Men^ndez. friend^ Mr, Menindez,
Mucho gusto en conocerle. Or Pleased to meet you.
Celebro la ocasi6n de conocerle.
On taking leave of anybody (despedirse), it is good form to call
your home his by saying Tiene Yd. su casa, calle de Le6n, nti-
mero 75. This is equivalent also to an invitation to call.
Siento molestarle, seSor. / am sorry to trouble you, sir.
No hay molestia. No trouble.
Me alegro de saber que su hermano / am glad to learn that your
de Vd. estd mejor de salud. brother is better in health.
EXERCISE 16
A. a. Learn the principal parts of ser, estar, tenet, venir, ir,
decir, hacer, querer.
b. Conjugate the present indicative and the preterit indicative of
the above verbs ; also the imperfect indicative of ser and ir.
c. I. Use ser, to be.
I am an American.
He is a Spaniard.
It is nine o'clock.
Use both imperfect and preterit
I was a^ soldier.
It was ten o'clock (impf).
2. Use estar, to be.
I am here.
Where is he ?
How are you?
^ Use polite form.
Are you^ a Cuban?
We 1
r^. J- are not Englishmen.
Were you a ^ lawyer ?
We
They J
-were merchants.
I
He
► was in Mexico.
How long were you there ?
^ Omit. See section 26, i.
68
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Here ^ we are.
Are they at home ?
We I
They/
were not at home.
3. Use tener, to have.
I
We 'have.
TheyJ
Does he have ?
Do you ^ have ?
4. Use venir, to come.
I
I 1
We Sdid not have.
TheyJ
\ olhave?
What did
come.
You
We
They
He comes.
I
He
You
We
TheyJ
j-came.
When does he come .?
I am coming.
He is coming.
We ]
They |-are not coming.
You J
'he 1
Where ' did^ you i-come from ?
[theyj
When * did you come ?
5. Use ir (a), to go (to) ; irse, to go away.
I am going now.* I
Where • is he going ? He
We
They
You^J
We
•-are going home. You^
TheyJ
To-morrow I go away.
Does he go away ? Where • did
When do they go off ?
1 here = ya.
2 Singular and plural.
' where fivtn^ i de d6&de ?
I
He
►went to Cuba. We
You 2
TheyJ
he
► was gomg.
► were going.
,2
you
they
He was going away,
^go? I went away.
They went off.
* Translate in two ways.
* ya. (Put before the verb.)
* ad6nde.
LESSON XVI
69
6. Use dedr, to say, to tell.
I
We \ say.
They J
He says.
What is he saying ? What did
What do you say 1
I 1
We Ssaid.
They J
he
you
Ithey
I was sa3dng.
You were saying — ? ^
say then ?
idf ^ ,|do?
[you^J
7. Use hacer,- to make, to do.
' 1 ' 1
We i-make. We ^made.
They J They J
What does he do ? „„ ... fhe
wn, 4. 2 J • .What did-^
What are you ^ doing ? [ you
8. Use querer, to wish, to desire.
' 1 '
You i-wish to go. We
They J They J
What does he wish ?
What do you wish 1
What was he doing ?
What were you* doing t
wished to come.
What did
4
he
you
► wish.!*
B. Una tarde cuando ya se anochecfa Flor se encontrd con el doc-
tor Guzman a la vuelta de una esquina, y ^ste se detuvo a saludarla.
-7- 1 Hola ! exclamd el con alegrfa.")
— Para servir a Vd., doctor, contes.td ella.
— I Adonde va por estos lados ?
— Vivo muy cerca ; vengo del trabajo y voy a casa.
— ^ Y qu^ hace Vd. ahora ?
— Coser, coser y Uevar esta vida con paciencia.
— Pero I qu^ bien la encuentro de salud !
— Despu^s de Dios, gracias a Vd.
— Pues lo celebro mucho. He tenido gran placer en saludarla.
^ i Decfa Vd. ? is the proper way to ask one to repeat what has not been
understood, i Qa6 ? w^at, is vulgar. ^ Singular and plural.
70 SPANISH GRAMMAR
— Adi6s, adids, doctor.
Y se estrecharon las manos.
Un domingo por la tarde Rosalia entrd en casa de Flor. Estaba
^sta en el jardfn, regando las macetas. Confusa Flor sali6 a recibirla.
— Yo soy Rosalia de Valera : vivo en la calle de la Paz, casa
niimero 36, y allf estoy a sus drdenes.
— Senora, muchas gracias. Tengo mucho gusto en conocerla,
y en esta casa habita una servidora de usted.
— Me han dicho que usted hace muy bien toda clase de bordados.
— Sf, senora, puedo bordar lo que usted quiera.
— Pues bien, yo vengo a eso justamente. Puede usted hacerme
el servicio de bordarme para dentro de dos meses cuatro fundas de
almohada muy bonitas y vistosas. Las quiero asf para un regalo,
I sabe usted ?
— No tengo inconveniente.
— Entonces i puedo contar con ellas ?
^ — SI, senora.
C. I, I Ddnde se encontrd Flor con el doctor ? 2. i Qu^ hizo el ?
3 . I Con qu^ saludo contestd ella ? 4. i De ddnde vino ella } 5 . ^- Que
clase de trabajo tuvo ? 6. ^' Qu6 hicieron al despedirse ?^7. i C6mo
se present© a Flor la senora de Valera ? 8. ^' C6mo le contestd Flor ?
9. I Que quiso la senora ? 10. i Para cudndo quiere las fundas de
almohada ? 11.^ C6mo las quiere ? 12, i Que es una almohada ?
Z>. I. Have I the pleasure of addressing Mr. Valera? At your
service. 2. I am pleased to make your acquaintance. 3. How is
your health to-day ? Much better, thank you. I am glad. 4. My
grandfather comes at three o'clock this afternoon. I shall meet him
at three o'clock this afternoon. 5. He says that he is going to Cuba
next month. I shall go with him. 6. One Tuesday morning^ I
went to his house and found him in bed very sick. 7. They said
that they would go to Spain with me. 8. I wished to see him but
he did not come to New York. 9. Where did he come from ? He
1 por la mafiana.
X
LESSON XVII
71
came from Mexico because he wished to learn English.^ 10. Yes-
terday they came at a quarter to five ; and we were "there to meet
them. 1 1 . What time was it when they went ? ^ It was 9 p.m. when
they said that they were going, but they did not go before 9.30.
12. The tailor who made me this suit said that it would be ready
last week. 13. I told him that I wished it for Sunday. 14. We did
not have the kind of goods which he wished. 15. They stopped
on the comer of the street to greet us.
^ Insert definite article.
3 Use Irse.
LESSON XVII
86. The Imperative Mood expressing command has these forms :
-ar VERBS -er verbs -ir verbs
Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur.
t. compra comprad 2. vende vended 2. escribe escribid
87. The Use of the imperative mood is limited to positive com-
mands of the familiar form ; that is, to children or intimate acquaint-
ances. Formal or polite requests, and negative commands of the
familiar form, are supplied from the present subjunctive. A complete
scheme follows :
Familiar
Polite
-ar verbs
Sing.
compra
no compres
compre Vd.
no compre Vd.
Plur.
comprad
no compr^is
compren Vds.
no compren ^ds.
buy
dotiH buy
buy
-er verbs
dotCt buy
Sing.
yende
no vendas
venda Vd.
no venda Vd.
Plur.
vended
po vend^is
vendan Vds.
no vendan Vds.
sell
dorCt sell
sell
-ir verbs
dotiH sell
Sing.
escribe
no escribas
escriba Vd.
no escriba Vd.
Plur.
escribid
no escrib&is
escriban Vds.
no escriban Vds<
write
dotCt write
write
don't write
72 SPANISH GRAMMAR
88. The Sabjunctive Mood, present tense, has the following forms :
-ar VERBS -er and -ir verbs
Sing. I. compre Sing. I. vend a
2. compres 2. vend as
3. compre 3. venda
Plur. I. compremos Plur. i. vendamos
2. compr^is 2. vendAis
3. compren 3. vend an
A translation of the forms is not given because it might lead to mis-
conceptions. See section 109.
89. Radical-Changing Verbs, being accented on the radical, suf-
fer a change of vowel in the 2d person singular of the imperative,
and throughout the singular and in the 3d person plural of the
present subjunctive. See sections 244-247 for models.
90. The Present Subjunctive, when not used in a clause depend-
ent on another verb, is used independently to express (i) a command
or (2) a wish.
I. English commands in the second person are ^ given by the
imperative, usually 'without a subject expressed ; as, Go, English
commands in the first person plural, and in the third person singu-
lar and plural, are given by a locution beginning with let ; as. Let
us go. Let him go, Spanish uses the subjunctive mood for all (ex-
cept familiar commands, see section 87), but usually introduces the
third persons by que. Note the forms :
To speak, hablar
Sing. 2. Speak, Hable Vd.
3. Let John speak, Que Juan hable
Let her speak, Que hable ella
Plur. I. Let us speak, Hablemos
2. Speak, Hablen Yds.
3. Let them speak. Que hablen
LESSON XVII 73
To sit doTvn, sentane
Sing. 2. Sit doTvn, Si^ntese Vd.
3. Let him be seated^ Que se siente
Let her sit down^ Que se siente eUa
Plur. I. Let us sit down^ Sent^monos
2. Sit down^ Sidntense Vds.
3. Let them be seated^ Que se sienten
a. The present subjunctive is sometimes used for the imperative, even
in affirmative commands. — Sube al momento. No recibi6 contestacidn.
— Que subas. " Come up at once?'' He received no reply. " Com^ upj*^
b. The present indicative appears for the subjunctive in mild com-
mands. Vas alii y le suplicas y le ruegas. Go there and beg and entreat
him,
2. A wish is expressed in English by the subjunctive or by may
followed by an infinitive. Spanish uses the subjunctive mood.
\ Viva el rey ! Long live the king I
I Dios le ampare I God protect you /
I Sea Vd. feliz I May you be happy /
91. Pronouns, with the imperative or the subjunctive used as
imperative, follow the verb and are appended to it, unless the
expression is negative or introduced by que or some other word,
in which cases the pronoun precedes.
H&galo Vd. Do it. Dime ahora. Tell me now.
No lo haga. Don'^t do it. No le digas. Don^t tell him,
H&galo Jorge, or Que Jorge lo haga. Let George do it.
92. Reflexive Verbs have the following peculiarities :
1. The second plural imperative loses d before os, except irse:
sentad -f os = sentaos, be seated
But id08, go away
2. The first plural drops s before noa :
yamos -|- nos = ydmonos, Let ^s go away
sentemos -|- nos = sent^monos, Let^s sit down
74 SPANISH GRAMMAR
93. Idiomatic Expressions. Englishplease, introducing a request,
may be rendered by various locutions as in the following :
Tonga Vd. la bondad de cerrar la Please (lit. Have the kindness to)
pnerta. close the door.
H&game Vd. el fayor de repetir. Please ()i\.. Do me the favor to)
repeat,
Sirvase Vd. traerme un yaso de . Please bring tne a glass of water,
agna. (Siryase, from senrirse, is less
courteous than the other expres-
Pase Vd. Come in, sions. Use with persons under
Pase Vd. adelante. Go first, obligation to serve you; fre-
Dispense Vd. Excuse me, quent in business letters.)
EXERCISE 17
A, I. Express in the negative, familiar form :
Speak) habla (hablar) Give, da (dar)
Take, toma (tomar) Say, di (decir)
Eat, come (comer) Come, ven (venir)
Drink, bebe (beber) Go, v6 (ir)
Go up, sube (subir) Go away, v^ (irse)
Open, abre (abrir) Do, haz (hacer)
Close, cierra (cerrar) Put, pon (poner)
2. Put all the above forms in the plural,
3. Express the same in the polite form, singular and plurcU, posi-
tive and negative,
4. Translate:
To get into the carriage, Subir al ooche To go auoay, Irse
Get into the carriage, sir Go away
Let him get in Let him go away
Let Mary get in Let Charles go away
Let us get in Let us go away
Get in, gentlemen Go away (//«r.)
Let them get in Let them go away
LESSON XVII 75
B. I. Mozo, trdigame Vd. un vaso de agua y una taza de caf^.
Sfrvase Vd. echarme esta carta al correo. Dfgame Vd. el nombre
de este pescado. 2. Cochero, ll^veme Vd. al teatro del Prfncipe y
no se pare Vd. hasta Uegar. Espere un momento, he olvidado mi
paraguas. Agudrdeme Vd. aquf. 3. Caballero, hagame Vd. el fa-
vor de indicar el camino de la casa de correos. Vaya Vd. derecho
fjor adelante. 4. Sfrvase hablar mds despacio. No comprendo bien
cuando Vd. habla tan de prisa. 5. Caballero, ^'por ddnde se va
al Hotel de Inglaterra? Siga Vd. hasta la esquina de la tercera
calle y de vuelta a la izquierda. 6. Tenga Vd. la bondad de repetir.
Soy extranjero y no comprendo si Vd. no habla despacio. 7. Co-
chero, vaya Vd. m£s de prisa. No llegaremos a tiempo. Ya esta-
mos. Bajemos. 8. Vamos a pie al parque y sent^monos debajo de
los drboles. i No serfa mejor ir en coche o en tranvfa ? 9. Ya es-
toy cansado de andar. Subamos al tranvfa y regresemos a casa.
10. Conductor, hdgame bajar en la esquina f rente a la catedral.
11. Pase Vd., seiior. Tome Vd. este asiento. No se vaya Vd. tan
pronto. Quede Vd. un ratito. 12. Que el camarero me traiga el pe-
riddico de hoy. 13. Que el camarero me Uame a las siete. 14. Que
el mozo suba mi baiil a mi habitacidn.
C The answers to the following should contain a verb in the sub-
junctive mood expressing command:'^ i. i Quiere el seiior leche en el
caf^ ? 2. 1 Dare yo la carta al cartero ? 3. Caballero, hagame Vd.
el favor de indicar el camino del teatro del Prfncipe. 4. i Quiere
Vd. indicarme la casa de correos ? 5. ^ Por ddnde se va a la calle
de Alcala ? 6. ^- C6mo iremos al parque ? 7. ^ Quiere el senor el pe-
riiSdico de hoy ? 8. ^ A qu^ hora quiere Vd. que le Uame t 9. Sefior,
hay un caballero a la puerta, quien quiere entrar. 10. ^ Iremos al
teatro en tranvfa o en coche ? 1 1. ^ En ddhde quiere Vd. su baiil ?
12. ^ Me comprende Vd ^
* The answers to Cmay be taken directly from ^with some variations;
for example, one answer to 12 might be, No may bien; sinrase hablar mAs
despado.
76 SPANISH GRAMMAR
Z>. I. What street-car do I take to go to the park ? Follow this
street to the next comer and go south.^ 2. Please give me a time-
table of the trains for Chicago. Do the trains stop for meals?
3. Please tell me where is the railway station. Go straight ahead
as far as the third comer and turn to the right. You will see it
then. 4. Let's go to the theater. Shall we go on foot ? No, let's
take a carriage. 5. Driver, take me to the plaza and stop in front
of the hotel. 6. Here* comes a car. Let's get in and go home.
7. Let us stay in the park to see the animals. Let's buy some bread
to give them. 8. Let John bring me«some fried eggs and a cup of
coffee. 9. I cannot understand you if you speak fast. Please speak
more slowly. 10. Call me at 6.30, as I wish to take the first train
home. II. Please ask the letter-carrier if he has any letters for me.
12. If Mr. Gonzalez comes, let him come in at once. I wish to
speak to him. 13. Please tell me if I am speaking to Mr. Genaro
Chic ? At your service. 1 4. Wait for me a moment. I am going
to mail an important letter. 15. Can you show me Mr. Ldpez's
house? I will show you his house, if you will accompany me
as far as the next comer.
1 Supply al. ^ ya.
LESSON XVIII
94. Two Pronouns. When two objective pronouns occur with
the same verb, the indirect object pronoun stands first
Me lo did. He gave it to me.
DAmelo. Give it to me.
Si Vd. tiene mis libros, d^melos. If you have my books, give them
to me.
a. When the direct object is a pronoun of the first or second
person, it is better to express the indirect object in the prepositional
form preceded by a.
Te presentd a ml. He introduced you to me.
Pres^nteme Vd. a ella. Introduce me to her.
LESSON XVIII
77
b. When two pronouns of the third person occur together, the
indirect object pronouns le and les assume the form se (derived
from Old Spanish ge and not the reflexive se). Thus :
Escribl una carta a mi padre. I wrote a letter to my father.
Le escribl una carta. / wrote him a letter.
La escribl a mi padre. / wrote it to my father.
Se la escribl. / wrote it to him.
c. The sentence Se la escribi may have six different meanings.
To distinguish the various meanings of le, les, and se, use the prep-
ositional forms of the pronouns : thus,
wt'\to him^ a 61
or \ to her^ a ella
le J to you, a usted
No se las escribl a ellos.
Quiero declrselo a Vd.
A 61 le mand6 un paquete.
A ellas no les habl6.
se *] to them (m.), a ellos
or " to them (f .), a ellas
les J to you (pi.), a ustedes
/ did not write them to them.
I wish to tell it to you.
I sent him, a package.
He did not speak to them.
In sentences like these an English speaker is tempted to omit the
conjunctive form. Do not omit it, because the prepositional form
merely explains the other and is not a substitute or alternative.
95. With hay the personal pronouns usually have the meaning
of some.
See section 253 for conjugation of the impersonal verb hay.
^ D6nde hay sastrerlas ? — Las hay " Where are there some tailors^
en la calle dQ Francos. shops ? " " There are some in
Francos street?''
^Hay husTOS frescos? — Los hay ^^ Are there any fresh eggs?'*''
de primera clase. " First-class ones^
96. Muy, very, is a shortened form of mucho ; and must be re-
placed by mucho when occurring alone. The intensified form is
muchisimo (muy mucho is not allowable). English much before
past participles is muy. (For examples see section 210.)
78 SPANISH GRAMMAR
97. The Possessive Adjectives given in section 37 are shortetjed
forms, used before nouns, of the following :
mlo, my niiestro, our
tuyo, thy vuestro, your (plur. of tuyo)
his , . . (de 61)
suyo-j her . . . (de ella) suyo-*
your . . . (de listed)
their (m.) . . . (de ellos)
their (f .) . . . (de ellas)
your . . . (de ustedes)
a. These forms are declined to agree with the thing possessed.
They stand after the noun, being regularly employed in direct ad-
dress.
Queridos hermanos mlos y queridas My dear brothers and sisters,
hermanas mlas. (Used by preachers.)
Amigo mlo. Dear Friend. '\ (Complimentary
Muy seSores nuestros. Dear Sirs, j openings of letters.)
b. When the meaning is indefinite, these forms express the Eng-
lish idiom of mine ^ of his ^ etc. : as, un amigo mio, a friend of mine ;
ciertos libros suyos, certain books of his.
c. On account of the several meanings of su and suyo, the prep-
ositional forms of the personal pronouns may be added after the
nouns modified, in which case the possessive adjective may be re-
placed by the definite article : No tengo su libro de ella, or el libro
de ella, I do not have her book.
98. Possessive Pronouns are formed from the possessive adjec-
tives by prefixing the article.
Singular
1. el mlo (la mfa, los mlos, las mlas), mine
2. el tuyo (la tuya, los tuyos, las tuyas), j/^;/rj, thine
3. el suyo (la suya, los suyos, las suyas), his^ hers, its, or yours
Plural
1. el nuestro (la nuestra, los nuestros, las nuestras), ours
2. el vuestro (la vuestra, los vuestros, las vuestras), j/^2^rj
3. el suyo (la suya, los suyos, las suyas), theirs ox yours
LESSON XVIII 79
a. The possessive pronouns agree with the thing possessed : Su
casa es miLs grande que la mia o la de usted, His house is larger than
mine or yours,
b. The article may be omitted before a possessive pronoun in
the predicate : Este libro es mio, This book is mine,
c, Los mios, los suyos, etc., may mean My folks ^ his tnen^ etc.
d, Lo mio, etc., means what is mine : as, Con lo suyo y lo mio
es imposible vivir, On his property and mine it is impossible to live,
99. Idiomatic Expressions.
To inquire one's opinion : iQu6 le parece?
To inquire one's liking: ^C6mo le gusta?
To invite one to partake : ^Le gusta?
The subjects of the verbs are the things under discussion ; the
person who thinks or likes is expressed by an indirect object pro-
noun. The individuality of the persons may be emphasized by a
pronoun in the prepositional form.
I Qu^ le parece este paSo ? What do you think of this cloth ?
A mi no me parece bueno. / don''t think it is good (lit. //
doesn't seem good to me),
I C6mo le gustan a Vd. las naran- How do you like oranges f
jas?
A mi me gustan muchisimo. / like them very much.
£ Le gusta comer con nosotros ? Will you dine with us f
I Le gusta una copa ? Have a glass f
Con mucho gusto. With great pleasure.
EXERCISE 18
A, Translate:
(Use the formal singular for you. Remember that pedir and comprar
take the indirect object of the person from whom a thing is requested
or bought)
I. Referrringto a letter (una carta). Give it to me. Give it to
him. I gave it to you. He delivered it to them. I have not writ-
ten it to her.
8o SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. Referring to some books (libros). I asked him for them. He
asked them of you. I have read them to them. Give them to us.
Did he send them to you ?
3. Referring to some apples (manzanas). I did not buy them of
him. Buy them of me. I wish to buy them of you. Did he sell
them to him ? He sold them to us.
4. Referring to a book (un libro). I read it to her yesterday.
He wishes to read it to you. She sent it to me, not to you. He
will not send it to her. They will not deliver it to you.
B, I. Voy a hacer un viaje a Barcelona, i Conoce Vd. un buen
hotel donde hay ascensor ?
— Lo hay en el Hotel de Ambos Mundos. AUf encontrard Vd.
buena cama, buenas comidas y servicio excelente.
— I Cuales son las horas de las comidas ?
— Por la manana al levantarse, cafe ; a las diez y media hasta
las doce, almuerzo ; a las siete, la comida en mesa redonda.
— I Cuanto pago ?
— De 8 a 12 pesetas diarias segiin la habitacidn, todo incluso
sino el cafd y las propinas. Muchos viajeros no toman nada por la
manana. i Va Vd. a Barcelona por mar o en ferrocarril ?
— Parto para Barcelona en el tren que sale a las diez de la ma-
nana. A mf no me gusta viajar por mar. En los camarotes falta
el aire; huelen mal y siempre me mareo. Ya he tomado en el
despacho de la companla un billete de primera clase de ida y
vuelta. Mi equipaje esta en la estacidn, listo para facturax. Yo
mismo debo estar allf media hora antes de la salida del tren. A mi
Uegada a Barcelona, alquilard un coche para Uevarme y lo mfo
derecho al hotel.
— En la f rontera se registran los baiiles y las maletas a la adua-
na. Por eso se para el tren casi una hora. Tambien hay fonda si
tiene Vd. apetito para comer o beber algo.
— I Tiene Vd. conocidos en Barcelona ?
— No conozco a nadie allf. El sefior Pdrez es de Barcelona.
LESSON XVIII 8 1
— I Quiere Vd. presentarme a 61 ?
— Con mucho gusto.
2. — I Hay buenas tiendas en Barcelona?
— Las hay muy buenas. Se puede comprar todo. Tienen siem-
pre buenos surtidos de distintas novedades.
— I Son m6dicos los precios ?
— Sf, mucho. Se venden los artfculos a precio fijo y no es pre-
■
ciso regatear.
(JSl viajero entra en una tiendd)
— I Qu^ desea el senor t
— Sfrvase ensenarme un traje completo para hombre.
— I Qu^ le parece ^ste ? Es del mejor pafio ingles, todo lana,
y de un modelo muy modemo.
— I Cuanto vale ?
— Lo vendo a treinta duros.
— A mf me parece demasiado caro. i No hay mas barato ?
— Mas barato si, pero no tan bueno. Fljese Vd. en la calidad
superior. El precio no es muy elevado y si le gusta el traje, puedo
rebajar diez por ciento pagandolo al contado. No puedo darselo
por menos.
— No me gusta el color. Me parece que ese color azul tira a
verde. Ens^neme Vd. algo mas obscuro. Los colores claros se en-
sucian facilmente.
— Pero este color es muy de moda. Vendo muchfsimo. Se lo
he enseiiado a Vd. primero porque lo escogen tantos senores. i No
quiere Vd. probar el traje 1 Si le sienta bien, el dependiente puede
llevarselo a su casa en seguida.
C, \, I Tiene Vd. su Have o la mla ? 2. ^ De qui^n es este badl ?
3. I C6mo le gusta a su hermano la ciudad de Barcelona ? 4. i Le
gusta a Vd. hablar en espanol ? 5 . ^ Hay cartas para ml ? 6. ^ Ddnde
hay libros espanoles } 7. i Qud le parece este traje ? 8. i Que tal
encuentra Vd. el hotel .? 9. ^ Quien le ha dicho que voy a Espana ?
10.^ Ddnde compr6 Vd. un sombrero tan parecido al mlo ? 11.^ Les
82 SPANISH GRAMMAR
gustan a Vds. las tiendas de Valencia ? 12. ^- Le gusta a Vd. rega-
tear ? 13. ^ Le gusta mas comprar a precio fijo ? 14. ^ £s de Juan
aquella maleta? 15. Explique Vd. en espanol el sentido de «un
conocido » ; « el equipaje » ; « una sala de espera » ; « una fohda » ;
« un surtido de g^neros.»
D, I . Can you tell me where to find a good hotel ? There is one in
Broad Street. 2. Do you buy your clothes in London ? No ; I buy
mine in New York. 3. I am writing a letter to my folks in Barce-*
lona ; I shall send it to them at once. 4. My trunk weighs more
than his. 5. Before the departure of the train, they will search your
valises and mine. 6. This trunk is mine, but that bag is yours. That
one yonder is Henry's. 7. There is no elevator in that hotel. I
think the other is better. 8. I do not like to climb so many stairs.
9. Will you have an apple 1 Many, many thanks. Nothing seems
so good to me as a ripe apple. 10. The orange was mine, but he
had cut it, so I gave it to him. 1 1. They showed a ^ desire to know
the story and Luciano told it to them. 12. The postman had a let-
ter for you. We were on the point of asking it of him, when he
handed it to us. 13. Are the prices high in London? Yes, very.
They seem higher to me than ours in New York. 1 4. Which coun-
try do you like best ? I like the country most in which I am living.
15. I think that I have your valise and that you have mine. 16. If
you ask him, he will gladly give them to you. 17. Sir, you have
made a mistake on paying me for^ the oranges. How is that?^
Haven't I paid you enough for them.?' 18. I had the pleasure
of seeing* her and speaking* to her, when I went to mend the
clock for her.* 19. I am not going to Spain alone; some friends
of mine are going to take the trip with me. 20. They do not like
long* journeys on the railroad, and so we shall stop at many places.
1 Omit. ^ Omit is that. ' Direct object, omityZ^r.
* Use infinitive. ^ Indirect object. • Supply definite article.
LESSON XIX 83
LESSON XIX
100. The Infinitive Mood. A verb in the infinitive mood com-
pletes the meaning of the verb, noun, or adjective on which it de-
pends.
No puede trabajar. He cannot work,
Queremos venir. We wish to come,
Pienso ir. / intend to go.
Ss precise hablar espaSol. // is necessary to speak Spanish,
a, Before a dependent infinitive most verbs require some prepo-
sition. The correct preposition must be learned with each verb.
See Appendix II for lists.
Aprende a nadar. He is learning to swim.
Tratar^ de ir. / shall try to go.
Me entretengo con leer. / amtese myself by reading,
Consienten en yenir. They consent to come.
b, A few verbs, notably seguir, govern the present participle.
Siga Vd. leyendo. Continue reading,
c, A preposition before the dependent infinitive after some verbs
causes those verbs to have a different meaning.
Deber, ought, should, Dejar, let, allow,
Deber de, must (supposition). Dejar de, stop, neglect, fail.
No debes leer la novela. You ought not to read the novel,
Debe de ser tu prime. // must be your cousin.
Me dejaron salir. They let me go out,
Ram6n dej6 de hablar. Ramdn stopped speaking.
No dej6 de darme los buenos dias. He did not fail to wish me good
morning,
101. Verbs denoting motion have the preposition a before the
dependent infinitive.
Viene a yerme. He is coming to see m^e,
Voy a escribir. / am going to write,
Subi6 a hablar con el mMlco. He went up to speak with the
doctor.
84 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. The English idiom after verbs of motion frequently has a co-
ordinate verb, as go and see. Such expressions in Spanish require
that the second verb be put in the infinitive preceded by a.
Fu^ ella a buscar un hneso. She went and got a bone,
Venga Vd. a yerme. Come and see me.
Vaya Vd. a llamar a su padre. Go and call your father,
102. An infinitive dependent on a noun or an adjective is usu-
ally connected therewith by the preposition de.
Tenga Vd. la bondad de decirme. Have the* kindness to tell me.
Tenemos la costumbre de leer los We have the habit of reading the
peri6dioos. newspapers.
Soy capaz de guardar el secreto. / am able to keep the secret.
a. A few nouns and adjectives have the preposition a before the
infinitive.
Estaba atento a mirarme. * He was looking at me attentively.
Condena Vd. la propensidn a llorar You condemn the tendency to cry
por motivos pueriles. for trifling reasons.
103. Verbs denoting a sense-perception, as seeing or hearing,,
show a dependent infinitive with a subject which is also the object
of the principal verb. The two verbs are usually not separated.
I Oy6 Vd. sonar la campanula ? Did you hear the bell ring f
Vi correr a las ni9as. / saw the girls run.
104. The dependent infinitive, with some exceptions as in sec-
tion 103 (see also 106), must not have a subject different from that
of the principal verb. Such expressions as He wishes me-to-come
require the subjunctive mood (see section 109). But clauses that
have the same subject as that of the principal verb are put in the
infinitive.
Cree estar enfermo. He thinks he is sick.
Espero llegar maSana. / hope I shall arrive to-morrow^
Crei haberle encontrado. / thought I had found him.
a. Decir should be followed only by a noun clause: Dice que estA
malo, He says that he is sick.
LESSON XIX 85
b. Dejar, to allow ^ pennitir, to permit, and a few other verbs may take
the dependent infinitive even if there is a particular subject.
Vuestra Reverencia me va a dejar Your Reverence is going to let me
ooger en la huerta una poca hoja gather in the garden a few
para mis gusanos de seda. leaves for my silk-worms,
Permitia al sol acariciar sus brazos She permitted the sun to caress
desnudos. her bare arms.
c, Hacer or mandar with the dependent infinitive means to cause, or
to have a thing done.
Size (or mand6) hacer un traje. He ordered a suit made,
Hace facturar el haul. He has the trunk checked.
Hence arise several idiomatic combinations :
Hacer venir al m^ico. To send for the doctor,
Hacer pasar al seSor. To show the gentleman in,
Hacer saber. To make known.
If the second verb has both a subject and an object, the subjunctive
mood should be preferred : Haga Vd. que Rosa lo coloque en el 8ill6n de
ruedas, Have Rosa put you in the wheel-chair.
105. The infinitive is used as a verbal noun,
1. Either as subject or object of a verb.
Oir la 6pera es alll lo de menos. To hear the opera is the least thing
there.
Era frecuente encontrarla en la // was a frequent thing to meet
calle. her in the street,
Recnerdo mucho trabajar. / remember working a great deal,
a. In this use of the infinitive the article frequently occurs.
£1 cazar es buen ejercicio. Hunting is good exercise.
Trabajo me cuesta el creerlo. To believe it is difficult (lit. costs
me labor).
Disimule Vd. el no haber contestado. Pardon my not having answered,
2. After prepositions. (English uses only the present participle.^)
Antes de viajar. Before traveling,
Parti6 sin decir adl6s. He left without saying good-by,
^ed^ en el colegio hasta cumplir / remained at school until I was
I08 dieciocho aSos. eighteen years old.
1 English grammarians commonly term this a verbal noun or gerund.
86 SPANISH GRAMMAR
106. After some prepositions the infinitive mood appears in de-
pendent clauses with idiomatic meaning. Such clauses may have
the subject different from that of the principal clause.
1 . A introduces a conditional clause.
«
Hnbiera prendido el fuego al con- The fire would have spread to the
yento a no ser por los bomberos convent if it had not been for
que llegaron en seguida. the firemen who arrived imme-
diately.
a. A yer is sometimes used imperatively, an ellipsis for yamos a yer, let
us see.
Se ha obstruido la fuente de la The water-pipe in the kitchen is
cocina. A yer si la arreglas. clogged. Let us see if you can
fix it.
Se ha desmayado, dijo el general. ^' He has fainted^^"* said the gen-
A yer una Camilla y que retiren eral. " Bring a stretcher and
a este oficial. carry away this officer.''''
b. Note such idiomatic adverbial expressions as
a medio asar, half baked a saber, to wit, namely
a medio yestir, half dressed a m^ no poder, with might and
a todo correr, at full speed main
a mds tardar, at the latest
2. Al precedes a time clause. (See section 62, ^.)
El viejo, al olr estas palabras, vol- The old man, when he heard (iyt
vi6 la cabeza. on hearing) these words, turned
his head.
3. Con introduces either
a. A clause denoting means :
Un idioma se aprende con hablar. A language is learned by speaking.
(The present participle is more common in this sense, § 274.)
b. A concessive clause.
En mi pueblo, con ser una ciudad In my town, though it is a city of
de importancia, no hay abasteci- importance, there is no public
miento de agua. water supply.
LESSON XIX 87
4. De may introduce a conditional clause.
Pues, de saberlo, dimitirla su cargo For^ if he knew it, he would re-
de contador. sign his position as manager,
Xsto no quiere decir que el capitAn This does not mean that the cap-
fttese mal soldado ; de haberlo tain was a bad soldier; if he
sido, no estaria a las 6rdenes de had been he would not be under
8U tio. the orders of his uncle,
a, De sometimes connects an infinitive with the noun in an adverbial
expression of time beginning with a, usually introduced in English by
after,
a I08 pocos aS08 de estar en Madrid, after being (or he had been) a few
years in Madrid
a I08 diez segundos de atender, after he had (or having) paid at-
tention for ten seconds
5. Para precedes an infinitive clause which explains the purpose
of the action expressed by the principal verb.
Compramos libros para leer. We buy books to read.
Come para yiyir 7 no yiyas para Eat to live, do not live to eat,
comer.
Aproyecho esta ocasidn para agra- I take advantage of this opportu-
decerle. nity to thank you,
a. After verbs of motion a is used instead of para.
8abi6 al campanario a contemplar He went up to the belfry to exam^
el horizonte. ine the horizon,
£1 muchacho se par6 a yer la tropa. The boy stopped to watch the
soldiers,
6. For introduces the reason or cause for the action of the prin-
cipal verb.
£1 buque no se ha perdido por tem- The ship was not lost on account of
pestades sino por Ir yo en ^1. storms but because I went in it.
No pudo hacerlo por hallarse en- He could not do it because he was
fermo. sick.
No nos ha dicho nada. — Por no ^^You have not told us a thing
alarmar a ustedes. about it.^'* " For the sake of not
alarming you^
88 SPANISH GRAMMAR
107. Verbal idioms in which occur a dependent infinitive are —
1. Tener que, must^ have to.
Tengo que despedirme. / must take leave (or say good-by),
TuYO que salir. He had to go out.
Tendremos que ir. We shall have to go,
2. Hay que, must^ in a general, hence impersonal, sense.
Hay que mejorar la condici6ii del // is necessary to improve the con-
obrero. dition of the workingman,
Habia que pasar entre d08 fuegos. // was necessary to pass between
two fires.
3. Haber de denotes a slight degree of obligation, sometimes is litde
more than a future. The imperfect has the force of the conditional.
Caruso ha de cantar esta noche. Caruso is to sing to-night (or will
sing to-night).
Anoche habla de yenir mi tla. Last night my aunt was to come.
Imaging que nadie habia de pedirle He imagined that nobody would
cuentas. ask him for an accounting.
4. Acabar de, have just. The infinitive is translated as though
it were the principal verb.
£1 yapor acaba de llegar. The ship has just arrived.
Acababan de leyantarse. They had just risen.
5. Volyer a, again. The infinitive is rendered as though it were
the principal verb with the tense of volver.
Vuelye a gritar. He shouts again.
Volyer^ a principiar. / shall begin again.
Muchas gracias, yolyi6 a decir la ^^ Many thanks ^^"^ the old lady said
yieja. again.
No vuelva Vd. a llorar. Don'^t cry again.
6. Ser de, used impersonally, appears to give a passive meaning
to the dependent infinitive.
£s de suponer. // is to be supposed.
Era muy de eztraSar. // was very surprising.
Note the following :
{ Era de yer la gente en la calle I You ought to have seen the people
in the street /
LESSON XIX 89
108. Relative Pronoun.
el que (masculine singular), he who^ ^- , , . ,
, ,j. . . .1x7 7 \ the one who ox which
la que (femmme singular), she who J
I08 que (masculine plural)^ , c the ones who ox which
las que (feminine plural) J \/^^j^ w^^ or which
lo que (neuter singular), that which^ what
a. As the first element of this compound is the definite article, the
masculine singular el combines with the prepositions de and a to form
del and al.
b, English what is qu^ only when asking a question. An indirect
question, as / know what he asks, must be introduced by lo que. Yo s4
lo que pregunta.
EXERCISE 19
A, Translate : 1 . Before arriving. Without waiting ten minutes.
After eating. The honor of speaking. The pleasure of knowing you.
2. I have just arrived. He has just spoken. They had just dined.
We had just come. Who has just risen ?
3. On getting up. On sitting down. When he sat down. On
saying good-by. When we returned.
4. Come and visit me. Go and get it. He went and asked him.
Let us go and see the machines. He went out to greet him.
5. He laughs again. They shouted again. I will come again.
Let us begin again. He has begun again.
6. I must go. We must study. They have to eat He had to
pay dear. I shall have to visit him.
7. It is necessary to pay. Was it necessary to shout.?
8. Mary is to come to-morrow. When am I to go ? Where was
he to take you .? Who will sleep on the ground ? What would a
young man do ?
B. I. Os preguntais la noche del 31 de diciembre — eQue he
hecho de los 365 dfas y seis horas de este aiio 1 Y es que s61o re-
cuerda vuestra memoria mucho desnudarse y vestirse, mucho comer
y volver a tener apetito, mucho dormir ; haber llorado algunos dfas,
go SPANISH GRAMMAR
y haber refdo mds que nunca pocos dlas despu^s. j Y lo mismo
siempre 1 j Y el ano pasado como el anterior ! j Y el aiio que viene
como el que acaba de pasar !
2. El comercio es un campo de batalla, en un bando los vende-
dores en otro los compradores. S61o hay tres casos en que el com-
prador y el vendedor se entienden sin discusidn. i? Cuando no
cuesta nada lo que se vende. 2? Cuando no se piensa pagar lo que
se compra. 3? Cuando es otro el que paga. Fuera de estos tres
casos que no son raros, tiene que haber lucha para fijar el precio
de las cosas. Cada cosa vale segiin la estiman el que la posee y el
que la necesita.
3. Aunque son muchos los ramos en que' se divide el comercio,
citaremos los cinco siguientes.
Comercio por mayor ^ que consiste en comprar grandes partidas
de mercaderfas en los puntos donde se fabrican o producen, para
venderlas despu^s a los mercaderes por menor.
Comercio por menor es el que se hace comprando g^neros a los
comerdantes por mayor, para venderlos en tiendas a los consumi-
dores.
Comercio de comisiSn, que se reduce a comprar, remitir, recibir,
vender, girar, o practicar cualquiera operacidn mercantil por cuenta
ajena. El que se ocupa de esto se llama comisionista.
Comercio de Banca : lldmase asl a la especulacidn que se hace
dando giro al capital por medio de cambios, descuentos de letras,
pagar^s, pr^stamos.
Comercio de Seguros, que consiste en responder del importe de
las averfas, perjuicio o pdrdida total de los gdneros y efectos del
comercio que por mar o tierra se transportan de un punto a otro.
Hay companlas de seguros que aseguran contra incendio y sobre
la vida de personas, obligdndose a ihdemnizar al que sufra una
p^rdida.
C 1, I Qu^ acaba Vd de leer ? 2. i Qud recuerda Vd. del aiio
pasado ? 3. ^ Cdmo se llama el que hace el comercio de comisidn ?
LESSON XIX 91
^•de banca? 4. Explique Vd. el comercio de comisi6n. 5. ^-Para
qu^ sirve un banco ? 6. ^ C6mo se Uaman los que venden ? i los
que compran? 7. ^ Piensa Vd. pagar lo que compra? 8. ^C6mo
se llama el que compra pero no paga al contado? 9. ^C6mo se
llama lo que uno debe? 10. ^'Por qu^ compra un comerciante
grandes partidas de g^neros ? 1 1 . ^* En qu^ consiste el comercio
por mayor ? ^ el comercio por menor ? 12. i Con qu^ motivo hace-
mos asegurar una casa o un almac^n de g^neros ? 13. ^' Cuil de los
ramos del comercio prefiere Vd. ? 14.^* Qu^ tiene Vd. que estudiar
para ser comerciante por mayor ?
Z>, I. He tried to answer him. 2. We do ill to permit it. 3. He
asks permission to come in. 4. The watchman consented to open
the door. 5. They wished to see me. 6. He did not let me go.
7. We called twice to wake up the boy. 8. He must be a bad man.
9. I believe I can go. 10. He regrets he must say it. 11. I am
having my watch mended. 12. We had another key made. 13. I
like to sleep in the morning. 14. He made the horse run. 15. He
brought me a paper to sign. 16. They went out without looking
at me. 17. He spoke without raising his glance from the paper.
18. He thought he heard his father's voice. 19. I have heard my
father relate the story. 20. Did you see the boys run.^^ 21. The
one who has just arrived is Mr. Guzmin. 22. I know what you are
going to say. 23. They came and visited me the first Sunday of
each month. 24. A Frenchman came to give us French lessons.
25. Those who buy goods to use are consumers. 26. Did you hear
the bells ringing? 27. On leaving school we were to occupy dif-
ferent places. 28. When they passed, people turned around to
look at them. 29. The article in the paper insulted the Americans
for favoring the insurrection. 30. He saw her again on the same
street. 31. To speak a foreign language is more difficult than to
understand it. 32. Before traveling in a foreign country one should
learn its language. 33. More than once I have wished to come and
pay you a visit. 34. They propose not to let me study. 35. While
she lived, I never neglected to visit her. 36. After being a few
92 SPANISH GRAMMAR
months in Havana the poor boy fell sick with^ a fever. 37. The
teacher punished the boy for not knowing his lesson. 38. It is neces-
sary to be there at ten o'clock in the morning. 39. Several other
persons lived there, because it was a boarding-house. 40. To give
advice is dangerous. ^
LESSON XX
109. The Subjunctive Mood is used in certain kinds of dependent
clauses.
I. Just as a direct command is expressed in Spanish by the sub-
junctive mood, so is also an indirect command depending on an
expression which implies a wish or command.
Escriba Vd. a su padre. Write to your father,
Quiero que Vd. escriba a su padre. I wish you to write to your father.
Que el camarero me traiga el caf ^. Let the waiter bring me the coffee.
Diga Vd. al camarero que me traiga Tell the waiter to bring me the
el caf ^. coffee,
a. The English expression in these cases is usually an infinitive
with a subject expressed. Such a construction must not be used
in Spanish unless the subject of the infinitive is the same as that
of the principal verb.
Quiero ir. / wish to go,
Quiero que Vd. vaya. / wish you to go,
b. Sometimes English has a present participle in the dependent
clause. Prohibo que tti fumes, I forbid your smoking,
c. Some common verbs that require the subjunctive in depend-
ent clauses for the above reason are
suplicar*^
to request^ beg
querer, to wish mandar, to order
desear, to desire permitir, to permit
'L' / -^ wwhen these words express a command)
escnbir, to write j ^ '^ '
2. Verbs expressing emotions and mental states require the sub-
junctive in the dependent clause.
LESSON XX 93
Sentimos que est^ malo su her- We are sorry that your brother is
mano. sick,
Espero que el mMico llegue a / hope the doctor will arrive in
tiempo. time,
Temo que no lo reciba. I am afraid he will not receive it,
a. Some common verbs of this kind are
esperar, to hope sentir, to regret^ feel sorry
temer, to fear alegrarse de, to be glad
tener miedo de, to be afraid of dudar, to doubt
3. Whenever the verb in a dependent clause denotes indefinite
future time, it requires the subjunctive mood. Such dependent
clauses are introduced by conjunctions, as
antes (de) que, before aunque, although hasta que, until
cuando, when en cuanto, as soon as mientras, while
EsperarA hasta que yo yenga. He will wait till I come,
Mientras seas joven, trabaja. While you are youngs work.
a. It should be observed that when the time is definite after these
conjunctions, the indicative is employed.
Mientras era joven, trabajaba yo While I was youngs I used to
mncho. work hard.
4. Whenever a dependent clause denotes the purpose, the result,
or the condition of an action, the verb is put in the subjunctive.
Common conjunctions which introduce such clauses are
para que (a que after verbs of motion), in order that,
sin que, without,
de modo que (often simply que), so that,
con tal que, provided that,
Envio a Carlos a EspaSa para que / am sending Charles to Spain in
aprenda bien el idioma espaSol. order that he may learn the
Spanish language well.
Deseo hablar con usted sin que se I desire to speak with you without
entere nadie. anybody^ s being informed of it.
B.oy saldris de la cilrcel, con tal Vou will leave the jail to-day^
que el arriero confirme tu decla- provided the mule-driver cor-
racl6n. roborates your declaration.
94
SPANISH GRAMMAR
EXERCISE 20
A. Use the present subjunctive of the verb indicated in the following:
I. Quiero que Vd.J
I wish you to 1 *
^ I call me.
%, ^Qu6 quiere Yd. que yt)
What do you wish me to
3. Digale Yd. que
Tell him to
4. Sentimos que Yd.
We are sorry that you
' write ?
do?
say?
Lbuy?
bring a glass,
send the bill.
Lcome in.
fare sick.
are gomg.
do not know.
5. Compro este libro para que Juan fmay read it.
I am buying this book in order that John [may study Spanish.
when he arrives,
as soon as he comes,
before he leaves,
while he is here.
6. Le ver^
I shall see him
B. I. Quiero que aun me oigas un instante. 2. Le escribir^ que
venga manana. 3. Mi padre quiere que yo me quede en casa.
4. Diga Vd. al gitano que se vaya. 5. Me alegro de que Vd. me
lo haya dicho. 6. Sienten que estemos malos. 7. Cuando el rey
de Inglaterra vaya a Cannes, se detendra en Parfs para visitar al
presidente de la repiiblica. 8. Nos dice que esperemos una hora.
9. El homo esta muy mal ; quiero que vengan albafiiles para com-
ponerlo. 10. ^ Quiere Vd. que le diga una cosa ? 1 1. Tu hermano
me ha encargado que diga a tu madre que le suban una taza de
caf^. 12. Dej^mosle que repose. 13. Carlos necesitara acostarse,
en cuanto llegue. 1 4. i Qui^n tocara el piano para que bailen ?
LESSON XX 95
15. Yo le suplico a Vd. que pague diez pesos a cuenta. 16. Ven
a buscarme cuando scan las diez. 17. Aceptard el trato con tal que
no sea preciso vender mi alma. 18. Le ruego se sirva Vd. enviarme
otro libro. 19. Le aconsejo a Vd. que estudie el espanol. 20. Pro-
hibo que Vds. salgan antes de las cuatro. 21. Le digo a Vd. esto
para que sepa la verdad. 22. La cena va a estar en seguida ; para
que esperes menos voy yo misma a poner la mesa.
C {The answers to these questions should contain a' verb in the
subjunctive mood.) i. i Qu^ quiere su hermano de Vd. ? 2. ^ Qud
manda Vd. ? 3. ^ De qu^ se alegra Vd. ? 4. i Qu^ ha dicho el ca-
pitdn al camarero } 5. ^ Qu^ suplica el seiior ? 6. ^ Hasta cudndo
van a quedar sus padres en Cuba .? 7. ^ Por qu^ compra Vd. esos
libros ? 8. i Cuinto tiempo aguardara su hermano ? 9. i De qu^
tienen Vds. miedo ? 10. ^* Qud prohiben ?
D, I . He wishes to write the letters himself : he does not wish
me to write them. 2. Tell the boy to come up stairs. 3. We will
go when you wish. 4. I am glad that^ he is going to Mexico.
5. He has asked me to write you. 6. We hope you will receive
them in good condition. 7. Let Don Luis go away. 8. I do not
wish my things to resemble yours. 9. I am sorry I shall be absent,
and I am sorry that you will not be there either. 10. We wish
you to tell your friends to come. 1 1. They are sorry that you have
no money. 12. When do you want me to return these books?
13. Where does the gentleman wish me to take him? 14. I am
afraid that^ the train will leave without us. 15. Wait here till I
return. 16. I wish to speak to them as soon as they arrive.
17. Write them to pay something on account. 18. Tell him to
take off his hat 19. I am glad that^ you have called me. 20. I
beg you to be brief. 21. I shall not permit you to be absent so
long.* 22. We fear he will tell it to her. 23. Have the kindness
to inform us as soon as you know. 24. I hope this will not pre'
vent your seeing me.
^ Use de before qoe. See section 231, 0. ^ tanto tiempo.
96 SPANISH GRAMMAR
LESSON XXI
110. The Imperfect Subjunctive has two sets of endings. The
stem may be found from the third person singular of the preterit in-
dicative : comprd, stem compr-; yendi6, stem vend-; tuvo, stem tuv-.
First Form
-ar VERBS -er and -ir verbs
Sing. I. comprasa Sing. I. vendiese
2. comprases 2. vendieses
3. comprasa 3. vendiese
Plur. I. comprisemoa Plur. i. vendi6wm08
2. compraseia 2. vendieseia
3. compraaan 3. vendieaen
Second Form
-ar verbs -er and -ir verbs
•
Sing. I. comprara Sing. i. vendiera
2. compraraa 2. vendieraa
3. comprara 3. vendiera
Plur. I. compriramoa Plur. i. vendidramoa
2. compraraia 2. vendieraia
3. compraran 3. vendieran
111. Sequence of Tenses. Whenever a dependent clause occurs
after a principal verb in a past tense the dependent verb must be
put in the imperfect subjunctive. The present perfect and the con-
ditional may, however, if the meaning allows it, be followed by a
present tense. The following table gives the usual sequence :
Main Clause Dependent Clause
Present Indicative
Future Indicative
Conditional
Perfect Indicative
Imperfect Indicative
Preterit Indicative
Present Subjunctive
Imperfect Subjunctive
LESSON XXI
97
Mando que Juan lo haga.
Handar^ que Juan lo haga.
Handarla que Juan lo haga, pero
no sabe haoerlo.
Handarla que Juan lo hiciera si
fuera posible.
He mandado que Juan lo haga
He mandado que Juan lo hiciese
(or hiciera) ayer.
Mandaba que Juan lo hiciese (or
hiciera).
Mand^ que Juan lo hiciese (or
hiciera).
/ order John to do it,
I shall order John to do it,
I should order John to do it, but
he does not know how,
I should order John to do it if it
were possible,
I have ordered John to do it to-
morrow,
I ordered John to do it yesterday,
I was ordering John to do it,
I ordered John to do it.
112. Conditional Clauses, contrary to fact, have the verb in the
imperfect subjunctive ; the conditional is used in the conclusion.
If I had paper, I should write the
letter.
If I were in his place I should
Si tuyiese (or tuyiera) papel, es-
cribiria la carta.
Si fuera (or fuese) yo en su lugar,
no iria.
Amarla mucho a su hijo si le
tuyiese.
not go.
He would love his son very much
if he had one.
a. The imperfect subjunctive of the -ra form is frequently used instead
of the conditional, but usually implies something unattainable or unreal.
De no obligarlo la necesidad, se
hubiera ido sin comprar.
Diera 70 por callarlo los dias que
me quedan de yida.
Hubiera querido ser un salyaje.
If he had not been compelled by
necessity, he would have gone
away without buying.
To avoid speaking of it I would
give the days that are left to
me to live.
He would have liked to be a
savage.
b, Quisiera used independently means would like with present
signification.
Quisiera una habitacidn amueblada. / should like a furnished room,
Quisiera que me preste Vd. un / wish you would lend me a
peso. dollar.
98 SPANISH GRAMMAR
c. Ordinary conditions after si have the present or imperfect indica-
tive. Si followed by the conditional has the meaning of whether,
Le pregimt^ si partirfa maSana. / asked him whether he would
leave to-morrow,
d. The imperfect subjunctive contrary to fact often appears in clauses
introduced by como si, cnal si, lo mismo que si, etc.
Me recuerdo como si fuese ayer. / remember as if it were yester-
day,
£1 cielo se inoendid con un relAm- The sky was lighted by a brighter
pago mis yiyo, ciial si la chispa flash, as if the electric spark
el^ctrica hubiese estallado en- had burst over our heads,
cima de nnestras cabezas.
Lo mismo que si fu^semos amigos fust as if we had been life-long
de toda la yida. friends.
EXERCISE 21
A, In the following sentences change the verb of the principal
clause to the imperfect or preterit tense ^ and the verb of the dependent
clause to the imperfect subjunctive: i. Quiere Juan que yo le dd un
peso, fohn wishes me to give him a dollar, 2, Siento que Vd. est^
male, lam sorry you are ill, 3. Le escribo para que sepa las no-
ticias, I am writing him so that he may know the news, 4. Suplico
que se sirva Vd. enviar una mdquina de escribir, I beg you please
to send a typewriter, 5. Nos dicen que mandemos muchos peri6di-
cos, They tell us to send a lot of newspapers, 6. Tengo miedo de
que no llegue 61 a tiempo, lam afraid he will not arrive on time,
B, I. Le rogud que estuviese dispuesto a las cinco. 2. Su tfa
regal6 a Juanito algunos dulces, dici^ndole que los Uevase a casa
para comdrselos en varias veces. 3. Le escribf que no vendiese la
casa antes de que yo la viera. 4. Hablaba a gritos como si estu-
viera siempre en ferrocarril. 5. Se alejaron sin que yo pudiese ofr
mds. 6. Gritd para que me oyeran. 7. El padre escribi6 a su hija,
pididndola que viniera en seguida. 8. La cant ante esperaba a que
se callara el piiblico para continuar ella. 9. No cref que viniera Vd.
tan pronto. 10. Una noche salieron del lugar sin que persona los
LESSON XXI 99
viese. 1 1. Si tuviera el dinero, comprarfa la casa. 1 2. Consult^ con
ella mi deseo de que me ayudasc a encontrar colocaci6n. 13. Su
padre hubiera dado su vida por 61. 14. Me dijo que tendrfa dinero
cuando cobrase la herencia. 15. | Cuantas personas te envidiarfan
la fortuna si la supieran 1 16. Le mand6 que le aguardase tres dfas,
y que si al cabo de ellos no hubiese vuelto, tuviese por cierto que
Dios habfa sido servido de que en aquella peligrosa aventura se
acabase su vida. 17. Un lugareno fud un dfa a casa de su vecino
a rogarle que le prestase su asno. El vecino, quien no estaba
dispuesto a prestdrselo, contest6 que sentfa rnucho que dste no
se lo hubiera pedido antes, pues lo habfa prestado a otro. Mien-
tras se estaba excusando de este modo, el asno comenz6 a re-
buznar. — j Oye ! dijo el aldeano. fise es el asno que Vd. afirma
haber prestado. Hay que confesar que Vd. es muy servicial. —
Me extrana mucho, repuso el vecino, que Vd. crea mas a mi asno
que a ml.
C. I. ^ Con qu6 motivo {u6 un lugareno a casa de su vecino?
2. I Qu6 vog6 el lugareno a su vecino ? 3. ^ Querfa el vecino pres-
tarle la bestia ? 4. i C6mo respondid ? 5. ^ Qu6 sentfa el vecino ?
6. I C6mo desminti6 el asno a su dueno ? 7. ^ Qud dijo entonces el
que querfa el asno ? 8. i Por qu6 se extranaba el vecino ? 9. i Cree
Vd. que sea posible tal historia ? 10. ^' Qu6 harfa Vd. en semejante
caso.^
I?. I. My father wished me to stay at home. 2. He told the
waiter to bring up the coffee. 3. He advised me to study book-
keeping. 4. The ladies permitted the gentleman to accompany them.
5. If I were alone, it would not matter. 6. I wrote you last month
without as yet ^ having received an ^ answer. 7. We were glad that
you came. 8. They used to go away before I arrived, and did not
come back till I had returned to school. 9. Don Gumersindo was
very kind and obliging provided that it did not cost him a cent
10. She set the table herself in order that Charles might eat at once.
^ hasta ahora. ^ omit
lOO SPANISH GRAMMAR
1 1. He spoke to me politely, asking me to sit down. 12. He acted
as if he understood. 13. The countess sent me a message that I
should go and see her. 14. My brother said that as soon as he had
money he would send me some.*
LESSON XXII
113. Letter-Writing.
I. The date, la fecha.
Ifueya York, xo de abril de xgzz
Madrid, 15 de junio de xgia
dated, fechada
the joth inst,. el 10 del J . . , *^v
\comente (corr.*»)
the 1 2th ult,, el 12 del p. p.^(pr6zimo pasado)
del p.* Y.* (pr6zimo yenidero)
the s^h of next month, el 5
del que yiene
del que entra
2. The address, la direcci6n.
Al
Sr. D.^ Guillermo Prieto,
Prinoesa, 77,
Madrid
1 Sr. D. stands for Seftor Don. The title seftor is used with a man's family
name (apellido) ; don with his baptismal name. Sefior is sometimes omitted,
Don Ariiiro Gonz&lez ; but if the Christian name is omitted, sefior alone should
be used, Seftor Gonzalez. The feminine forms are sefiora (Sra.), sefiorita
(Srta.), dofia (D.*). A married lady retains her maiden name but adds her hus-
band's surname. If Sefiorita Teresa S&nchez marries Don Arturo Gonz&lez, she
becomes Sefiora Teresa S&nchez de Gonz&lez. Children may retain their
mother's family name if they desire by adding it to their father's; as,
Felipe Gonz&lez y S&nchez. The y may be omitted ; as Manuel Garcia Rodri-
guez. Widows insert viuda. Sefiora Lucia Robledo, vda. de Fem&ndez. It is
sometimes puzzling for a foreigner to know a Spaniard's family name, as it
often happens that he may have two baptismal names and omit the mater-
nal surname. Thus, in J086 Toriblo Medina, the apellido is Medina.
LESSON XXI -:: V . ij: lOI
fo address, dirigir . J^. p^^bt)x jjif spaitaila *ofasi^'^2
^<7m il/. Gonzdlez, enTlo de M. /^^ envelope, el sobre
GonziUez general delivery, en lista
^^r^ ^, en casa de printed matter, impresos
registered, certificado please forward, a reexpedir
3. Complimentary opening.
Dear Fnend< i » ,
1^ Mny seSor mio 7 amigo :
My esteemed friend, Estimado amigo mio :
Dear Doctor, Estimado doctor :
To ladies,
r Muy estimada seSora :
Dear Madam< Muy distingnida seSorita:
t SeSora :
For business letters,
l^Mny se2or nnestro :
(from a firm)
Gentlemen, Mny seSores mios (or nnestros) :
To express respect to superiors.
Sir, Mny seSor mio y de toda mi consideracidn :
4. Complimentary close.
1 . Hoping to hear from you, £n espera de sna gratas noticias,
2. Awaiting your early reply, Esperando sn pronta contestacidn,
3. With nothing else to-day. Sin mis por hoy,
I remain'^ ,, , , anedo^ , „, ^* -, -, «
J. \ Yours very truly ^ Ue Vd. at.*» y S.S.*
lam J ^ -^ soy J
More formal,
4. Salndo a Vd. cordialmente y quedo como siempre snyo af ."^ ' y at.^
amigo.
5. Tengo el honor de ofrecerle mis respetos y qnedo su mis at.^ y
S.S.Q.B.S.M.«
Note. Abbreviations are frequently used in Spanish. A period should
be placed after the abbreviation ; if part is written above the line, the
period is written after the letters that remain in the line ; as, af ."*•.
1 Note that Spanish uses the colon after the salutation.
^ at.^ y S.S. = atento y seguio servldor. ^ af ."^ = afectisimo.
^ Q.B.S.M. = que besa sus manos. (To a lady) Q.B.S.P. = que besa sus pies.
• •
I02
. -.'SPklSrlsb GRAMMAR
yto inform you that
1 . / have the pleasure ^
2. We have the honor \ of informing you that
3. / take the liberty J
4. The purpose of this letter is
5. / regret (/ am sorry)
1 . Tengo el gusto de
2. Tenemos el honor de
3. Me permito
4. Sinre la presente para
5. Siento
participarle
ayisarle
manifestarle
^que
6. Acknowledging receipt,
1. In answer to
2. Answering
3. To acknowledge the receipt of
4. We have before us
5. I have just received
6. / hasten to reply to
7. I received
1. £n contestacidn a
2. Contestando a
3. Acusar recibo de
4. Tenemos a la yista ^sn-^
5. Acabo de recibir
6. Me apresuro a contestar a
7. Recibi
your letter \ ^^,
y - yofthe
your favor) '^
carta
grata
atenta (at>)
estimada
apreciable (ap.^)
Uel
7. To request.
1 . Please {be kind enough to) (or kindly)
2. / shall be pleased if you
3. We shall be obliged if you
4. We beg you to
1. Siryase Vd. (with infinitive of dependent verb)
2. Estimar^ que Vd. (with subjunctive of dependent verb)
3. Agradeceremos que Vd. (with subjunctive of dependent verb)
4. Le rogamos *!
Le suplicamos i-qne Vd. (with subjunctive of dependent verb)
Le pedimos J
LESSON XXII
103
EXERCISE 22
NuEVA York, 7 de julio de 191 1
A, I.
Sr. D. Victoriano SuXrez,
Preciados, 48, Madrid.
Muy serior mfo :
Me satisface acusar a Vd. redbo del catalogo, que se sirvid en-
viarme. Le agradezco esta atenci6n y le pido me envfe las obras
anunciadas en 6\ y que menciono al pie de la presente, en pago
de las cuales adjunto Pesetas 55 en giro sobre el Banco Hispano-
Americano, que importan, incluso gastos de la remesa. Doy a Vd.
gracias por este servicio y me ofrezco su atento servidor q.b.s.m.
Arturo Acosta GAlvez
Sr. D. Arturo Acosta GAlvez,
Nueva York.
Madrid, 24 de julio de 191 1
Muy seiior mlo :
Tengo el gusto de acusar a usted recibo de su estimada del 14
del c.** de la cual separd un cheque a mi orden, por valor de Pe-
setas 55~, que le abono en cuenta. En cumplimiento de su atento
pedido le remito por correo de hoy los efectos que van detallados
al final, por los cuales cargo a usted en cuenta la suma de Pesetas
56°^ que importan.
De usted, como siempre, atento servidor,
Victoriano SuArez
EjEM-
PLARES
FACTURA
Rub^n Darfo = Obras escogidas
Precios
3
3
50
10
SO
I
Gonzalez Blanco = Hista de la Novela
12
12
00
alfrente
22
50
I04
SPANISH GRAMMAR
EjEM-
PLAKES
delfrente
Precios
22
50
San Martfn = Sepan cuantos
3
3
00
V. de Guevara = El Diablo Cojuelo
12
12
00
Clarfn = La Regenta 2 tomos
3
SO
7
GO
Picdn = Dulce y Sabrosa
4
4
00
Almanaque
I
50
I
50
Franqueo
6
05
Total
Ptas.
S^
05
3- Hotel Peninsular,
Sevilla, 14 de agosto de 19 10
Sr. D. Roberto Samper,
Calle Arenal, 45, Madrid.
Muy senor mlo y amigo :
Se van a vender en almoneda los muebles y efectos del difunto
D. Martfn de Timoneda el dfa 3 del p.° v.**. Como yo sd que po-
sefa una biblioteca compuesta de muy buenas obras y de las me-
jores ediciones, quisiera adquirir la mayor parte de ella y aiin toda
si fuera posible. Desgraciadamente no puedo concurrir a la venta
por tener mala una piema, que no me deja dar un paso, y por esta
causa me tomo la libertad de suplicarle me sustituya en esta opera-
ci6n confiado en su amistad. Vd. conoce este genero y ningiSn otro
podrfa serme tan iStil. Conque, tdmese Vd. la molestia de pasar
por alia, y compre todo lo que se venda a un precio c6modo. Le
remito dos mil duros para este objeto, suplicandole al mismo tiempo
disimule la franqueza de su af."*° y at.*° S. S.
Enrique Reyes
P.D. Por la primera edicidn del Quijote puede Vd. pujar hasta
quinientos duros.
LESSON XXII 105
B, Translate into ^anish :
1. My dear friend,
I intend to go to Havana on the steamer which leaves New York
on the nth inst. As I have never been in that city I do not know
where to find the hotels. Can you recommend a good hotel or
boarding-house at a moderate price ? When you reply, please tell
me how to reach the house.
Thanking you for this favor I am, as ever,
Your friend,
William Brown
2. Dear Sir :
I have before me your letter of the 29th ult., and hasten to reply.
The proprietor of the house where I am living has a vacant room
which he will reserve for you. I shall be on the wharf as soon as
I learn the arrival of the steamer. Wait for me. I shall have great
pleasure in accompanying you to your house.
As ever, yours,
Victor Garcia
3* Boston, Mass., September 12, 191 2
Messrs. B. Muro & Co.,
Florida, 34, Buenos Aires.
Gentlemen :
We take the liberty of calling your attention to a catalogue of
our goods which we are sending under separate cover ^ by this
same mail. We believe that these articles are suitable for your
market. The prices are moderate and the terms of payment very
liberal, six months from the date of shipment. We allow three per
cent discount for payment by draft remitted by return steamer.
Our factory has instructions to pack in special boxes all merchan-
dise intended for South American trade in order that it may arrive
^ Under separate cover = t>ajo pliego.
Io6 SPANISH GRAMMAR
in perfect condition. If you will favor us with a trial order we are
confident that you will be satisfied with the quality of the goods
and will desire further ^ shipments.
Awaiting your early reply, we are
Yours very truly,
Henry White & Sons
C Letter outlines, i. Write the answer of Mr. Roberto Samper
to the letter A^ 3.
2. Write to the Hotel de Roma, Sevilla, Spain, asking to have
a room reserved for yourself and party. Explain when you expect
to arrive and the number of persons. Request that mail be kept
for your arrival.
3. Send a request for a catalogue of the books published by
G. Prieto and Co. of Madrid. Inquire how they wish sent the pay-
ment for any works which you may order.
4. Write an invitation to some friends of yours to spend a week
with you in the country. Give an outline of what you intend to do
for amusement.
PART II
SYSTEMATIC ACCIDENCE AND SYNTAX
CHAPTER I
ORDER OF WORDS
114. Sentences. While the arrangement of words is much freer
in Spanish, and the meaning is not so dependent on a fixed order
as in English, there are a few notions which the learner should keep
in mind. The Spanish sentence aims at a certain balance by putting
the longer members of the sentence or clause last. Considering the
clause as composed of three members, subject, verb, and comple-
ments, the longest of the three may be placed at the end.
Juan yende muchos periddicos. John sells many newspapers,
£1 pequeflo Juan yende muchos Little John sells many news-
peri6dicoSy or Vende el pequeflo papers.
Juan muchos periddicos.
Vends muchos periddicos el chico The boy with the red cap sells
de la gorra roja. many newspapers.
a. In questions, the object, unless materially longer than the
subject, precedes.
^ Vende muchos periddicos el pe- Does little John sell many news-
que2o Juan ? papers f
115. Inyersion of Verb occurs,
I. Regularly in questions : ^Qu^ vende Juan? What does John
sein
107
I08 SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. Frequently for the sake of emphasis :
I Ha caldo una pabna 1 A palm tree has fallen / (said in
the stress of excitement at the
fact occurring during a storm.)
3. Generally in relative clauses :
Vino la mujer a quien hablan des- The woman whom the cries had
perta^o las voces. awakened came.
£1 cura entond la Salve, que re- The priest intoned the " Salve,^
piti6 la tripulacidn. which the crew repeated.
116. A Predicate Adjective is best placed immediately after the
verb.
I £s interesante el libro ? Is the book interesting?
I Aqui es bueno el chocolate ? Is the chocolate good here f
117. Adverbs, especially those of place and time, may be put for
emphasis at the beginning of the sentence.
Aqui se habla espaSol. Spanish is spoken here,
Bien s6 yo. / know very well.
MaSana viene mi padre. My father comes to-morrow.
a. But the usual place for adverbs is immediately after the verb.
Estudio siempre mi leccidn. / always study my lesson.
Despierte Vd. con cuidado a Rosa. Wake Rosa carefully.
118. The Adverb no always precedes the verb, but may be sep-
arated from it by a pronoun used as an object.
Yo no lo conozco. / do not know him.
a. Used with adverbs or elliptical expressions, no follows the
other words.
I Hoy no ! Not to-day.
I Todavia no I Not yet,
I Eso no 1 Not that.
119. A Subject Pronoun may be placed after the verb, but pre-
cedes other words.
Soy yo. // is I.
No quiere ella la manzana. She does not want the apple.
ORDER OF WORDS
109
120. Compound Fonns of Verbs should not be separated into their
component parts by the intrusion of other words.
I Ha yisto Vd. ? Have you seen ?
Bid dicho siempre. . / Aave always said,
a. Likewise an infinitive closely depending on another verb is
commonly not separated from the former except by pronouns.
VI correr al muchacho. / saw the boy run.
I Oye Vd. sonar la campanilla ? Do you hear the bell ringing?
Lo admir^ al verlo patinar. / admired him on seeing him
skate,
121 . Participles and Infinitives having subjects are usually placed
before their subjects, contrary to English usage.
Estando la seflora en el jardin, le The lady being in the garden^ I
liable. spoke to her.
Conseguidaladispensaeclesiisticay The dispensation of the church
se fij6 la boda para las ocho de {having been) obtained^ the w,ed-
la manana. ding was set for eight in the
morning.
Al cumplir la Princesa los quince When the Princess was fifteen
aSos era la admiracidn de la years old, she was the wonder
. corte. of the court.
122. The Preposition a, used to indicate the direct object, makes
possible a very free arrangement of words ; see section 134.
A Clara la llam6 a si DoSa Blanca. Doha Blanca called Clara to her.
Poco despu^s yisitaron a la enfer- Shortly afterward the two best
ma los dos m^icos mejores de doctors in the town visited the
la ciadad. sick woman,
EXERCISE 23
I. Has this boy relatives? 2. His wife and his daughter were
walking ahead. 3. Spring begins to-morrow. 4. Is winter cold in
this country ? 5. Is the show to-day ? 6. They had not walked two
hundred paces when there reached their ears a great noise of water.
7. ,The Hollanders have not forgotten the history of their war with
no SPANISH GRAMMAR
Spain. 8. When the lady said this,* she turned away. 9. Five dol-
lars are lacking. 10. These are the men whom my father did not
know. II. He was sitting in the shadow which the old tree made
on the ground. 12. I have often seen them. 13. Traveling by
night, his garments torn, his feet scratched, he finally reached home.
14. I lived on the salary which an insurance company paid me.
15. His work finished, he left the office immediately. 16. He saw
his father coming. 1 7 . Not now, my son. 1 8. A month had passed
since that day.
1 Translate in three ways : i, al with infinitive ; 2, the present participle ;
3, the past participle.
CHAPTER II
ARTICLES
123. The Definite Article has the following forms :
Masculine Feminine Neuter
Sing. el la (el) lo
Plur. los las wanting
a. The feminine form el is derived from the old feminine ela.
It is used only before nouns beginning with an accented a sound,
excepting names of letters :
el aye, the bird el agua frfa, the cold water
el hacha, the ax el Asia, Asia
Compare
la alta casa, the high house la a, the a
la America, America la hacienda, the estate
b. The masculine singular el (or feminine el) combines with de
or a to form del and al respectively. But the combination does not
occur when the article forms part of a title :
£1 autor de -E/ Trovador, The author of^^El Trovador. "
Mandd su poema a El Liberal, He sent his poem to " The Liberal.^'*
124. Uses of Definite Article. Primarily, the Spanish definite
article, in common with the English, denotes a particular individual
or a specific object ; but it also has the following uses not found
in English.
I. Before nouns denoting general or abstract ideas :
£1 pan es el sustento diario de los Bread is the daily food of men.
hombres.
La vida es breve. Life is short.
Los hombres aman la libertad. Men love liberty,
III
112 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. The absence of the article conveys a partitive idea, often
expressed in English by some or any^ or in the negative by no :
i Tiene Vd. pan ? * Have you any bread?
No tenemos libertad. We have no liberty,
2. With geographical names,
a. Especially if taken in a general sense and not after a prepo-
sition :
Ha corrido la Francia. He has traveled over France,
But, EstA en Francia. He is in France,
b. Always with some names :
la America del Norte, North la CoruSay Corunna
America el Panami, Panama
l08 Estados Unidos, the United el Jap^n, Japan
States la Habana, Havana
el Canadi, Canada el Mediterr^eo, the Mediterra-
el Perdy Peru nean
c. Never with others :
Venezuela Chile M^jico, Mexico
3. With proper nouns modified by an adjective, and frequently
with Christian names of women :
el pobre Pablo, poor Paul la Paquita, Fannie
a. Hence before titles and epithets when not addressing the per-
son:
El general Guzmin. General Guzmdn,
La seSora Ldpez. Mrs. Ldpez,
Juana la loca. Jane the Crazy,
But, Buenos dias, seSor P^ez. Good mornings Mr. Pirez,
b. Exceptions to a are the titles don, doSa, sor, fray.
4. With adjectives used as the name of a language, except after
hablar and en :
Aprendo el espaSol. / am learning Spanish.
I Habla Vd. espaSol ? Do you speak Spanish f
Escribo en franc6i. / write in French.
DEFINITE ARTICLE 113
a. The adjective castellano, CasHlian, always takes the article.
Hablamos el castellano. We speak Castilian,
5. With adjectives of nationality, profession, sex, etc., in appo-
sition with a pronoun expressed or understood :
Nosotros los ingleses. We English,
Ustedes las mujeres. You women.
Los profesores comprendemos. We teachers understand,
6. In certain expressions of time, —
a. Those modified by an adjective or a phrase :
el aSo pasado, last year el martes que yiene, next Tuesday
b. Before names of the days of the week except in dates (English
usually has the preposition on in similar cases), and before names
of the seasons :
La primavera. v Spring,
Viene los lunes. He comes on Mondays,
Mi^rcoles, el dos del corriente. Wednesday, the second instant.
7. To express rate where English has the indefinite article, though
Spanish sometimes omits the article :
Un peso la vara, or un peso vara. A dollar a yard.
Treinta centavos la docena. Thirty cents a dozen.
8. In speaking of the person or clothing, in place of the possessive
adjective :
Cdrteme Vd. el pelo. Cut my hair.
Tiene puestos los zapatos. He has his shoes on.
9. To modify an infinitive or a clause :
JJl mentir es un vicio. Lying is a vice,
tf e vuelve loco el que no me lleve // makes me crazy, the {fact) that
nunca la contraria. you never contradict me.
10. In many adverbial phrases not possible to classify; as,
en la escuela, at school en la iglesia, at church
en el colegio, in high school a la ciudad, to town
114 SPANISH GRAMMAR
125. The Neuter Article is used with adjectives, making an
expression equivalent to an abstract noun. It occurs frequentiy
with past participles and in many adverbial expressions.
No son lo mismo. They are not the same,
Ama lo bueno. He loves whatever is good,
Est^ por lo positiyo. They are for the practical.
Quedamos en lo dicho. We stuck by what had been said,
Grit^ y me contestaron a lo lejos. / shouted and they answered me
far off,
a, A peculiar idiomatic use of the neuter article occurs when the
modified adjective refers to a word in a following clause, sometimes
equivalent to an indirect English exclamatory phrase introduced by
how. The Spanish adjective agrees with the noun.
I Sabe Vd. lo buena que es mi her- Do you know how good my sister
mana ? is ?
A pesar de lo muy agradecidos In spite of how very grateful we
que estamos. are.
b. Lo in the foregoing idiom may be modified by todo : Queria decirle
todo lo hermosa que me parecia, / wanted to tell her how very handsome
she seem^ed to m,e,
126. Omission of Definite Article occurs,
1. Before a noun in apposition with another: el se&or F., direc-
tor del colegio, Mr. F., the principal of the school,
2. Before numbers that are part of the title of sovereigns :
Alfonso Trece es el nieto de Isabel Alfonso the Thirteenth is the
Segunda. grandson of Isabella the Second,
3. Sometimes the omission or use of the definite article gives a
different meaning to the phrase :
hacer la cama, to make the bed dar vuelta a, to turn
hacer cama, to be sick abed dar una vuelta, to take a walk
dar la vuelta, to go around
4. In many adverbial expressions :
en Filipinas, in the Philippines en tercera persona, in the third
por primera Y%Zyfor the first time person
INDEFINITE ARTICLE 115
127. The Indefinite Article, identical with the numeral one^ has
the following forms : ^^ t.
^ Masculine Feminine
Sing. uno, un una
a. The masculine singular is shortened to un before a noun or
an attributive adjective. Used alone or as a pronoun, the full form
appears.
I Tiene Vd. un buen perro ? Have you a good dog f
SI, tango uno. Yes, I have one,
Tengo uno muy bueno. / have a very good one,
b. The feminine, in imitation of the feminine definite article el,
usually is un before nouns beginning with an accented a sound.
un aye hermosa, a beautiful bird un dguila l>equeSa, a small eagle
128. Use and Omission of Indefinite Article. The indefinite arti-
cle is used about as in English, but is omitted in the following cases :
1. Before an unmodified noun in the predicate denoting business,
profession, party, religion, etc. :
£8 sastre. He is a tailor.
Se ha hecho abogado. He has become a lawyer,
£8 liberal. He is a liberal.
Soy americano. / am an American.
a. The indefinite article may be used to attribute a given qual-
ity to one's character. Es cobarde. He is a coward (under these cir-
cumstances). Es un cobarde, He is a regular coward (by nature).
2. Before nouns in apposition :
Tampico, puerto del golfo de Tampico^aharboronthe Gulf of
M^jico. Mexico,
3. Before nouns preceded by de in adverbial expressions corre-
sponding to English as a :
Va de consul a M^jico. He goes to Mexico as a consul,
Yo soy un hombre atroz, a quien / am. a disagreeable man, whom,
nadie ha podido aguantar ni de nobody has been able to endure
muchachOy ni de joven, ni de as a boy, as a young man, nor
Tiejo. as an old man.
Il6 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. Similarly de denotes apposition between an adjective and a noun
or between two nouns.
I £1 pobre de Pepe I Poor Joe /
£1 marica de Don C^dido. Don Cdndido the old woman,
I Qu^ Ustima de muchacha I What a pity about the girl!
4. In many verbal idioms which must be learned by observation :
Tiene buen corazdn. He has a kind heart,
Poner precio. To set a price.
5. Before certain adjectives ; mil, one thousand^ ciento, one hun-
dred^ and other numbers and fractions denoting quantity, as media
docena, half a dozen,
tal, such a i qu^ tal muchacho ? what sort of
otro, other^ another boy ?
cierto, a certain
6. In exclamations after | qu^ I
I Qu6 ruido ! What a noise I
I Qu^ chico atroz ! What an awful boy /
7. In negative expressions or those implying a negative :
No dice palabra. He does not say a word.
Me dej6 sin respuesta. He left me without a reply,
I Hay hombre tan atreyido ? Is there a man so bold?
EXERCISE 24
I. The largest continent is Asia. 2. Havana, the capital of Cuba,
is a beautiful city. 3. Men seek gold in all parts of the world.
4. There is gold in South America and in Mexico. 5. They do
not speak pure Castilian in Chile and Peru. 6. Mr. Ibarra, a Cuban,
teaches Spanish and French. 7. He is a Mexican and a soldier.
8. We Americans love independence. 9. My hands and face are
cold. 10. To read and write is indispensable. 11. Tailors make
suits for men. 12. Captain L6pez arrived last Wednesday from
Panama. 13. Whatever is good is expensive^ but people want
the good cheap. 14. We know the worst: what we said has
ARTICLES 1 1 7
happened. 15. Another day comes to-morrow. I have a thousand
things to do.^ 16. How much did you pay for such a thing? A
dollar a pound. 17. Spanish is easier than French. 18. Good morn-
ing, Miss Mary. Who came yesterday ? General P^rez and Mrs.
Navarro. 19. Eating^ too much is bad for one's health. 20. He re-
ceives one thousand dollars a year, not a hundred dollars a month.
2 1 . Philip the Second was the son of Charles the First, king of Spain,
who was Charles the Fifth, the German emperor. 22. Do you know
how pretty she is ? 23. We have geography on Fridays. 24. You
Spaniards read English easily. 25. This steamer leaves Corunna
for South America next week. 26. Little Paco says that the water
is cold. 27. Is iron more useful than silver? 28. The retinue con-
sisted of Lieutenant Carvalho, the leader of the Brazilian colony,
Messrs. Rodriguez and Guzman, and the writer. 29. Now we girls
are for the practical. 30. What an idea! 31. He is John G6mez,
a son of General G6mez. 32. There is not a carriage in the street.
33. He dressed himself as a woman. 34. He is going to Spain with-
out knowing a word of Castilian. 35. What a man I As a lawyer
he had no success. Now he is a politician. 36. He was a rich man
and is now poor ; he was a father and is alone on the earth ; he was
a husband and is a widower. 37. I subscribed to The LiberaL
38. The first thing that he did was to look at the books. 39. You
do not know how cold it is."
1 que hacer. ^ Use infinitive. • See section 58, a.
CHAPTER III
NOUNS
129. Gender. Every Spanish noun is either masculine or feminine.
1. Masculine are nouns —
a. Denoting male beings :
el rey, the king el artista, the artist
el cura, the priest el amigo, the friend
b. Ending in o :
el yientOy the wind el ojo, the eye
Except la mano, the handy and a few others rarely used.
c. Names o'f most oceans, rivers, mountains ; and countries, not
ending in unaccented a :
el AtUntico, the Atlantic los Andes, the Andes
el AmazonaSy the Amazon el Plata, the river La Plata ^ or
el Sena, the Seine River Plate
el Ecuador, Ecuador el Panamd, Panama
But la EspaSa, Spain, la Italia, Italy
«
d. Indeclinable words, infinitives, etc., used as nouns :
el hablar, speaking el si, the yes
2. Feminine are nouns —
a. Denoting female beings :
la reina, the queen la actriz, the actress
la joven, the young lady la tigre, the tigress
b. Those ending in a : .
la pluma, the pen la naranja, the orange
But exceptions are very numerous. Most important are el dia,
the day ; el mapa, the map ; nouns of Greek origin usually ending
in ma, as el idioma, the language ; el sistema, the system ; el
telegrama, the telegram.
ii8
PLURAL OF NOUNS 1 1 9
Many nouns ending in a may be recognized as masculine by their
signification :
el centinela, the sentinel el papa, the pope
c. Names of the letters of the alphabet :
la by the b una ch, ckch
d. Nouns with the terminations \dad, tad, tu^ ie, i6n, umbre,
denoting abstract or general ideas :
la libertad, liberty la necesidad, necessity
la virtud, virtue la serie, the series
la nacidn, the nation la costu'mbre, the habit
130. Number. The plural of Spanish nouns is formed by add-
ing 8 to words ending in an unaccented vowel, es to words ending
in a consonant or an accented vowel, including the monosyllabic
names of the letters of the alphabet.
el hombre, the man los hombres, the men
la mujer, the woman las mujeres, the women
el rubiy the ruby los rabies, the rubies
la 0, the o las oes, the o^s
a. Note that the proper spelling to retain the sound of the sin-
gular must be obtaiined by changing final z to c, and final c to qu,
before es.
la luz, the light las luces, the lights
el frac, the dress-coat los fraques, the dress-coats
Also, el 6nix, the onyx los 6nices, the onyxes
b. The following words shift their accent in the plural :
el cardcter, the character los caracteres, the characters
el regimen, the regime los regimenes, the regimes
I. Exceptions to the above rules are
a. Words ending in y :
el rey, the king los reyes, the kings
el buey, the ox los bueyes, the oxen
b. Words ending in € :
el caf6, the coffee los caf6s, the coffees
el pie, the foot los pies, the feet
I20 SPANISH GRAMMAR
€. Exceptions to other accented vowel terminations are
el papA, papa los papAs, papas
el wfAky the sofa los soiis, the sofas
la mamiy mamma las mamis, nuimmas
2. The following make no change in the plural.
a. Words ending in unaccented es or is :
el lunes, Monday los lunes, Mondays
la crisis, the crisis las crisis, the crises
b. Family names, especially those terminating in es or ez, and
foreign names not having terminations similar to Spanish :
Pdrez, los Pdrez
Franklin, los Franklin
c. Adopted Latin words :
el deficit, the deficit los deficit, the deficits
el ultimatum, the ultimatum los ultimatum, the ultimatums
3. Irregular:
el lord, the lord los lores, the lords
131. Compound Nouns. In English a noun may perform the
function of an adjective and modify another noun. The combina-
tion is written sometimes as one word, as hedgehog \ sometimes
with a hyphen, as bear^sfoot\ often as two words, as bond paper.
While a few such combinations exist in Spanish, as ferrocarril,
railroad^ the great majority of English compound nouns must be
turned into Spanish by the use of prepositions in various ways, as,
1 . The modifying noun follows the other and is connected there-
with by de : thus,
el reloj de oro, the gold watch
t la pluma de acero, the steel pen
2. If the modifying noun denotes use or purpose, para is pre-
ferred as the connecting preposition ; as,
la taza para caf ^, the coffee cup
la miquina para escribir, the typewriter
See further under compound adjectives, section 138.
SUFFIXES 121
132. Augmentatives, Diminutives, and other suffixes. Spanish
compensates in part for its lack of compound nouns by possessing
a large number of suffixes, some of which are classed as augmen-
tatives and diminutives. Though these indicate size, they also de-
note other ideas such as contempt, affection, irony, disagreeableness,
mockery, which in English are often expressed by terms from dif-
ferent stems ; as, casa, house ; casucha, shanty. Sometimes a word
originally a diminutive acquires a specialized meaning ; as, cuchara,
spoon \ cucharita, teaspoon. Many of the suffixes may also be
applied to adjectives. v
(A complete discussion of the suffixes will not be given, because the
learner should not attempt to apply them himself and should rely on the
dictionary for any forms other than the simplest)
1. Augmentatives are
a, -6n, -ona :
silla — silliSn, big chair ^ easy chair nariz — narigdn, big nose
Gaspar — Gaspardn, big Caspar mujer — mujerona, big strapping
woman
b, -azo, -aza : picaro — picarazo, great rogue.
c, -ote, -Ota ; also depreciative :
palabra — palabrota, offensive and vulgar word
feo — feote, extremely ugly
d, -ajo(a), -acho(a), -uco(a), -ucho(a) ; express poor quality or
contempt :
fraile — frailucho, contemptible espanto — espantajo, scarecrow
friar vino — vinacho, poor wine, dregs
cuarto — cuartucho, wretched room vivo — vivaracho, frolicsome
2. Diminutives are
a, -ito(a), -cito(a), -ecito(a), dialectical -ico(a) etc.,' -illo(a),
-€illo(a), -ecillo(a) ; express also affection, niceness, pleasing qual-
ities, pity.
llor — florecita, little flower cigarro — cigarrillo, cigarette
madre — madrecita, little mother, seSora — seSorita, miss
dear mother mujer — mujercita, frail little wo-
papA — papaito, papa dear man
122 SPANISH GRAMMAR
b, -uelo(a), -zuelo(a), -ezuelo(a) ; express also mockery and
ridicule.
Venezia, Venice — Venezuela rey — reyezuelo, petty king
pequeSo — pequeHuelo, dear little mujer — mujerzuela, sorry little
fellow woman
c, -ete(a), -cete(a), -ecete(a); frequently also depreciative.
caballero — caballerete, dude^ dandy
historia — historieta, short story
d, -ejo(a); implies contempt: caballo — caballejo, nag,
' e. The augmentatives ^n and -ote sometimes form diminutives :
rata, rat — ratiSn, mouse isla, island — islote, islet
3. Various combinations of these suffixes are common :
rlo — riacho — riachuelo
hombre — hombr6n — hombronazo
chico — chiquito — chiquitito, chiquitillo
4. A few Spanish suffixes, not augmentatives nor diminutives,
should be known :
a, -ada (capacity), Eng. -ful\ cuchara, spoon — cucharada, spoon-
ful.
b, -ada, -azo, a blow with or a wound from.
puSal, dagger — puSalada, dagger thrust, stab wound
bala, bullet — balazo, bullet wound, shot
c, -al, -ar, -eda, a collection, grove, or orchard.
arena, sand — arenal, sandy spot
caf 6, coffee — caf etal, coffee plantation
manzano, apple tree — manzanar, apple orchard
SHaxnOy poplar — alameda, avenue of poplars
d, -dor, -dora, the person or thing that performs the act indicated
by the verbal stem ; often used adjectively.
hablar, to talk — hablador, talkative
matar, to kill — matador, killer
trillar, to thresh — (mdquina) trilladora, threshing-machine
OBJECTIVE CASE 1 23
e, -ero(a), the person who makes, manages, or sells things.
zapato, shoe — zapatero, shoemaker or shoe-^lealer
molino, mill — molinero, miller — molineray miller's wife
f, -ia added to -ero : -eria, place of business.
zapateria, shoe shop or collection 0/ shoes
librero, book-dealer — libreria, book store
5. The past participle feminine makes nouns denoting the com-
pleted action of the verbs.
llegar, to arrive — Uegada, arrival
salir, to depart — salida, departure .
\ ^ ^ ^ >-un billete de ida y yiielta, a return ticket
volver, to return J .
133. Idiomatic Plural. The masculine plural of nouns and pro-
nouns includes the corresponding feminine :
I08 padres, the parents los hermanos, brothers and sisters
los hijos, the children los parientes, the relatives
los seSores Gonz&lez, Mr, and los reyes cat61icos, the Catholic
Mrs, Gonzdlez Monarchs (i.e. Ferdinand and
Isabella)
a. The titles of offices, being susceptible of misunderstanding, are an
exception :
el alcalde y la alcaldesa, the mayor and the mayoress
el presidente y su seSora, the president and his wife
134. Objective Case. The preposition a serves to indicate the
objective (or accusative) case of nouns when the direct object is —
1. A specific person, intelligent animal, or personified thing:
Vea Vd. a Cecilia. Look at Cecilia,
No encontr6 a mi amigo. / did not find my friend.
Don Quijote cabalgaba a Rocinante. Don Quixote rode Rocinante,
Las riquezas no siempre tienen por Riches do not always have joy
compaSera a la alegria. for a companion.
2, A geographical name without definite article :
He yisto a Seyilla. / have seen Seville,
But, Pizarro conqnistd el Perd. Pizarro conquered Peru,
124 SPANISH GRAMMAR
3. Out of its normal position, or liable not to be recognized :
Al yate alcanzd el vapor. The steamer overtook the yacht.
Ningnna de las cosas que a la flor None of the things which make
hacen bonita. the flower pretty.
El nombre rige al yerbo. The noun governs the verb.
4. A pronoun, except que and the unaccented object pronouns :
£1 seSor a quien llam^. The gentleman whom I called.
El hombre que yl. The man whom I saw.
No conozco a nadie. / know nobody.
5. Though the preposition a be required by these rules, it is
often not used before a word beginning with an a sound, or when
there is also an indirect object in the sentence, or a noun governed
by the preposition a :
Mira aquel hombre. Look at that man.
Di<5 el esclayo a su hijo. He gave the slave to his son.
Maudd el muchacho a casa. He sent the boy home.
Note. In general, a should be retained before nouns that require it,
which is often possible by substituting the passive construction for the
active ; as, Se le did el esclayo a su hijo, The slave was given to his son.
6. Since a proper noun in the objective case always requires the
a, two proper nouns governed by a should be avoided by using
another expression : thus, instead of Prefiri6 a Pedro a Juan, say
Prefiri6 el joven Pedro a Juan.
7. With certain verbs, a appears before their personal objects
when the verb has a special meaning :
querer, to wish; querer a, to love
tener, to have^ usually without a before a personal object, requires it in
the idiom tener a uno en coalquier parte
perder, to lose; perder a, to ruin, though sometimes also to lose by death
Quiero un criado. / wish a servant.
Isabel te quiere como a un hermano. Isabel loves you as a brother.
Tengo un buen tlo. / have a good uncle.
Tengo a mi tlo en Chile. My uncle is in Chile.
Perdid (a) su hermano en la guerra. He lost his brother in the war.
Con su mania del juego, pierde a By his passion for gambling he is
su familia. ruining his family.
NOUNS 125
EXERCISE 25
A, Determine the gender by the rules ^ and write the proper article
with : ciudad, sistema, muchedumbre, circulacidn, independencia,
esperanza, carlista, poema, Venus, monarca, calidad, unidn.
B, Write plurals with articles: el agua, la tesis, el lunes, el ingles,
el senor Martfnez, el pie, el rubf, el juez, el dguila, la serie, el rey.
C, Determine the meaning of the whole word by examining the stem
and the suffix : el hermanito, el animalejo, el hombrecillo, la mane-
cita, Anita, el doctorzuelo, el papelucho, el bobarrdn, el chiquillo,
Carlitos, el hombrdn, los zapatones, la zapatilla, una plumada de
tinta, una cuchillada, la venida, el dador, la entrada, el naranjal, el
palmar, el hachazo, un silletazo, una arboleda, el ranchero, el relo-
jero, una relojerfa, una guanterfa.
Z>. Translate : i . He has three grandparents, his father's par-
ents and his mother's mother. 2. My brother has three children,
two boys and a girl. 3. There is a party to-night at Mr. and Mrs.
Gonzalez's. 4. We saw a handsome eagle in the park. 5. Put
(an)^ accent on the i's of the endings of the imperfect indicative.
6. Columbus discovered America, but Cortes conquered Mexico.
7. Where did you find John ? 8. I saw nobody there whom I knew.
9. Whom did you see in the theater ? 10. The night follows the day.
II. The silver spoon is on the kitchen table. 12. They have a new
sewing machine. 1 3. The Romans used to write on wax tablets with
iron pencils. 14. He called the dog friend. 15. Lucas had taught
the dog to dance. 16. The water carried me away like a feather.
17. I do not believe unde Lucas 2} man to^ consent to* such fool-
ishness. 18. They gave the sick woman medicine in small doses.
19. The letter z is not written * before the vowels e and i. 20. In the
Roman system of numeration the capital C equals one hundred, and
the capital M one thousand. 21. Here you have Dona Dolores.
1 Omit. * de. 'en. * Use reflexive verb.
CHAPTER IV
ADJECTIVES
135. Gender. If the masculine singular of an adjective ends in
0, the feminine is formed by changing o to a. Adjectives ending
otherwise remain the same in both genders.
on caballo negro, a black horse una yegna negra, a black mare
el iLrbol yerde, the green tree la hoja yerde, the green leaf
un hombre feliz, a happy man una mujer infeliz, an unhappy
el belga, the Belgian woman
el cielo azul, the blue sky la estrella azul, the blue star
el partido socialista, the socialist la frontera marroqul, the Moroccan
party frontier
Exceptions are
1. Adjectives of nationality, which add a to a final consonant :
ingl68y inglesa, English andaluz, andaluza, Andalusian
alemAn, alemana, German proyenzal, proyenzala, Provenqal
2. Adjectives with the terminations im, 6n, or (except compara-
tives), ete, ote, In :
regordete, regordeta, plump hablador, habladora, talkative^
feote, feota, ugly
holgazin, holgazana, lazy But una hermana mayor, an older
chiquitln, chiquitina, tiny sister
burldn, burlona, roguish la parte superior, the upper part
3. A few adjectives of one termination which add a when used
as feminine nouns, especially those ending in al.
la colegiala, the schoolgirl la superiora, the mother superior
136. Number. The plurals of adjectives follow the rules for the
plurals of nouns ; see section 130.
126
COMPOUND ADJECTIVES 127
137. Apocopatiofi. See section 46.
1. Giande in the fiiU form is used before nouns b^;inning with a
vowel sound.
nna gxande abundancia de flores, a great abundance of flowers
nn sranda hombre, a great man
a. Sometimes also for emphasis ; as, Ss cosa cierta que nunca grande
oosa 86 hubo sin trabajo, // is certain that no great thing ever came to
fass without work,
2. Santo becomes san in names of saints, except before those
beginning with To or Do ; as, San Pedro, Saint Peter -^ San Pablo,
Saint Paul,, Santo Toribio ; Santo Domingo ; Santo Tomis.
a. The name of the island, however, is San Tomas, with shift of
accent due to derivation from English.
b. The adjective santo, and its feminine form in names, have the full
form ; as, el santo dia, the blessed day ; Santa Maria.
3. Ciento becomes cien before nouns : den mujeres, one hundred
women. But the full form occurs in counting above a hundred ; as,
ciento dos pesos, one hundred and two dollars,
138. Compound Adjectives, like compoxmd nouns, are not very
numerous in Spanish. English compound adjectives must usually
be translated into Spanish by prepositional phrases.
una niSa de ojos aznles, a blue-eyed girl
Ids ricos duros de coraz6n, the hard-hearted rich
1. When the expression contains two nouns and an adjective,
the adjective may ag^ee with either noun :
ui sombrero de ancbas alas
un sombrero ancho de alas
2. The repetition of de may be avoided by using other preposi-
tions according to sense :
nn bastdn con puSo de oro, a gold- compaSfa de segnros contra incen-
hectded cane ^ios^flre insurance company
maqninaria para trabajar la ma- clavos para herraduras de cabeza
dera, wood-working machinery pequeSa, small-headed horse-
shoe nails
\a broad-brimmed hat
128 SPANISH GRAMMAR
3. The English suffix -less is translated by the preposition sin :
la telegrafia sin hilos, wireless sierra sin fin, endless saw or band-
telegraphy saw
4. With proper names and the words brand 21A color ^ the prepo-
sition may be omitted :
ruedas Pelton, Pelton wheels goantes color yerde aoeitnna, olive-
fdsforos marca Victoria, Victoria green gloves
brand matches el musgo color perla, the pearl-
colored moss
139. Position of Adjectives, i. The will of the writer largely
determines whether an adjective shall stand before or after the
noun. However, the emphatic position is after the noun ; hence,
important adjectives that distinguish individuals from others of the
same class follow the noun, while those which are characteristic or
may apply to all objects of a class precede the noun.
buenos amig<0Sf good friends claveles blancos, white pinks
amigos intimos, intimate friends la blanca nieve, the white snow
las bellas fiores, the beautiful una casa costosa, an expensive
flowers house
2. When two adjectives come together either before or after the
noun, it is customary to write y, and, between them ; unless one
of the adjectives is so closely connected with the meaning as to
make practically a compound noun.
ojos grandes 7 animados, large el Banco Nacional Americano, the
animated eyes American National Bank
dos largos 7 tristes meses, two aguas minerales extranjeras, for-
long sad months eign mineral waters
3. Groups of modifiers should be arranged so as to restrict the
word intended, and with a care for the sound.
Aceiteras de acero sin junta. Seamless steel oil-cans,
Arboles corpulentos de rugosos tron- Huge trees with rough formidable
cos formidables abrian en yerti- trunks opened on dizzy heights
ginosas alturas los mil herciUeos the thousand Herculean arms
brazos de sus ramajes frondosos. of their leafy branches.
ADJECTIVES
129
4. The following adjectives are always placed before the noun.
(See also section 142, 6.)
ambosy both
cada, each
cuanto, how much
demAs, other
macho, much^ plural many
The cardinal numerals
otro, other
poco, Ittt/ey plural ^tt'
^qu^? what?
^cail? which?
tantOy so much
todo, every ^ all
5. Some adjectives have a difference in meaning according as
tiiey stand before or after the noun. These differences are usually
a distinction between the figurative and the literal meaning, but the
adjectives in their literal sense may sometimes be found in good
writers placed before the noun.
mi cara madre, my dear mother
derto hombre, a certain man
un gran seSor, a great lord
mal caf ^, bad coffee
el mismo dla, the same day
un nuevo libro, a new (i.e. differ-
ent) book
I pobre muchacho 1 poor boy /
yarios papeles, several papers
\m libro caro, an expensive book
una noticia cierta, a true piece of
news
una casa grande, a large house
una gran sala baja, a large lower
room
un hombre malo, a wicked man
el rey mismo, the king himself
un libro nuevo, a new book (newly
printed)
un muchacho pobre, a poor boy
papeles yarios, miscellaneous pc^
pers
a. Many expressions require a fixed position of the adjective : buen
dinero (ironical), little money ; una buena pieza, a nice trick ; el padre
santo, the Pope\ la Santa Biblia, the Holy Bible, (See the large
dictionaries.)
b, A distinction exists between el mismo and un mismo. The latter
implies no comparison, one and the same, while the former supposes
comparison.
Todo ello estd escrito de una mis- // is all written in the same hand
ma letra.
Esta gorra no es la misma. This cap is not the same one.
I30 SPANISH GRAMMAR
EXERCISE 26
A. Translate: i. Tanks of California redwood. 2. Elngraved
wedding cards. 3. Solid steel cart-wheels. 4. Portable Victor re-
frigerating machines. 5. Cotton-seed-oil presses. 6. Eureka brand
table cutlery. 7. A gasoline illuminating system. 8. Seamless stock-
ings. 9. A blue typewriter ribbon. 10. Aluminum advertising signs.
B, I. John will earn a great honor and a good handful of silver.
2. He wore a necktie of pearl-colored silk. 3. While the money
lasted, the innkeeper treated me with great attention. 4. The cap-
tain had a thick, black, silky mustache. 5. This large house belongs
to the heir of a great family. 6. The poor sick girl I I took her
some new magazines to read. 7. A dense impure vapor rose from
the surface of the sea. 8. His younger sister was a charming girl.
9. We entered the lower part of the house. 10. He bought two
handsome black horses. 11. The German girls have pretty blue
eyes. 12. The Carlist party has its name from Don Carlos, brother
of Ferdinand the Seventh. 13. Wireless telegraphy is one of the
great inventions of the nineteenth century. 1 4. Saint Thomas never
visited the island of Saint Thomas. 15. With the stones he has
built a safe, handsome yard for his cattle. 16. They have several
kinds of new books. 17. The streets of the city are broad and clean.
18. There are a hundred boys in the class. 19. This room has five
broad high windows. 20. In the market we saw a heap of orange-
colored squashes. 21. The president of the United States lives in
the White House. 22. The same day the president himself opened
the door. 23. He paid the hundred pesetas to both men. 24. They
sell domestic and foreign goods of all kinds. 25. All this happened
on one and the same day. 26. The same day we played ball in the
afternoon.
CHAPTER V
ADJECTIVES, CONTINUED
140. Agreement of Adjective and Noun. i. An adjective modi-
fying two or more nouns may be masculine plural when the nouns
are of different gender ; and must be so if the nouns denote persons.
£1 mddico y la seSora estaban sen- T/ie doctor and the lady were
tados en el despacho. seated in the office,
2 . The plural adjective may agree in gender with the nearest noun.
Sangre, dinero, e intelligencia eu- European bloody money ^ and in-
ropeas. telligence.
Juntos el terror y la admiracidn Together terror and wonder arose
germinaron en el alma de Lucila. in Lucille^ s soul,
£1 misterio y sigilo diplomiticos. Diplomatic mystery and secrecy,
3. If the nouns appear to the writer as closely associated in mean-
ing, the adjective modifying them may agree in both gender and
number with the nearest.
£1 valor y constancia espaSola. Spanish valor and constancy,
Otras devociones y ejercicios. Other devotions and exercises.
Mi padre ha leido muchos romances My father has read many ballads
e historias. and stories.
a. An adjective or an article may be repeated when it is desired to
mark a distinction in meaning between two nouns. See section 141.
Tengo mucho frio y mucha hambre. / am very cold and hungry,
4. Two or more singular adjectives may be used with a plural
noun, agreeing with it in gender, when different objects are meant.
I08 tomos primero y segimdo, the first and second volumes
las Claras italiana y portnguesa, the Italian and Portuguese parlia-
ments
131
132 SPANISH GRAMMAR
141. Repetition of Adjective and Article. Adjectival modifiers,
including the articles, are repeated with each noun when distinct
persons, things, oi ideas are presented.
Hi madre y mi tia. My mother and aunt,
Hasta las diez y media o la^ once. Until halfpast ten or eleven o'clock,
Gracias a Vd. por las naevaa cartas / tkank you for the recent letters
y los nueyos consejos. and advice,
Esta consideraci6n y esta medita- This consideration and this reflec-
ci6n me atemorizan. tion make me afraid.
£1 amor de Dios y el concepto de God'' s love and the concept of God
Dies todo lo abarcan. embrace everything.
a. If, however, the two nouns appear to the writer to represent
closely related ideas or to have a collective sense, the modifier appeals
only once.
Se comprenden bajo la denomina- Under the term baggage are in-
ci6n de eqnipajes los batiles, ma- eluded trunks^ valises^ hat-
letaSy sombrereraSy y saoos de boxes, and traveling-bags.
noche.
£1 Principe de Viana tuvo la ma- The Prince of Viana had the
jestad y esperanzas de im naci- majesty and hopes of a royal
miento real. birth.
Obra una transmisidn y mezcla de // effects a transmission and
sangre. mingling of blood.
142. The Comparative. See sections 47, 48, 49.
1. The correlative adverbs the . . . the used with comparatives
are rendered in Spanish by cuanto . . . tanto.
Cuanto mds leo este autor, tanto The more I read this author the
mds lo admiro. more I admire him.
a. Tanto may be omitted ; and mientras may be used instead of cuanto.
Cuanto mAs lejos, mejor. The farther the better.
Mientras mayor me representa el The greater I imagine God^s love
amor de Dios, menos celoso estoy {to be), the less jealous I am
y mds le amo. and the more I love him.
2. Though tan is used with adjectives, the full form tanto must
be used with comparatives : tanto peor, so much the worse.
THE COMPARATIVE 133
3. The comparative may be intensified by cada vez to denote a
gradual increase in degree.
La seSora estalMi cada yez peor de The lady became constantly worse
salud. in health,
Brillan cada yez mis las luces The electric lights shine brighter
el^ctricas. and brighter,
4. Indefinite expressions after comparatives are usually in the
negative.
mejor que en ningdn otro pais, better than in any other country
mis rico que nunca, richer than ever
5. A redundant no sometimes appears after a comparative.
El guardia parecia ocuparse mis de The watchman seemed to pay
la campiSa que no del rfo. more attention to the plain than
to the river,
6. The irregular comparatives mejor, peor, menor, and mayor
may stand before the noun, but are placed after it when the com-
parison is not limited, or when the noun is preceded by algono,
ninguno, or otro. Mayor and menor may stand before the noun
only in a completed comparison.
mi mejor amigo, my best friend ninguna casa mejor, no better house
su hijo menor, his youngest son una seSora mayor, an elderly lady
VendrAn dias mejores. Better days will come.
El peor hombre del mtmdo. The worst man in the world.
La mayor casa del iMtrrio. The largest house in the quarter,
143. Than after a comparative. See section 49.
I. When the comparison is with a noun in the principal clause,
Spanish uses for than del que, de la que, de los que, de las que,
according to the gender and number of the noun represented.
Tenia yo menos dinero del que me / had less money than he de-
pidi6. mandedofme,
Hubo mis gente de la que invito. There were more people than he
invited,
£ Son machos los enemigos ? Mis Are the enemy numerous f More
de los que esperibamos. than we expected.
134 SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. When the comparison is with a statement or idea, de lo que
introduces the second member.
Es m&a hdbil de lo que parece. He is more skillful than he seems,
144. VLkR modifies many adverbs of place which have no com-
parative degree in English, and otherwise forms various idiomatic
expressions.
mds adelante, later on^ farther on
mds arriba, higher up, mds abajo, lower down
mAs al nor^^ farther north
mis bien, rather
mds acd de, on this side, mis alii de, beyond^ on the other side
no mis . . . que, only : No habla mis que dos sillasi There were
only two chairs
a poco mis, nearly : A poco mis se muere. He nearly died
145. The Superlative, i. A possessive adjective may replace the
article in forming the superlative.
su poema mis interesante, his most interesting poem
mi mejor amigo, my best friend
2. The superlative adjective may stand either before or after the
noun ; but in the latter case the article is placed before the noun.
Isabel, sostenida por la mayor y mis sana parte del reino, Isabel^ sup-
ported by the largest and soundest part of the kingdom
las rocas mis elevadas, the highest rocks
3. With several adjectives in the comparative or superlative, mis
or menos is used only once.
las regiones mis ricas y f^rtiles, the richest and most fertile regions
los menos sabios y leldos, the least learned and well-read
4. The superlative adjective in the predicate omits the article
when the comparison concerns only the subject of the verb without
reference to other nouns or pronouns.
Cuando mis alegre estaba, vi que When I was merriest I saw the
la seSora fij6 en ml la mirada. lady stare at me.
No te cases nunca, Cecilia ; el Never marry ^ Cecilia j the man
hombre que mejor parece de who seems best as a lover is the
novio es el esposo peor. worst husband.
THE SUPERLATIVE 135
5. A superlative adjective modifying a noun in apposition with
anotiier has tiie article after the noun.
Gonzalo de C6rdoba, general el mAa iliutre del siglo XV, Gonzalo de
CdrdobUj the most illustrious general of the fifteenth century
6. The article is not used with the superlative of an adverb un-
less accompanied by the adjective posible, or an expression denoting
possibility ; in which case the neuter article is required.
Los cometas aparecen cuando me- Comets appear when they are
nos se los espera. least expected,
Se trataba lo menos posible con los He conversed as little as possible
yecinos. with the neighbors.
Huy6 lo mAs de prisa que podia. He ran away as fast as he could.
I>on Fadrique bail6 lo mejor que Don Fadrique danced the best he
supo. knew how.
a. When it is necessary to emphasize or make precise the superlative
degree of an adverb, Spanish uses a relative or adverbial clause.
Es Juan el que corre mds de prisa. John runs the fastest.
7. Most^ as a noun, is la mayor parte de or los (las) mds de.
la mayor parte de su dinero, most of his money
los mis de los suyos, most of his men
a. Los (las) mis may also be used as an adjective ; as, las mds noches,
M4)st nights,
146. Absolute Superlative, i. When there is no real comparison
but the adjective denotes a supreme degree, Spanish applies the
ending isimo to the adjective; as, h^bil, j>^//^z^/— habilisimo,
very skillful.
a. A final or other vowel is dropped before adding the termination,
and the rules for spelling (see section 7) must be regarded.
mucho — muchisimo, very much rico — riqulsimo, very rich
f eliz — felicisimo, very happy largo — larguisimo, very long
b. The termination lo retains i, but io is dropped; though some
adiectives in lo or io do not allow the addition of isimo.
frlo — friisimo, very cold amplio — amplisimo, very ample
136 SPANISH GRAMMAR
c. The original Latin word influences the formation from adjectives
having a stem vowel ie or ue, or the terminations ble, fico, yolo, or whose
Latin superlative ended in rimus or limus. There are also a few unclassi-
fied forms from the Latin superlative.
cierto — certlsimo, very sure
fuerte — fortlsimOy very strong
noble — nobilisimo, very noble
magnifico — magnificentlsimOy very magnificent
ben^YOlo — beneyolentisimo, very benevolent
c^lebre — celeb^rrimo, very famous
fiu:il — facilin^o (also facillsimo), very easy
sable — sapientisimOy very wise
flel — tAtVisimOf very faithful
2. The following adjectives have, besides the regular absolute
superlative, others derived from the Latin forms :
bueno — bonisimo, 6ptimo, very good
malo — malisimo, p^imo, very bad
grande — grandisimo, mdzimo, very great
pequeSo — pequeSf simo, minimo, very small
3. An equivalent for the absolute superlative may be formed by
intensifying adverbs modifying the adjective.
muy bueno, very good cantidades sobre manera pequeSas,
sumamente fiel, extremely faithful exceedingly small quantities
a. The particle re (rete) may be prefixed to the adjective with the
same force :
rebueno, very good; retebien hecho, very well done
147. Adjectives as Nouns. The Spanish adjective may be freely
used as a noun to specify individuals. English uses the adjective
as a noun only in a limited way, usually supplying words like mariy
woman, the one, the ones,
I Vid Vd. al ciego ? Did you see the blind man f
I Qui^n es la vieja ? Who is the old woman ?
£1 pequeSo es mis bonito que los The little one is prettier than the
grandes. big ones»
ADJECTIVES 137
1. Certain superlative expressions in English supply the words sort^
kind, one of\ these words are rendered in Spanish by the superlative
of the adjective used as a noun governed by the preposition de.
carmesf del mds yistoso, crimson of the showiest kind
una noche de las mAs frfas de diciembre, one of the coldest December
nights
una tarde de las primeras frlas de octubre, one of the first cold after-
noons in October
a. In a similar way a superlative adjective preceded by de may stand
with partitive sense in the predicate.
Los dias que pas^ en aquella casa fue- The days that I spent in that house
ron de los m^s tristes de mi yida. were the saddest in my life.
£1 paSo es de primera clase. The cloth is first-class,
2. After a neuter pronoun, as mucho, nada, qu^, the adjective pre-
ceded by de may be treated as noun and may agree or not in gender
and number with the word to which it refers.
I Qu6 hay de nuevo ? What is there new f (idiomatic
English) What is the news f
Nada de particular. Nothing special.
Aquellos ojos tenian mucho de her- Those eyes were very beautiful.
moso or de hermosos.
148. Adjectives as Adverbs. Adjectives are frequently used as ad-
verbs ; as, hablar bajo, to speak low ; Carlos habl6 primero, Charles
spoke first ; Viven felloes, They live happily.
a. Solo when used as an adverb takes a written accent: s61o dos,
only two.
b. Medio, half is frequentiy found as an adverb :
Los yiejos pareclan medio muertos. The old people seemed half dead,
Estaba ella medio escondida. She was half hidden.
EXERCISE 27
I. The interest and emotion of the public were extraordinary.
2. They live in the largest and richest city in the world. 3. We have
Spanish lessons on Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays. 4. What
is the opposite of " better " ? " Worse." 5 . A faithful dog is the most
faithful of friends. 6. Most Spanish words of Gothic origin are
138 SPANISH GRAMMAR
military terms, or personal names like Federico. 7. Greece and
Rome were the two most celebrated nations of antiquity, one for the
arts and genius, the other for its strength and greatness. 8. The sil-
ver mines of Potosf have produced for more than two centuries an in-
calculable wealth. 9. I prefer the old book to the new one. i o. The
old men were watching the young men. 1 1 . The house has nothing
beautiful (about it).^ 12. I had only one friend in the city. 13. Our
bookstore was established in one of the most central streets. 1 4. The
streets became constandy uglier as we left ^ the center of the town.
15. The price of the rags is greater the newer they are. 16. Why
are we poor? Because we spend more than we earn, or because
we earn less than we spend. 17. The servant returned earlier than
we expected. 18. Acquaintance with* Spanish will be most useful
for you. 19. I have sold all my best books. 20. Lincoln had not
been a state governor nor a federal senator, the highest offices of
the republic after that* of president. 21. Most of the houses were
closed on account of the heat. 22. He studies more than anybody.
23. He possessed many religious paintings and engravings. 24. They
traveled silently. 25. Further on, the amphitheater of mountains,
some higher than others, all black and formidable, surrounded the
plain. 26. San Felfu is a town of 10,000 souls and one of the rich-
est and most important in the province. 27. Through the little nar-
row windows she saw the deep, blue bosom of the night. 28. Most
Sundays I was invited to dine at my uncle's, a very rich old bache
lor. 29. St. Paul's is the largest church in London. 30. The little
girl was half dead from cold. 31. He entered the office in^ worse
humor than ever. 32. From the roof he saw more than fifty bell-
towers. 33. The Spanish and English fleets met in the harbor of
Vigo. 34. His words were half French, half German. 35. There
is something superior in that young man. 36. The pinks and white
roses were a lovely present. 37. We are friends ; we were together
at school.
1 Omit ^ alejarse de. ' del. ^ el. * de.
CHAPTER VI
NUMERALS
149. Cardinals. See section 39.
I. Though un is omitted before mil, it is used in numbers above
1000:
ji^ooOy treinta y un mil
lOiyOOOy ciento un mil
2. The plural of tmo is unos(a8), which is used as an indefinite pro-
noun, see section 179, 3. Before plural nouns uno8(a8) has the mean-
ing of one, Se yenden muchas tijeras : no quedan sino unas, We sell
many scissors : only one pair is left,
a. Before a cardinal number unos(a8) conveys an idea of indefinite*
ness : unos cincuenta, someffty,
3. Cuatro is used as an indefinite number. £1 alguacil refirid en cuatro
palabras todo lo que sabemos, The policeman related in a few words
all that we know.
150. Ordinals. See section 40.
1st primero, -a (primo, -a)
15th d^mo quinto, -a
2d segundo, -a
1 6th d^dmo sexto, -a
3d tercero, -a (terdo, -a)
1 7th d^dmo s^ptimo, -a
4th cuarto, -a
1 8th d^cimo octavo, -a
5th quinto, -a
19th d^cimo nono, -a
6th sexto, -a, or sesto, -a
20th vig^simo, -a
7th s^ptimo, -a, or s^timo, -a
2 1 St vig^simo primo, -a
8th octavo, -a
22d vig^simo segundo, -a
9th noveno, -a (nono, -a)
23d vig^simo tercio, -a
loth d^cimo, -a
30th trigdsimo, -a
nth und^dmo, -a
40th cuadrag^simo, -a
1 2th duod^dmo, -a
50th quincuag^simo, -a
13th d^dmo terdo, -a
6oth sexag^simo, -a
14th d^mo cuarto, -a
70th septuag^simo, -a
139
140
SPANISH GRAMMAR
80th octog^simo, -a
600th sexcent^simO) -a
90th nonag^simo, -a
700th septingent^simo, -a
1 00th cent^simo, -a
Sooth octingent^simo, -a
10 1st cent^simo primo, -a
900th noningent^simo, -a
1 1 ith cent^simo und^dmo, -a
1,000th mil^simo, -a
200th ducent^simo, -a
2,000th dosmil^simo, -a
300th trecent^simo, -a
10,000th diezmiMsimo, -a
400th cuadringent^simo, -a
1, 000,000th millon^simo, -a
500th quingent^simo, -a
a. The short forms primo, tercio, nono, are preferred in compound
expressions. These may be written in one word, but both parts should
agree in gender and number with the noun.
b. Only educated Spaniards are familiar with the ordinals above 20th.
They are used in the prayer-book and in some special expressions, as el
quincuag^imo aniyersario, the fiftieth anniversary.
151. Fractions to and including one eleventh are formed by using
a cardinal numeral for a numerator and an ordinal for a denominator.
un medio.
\
tres cuartos,
1
un octavo (ochavo),
un tercio.
\
un quinto
1
un noveno,
dos tercios,
1
un sexto.
" ■
un d^mo,
un cuarto.
\
un s^ptimo.
\
un und^cimo.
1
\
tV
From and including one eleventh, the denominator of a fraction
is formed by adding the termination -avo to the cardinal numeral.
un onzavo,
un dozavo,
un trezavo,
un catorzavo,
un quinzavo,
un diedseisavo,
un diedsieteavo,
un diedochavo,
un diecihueveavo,
un veintavo
un veintiunavo,
un trdntavo,
un centdsimo or centavo,
un mil^simo,
un diezmil^simo
un millon^simo,
TOOOO
TOOOOOO
a. A frequent method in general conversational use of forming frac-
tions is by introdudng the word parte ; as, las dos terceras partes, two
thirds ; la yig^ima parte, one twentieth.
NUMERALS 141
b. Derived from their use with a noun, the fractional numerals, some
in the feminine form, others in the masculine, have special meanings.
una tercia, twelve inches^ i.e. one third of a yard (vara)
on tercio, a bale
una cuarta, nine inches^ one quarter of a yard^ frequently used in
business
medio, cuartOy ochayo, are names of coins.
See dictionary for meaning of this class of words.
c. The adjective medio, half is used as a noun in calculations, other-
wise the noun is la mitad. Note the difference between the two lan-
guages in the matter of the article and the position of medio in respect
to the noun.
media hora, half an hour
una media dosis, half a dose
una bora y media, an hour and a half
ties pesos y medio, three and a half dollars
la mitad de la casa, half of the house
152. Collective Numerals.
un par, a pair una yeintena, twenty^ a score
ana decena, ten una sesentena, sixty
una docena, a dozen una centena or un centenar, one hundred
una qnincena,7^^^M on miliar, one thousand
a. The cardinals ciento and mil may also be used as collectives :
miles de aves, thousands of birds.
b. In commercial language, to express rate, ciento and miliar are
the preferred forms.
a $4 ciento, at $4 a hundred
ladrillos a $15 miliar, bricks at $ij a thousand
c. Collective numerals in -ena sometimes have an indefinite value :
as, una decena, about ten.
d. Collectives require de before a following noun.
una yeintena de caballeros, a score of gentlemen
una docena de hueyos, a dozen eggs
^42
SPANISH GRAMMAR
153. Multiple Numerals.
simple, single
doble or dnplicado or ddplice,
double^ twofold
triple or triplicado or triplice,
triple^ threefold
cuAdmplo or cuadruplicado, quad-
ruple^ fourfold
154. Arithmetical Signs.
-|- mAs X poi^
-f- diyidido por
qnlntnplo or qnintnplicado, quin-
tuple, fivefold
sdztuplo, sixfold
septuple, sevenfold
d^cnplo, tenfold
c^tuplo or centnplicadOy a hun-
dredfold
miUtiple, manifold, multiple
= es igual a
— menos
Dos tercios mAs un medio son uno
y un sexto.
I Cuibitas veces cabe el 6 en 54 ?
Dos por tres son seis.
I Esti bien la suma ?
La suma (0 el total) de ao y 30 es
igual a 50.
Two thirds plus one half are one
and a sixth.
How many times is 6 contained
in S4 ^
Two times three are six.
Is the total correct f
The sum of 20 and jo is equal to
50.
155. Dimensions. In expressing dimension Spanish uses the
verb tener with the following nouns and adjectives :
alto, high la altura or elevacidn, height
largo, long la longitud or eztensi6n, length
ancho, wide la anchura or latitud, width
^ \deep la profondidad, depth
\ thick el espesor, thickness
espesoj '^ '
The adjectives may be used in place of the nouns except as sub-
ject of the verb. Note the following methods of expression :
£Qu6 anchura tiene el rio? ^
-_ - . . ^. , _/ . f anchura? \How wide is the river f
^Cuantos pies tiene el no de'j v 9 I
' una anchura de media milla. ^
r de ancho.
\de anchura.
Bl rio tiene
media milU
► The river is half a mile wide.
NUMERALS 1 43
a. Expressions of dimension used as either attributive or predicate
adjectives are preceded by de.
de 900 metros de^
>A tower goo meters high.
Una torre^
alta de 900 metres.
Goantes largos de catorce botones. Fourteen-button gloves.
El tamaSo de la caja es de tres pies The size of the box is three feet
de largo y de dos pies, tres pul- long by two feet three inches
gadas de ancho. wide,
Es hondo de ocho pnlgadas. // is eight inches deep.
156. Distance is expressed as follows :
I Cuinto hay de Madrid a Seyilla ? How far ns it from Madrid to
Seville f
Dista de nnos 560 kil6inetros. // is about ^60 kilometers distant.
No hay cinco minutes de aqul a la It is not five minutes'* walk from
iglesia. here to the church,
a. Adverbially, distance may be expressed by the preposition a.
a dos pasos de aqul, two steps from here
a una legua, a league away
157. Price requires the preposition a.
I A c6mo yende Vd. la tela ? How do you sell the cloth f
A dos pesos vara. At two dollars a yard.
\ A peira chica ^ la buena naranja I A good orange for a cent,
a. Estimates take the preposition en.
En dos arrobas de uyas apreci6 el He appraised the damage at two
gasto. arrobas (jo lbs,) of grapes,
b. Articles made or sold at a uniform weight or value have the double
preposition de a before the rate.
sellos de a cinco centavos, five-cent stamps
una moneda de a 5 pesetas, a coin worth five pesetas
un cartncho de dinamita de a a| kilos, a dynamite cartridge weigh-
ing 21 kilos
1 A copper coin of 5 centimes, worth about a cent of our money, is called a
perra chica or perrita, also peno chico ; the piece of 10 centimos, being larger,
is called a peno gordo or perro grande. The names are derived from the fact
that the coins have on the obverse a representation of a lion holding a shield.
144
SPANISH GRAMMAR
158. Measure is preceded by the definite article in Spanish, which
however may be omitted, and por may be introduced.
r la vara.
El paSo Yale nn peso-j vara. The cloth is worth a dollar a yard.
[por vara.
159. Rates involving an element of time are most commonly
expressed by an adjective.
Ocho pesetas diarias.
Un suelda de $6o mensnales.
Se calcula el consumo en ochenta
mil toneladas annales.
Eight pesetas a day,
A salary of $6o a month.
The consumption is estimated at
eighty thousand tons a year.
a. Note also the following.
Cada seis meses.
Una yez por semana.
$40,000 anualmente.
Dos yeces al dia.
Un dla si y otro no.
A perra chica uno.
Caf 6 por una peseta.
A raz6n de ocho reales la docena.
Una yelocidad de 60 kil6metros por
hora.
I Qn^ tanto por ciento ?
Un descuento de 2 por 100.
Al tipo de 4,50 por 100.
El tipo del interns es de 5 por ciento.
Every six months.
Once a week.
$40^000 yearly.
Twice a day.
Every other day,
A cent apiece,
A peseta's worth of coffee.
At the rate of eight reals a dozen.
A speed of 60 kilometers an hour.
What rate per cent ?
A discount of 2^^,
At the rate of 4.^ per cent.
The rate of interest is j per cent.
160. Approximation. Numerical expressions are modified to ex-
press approximation as follows :
Cosa de dos horas.
Como de una vara.
Vale poco mis menos diez duros.
Tiene unos cincuenta £^os.
Tiene cincuenta y tantos £^os.
Tres mil y pico de pesetas.
About two hours.
About a yard.
It is worth about ten dollars.
He is some fifty years old.
He is fifty-odd years old.
Three thousand and odd pesetas.
a. With the hour of the day, a eso de is common : a eso de las
siete, about seven d* clock.
NUMERALS 1 45
EXERCISE 28
I. This bill amounts to sixteen thousand five hundred and
twenty-nine pesetas. 2. He earns seven dollars a week, and pays
fifty cents a day for his board. 3. We will allow a discount of
three per cent for payment in cash. 4. The fanega is a Spanish
measure which contains about a bushel and a half. 5. The pop-
ulation of this city amounts to about one million two hundred and
one thousand. 6. One half is a fraction which has for denominator
the number two and which consequently supposes (the) unity divided
into two equal parts. 7. The Mediterranean Sea is thirty-five thou-
sand kilometers long from east to west, and has a minimum width
of a hundred and forty kilometers between Timis and Sicily. 8. Ac-
cording to the metric system of weights a kilo is equal to two and
one fifth pounds. 9. This room is fifteen feet long by twelve feet
wide. 10. We have begun at the eighth line of the fifty-second page.
II. I want a dollar's worth of two-cent stamps. 12. The principal
nave of the church measured 64 meters in length and 1 2 meters in
width between the pillars. 13. The height of the arches above the
floor was 24 meters. 14. During the first three years he used two
thirds of his salary for the purchase of books. 15. He is about
forty years old. 16. He is about five years older than I. 17. The
Eiffel tower in Paris is more than three hundred meters high.
18. How much is this cloth worth a yard? 19. We paid three
dollars a day at that hotel. 20. One fourth plus one third equals
seven twelfths. 21. We arrived at the city at about eleven o'clock.
22. Columbus discovered America the twelfth of October, fourteen
hundred and ninety-two. 23. The second of May is the Spanish
national holiday. 24. At this price the shares return an interest of
five and a quarter per cent. 25. The one-peseta piece is worth
four reals, but there is no coin worth ^ a real. 26. He lives half a
mile away. 27. The street car passes this comer every ten min-
utes. 28. There was in the park a circular pond about a hundred
^ Omit : see section 1 57, b.
146 SPANISH GRAMMAR
meters in diameter. 29. This hotel was a mile away from the sta-
tion. 30. The pond was scarcely deeper than half a yard in its
deepest part 31. How does he sell the eggs ? Thirty-five cents a
dozen the fresh ones. 32. From the railway station coaches leave
daily in summer for that village. 33. The production of manufac-
tured cork amounts to two and a half million kilograms a year.
34. I have read this book a dozen times. 35. In 1892 we Amer-
icans celebrated the four-hundredth anniversary of the discovery of
the New World. 36. The basis of the Spanish currency is the
peseta which is nominally equal to nineteen and three tenths cents
of our money, but there is always a discount in our favor. 37. There
are about ten meters of this cloth ; how much will you sell it for ?
At a dollar and a quarter a meter. 38. When shall we arrive in
Granada? About nine o'clock if the train is not behind time.
39. The custom house appraises these cigars at two dollars and a
half per hundred. 40. An express train leaves for that city every
other hour. 41. The richest emerald mines of Colombia are situ-
ated about seventy-five miles north of Bogoti at an elevation of six
thousand five hundred feet above sea level. 42. The Bolivian
mines yield one sixth of the world's yearly production of tin. The
metal sells at times as high as one thousand dollars a ton.
CHAPTER VII
POSSESSIVES AND DEMONSTRATIVES
161. Possessives. See sections 37, 97, 98.
1. The indefinite use of the possessive adjective occurs also
when the adjective stands in the predicate : Son aminos nuestros,
They are friends of ours ; and between a demonstrative and the
noun : este mi amigo, this friend of mine ; ese su perro, that dog
of yours.
a. Note the expression esta su casa, this your house, in English, my
house, a polite reference to one's own residence ; see section 85.
2. With parts of the body and clothing, the definite article is
frequently substituted for the possessive adjective. The personal
pronoun of the indirect object form is used with the verb to indi-
cate the person if necessary. El peluquero le cort6 el pelo, The
barber cut his hair, (See section 56, ^.)
3. The possessive adjectives appear in several expressions like
the following :
En tomo suyo. Around him.
En sn busca. In search of him,
A nuestro encuentro. To meet us,
A sn paso. As she passed,
Mir6 a mi alrededor. / looked around me,
162. Demonstratives. See section 35.
I. Referring to time, este denotes present time ; ese, a recent
period ; and aquel, a remote time.
esta noche, to-night
esa tarde, that afternoon
aquel siglo, that century
147
148 SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. Ese often implies contempt : ese G6mez, that fellow Gbmez.
a. The phrase de Dios gives a satirical turn : esas calles de Dios, the
blessed streets.
3. ifcste means the latter (that thing last mentioned, the nearest) ;
aqu^ means the former,
Tal distancia habla entre el yiejo y Such distance there was between
elmozoquenuncapermiti6aqu61 the old man and the lad that
delante de gente ser llamado tfo the former never permitted htm-
por &te. self before people to be called
uncle by the latter,
a. These pronouns are often used to make the subject of the verb
evident.
Lorenzo esperd a la yentana la Lorenzo waited at the window
Yuelta de Clara. Asia lleg6 poco Clara's return. She arrived a
despu^. little while afterwards.
El autor nos entera de que Guiller- The author informs us that Wil-
mo y Carmen se aman, de que Ham and Carmen are in love^
aqu61 elude hablar de matri- that the former avoids speaking
monio. ^ of marriage.
4. The feminine forms ^sta and ^sa, referring to ciudad or plaza
understood, frequently mean this town (of mine) and that town (of
yours). The phrases en (de, a) ^sta and en (de, a) ^sa may some-
times be rendered simply here and there.
Los precios en ^ta han sufrido Prices here have risen.
una alza.
Espero llegar maSana a 6sa. / expect to reach your town to-
morrow.
5. As the neuter forms stand for an idea, all three, esto, eso,
and aquello, may at times be rendered that.
I Qu6 es esto ? JVhat is that ? (which I have here).
I Qu6 es eso ? What is that f (near you).
Hace muchos aSos que 8ucedi6 That happened many years ago.
aquello.
a. The neuter forms refer only to unnamed things : ^ Para qu6 sirye
eso ? What is that good for? An object having been named, its gender
is known : ^ Cuil es su pluma ? Esa. Which is your pen f That one.
DEMONSTRATIVES 149
b. Note the idiomatic expressions
por esOy therefore; no por esc, not on that account
en estOy hereupon^ at this moment
esto de vivir en Madrid, this matter of living in Madrid
eso de morirse, that idea of dying
I Qu6 significaba aquello de lleyarme a Paris ? What did that statement
about taking me to Paris mean f
c. Before a prepositional phrase or a relative clause the neuter article
may replace the demonstrative :
lo de Castro, the affair of Castro
lo de ayer, that {which happened) yesterday
Bien s^ lo que quiere, / know very well what he wants,
d. The expletive that of English is not required as a grammatical sub-
ject I Es bueno I That is fine / \ £s i^eresante I That is interesting I
6. The definite article replaces the demonstrative before a prep-
ositional phrase or a relative clause, unless the relative is itself the
object of a preposition. English has that^ the one, he, she, etc.
£1 de la camisa limpia. The one with the clean shirt.
La de Montejo. She of Montejo (that is, Montejo's
wife).
£se cura es el que ofreci6 sn yida That priest is the one who offered
por la de sus compaSeros. his life for that of his com-
panions,
DoSa Eduarda es la que ha dicho Doha Eduarda is the one or // is
esto. Doha Eduarda who has said
this,
£s Pepita aquella a quien ama. Pepita is the one whom he loves,
a. Note that the English possessive case when used without a noun
requires for its translation this demonstrative use of the definite article :
mi perro y el de Juan, my dog and fohn's.
b. In such expressions as one of the ( — ) which, Spanish prefers to
arrange the words one ( — ) of those which,
Un telegrama de los que recibi6. One of the telegrams which he
received,
Un curioso de los que habian acu- One of the idlers who had come
dido. up.
I50 SPANISH GRAMMAR
c. This construction in the predicate preceded by de means sort or
kind of,
Aqnellos ojos eran de los que no Those eyes were the kind that
pueden olyidarse. cannot be forgotten,
£ste no 08 de los que se marchan This man is not the sort that goes
sin pagar. off without paying,
^. In an attributive prepositional phrase the demonstrative is com-
moner.
Flores raras de ^sas que 86I0 surgen Rare flowers of the sort that only
de ruinas. spring from ruins,
Un chiste algo amoroso de dstos que A rather loose jest of the kind that
suelen permitirse los andaluces. Andalusians are accustomed to
indulge in.
EXERCISE 29
I. There is no more; that is all. 2. Who is that fellow? The
one with the green hat near the door. 3. Are these your books ?
No, they are Henry's. 4. I have read the works of Cervantes and
those of Calderon. I prefer the former to the latter. 5. My land
is worth more than my neighbor's. 6. When you arrive in your
town, remember that you have left friends of yours here. 7. The
prices in this (market) have fallen. How are they in yours ? 8. He
who lives in the country is called a countryman ; but those who
live in the city are citizens. 9. He lent me more money than I
asked. 10. Dona Ana was going to pass when her husband called
her. " Listen," said the latter. 11. Those books are mine; and I
have yours. Let us exchange. 12. Why did you let that tramp
come into the yard? 13. These friends of mine have come from
the country to see the celebrations. 14. That day I was happy.
15. Those horses are the ones we saw yesterday. 16. Henry re-
membered his parents, his friend Carlos, the bedroom where the
pictures were : he wished he could see all that. 17. This matter of
changing the name of streets is a mania in all those blessed towns.
18. Your sister and Peter's are in the same class. 19. That aifair
on Santiago Street was scandalous. 20. Those two gentlemen are
DEMONSTRATIVES 1 5 1
brothers; the one to whom I introduced you was my partner.
21. That business of yours had very good success ; but your cous-
in's had very little. 22. I shall write to my folks and^ ask^ them
for money. 23. Sir, I am not the girPs betrothed ; I am a relative
of hers. 24. That is what I command you. 25. We received letters
from our brother and sister: hers are more interesting than his.
26. Your duties are those of a daughter. 27. He placed himself in
a seat opposite mine. 28. At the house of the ladies of Femdndez
they have spoken very badly of me. 29. Since those days my stud-
ies have advanced very much. 30. I asked him if the button was
his. 31. Don Francisco was the first of his people who did not
serve the king. 32. Anita is the one who has fallen sick. 33. Bring
some apples of the kind that uncle likes best* 34. One of the
gentlemen who were present at the party related a long story
about his business. 35. This fruit is one of that kind which is not
known* in Europe, and therefore most people in Spain do not
know its name. 36. What is the news in your town? Nothing is
going on here ; it is always the same.*^ 37. Father and son parted ;
the former to return to his business, the latter to go to his school.
38. He invested his wife's money* in the shares of the Eastern
Railway, and his own in those of the Northern. 39. One of the
friends who came to the wedding brought his children and his sis-
ter's. 40. Dealing with rascals of that stamp, who lie at every
opportunity, one does not know what to expect.^
1 Omit. * Use reflexive verb.
^ Use present participle. ^ lo de siempre.
* m&s. ^ caadaly m,
7 atenderse a.
CHAPTER VIII
RELATIVES
que
163. Relative Pronouns.
' which'^
> referring to
that
who
whom
1, things
2, persons, when not governed by a prepo-
sition
quien, quienes, who^ whom^ referring to persons only
(who
el que, la que, los que, las que
el cual, la cual, los cuales, las cuales
referring to both persons
and things
which
that
lo que, lo cual, which, referring to clauses or ideas
whose
of whom ..possessive relative adjective
of which ]
. . ( as much . . . ^J ^ . , o .^ i ^. j« ^« j
cuanto, cuanta J ^^ ^ ^^ [ indefinite relative adjective and
pronoun
cuyo, cuya
cuyos, cuyas
^ < as m.any . . . as >
cuantos, cuantas „ ^, ^r ^
X^all the . . . that J
164. General Rules, i. Relative pronouns must not be omitted
in Spanish though omitted in English : el libro que tengo, the book
I have,
2. Prepositions governing relative pronouns must stand before
them, not at the end of the clause as in Engush : la casa en que
vivo, the house that I live in,
3. The student must beware a combination of the two foregoing
peculiarities of English : el asunto de que Vd. me hablaba, the affair
you were telling me about.
4. Relative pronouns must stand as close as possible" to their
antecedents :
Se qued6 en casa de don Casto el The officer, who was a lieutenant^
oflcial que era un teniente. remained at Don Castors,
152
RELATIVE PRONOUNS 153
5. The verb after a relative pronoun takes the person and num-
ber of the antecedent, while the past participle, except when used
with haber, has the gender and number of the antecedent in accord
with the rules for the agreement of adjectives. (See section 140.)
I16 yo que soy mAs joven. I will go who am younger.
El estrecho y la isla que fueron The strait and the island which
descubiertas por Bering. were discovered by Bering.
a. Some writers prefer the third person of the verb when the relative
occurs after a predicate noun or pronoun.
Yo soy el gitano que di6 sus seSas / am the gypsy that gave his de-
al capitin general. scrip tion to the captain general,
b, \i the relative has indefinite force (see section 166, 3) the verb will
be in the third person : Quien va soy yo, / am the one who is going.
6. In a relative clause the verb frequently stands before the subject.
Aquel hombre dispar6 el tiro a que That man fired the shot to which
han contestado las tropas. the soldiers have replied,
Maria Victoria es una muchacha Maria Victoria is a very pretty
muy linda a quien ama Juan, el girl^ whom John^ the count of
oonde de PeSafiel. Pehafiel, loves,
165. Que is invariable. After prepositions it refers only to things.
La casa que compr6. The house which I bought,
Los hombres que vimos. The men whom we saw,
Tir6 la pluma con que escribia. He threw away the pen with
which he was writing,
a, Donde, where, may replace que governed by a preposition : la
ciudad donde yive, the city in which he lives,
b. Que instead of cuando is customary in relative expressions defining
time : el dia que llegu^ a Madrid, the day when I reached Madrid,
166. Quien, qtiienes, in modem Spanish refers only to persons
or personified things and abstractions.
Snoontramos a DoiKa Blanca, quien We met Doha Blanca, who was
salia de misa. coming from mass.
No era la humildad cristiana quien // wc^ not Christian humility that
habla elegido aqnellos tipices de had selected those tapestries of
rojo terciopelo. red velvet.
154 SPANISH GRAMMAR
1. After prepositions, quien replaces que when referring to per-
sons.
Ese liijo de tm posadero que yiene That son of an innkeeper who
a ynestra cabeza y a quien Ua- comes at your head and whom
man Murat. they call Murat,
Sntonces entraion en el comedor los Then there entered the dining-
caballeros con qnienes tuye la room the gentlemen with whom
conversacidn. / hcui the conversation,
2. A relative clause concerning persons, not restrictive of its an-
tecedent, is usually introduced by quien.
Escribo al SeSor Romero, quien esti / am writing to Mr, Romero^ who
en Chile. is in Chile,
Entreg6 las monedaa al abogado. He handed the coins to the lawyer^
quien las pes6 una por una. who weighed them one by one.
a. El cual (or el que) may also be used in nonrestrictive clauses.
Pa86 el gitano, el cual se par6 a yer The gypsy came along and stopped
la tropa. to see the soldiers,
3. In indefinite expressions no antecedent is required for quien.
No tengo a quien dirigirm >. / have nobody to apply to,
£ Hay quien sabe ? Is there anybody who knows ?
Quien mucho abarca poco aprieta. He who takes much in hand grasps
feebly (or accomplishes little).
a,\n expressions corresponding to English he who, they who the one
who, etc., quien may be said to include its own antecedent.
Rodrigo fu^ quien acompaJI6 a la Roderick was the one who accom-
niSa. panied the girl.
4. When the antecedent is necessarily separated from the rela-
tive, quien may show the correct antecedent.
Bolivar es el h^oe vencedor en Bo- Bolivar is the hero, victor at
yacd y en Carabobo quien fund6 Boyacd and Carabobo^ who
a Colombia. founded Colombia,
Note. For uses 3 and 4 of quien the pronoun el que may be
substituted.
Mi reino y mis tesoros dar6 al que / will give my kingdom and my
salve a mi hija. treasures to him who saves my
daughter.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
155
5. As correlatives, qui^n . . . qui^n are used idiomatically as
indefinite pronouns, one , . . another ; in the plural, some . . . others.
Qui6n habla contado los amores de
Napoleon, qui^n la noche del dos
de mayo en Madrid.
Los Pescadores doimian en yarias
actitudesy qui^nes de braces,
qui6nes respaldados.
One had related the love affairs
of Napoleon^ another the night
of the second of May in Madrid,
The fishermen were sleeping in va-^
riotis positions, some face down-
wards, some on their backs.
a. Note that as correlatives qui6n . . . qui^ bear the written accent
167. El coal, el que, are employed as follows :
I. When the relative and the antecedent are separated by other
words, the gender and number of the relative serves to show to
which word it refers.
Examin6 las colgaduras de la al-
coba, las cuales eran de seda.
He yisto a la hija del Se3or Robledo,
la cual est£ ahora en la ciudad.
Don Roqne, nn yiejo parecido a
Bismarck, con el cual nombre se
le conocia.
He examined the hangings of the
bedroom,, which were of silk.
I have seen Mr. Robledo^s daugh-
ter, who is now in the city.
Don Rogue, an old man resembling
Bismarck, by which name he
was known.
2, After prepositions, especially those of more than one syllable
and compound prepositions ; but after a, con, de, en, the simple
relatives que and quien are more frequent
Such are the things about which
I wish your opinion.
The m,other ran into the street, in
the middle of which she met
her daughter.
They put the wounded m^n in the
house in front of which he had
fallen.
From our men were chosen eleven
champions, among whom the
most famous was Diego Garcia
de Paredes.
Tales son las cosas sobre las cuales
quiero su opini6n.
Corri6 la madre a la calle, en medio
de la cual se encontr6 con su
hija.
Metieron al herido en la casa de-
lante de la cual habia caldo.
Escogi^onse de los nuestros once
campeones, entre los cuales el
mis c^lebre era Diego Garcia de
Paredes.
156 SPANISH GRAMMAR
3. The neuter forms lo coal, lo que, refer to clauses or ideas.
These should not be confused with lo que in the sense of that
which or what,
Se le apareci6 el cerdo de San An- There appeared to him St, Antho-
t6ny por lo coal detennin6 me- ny^s swine^ on which account he
terse a g;iiardador de puercos. decided to become a swineherd,
Tal es nuestro famoso CapitAn Ve- Such is our famous Captain Poi-
neno; por lo qne suplico a Vd. son; wherefore I beg you to
tenga paciencia para aguantarlo have patience to put up with
algunas semanas. him a few weeks,
Sns simpatias estayieron por los His sympathies were for the parti-
partidarios de la emancipaci6n sans of American freedom^which
americana, lo que le hizo sospe- made him a suspicious charac-
choso a las autoridades espaSolas. ter to the Spanish authorities.
But
I Es yerdad lo que oigo ? Is that which {what) I hear true f
Repita Yd. lo que dijo. Repeat what he said.
Me conformaba con lo que era ley I complied with that which was a
de la naturaleza, segiin el m^ico. law of nature according to the
doctor,
a. The phrase a lo que means according to^ or as,
a lo que me cont6, according to what he told m.e
a lo que me parece, as it seems to me
b. lo que es, asfor^ as to,
Lo que es el tio Lucas no se marcha. As for uncle Lucas^ he does not go,
168. Cual without the article is correlative with tal.
Tal era su conducta cual era de His conduct was such as was to
esperarse. be expected,
Tal cual colocaci6n. Some position or other,
Tal para cual. Tit for tat,
I. CuAl . . . cual, as correlatives, mean one , , , another \ cuiles
. . . cuiles, some , . . others. See section 166, 5.
En cuanto a armas, cuAl lleyaba As for arms, one wore a saber^
sable, cuAl espadin de etiqueta. another a court rapier,
Tengo muchos libros, cuiles de / have many books, some of his-
historia, cuAles de poesla. tory, others of poetry.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS 157
2. Coal also appears as a relative adverb in the sense of as or like.
Un paje sonrosado y coloradete cual A page blushing and red as a girl,
una muchacha.
a, dial si before clauses, as if\ see section Ji2,d,
169. CuyO| like other Spanish possessive adjectives, agrees in
gender and number with the thing possessed.
Los porteros, cnyo imiforme admi- The gatekeepers^ whose uniform
raba Anselmo. Anselmo admired.
El caballero cuyas cartas ha The gentleman whose letters you
traldo Vd. have brought,
Un billete de loteria con cuya venta A lottery ticket by the sale of
podria obtener unas cuantas pie- which he might get a few
zas de cobre. coppers,
a. When referring to the body or clothing, a quien as indirect object
replaces cuyo.
Por ella btisc6 an lance con el con- For her sake he picked a quarrel
de a qnien ha roto la cabeza. with the county whose head he
has broken.
170. Cuanto takes the gender and number of the noun to which
it refers. It is equivalent to todos los que, todo lo que, etc.
Estoy may malo seg^ la opinion / am very ill according to the
de coantos doctores me han opinion of all the doctors who
yisto. have seen me.
Le hice cuantas preguntas qaise. / asked him all the questions that
(or a^ many questions as) I
wished.
EXERCISE 30
I. He gave the coins which he took from his pocket to the chil-
dren. 2. The gendeman who was sitting at my right rose and
shook hands with my daughter, who had come in a moment be-
fore. 3. To-day I saw my friend's daughter who has been sick.
4. The sexton locked the door near which we were standing. 5. I
gave John the gold coins, who put them in his pocket. 6. We
found ourselves in a handsome parlor, on whose walls was a rich
158 SPANISH GRAMMAR
collection of paintings. 7. '' Don't you see me ? " said Victor, for it
was he who spoke. 8. He had three dogs with which he spent a
great deal of time. 9. On the table he found letters for different
persons, and one whose address said, "To my dear Joseph."
10. The people were very merry : one was singing, another dancing.
11. That land I was telling you about is for sale. 12. The ladies
you spoke to are Mexicans. 13. The father cried when he saw
the ugly building in which his son was a prisoner. 14. A gentie-
man who said he would return soon has just left this card.
15. They gave prizes to all those who won them. 16. We hunted
in the dictionary for all the words which we did not know. 17. The
girl's mother was sick in the hospital, on which account she lived
alone with her uncle. 18. Not many days ago I received a letter
in which a certain friend of mine asked me for money. 19. He
appeared like one who has lost his last dollar. 20. The piano
which she is playing belongs to a man whose daughter has died.
21. It was Mary who selected the cloth. 22. The boy did not
know his lesson, which displeased the teacher very much. 23. He
promised him all the money that he had 24. I know whom you
are talking about, Guzman's wife. 25. All that I have is yours.
26. He asked the maidservant, '' Was it you who rang ? " 27. She
answered, " It was not I who rang." 28. To you I owe all that I
am. 29. The servant under (a) whose care he was gave him a
glass of water. 30. To-day should arrive here the first regiment
of infantry, which spent the night in Gerona. 31. He had written
several works, in which he treated political questions. 32. His son
was Philip the Second, on whose realms the sun never set 33. One
more, another less, all dream of the probability of great wealth.
34. It is all that I have to tell you. 35. He who distributes the
letters to the houses is called the postman. 36. We were very busy
on the day when he came. 37. The prisoner saw the daughter of
the Moorish governor, of whose beauty he had heard.^
^ tenia noticias.
CHAPTER IX
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS
1 71 . i qui^n ? who ? i qu^ ? what ?
I a qui^n ? whom f i cuAl ? which f what ?
I de qui^n ? whose f i coiinto ? how much ?
a. The interrogatives require the written accent to distinguish them
from the relatives.
172. Qui^n (qui^nes) refers only to persons.
I Quito 68 Vd. ? Who are you ?
I Sabe qnito soy ? Do you know who I am ?
I Ahl est&n I — ^ Quitoes ? There they are / — Who f
1. Its objective case is a quito.
I A quito hablaba ? To whom was he talking f
I A quitoes vi6 Vd. ? Whom did you see f
2. Its possessive case is de quito.
I De quito es aquella casa ? Whose house is that ?
a. The phrase de quito is seldom used except in the predicate after
ser.
I De qui^n es la casa que habita Vd. . Whose house do you live in ?
b. The form ciiyo was formerly used as an interrogative, but is now
obsolescent i Ciiyo es el perro ? Whose dog is it ? Better i De quito
68 el perro ?
c. Many English expressions containing whose will be rendered by the
indirect object.
^A quito compr6 Vd. el caballo? Whose horse did you buy? more
strictly From whom did you buy
the horse ?
159
l6o SPANISH GRAMMAR
173. Qu6 is invariable and may be used either as an adjective or
as a pronoun.
I Qui dice ? IVAa^ does he say f
I i)yA libro tiene Vd. ? What book have you f
174. CoAl (coiles) indicates choice.
I Cuil es la f echa ? What is the date ?
I Guiles son los meses del aSo ? What are the months of the year f
I Cnil de los libros prefiere Vd. ? Which of the books do you prefer?
I Ciiil de ustedes le ha yisto ? Which of you have seen him ?
a, Qa6 in contrast with cuAl calls for a definition.
I Qu6 es la geografia ? What is geography f
I Ciiil es la mejor geografia ? Which is the best geography f
b. Though cuAl may be used as an adjective, it is preferable to use it
only as a pronoun: not ^ Guiles amigos yienen? but ^Guiles de los
amigos yienen ? Which fiends are coming f
175. Cuinto (cuinta, -os, -«8).
I Guinto vale ? How much is it worth f
I Guinto cuesta ? How much does it cost f
I Guintos libros tiene la biblioteca ? How many books has the library f
£ Guintas seSoras hay ? How many ladies are there f
176. Interrogative idioms worthy of note are —
1. ^Qu^tal? What kind of?
I Qu^ tal cuarto le dieron a Vd. ? What sort of room did they give
you?
I Qu^ tales son las flores ? What kind of flowers are they ?
a. Perhaps more common in the same sense is i qu6 clase de ?
I Qu6 clase de hombre es el mar- What kind of a man is the mar-
qu^ ? quis ?
I Qu^ clase de gente hay aqui ? What sort of people are there here?
Note, i Qu6 tal ? is also used as a familiar greeting : Hello ^ or more
courteously, ^ Qu6 tal sigue Vd. ? How are you getting on ?
2. ^Qu6 cosa? in place of simple qu6.
I Qu6 cosa quiere ? What does he want ?
INTERHOGATIVES l6l
3. ^ A i^7 for what purpose ? why ?
I A qu6 estas notas Idgubres ? IVhy these mournful notes f
I A qu6 yiene esta orden ? For what purpose is this order?
4. ^Qu^ tanto? in place of cuiuito.
I Qtt6 tanto dista el pueblo ? How far is the town ?
177. Exclamations, i. |Qu6! is used in exclamations,
(i) Before nouns with the meaning of what or what a, without
the indefinite article :
I Qu6 suerte 1 What luck I
\ Qu6 hombre 1 What a man I
a. When an adjective modifies the noun, tan or m&& may intensify
the adjective.
I Qn^ niSa tan guapa 1 What a pretty girl!
I Qn6 pies tan frf os I What cold feet I
I Qu6 tinta mis mala 1 What poor ink /
(ii) Before adjectives or adverbs with the meaning of how :
I Qu^ bueno es Vd. I How good you are /
I Qu6 mal habla I How badly he speaks /
2. I Qu6 de . . . I before nouns means how many,
I Qu6 de pobres hay 1 How many poor there are /
3. I Cuinto I is shortened to cuAn before adjectives and adverbs,
but not before comparatives, verbs or nouns.
I CoAnto sabe I How much he knows /
I CoAntas cosas le diria! How many things I would tell
you /
\ Cttin dichosa es ella 1 How fortunate she is /
I Cu&nto m^ dichosa es su hermana I How much happier is her sister /
I CuAn lejos le parecla todo I How faraway everything seemed
to him /
a, Lo que is sometimes used for coiinto.
I Si €i. supiera lo que le quiero ! (/ wish) he knew how much I
love him /
I Lo que nos divertiremos 1 What a good time we shall have /
1 62 SPANISH GRAMMAR
EXERCISE 31
I. Who are you ? 2. What have you ? 3. Whose is it ? 4. What
is that? 5. Which pencil have you? 6. How much is it worth?
7. How many have you ? 8. To whom were you talking ? 9. Which
door is open ? i o. What time was it ? 11. What a very lucky man !
12. Who is that young man ? 13. Whose hat has John ? 14. How
happy they are I 15. With whom have they lived ? 16. Which are
my books and which are yours ? 17. What is the price ? 18. Which
do you wish ? 19. What kind of a dog is it ? 20. What kind of a
book do you want ? 21. What do you want for it ? 22. For whom
are these letters ? 23. One of these packages, I don't know which,
is for you. 24. Is it true what he says? 25. What is the way to
(de) Cidiz ? 26. What are you talking about ? 27. Which street is
the station on ? 28. What kind of meat will you have ? 29. We
have all kinds of books. Which will you have ? 30. What vegetables
are there on the bill of fare ? 31. Have they told you what he has
done ? 32. Do you know who that gentleman is ? ^^, What language
do you speak ? 34. What kind of money do you want ? 35. How
many five-cent stamps do you want ? 36. How much does he charge ?
37. Whom do you think I met last night? My friend from C6r-
doba. 38. Whom are you waiting for ? 39. How many plans I
How many calculations I 40. What day was that? 41. How glad
I am ! 42. Tell me, which one gave me these flowers ? 43. How
horrible all this is I 44. How easy it is to give advice I
CHAPTER X
INDEFINITE EXPRESSIONS
178. Indefinites. The Spanish indefinite pronouns and adjectives
are
alguien, somebody^ anybody
alguno, some^ any
algOy somethings anything
cosa, thing
mucho, much
muchoSy many
unoSy som^e^ a pair
imo y otro, both
ambosy los dos, both
otro, another
algirno que otro, occasional
cada, each
todo, every s all
tal, such
nadie, nobody
ningimo, no^ none
nada, nothing
otra cosa, something else
pocOy little; un poco, a little
^ocos, /ewy algunos, a few
unos cuantosy a few
lino u otro, either
ni uno ni otro, neither
el otro, the other; los demis, the others
ajeno, another^ s^ others'*
cada uno 1 ,
, yeach one
cada cnal j
un tal, a certain; el tal, the said
These wordis may be conveniently studied from the English point
of view as in the following sections.
179. Some — Any — No — Not A. i. The absence of the defi-
nite article before a noun denoting substances implies a part of the
substance.
I Tiene Vd. pan ?
I Quiere Vd. legumbres ?
Have you any bread?
Do you wish some vegetables ?
a. The negative of the above is expressed by the negative verb.
No tengo pan. / have no bread.
I do not wish any vegetables,
163
No quiero legumbres.
1 64 SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. Alguno, sotne\ ningttno, ;i^; or no . . . algano (after the
noun).
Algiin dia. Some day,
Ningiin hombre. No man.
No yeo hombre alguno. / see no man; or / donH see a
single man, .
3. nnos, some ; more indefinite than algunos ; often of things in
pairs.
Unos ojos muy grandes. A pair of very large eyes.
XJnos paiptalones. A pair of trousers.
4. Lo, la, I08, las, before hay and other verbs expressing parti"
tive ideas as in i, signify some.
I Hay manzanas ? Si, las hay en Are there any apples f Ves, there
la mesa. are some on the table.
^ Tiene Vd. pan ? Lotengo. Have you any bread? I have
some.
Con su seSora (los que la tenlan). With their wives {those who had
one).
5. Alguno que otro and uno que otro mean occasional ^ some or other.
Alguno que otro pretezto. Some pretext or other.
Alguna que otra mirada. An occasional glance.
i yapor hace la carrera de Am^ My steamer goes to America only
rica s61o una que otra yez. occasionally.
180. Some of — None of .
Algunos de mis amigos. Some of my friends.
Ninguno (ningunos) de los libros. Not one (none) of the books,
181. Somebody — Nobody.
Alguien yiene. Somebody is coming.
Nadie sabe. Nobody knows.
a. Alguien and nadie cannot be used before limiting prepositional
phrases as in section 180.
182. Something — Nothing, dgo — nada.
Mds yale algo que nada. Something is better than nothing.
See section 210, 3, for adverbial use.
INDEFINITES
165
a, Algnna cosa and una cosa are used for somethings ninguna cosa
for nothings in some expressions.
I Quiere Vd. que le diga una cosa ? Do you wish me to tell you some-
thing ?
Note. When ningimo, nadie, or nada or any other negative is used
after the verb, it is necessary to put no before it See section 212, 2.
No tengo nada^
Nada tengo j
No conozco a nadie.
Nadie me conoce.
No ha adquirido ninguna cosa.
183. Else.
(Hra cosa.
Nada mis.
/ have nothing,
I know nobody.
Nobody knows me.
He has purchased nothing.
Something else.
Nothing else.
184. Much — Many, mucho, muchos,
Mucho aziicar. Much sugar,
Muchos hombres. Many men,
a. Very much is muchisimo.
b. Similar to English a great deal, plenty ^ etc. are such expressions
as the following :
They executed many influential
persons.
In the Congress was observed the
absence of many members.
The boy gave John plenty of
blows.
gran parte: Fusilaron a gran parte
de personajes influyentes.
gran n&mero: En el Congreso se ha
notado la ansencia de gran nii-
mero de diputados.
una pardon de: El chico di6 a Juan
una porci6n de golpes.
185. Little — Tew, poco^ pocos.
a little^ un poco de
' algunos
unos cuantos
afew< . , ...
-^ un par de {couple)
cuatro (see section 149, 3)
poca leche, little milk algunas palabras, a few words
pocas naranjas, few oranges unos cuantos limones, a few lemons
on poco de dinero, a little money un par de horas, a couple ^ hours
1 66 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a, A little as an adverb is more frequently un poquito : Hablo espaSol
un poquito, / speak Spunish a little.
186. Both, ambos, los dos, las dos, uno y otro.
Ambas manos. Both hands.
Traiga Vd. pescado para los dos. Bring fish for {us) both.
Uno y otro sexo. Both sexes.
a. For both . . . and, as correlatives, see section 236.
187. Either . . . Neither, uno u otro, ni uno ni otro, and their
declined forms.
Uno u otro puede yenir. Either may come.
No saben la yerdad ni uno ni otro. Neither knows the truth.
a. For .the number of the verb see section 261, d.
b. Neither . . . nor, as correlatives, ni . . . ni ; either ... ^r, ... ;
see section 236.
188. Other.
1. El otro, the other.
2. Otro, another (dXyffdcys without the indefinite article) : otra vez,
another time, again, encore.
3. Los demis, the others (i.e. the remainder).
Cuando mi padre sali6 del cuarto, When my father left the room, the
los dem&s me hicieron muchas others c^ked me many questions.
preguntas.
4. Ajeno, another^ s, other's.
en casa ajena, in another'' s house lo ajeno, other people^ s property
5. With numerals and adjectives of quantity, otro precedes.
Otros diez. Ten others.
Otro tanto. As much m,ore.
Otros muchos. As many others.
Van cuatro cinco seSoras y otras Four or five ladies are going and
tantas seSoritas. as many misses.
INDEFINITES 1 67
189. Each : coda (invariable).
Cada uno or cada cual. EcLch one,
Cada uno de nosotros. Each one of us,
CallamoSy quedando cada coal con We were silent^ each one having
8US ideas. his own ideas.
190. Each Other. This idea is expressed by the plural of the
reflexive verb. (See section 257 for conjugation.)
Nos yeremos. We shall see each other.
Se odian. They hate each other.
By adding uno y otro, uno a otro, uno de otro, and the declined
forms (also with the definite article, el uno el otro), great precision
may be obtained.
Se temen el imo al otro. They fear each other {one man
another).
Se aman unos a otras. They love each other {men and
women).
No se recuerdan la una de la otra. They do not remember each other
{one woman another).
191. Every, i. Todo (without article): toda mujer, every woman.
2. In expressions of time with the article and plural : todos los
sibddos, every Saturday ; todas las noches, every night.
3. In phrases expressing frequency cada is used.
cada diez minutos, every ten cada dos horas, every two hours
minutes
4. Todo el mundo, everybody.
a. Before a relative, todo alone: todo el que cae en nuestro poder,
everybody who falls into our power.
5. Todo (neuter), everything.
a. When todo is the direct object of a verb, lo before the verb indi-
cates it : Mi padre lo perdi6 todo, My father lost everything.
192. All : todo (with the definite article between it and the noun).
todo el dla, all day toda la casa, the whole house
todos los seSores, all the men todo Madrid, all Madrid
1 68
SPANISH GRAMMAR
193. Such : tal (without the indefinite article), semejante.
Tal dia como hoy.
Tales son las cosas.
Semejante disparate.
No he Tisto a semejante hombre.
Such a day as to-day.
Such are the things.
Such a blunder.
I have not seen such a man {as he).
194. A Certain, i. Cierto (without the indefinite article): cierto
hombre, a certain man,
2. Un tal Garcia, a certain Garcia, one Garcia,
3. No 8^ qu6 (lit. I do not know what) : no s^ qu6 dia de agosto,
on a certain day in August
195. The Said : el tal, dicho, refendo.
el tal L6peZy the said Lopez
la tal comedia, the said comedy
dicho principe, the said prince
las referidas madre e hija, the said
mother and daughter
196. Indefinite Subject. When the doer of an action is indefinite,
Spanish uses —
1. The reflexive verb. (See section 272.)
2. The third person plural of the verb.
Dicen.
Llaman a la puerta.
They say.
There is a knock at the door.
3. Uno; sometimes persona, in the negative; less frequently,
hombre and gente.
En un instante puede uno coger
una gran rama de yioletas.
I No te acuerdas de uno que tenia
un estanco en la calle de Pere-
grinos ?
No qued6 persona a yida.
Llegar hombre a casa 7 no poder
subir a su cuarto, no es cosa de
risa para gente cansada.
In a moment one can gather a big
bunch of violets,
DonH you, remember a m^an who
had a tobacco shop in Peregrinos
Street ?
Nobody remained alive.
For a man to reach home and not
be able to get into his room is
no joke for a tired person.
INDEFINITES 1 69
4. Whenever a fictitious name is preferable, as John Doe, or
Mr. or Miss So-and-so, Spanish uses fulano, Don Fulano de Tal,
mengano, or zutano.
Fulano y zutana han preguntado Mr, So-and-so and Miss So-and-so
por Vd. have inquired for you,
197. Ever joined to adverbs and pronouns is quiera, present
subjunctive of querer.
1. Dondequiera que iba, wherever he used to go,
2. Quienquiera que sea, whoever it may be,
3. Cualquiera (cualesquiera), any in sense that does not require
negation, any you please.
Es un modo de vivir como otro It is a way of earning one's living
cualquiera. like any other,
Cualquiera de los dos. Either one of the two,
a. As an adjective cualquiera may drop the final vowel before a noun,
cualquier dia, any day de cualquier modo, in some fashion
b, un cualquiera, a person of no account^ a nobody.
The plural of this expression is unos cualquieras.
EXERCISE 32
I. Have you any money ? Very little. 2. We have no Spanish
books. 3. I wish some white paper and black ink. 4. I am going
to buy some good trousers. 5. No woman knows. 6. There is
something which I do not understand. 7. Somebody is knocking
at the door. 8. It is none of my acquaintances. 9. Some of the
Frenchmen rose. 10. It is nothing. 11. Has anybody come ? No,
nobody. 12. Many are called but few are chosen. 13. I bought a
few pounds of meat and some vegetables. 14. I will take a little
black coffee. 15. We had neither ink nor paper. 16. Neither has
come, because both are sick. 17. After these letters, I received
four others and wrote as many more. 18. He sang the same song
many other nights. 19. He opened the windows and rested both
elbows on the silL 20. Every afternoon I walk for a couple of
I70 SPANISH GRAMMAR
hours. 21. Mother and son embrace each other. 22. We have much
to say to each other. 23. The gentlemen do not know each other.
24. None of the girls understood all that they read. 25. Everybody
says it; nobody knows if it is true. 26. He thinks that he knows
everything. 27. Such a thing has never been seen.^ 28. There are
no such books in the library. 29. Every boy is here, none is ab-
sent 30. He has not slept all^ night. 31. A certain gentleman
used to come here every Monday. 32. A certain Suarez came to
see me. 33. The said Suarez was another acquaintance of mine.
34. On a certain day of* last month there arrived letters for each
one of them. 35. Where can one find a good restaurant.? There
is one on Burgos street. 36. Some one is ringing the bell. Some
huckster, I suppose. * 37. Where are there some sheets for the bed,
Mary? There are some in the closet. 38. Are there any pillow-
cases there ? There are some also. 39. That is luck and nothing
else. 40. Either of these books will be useful to anybody who is
studying Spanish. 41. Other people's money does not interest me.
42. Each boy has his own seat. 43. A large part of the audience
remained standing, but the rest sat down. 44. I met our friend So-
and-so this morning. He knows nothing of what has occurred.
45. Every one who reads Spanish knows something about Cervan-
tes' Don Quixote. 46. I have read to-day's paper without finding
anything about the marriage. 47. Have you anything pretty in
your store ? 48. He does not owe anything to anybody.*
^ jamdd se ha visto. ^ del.
^ Insert en before alL ^ seri. See section 266.
* Say nothing to nobody.
CHAPTER XI
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
198. Methods of Address, i. The forms of the second person
singular are used in addressing members of the family, intimate
friends, children, or pet animals. Foreign speakers will always use
usted with the third person singular of the verb, as this is the form
employed by persons who desire to be courteous to each other.
a, Usted is derived from yuestra xnffi^^^ your grace. Other similar
forms are Usia, used in addressing magistrates, lower officers of the
army, etc. ; Vuecencia, to ambassadors, members of the king's cabinet,
etc. The different degrees of nobility also have their proper form of
address or tratamiento.
2. The second plural, vosotros, is primarily the plural of td;
but it is sometimes employed in addressing persons collectively,
who singly would be addressed by usted : for example, in public
speeches, in friendly letters addressed to two or more persons, and
in public advertisements. .
VosotroSy hijos de la ReToluci6n, You^ sons of the Revolution^ are
yenfs a EspaSa. coming to Spain.
a. The older form tos, instead of vosotros, is still found in prayers,
or in literature to represent ancient manners.
Vos, SeSor, que sacasteis de la nada You^ Lord, that drew this world
cste mundo. from chaos.
I Eh ! Maestro . . . vos os burldis. Ah! Master^ you are jesting.
b, Nos for nosotros is used by sovereigns and magistrates, and in reli-
gious forms.
Nos el rey. We the king,
199. It. I. As the subject of a verb, // is usually unnecessary
in Spanish ; llueve, it is raining. When necessary, it will be the
171
172 SPANISH GRAMMAR
masculine €1 or the feminine ella, according to the gender of the
noun represented. Referring to an idea, it is neuter (section 206).
2. Instead of it after a preposition, adverbs of place are some-
times found.
Le di6 una cajita. Alii mir6 la He gave her a little box. The young
joyen esposa con asombro. wife looked at it with surprise,
a. This use of adverbs of place is also extended to persons.
Se me echa encima. He throws himself on me,
De pronto se me puso delante. Suddenly he stood before me,
200. Le — Lo — La — Lea. The objective pronouns of the third-
person singular are used somewhat indiscriminately by some writers.
1. Le may be the direct object form referring to things.
No hay lazo alguno que conmigo te There is no bond that binds you to
ligue ; y si le hay, yo le desato mej and if there is any, I un-
y le rompo. bind it and break it,
2. La and las may be the indirect object feminine.
Cuando la visits, estaba alii su When I visited her^her cousin was
primo y nada la dije. there and I said nothing to her,
a. La and las are the proper forms for use with the reflexive verb
when used impersonally. See section 273.
Se la admira. One admires her; or, She is admired,
Se las ye yenir. They are seen coming,
3. Lea may be direct object plural referring to persons.
Les f orzaba a partir la poca seguri- The insecurity of the beach com-
dad de la playa. pelted them to depart.
I Pobrecitos niSos ! Todo el mundo Poor children I Everybody knows
sabe que les adoro. that I adore them.
Note. The student should not imitate the constructions described in
this section, but should be guided by the following :
'him ox you, direct and indirect la, her, direct object feminine
le ^ object masculine les, to them, indirect object mascu-
^ to her, indirect object feminine line and feminine
lo, // or him, direct object masculine los, them, direct object masculine
PERSONAL PRONOUNS 173
201. Indefinite Feminine. The feminine of pronouns often has
indefinite force. The form most frequently occurring is la.
Ese hombre la echa de gracioso. That man pretends to be funny.
La (or las) pagari. He will pay for it (that v&^get his
punishment),
I Buena la hlcimos ! We gave it to them good,
Entonces seri ella. Then will come the pinch.
En ^stas 7 en otras Uegamos a In the meantime we reached
Manresa. Manresa,
EUos harin de las suyas. They will play some of their
tricks.
202. The Prepositional Forms of the personal pronouns are the
only ones which can be used with verbs that require a preposition
before the direct object.
El caf^ estd en la plaza, y en ^1 en- The cafi is on the square^ and we
tramos a refrescamos. entered it for refreshment,
Se ca86 con ella. He married her.
No me acuerdo de ^1. / do not remember him,
Ella, al reparar en mi, irgtti6 alti- When she noticed me, she raised
yamente la cabeza. her head haughtily.
a. The prepositional forms are often called disjunctive^ because
they are not directly dependent on the verb.
203. Redundant Pronoun. Whenever the pronouns le, les, or
se are vague in meaning, they may be made definite by the em-
ployment of the disjunctive (prepositional) forms.
Le llama a Vd. He is calling you.
Les enyiaremos a ellos las tarjetas. We shall send the cards to them,
Se las entreg6 a ella. He delivered them to her.
I. For the sake of emphasis or contrast, the same construction
is frequent with the other personal pronouns.
Esas cosas me hacen mis daSo a Those things hurt me more than
mi que a ti. you.
A mi me gnsta yiajar pero a mi / like to travel, but my mother
madre no le gnsta. does not like to.
174 SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. This double-pronoun construction has been extended to nouns.
Whenever for emphasis the direct or indirect object precedes the
verb, the corresponding pronoun is also usually employed.
Le envi6 a Aste un regalo. He sent the latter a present,
A las seSoras les mand6 ramos de To the ladies he sent bouquets of
flores. flowers.
La primera muSeca que tuye me la The first doll that I had he gave
di6 ^1. me.
Eso te lo habrla dicho tu tla. Your aunt probably told you that.
a. The neuter indefinite pronoun todo, when the object of a verb, must
always be represented by lo.
Mi padre lo sabe todo. My father knows all.
Quiero conf esArselo todo. I wish to confess everything to you.
Frutas, flores, monies, lagos, rlos, Fruits^ flowers^ mountains^ lakes ^
todo lo habia en esta tierra rivers^ there was everything in
bendita. this happy land.
204. Ethical Dative. There is sometimes used a redundant pro-
noun, indirect object form, of the same person and number as the
subject. It appears to give a slight degree of emphasis to the person.
Me lo comer^. / shall eat it.
Me la he encontrado muri^ndose. I found her dying.
Hemos sacado a esa ni2a del con- We have taken that girl from the
yento y nos la Ueyamos a convent and are escorting her to
Madrid. Madrid.
205. Mismo lends emphasis to a personal pronoun like the Eng-
lish self When mismo emphasizes the subject, the pronoun must
be expressed.
El mismo sali6 a recibirme. He himself came out to receive me.
Lo har6 yo mismo. / shall do it myself.
Prometl a mis amigos yolver pron- I promised my friends that I would
to y a mi mismo hacer la yisita return soon^ and to myself that
definitiva. / would make the visit the last,
a. Propio, own^ also intensifies a noun or pronoun :
Mis propias manos. My own hands.
El propio rey lo hizo. The king himself did it.
Por si propio (or mismo). On one's own account.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS 175
206. Neuter Pronouns, i. The neuter pronoun has the forms
Subject Direct Object Indirect Object Prepositional
ello lo le ello
2. As subject the neuter pronoun is found mainly in the expres-
sion ello es (or fu^) que.
Ello es que no sabemos nada de lo The fact is that we do not know
que hace. anything of what he does,
3. The neuter forms refer to phrases or ideas without gender.
^Cree Vd. lo que dice? Ya lo Do you believe what he saysf
creo. / surely do believe it.
^ Qu^ mal hay en ello ? What harm is there in it ?
Son las seis de la tarde. Lo ha It is six o"^ clock in the afternoon,
dicho el xeloj de la catedral. The cathedral clock has said it,
Cierta mujer en traje de baile. A certainwontan in evening dress,
I Qni^n era ? Lo ignoribamos. Who was she f We did not
know,
Conii6 demasiado. For ello tuyo He ate too much. On that account
que sufrir una indigesti6n. he had an attack of indigestion,
4. After the verb ser, in the predicate, lo refers to the whole
phrase rather than to a single word. In such cases no word aj>-
pears necessary in English; consequently, the student must be
careful to employ the pronoun lo when required by Spanish usage.
I Son hn^rfanas ? Lo son. Are the girls orphans ? They are,
Irene fu^ una Venus, es decir, lo Irene was a Venus; that is, she
ixii mis tarde. was later,
a. Sometimes the English word corresponding to lo is so.
Parece viejo sin serlo. He seems old without being so.
No bien deseaba una cosa (a yeces No sooner did I desire a thing,
8indecirlo),meloproporcionaba. sometimes without saying so,
than he got it for me,
b. If the pronoun refers to a definite person it takes the gender and
number of the noun to which it refers or may be omitted.
^Es Vd. la seSora de Gonzillez? Are you Mrs, Gonzdlez? I am^
Para seryir a Vd., la soy. at your service.
176 SPANISH GRAMMAR
5. Whenever a second verb in a clause refers to a foregoing
predicate noun, adjective, or adverb, it is customary to insert lo.
Si tal cnal recibo es falso no lo If such and such a receipt is false
68. or not,
6. Instead of repeating a verb, one may substitute hacer and
the neuter lo.
Todos ezaminaron el bicho, y yo All examined the bug, and after-
despu^s tambi^n lo hice. wards I too did so,
Ella me iiiYit6 a sentarme en el She invited me to sit on the sofa,
Boii y lo hizo tambi^i. and she did so too,
207. Position. The remarks about the position of the personal
pronouns (sections 81 ; 6S,a\ 91) require the following additions :
1. As a matter of style an imemphatic pronoun rarely begins a
sentence except in conversation, but is appended to the verb.
Seryfalo en silencio. She served him in silence,
Abri^ronse las iglesias. The churches were opened,
2. When several verbs occur in series, if one of them has a pro-
noun it is appended to the verb.
Sac6 papel del bolsillo, redacts una He took paper from his pocket, com-
carta, ptisole el sobre, peg61o y posed a letter, put it in an enve-
echdse a reir. lope,sealedit, and began to laugh,
3. The pronoun may be attached to the auxiliary of a compound
verb, but never to the past participle, though this is found in older
writers and occasionally even now.
Habianos yisto. He had seen us,
Siente haberle ezpuesto a perder la She regrets having exposed you to
yida. lose your life,
Despu^ de haberla leido y hechote After having read it and crossed
cruces. yourself,
4. With the verbs poder, querer, deber, ir, salir, volver a, haber
de, and other similar verbal expressions, the pronoun may stand
before the auxiliary verb or be attached to the dependent infinitive.
8e lo puedo enviar a Vd. 1 , j -^ u
^ , .- , „, > I can send tt to you,
Puedo enyiarselo a Vd. j
PERSONAL PRONOUNS 177
jMe qniereVd. Tender la casa?^ „,.,, ., ,, , ^
/^i Tra ^ 1 ^ r Will you sell me the house f
I Quiere Vd. yenderme la casa ? J *^
Les ynelYO a suplicar. / beg you again,
Inclin6 la frente. Pronto yolyi6 a He bowed his forehead. Soon he
alzarla. raised it again,
I Ddnde se ha de colocar Eduardo ? Where is Edward to put himself?
La niSa no ha de negarme la obe- The girl shall not refuse me obedi-
dienda. ence.
5. In the progressive (periphrastic) conjugation (see section
258), the pronouns may stand before the auxiliary or be attached
to it or to the present participle.
La costa se iba alejando'
fbase alejando la costa
La costa iba alejAndose
^ The coast kept getting farther away.
EXERCISE 33
I. This is a large house and many people live in it 2. My
daughters also like very much to go to the theater. 3. You may
believe that^ now, but you may change your ideas. 4. Does that
price suit you ? Yes, it suits me very well. 5. O ! Valencia I I
never found anything comparable to it 6. This book I dedicate
to my parents. 7. He wished to send to the hotel for my valise ;
finally I consented to it. 8. The fact is that I should not have
bought myself this fur coat 9. Nobody could be more satisfied
than I was. 10. He was only happy when he was talking, and he
did it very well. 11. The only business that had turned out well
was the steamer business, and that he had inherited from his father.
12. They have also told me that his uncle and aunt are rich ; but
they are not 13. If my brother-in-law should not marry, that tide
would be for my son: Isabella the First herself gave it 14. But
I was happy, I could not, conceal it. 15. On hearing me, he turned
around and pushed the cash drawer to close it 16. Generally he
listened to nobody but himself. 17. You may count on me ; I will
1 Put first in sentence. See section 203, 2.
178 SPANISH GRAMMAR
be there. 18. It was now nine o'clock, as I ascertained by^ my
watch. 19. I am going to tell him that you have arrived. 20. Tell
him that I hoped to have met him at the station. 21. The fact was
that the train arrived two hours late.^ 22. When the poor man cut
the bread his knife struck* a coin which was inside it 23. That
fellow thinks* he is handsome. 24. All confessed that Robert was
brave when it was necessary to be so. 25. She loved him more
than he did*^ her. 26. Pepita loved D. Gumersindo as the man to
whom she owed everything. 27. Is the man rich ? I do not think
so myself ; if he is, he must be a miser. 28. I have heard the name
but I cannot remember it. If I could do so, I would tell it to you.
29. The coins are mine and I am going to prove it, I tell you
again, the old man shouted to those who were in front of him.
30. It seems difficult to do this but it is not. 31. Many things at-
tracted the good man's* attention and he tried to see most of them
during his short visit. 32. To his wife he brought a diamond ring,
and to his daughters he gave presents of money. They said so
themselves. 33. There are things which one knows without having
seen them. 34. Soldiers, you owe it to yourselves, to your families,
to your country, to bear yourselves as brave men. 35. Having
dressed myself hurriedly, I forgot to put it on. 36. Henry asked ''^
Prieto and Co. for^ a position and they have promised it to him,
37. Hereupon he took out one of the telegrams which he had re-
ceived and read it to them. — I am glad of it. 38. My dear brother
and sister, I thank you a thousand times for the present. You know
yourselves what a pleasure it gives to receive such a reminder.
1 en. ^ con dos horas de retraso. ^ dar con. ^ See section 201.
* Omit * Indirect object ; put first in the sentence. ' solidtar.
CHAPTER XII
ADVERBS
208. Adverbs of Place.
ahl, there (near . the person ad-
dressed) .
- \ there (at a distance), ^^;^d?<?r
adentrOy «//V^z/^ ^(implying move-
afuera, without] ment)
adelante, forward
attds, backwards
Interrogative,
abajo, down
arriba, up
cerca, near
lejos, /ar
donde, where
enfrente, opposite
dentrOy inside
fuera, outside^ out of doors
delante, in front
detrdSy behind
ddnde, where
a, Aqul and alll are more precise and defined, while acA and alU have
a more general meaning : Tengo el dinero aqul en el bolsillo, / have
the money here in my pocket ; acd would be incorrect in this sentence.
Alii implies a definite spot, while alU denotes distant places : alU en
Cuba, there in Cuba ; alU, the invisible world ; acA, this world.
AcA is frequently used with venir: Ven acA, Come here.
With estar, acA refers to the house in which one is speaking or writing :
AcA todos estamos bien, We are all well here.
Note also Trae acA, Bring (it) here,
AcA denotes present time, allA the remote past ; de ayer acA, now ;
allA en el siglo de oro, then in the golden age.
b. Aqui, acA, alll, allA, and ahl may be preceded by prepositions and
followed by other adverbs of place.
de alll a poco, a short time from
then, thereafter
de alll en adelante, henceforward
por aqul, around here, in this di-
rection
por ahl, near you, that way
allA arriba, up there
alll fuera, outside, out there
aqui dentro, in here
179
l8o SPANISH GRAMMAR
c. Adverbs of direction are preceded by the preposition hacia after
verbs of motion.
Viene hacia aqui. He is coming this way,
Cayd hacia atrAs. He fell backwards,
Marcharon hada adelante. They marched forward.
Mirando hacia arriba. Looking upward,
d. The neuter article combines with adverbs of place in numerous
expressions.
lo de atrAsy the rear lo de delante atrAs, hind side fore- •
lo de arriba abajo, upside down most
e. Parte forms adverbial phrases equivalent to English compounds with
where ; these are preceded by different prepositions according to sense.
Dies estA en todaa partes. God is everywhere.
Lo busqn^ per todas partes. / searched for it everywhere.
No yamos a ninguna parte. We are not going anywhere,
f The interrogative d6nde is usually defined by prepositions. This
preposition often appears at the end of the clause in English.
^ A ddnde va Vd. ? Where are you going (to) f
I en d6nde ? i per ddnde ? ^ de d6nde ?
209. Adverbs of Time.
ahora'\ aun ^ ^ ^.7/
ya r^^ todavlaF^'''^'^^^
entoncesy then siempre, always
ayer, yesterday despu^s, afterwards
hoy, to-day luego, next, after
maSana, to-morrow antes, before^ rather
anoche, last night temprano, early
pasado maSana, day after to- tarde, late
morrow jamAs, ever
antea3rer, day before yesterday nunca, never
pronto, soon mientras, in the meantime^ while
Interrogative, coAndo, when
a. Adverbs of time and direction are generally placed after nouns.
aSos antes, years before mar afuera, out to sea
meses despu^s, months afterward tierra adentro, inland
escalera airiba, up stairs boca abajo,y^^^ downwards
ADVERBS l8l
b, MiBmo intensifies adverbs of time and place.
ahora mismo, right now esta noche mismo, this very night
ahi mismo, right there aytt mismo, only yesterday
c, Ya with past tenses means already :
Ya han yenido. They have already come.
With present tenses, now :
Bra muy rico, pero ya es pobre. He was very rich, but now he is
poor.
With future tenses, at another time :
Ya nos yeremoa. We shall see each other later,
Ya is frequently used, however, to intensify statements.
Ya estamoa. Here we are, Ya se ye. Now it is evident,
Ya entiendo. Now I comprehend, Ya lo creo. / should say so,
I Ya yoy I / am coming (note the use of ir instead of venir).
^ Andr^ no yuelye ? Ya, ya tarda. Andrew doesn V return ? He is
very late,
(i) Ya no means no longer,
Los que ya no pueden trabajar. Those who can no longer work.
No estA ya en el mundo. He is no longer in the world,
(2) Ya . . . ya introduces alternatives.
Ya de dla, ya de noche. By day or by night.
See section 278, 4 for use of subjunctive mood.
d, The English adverb long referring to time is mucho tiempo.
MAs tiempo. Longer,
I Cuinto tiempo dura ? How long does it last f
Demasiado tiempo. Too long,
Hace tanto tiempo. // is so long ago,
Poco tiempo ha. A short time ago,
(i) Note the idiom tardar en + infinitive (lit. to delay in).
No tardari mucho en yenir. He will not be long in coming, or
// will not be long before he comes,
Tard6 poco en llegai. He arrived in a short time, or He
soon arrived.
1 82 SPANISH GRAMMAR
e. Coando (unaccented) and mientras are also relative conjunctive
adverbs introducing clauses, and sometimes have prepositional force.
cuando las elecciones, at the time mientraajdyenes, when youn^ men
of the elections
Coando also enters into various adverbial phrases.
cuando mils, at most de cuando en CMan<dLOffrom time to
cuando menos, at least time
210. Adverbs of Quantity or Degree.
apenas, scarcely mucho, much; muy, very
bastante, enough poco, little
casi, almost mis, more
demasiado, too much, too menos, less
tanto, tan, so much loAxto^full well, enough
Interrogative, cuinto, how much
1. Muy, the shortened form of mucho, stands before adverbs
and adjectives (except comparatives, but including past participles),
and is never used alone.
Muy bien. Very well,
Un azul muy claro. A very light blue,
Un azul mucho mils claro. A much lighter blue,
Estoy muy agradecido. / am much obliged,
Parece muy cansado. SI, mucho. He seems very tired. Yes, very,
a. Muy never modifies mucho. The absolute superlative is muchlsimo.
2. Mucho, being also an adjective, appears for very in those idio-
matic expressions in which Spanish has a noun corresponding to
an English adjective.
Tiene mucho f rio y mucha hambre. He is very cold a?td hungry,
Es mucha verdad. // is very true.
3. The indefinite pronouns algo and nada are also used as ad-
verbs of degree.
Yo soy nada curiosa. / am not at all curious,
Su cabeza era algo calya. His head was somewhat bald.
ADVERBS 183.
211. Adverbs of Manner.
asi, thusy so bien, well alto, loud despacio, slowly
quedo, softly , gently mal, badly , ill bajo, low de prisa,,/^/
Interrogative, c6mo, how
a. From adjectives, adverbs of manner are formed by adding mente
to the feminine singular.
seguro — seguramente, safely
habilisimo — habillsimamentey very skillfully
feliz — felizmente, happily
With two or more adjectives mente is used only once.
Escribe mis correcta que elegante- He writes more correctly than
mente. elegantly.
1. Como (unaccented) has relative force, as. For its use in com-
parisons see section 50.
Asistla a la boda como testigo. He attended the wedding as a
witness.
2. Recientemente, shortened to reci^n, is common with past
participles.
el reci^n Uegado, the new arrival loaTeci6ncsis&dos,the newly wedded
3. Adverbial expressions of manner are also formed by the
phrases de una manera, de un modo.
de una manera encantadora, in a de este modo, in this manner
. charming fnanner
4. From adjectives and nouns of nationality, adverbial expres-
sions are formed as follows .
a la francesa, /;/ the French style al estilo de Ja^n, in the fashion of
arroz a la yalenciana, rice in Va- fadn
lencian style vestida a lo nistico, dressed in
al estilo g6tico, in the Gothic style rustic style
212. Adverbs of Affirmation and Negation.
no, no justo, right
ai, yes claro, evidently
tampoco, neither \ eso no I no^ indeed!
ni . . . ni, neither . . . nor \ eso si I yes^ indeed!
ni siquiera, not even si tal, surely
1 84 SPANISH GRAMMAR
1. No precedes the verb and the objective personal pronouns.
7o no le yf . / did not see him,
A mi no me gusta dedr. / do not like to say,
Pedro no ha yenido. Peter has not come,
2. No must precede the verb when other negative words follow it
No conozco a nadie. / know nobody.
No tengo nada. « / have nothing.
No yeo a ninguno de mis amigos. I see none of my friends,
Pablo no lo tiene tampoco. Paul hasn 7 it either,
a. But if the negatives precede the verb, no is omitted.
Nada tengo. / have nothing.
A nadie conozco. / know nobody,
3. No usually follows adverbs and pronouns when used without a verb.
ahora no, not now " yo no, not I
todayia no, not yet a mi no, not to me
4. If a second verb, noun, or adjective is included in the negation, ni
precedes it. No era joven ni muy yiejo. He was not young nor very old.
This is equivalent to omitting one of the correlatives ni . . . ni.
No tengo libros franceses ni es-
/ have neither French nor Span--
ish books.
paSoles.
No tengo libros ni franceses ni es-
pa&oles.
a. Note also that the adverb ni is required even when the negation
is merely implied.
Una noche sin luna ni estrellas. A night without moon or stars,
I Qu^ tienes que partir en mi ri- Whdt concern have you with my
queza ni en mi pobreza ? wealth or my poverty ?
5. After the adjective todo the negative is frequently suppressed.
Kn toda la noche he podido dormir. / have not been able to sleep the
whole night.
En toda mi yida he yisto semejante In my whole life I have never
cosa. seen such a thing.
a. The last expression often omits toda, hence en mi yida is a com-
mon expression for never,
£n mi yida lo hice. / never did it.
ADVERBS 185
Similar expressions are en dlas de Dios, en los dlas de la yida,
meaning never,
6. Si often intensifies a statement, especially in contrast to a preceding
negative.
Bn cnanto a los muebles, no costo- As for the furniture^ not costly
808 pero 8f'c5modo8 y de forma but comfortable and of elegant
elegante. shape,
^Nos pagarin todo lo que nos Will they pay us all that they
deben? Todo, eso si. owe us f All of it, surely.
Lo que si le ruego. ThaVs what I do ask him-,
213. Adverbs of Doubt.
acaso
tal Tez , apenas '^ , ,,
. - Y perhaps . > hardly
qniza ^ ^ apenas si j -^
quizes
1. The subjunctive mood often appears with these adverbs, see
section 278, 5. Acaso tenga Vd. la culpa, Perhaps you are to blame,
2. In questions acaso implies improbability or shows that a neg-
ative answer is expected.
I Acaso lo s^ yo ? How do I know ?
I Van acaso a saberlo ? How are they going to know f
214. Intensification. The following methods of intensifying or
modifying the meaning of words and statements exist.
1. Absolute superlative of the adverb, or the use of sobre manera
or sumamente ; sumo, -a, before nouns.
lejos, lejisimo, very far
sumamente ^ -,
(-dificil, extremely difficult
sobre manera j ' y m
con suma gracia, with the utmost grace
2. Si que.
Bntonces si que no nos perdonarian. Then surely they would not par-
don us,
Sso si que no. JVot that by any means,
Ahora si que hueles, y no a ambar. J^ow verily you do smelly and not
of amber.
1 86
SPANISH GRAMMAR
3. Que.
I Socorro 1 | que me matan I
I TlOy que te espero I
4. Si.
Si no ye, la pobre.
Si no parece la misma casa.
I Que si lo 8^ 1
5. Tan — Tanto.
Un instante, tan s61o un instante.
I Qu4 dia tan hermoso 1
Ni tan siquiera.
Tengo tanto gusto en conocerle.
6. Bastante.
Hace bastante frio.
£s bastante rico.
La monotonia de mi yida empieza
a fastidiarme bastante.
7. Repetition.
Asi asi es como se castiga a los
pillos.
Casi, casi estoy tentado a pensarlo.
I Nada, nada 1
I DigOy digo 1
Help / they are killing me /
Uncle, J am waiting for you /
Why, she doesn 7 see, poor girl,
Jt really does not seem like the
same house,
J should say I do know it.
A moment, only just a moment.
What a fine day /
Not even,
I am so pleased to make your ac-
quaintance.
It is rather cold.
He is quite rich.
The monotony of my life begins
to bore m.e considerably.
That is the way to punish rascals,
I am very nearly tempted to think
so.
No, no / (absolute refusal)
/ declare / Do tell I
8. The diminutive -ito in familiar and colloquial speech.
I cuidadito 1 take good care \ en seguidita 1 right away
9. Conque introduces a natural consequence of what has just
been said; or recalls to mind, and insists on, the subject under
discussion.
{ Conque yamos 1
] Conque las seiscientas pesetas I
Well then, let V go.
Come now, (take) the six hundred
pesetas {which I have offered).
ADVERBS
187
215. Adverbial Phrases are formed in various ways :
I. With the definite article.
a (la) derecha, on the right
a (la) izquierda, on the left
a la moda, in style
a la vista, in {at) sight
a la verdady in truth
al contadOy {in) cash
al fin, finally
2. Without the article, singular.
a fondOy thoroughly
a manOy by hand
a menudo, often
a pie, on foot
con todo, nevertheless
de antemano, beforehand
de balde, gratis
de buena gana, willingly
de dla, by day
de noche, by night
de nuevo, again
3. Without the article, plural
a ciegas, blindly
a escondidas, secretly
a gatas, on all fours
a sabiendas, knowingly
a solas, alone
al momento, instantly
en el acto, at once
en el dia, nowadays
en lo sucesivo, in the future
por lo comtin, commonly
por lo pronto, yZ?r the time being
por lo tanto, consequently
- ^ r headfirst
de cabeza < , 7 j
\^on ones head
de pronto, suddenly
de propdsito, on purpose
en contra, against
en fin, in short
en pro, in favor of
en seguida, immediately
por consiguiente, consequently
por supuesto, of course
por dltimo,^/^^//^
de espaldas, ^» {with) one'^s back
de oidas, ^y hearsay
de puntillas, ^/r ///>/^^
de rodillas, ^» ^;;^'j' knees
de veras, /« /r«M, really
4. Miscellaneous adverbial phrases.
a manos Uenas, by handfuls
a mds no poder, ^iV^ all one^s
might
a sus anchas, at one^s ease
al por mayor, by wholesale
al por menor, by retail
cuanto antes, as soon as possible
desde luego, right away
de vez en tx^BsA'^^from time to time
gota a gota, drop by drop
ni con mucho, not by a good deal
para Bidrnpte, forever
poco a poco, little by little
siempre jamiLs, forever and ever
1 88 SPANISH GRAMMAR
216. Position of Adverbs. Adverbs should stand close to the
verb they modify ; if emphatic they are placed first in the sentence.
HaSana viene 61. He comes to-morrow,
Bien sabes. You know very well.
Llama con cuidado a Rosa. Call Rosa cautiously,
a. They stand before adjectives and past participles, but must not
come between the parts of compound tenses formed with haber.
Ha dicho demasiado. He kas said too much.
BstA bien dicho. // is well said.
He ganado siempre. / have always won,
b. Bien before the verb is especially emphatic and must be translated
by other words than well.
Bien hemos charlado esta noche. We have had a good long talk to-
night.
Bien creimos que se moria. We surely thought he was dying.
Bien se lo debo. / certainly owe it to him,
c. Adverbs modifying adverbial phrases stand before the whole phrase,
muy a menudo, very often tan de prisa, so fast
EXERCISE 34
{This exercise contains examples of the irregular verbs and those
with change of spelling. See sections 242 to 2§i. Adverbs must be
taken from the chapter^ not from vocabulary^ i . I arrived the
day before yesterday. 2. Where did you come from ? 3. He fell
down from the top of the stairs. 4. They put themselves in front.
5. Do you see that light up there? 6. I had my breakfast later
than usual. 7. It is snowing outside. 8. They fell forward. 9. He
was not around there. 10. Come inside here. 11. He died a short
time thereafter. 12. His land extends farther up. 13. He built
the house months ago. 14. The bird flies out to sea. 15. Tell me
right now. 16. He no longer hears. 17. He repeats it right there.
18. He sleeps anywhere. 19. He plays a long time with the boy.
20. He slept too long. 21. He will come before long. 22. He
runs away very fast. 23. He thinks so. 24. I approached on
ADVERBS 189
tiptoe. 25. He neither sees nor hears. 26. It is good for nothing.
27. He was fr3dng the potatoes. 28. Do not laugh so loud.
29. Perhaps he knows, but I doubt it. 30. Now you are surely
l)dng. 31. He took leave of us last night. 32. He is sleeping on
his back. ^^. Is he really coming ? 34. We will come immediately.
35. Consequently I warn you. 36. He asks me for money from
time to time. 37. He dresses himself as soon as possible. 38. I
am sending him on purpose. 39. They have finally returned the
book. 40. Commonly he does not return so soon. 41. It smells
of kerosene. 42. SSlo as an adverb is accented. 43. Who defends
the prisoner gratis ? 44. I paid cash. 45. Go out alone. 46. He
went on all fours. 47. He had turned aroimd with his back toward
the door. 48. They came secretly. 49. He sits down on the left.
50. We had the steamer in sight a long time. 51. Of course you
will say yes. 52. I shall not say that he lies, but I shall say that he
is mistaken. 53. He has not done it yet. 54. She dresses in the
SeviUian style. 55. They distinguish themselves in a very respect-
able manner. 56. I ascertained the law at once. 57. I drew the
newcomer out of the room. 58. The bell rings almost always at
eight o'clock. 59. Don't bite, child. 60. We were somewhat tired.
61. Over there in America you govern extremely well. 62. Con-
cluding my speech, I left at once. 63. I began to shoot blindly.
64. Bring me Valencian rice. 65. Blow your comet loudly and
distinctly. 66. He feels too sick to go out. 67. He saw her again
opposite. 68. We shall surely know something certain at last.
69. That fellow truly is the type of a bad man. 70. The diligence
rolled up the street, afterwards forward on the highway. 7 1 . Nothing
seemed to him criminal nor even unpermitted. 7 2. In my whole life
I have never had such luck.
CHAPTER XIII
PREPOSITIONS, CONJUNCTIONS, INTERJECTIONS
217. Prepositions. The simple prepositions in Spanish are
a, at, to
ante, before
bajo, under
con, with
contra, against
de, of, from
^<bBAt^from, since
durante, during
en, in, to, at, on
entre, among, between
ezcepto, except
hacia, towards
hasta, until, to, up to, as far as
mediante, by means of
menos, except, but
'^XKyfor
yxt.for, by
salvo, except, save
segdn, according to
sin, without
sobre, on, about
tras, after
218. From adjectives, and adverbs in mente, prepositions are
formed by the use of a :
adversamente a, adversely to
conforme a, according to
contrario a, contrary to
correspondiente a, agreeably to
frente a, opposite to
junto a, close to, near
relativamente a, in relation to
respecto a, with respect to
tocante a, in regard to
219. From adverbs of place and time, prepositions are formed
by using de :
acerca de, about, concerning
alrededor de, around
antes de, before (time, order)
cerca de, near, about
debajo de, under
delante de, before (place)
dentro de, within
despu^ de, after (time, order)
detrib de, behind, after (place)
encima de, over, on top of
fuera de, outside of
lejos ^^^ far from
190
PREPOSITIONS
191
220. Prepositional Phrases.
a causa de, on account of
a ezcepcidn de, with the exception
of
a fuerza de, by dint of
al lado de, beside
a lo largo de, along
a mis de, besides^ farther than
a pesar de, in spite of
a panto de, about to
a (or al) tray^s de, across^ through
adenUs de, besides^ in addition to
con motiyo de, on account of
de parte ^e,from
en contra de, against
en cuanto a, as for
en frente de, in front of
en pro de, in favor of
en vex de, instead of
en yirtud de, by virtue of
m&s alU de, beyond
por medio de, by means of
por raz6n de, by reason of at the
rate of
sin embargo de, notwithstanding
a. Especially to be noted are
a fines de agosto, at the end of August
a mediados del siglo XV, about the middle of the fifteenth century
a principios de 1492, at the beginning of I4g2
b. Adverbial phrases may combine with prepositions.
de espaldas a la puerta, with his a escondidas de mi madre, without
back to the door my mother^ s knowledge
221. A — En. I. A implies motion, en rest.
Voy a casa. / am going home, Estamos en casa. We are at home,
Se arroj6 al mar. He threw himself into the sea.
Estar^ en Paris. / shall be in Paris,
a. The verbs caer, to fall, entrar, to go in, saltar, to jump, require
en. Entr6 en la ciudad. He went into the city. '
2. Concerning time, a considers the termination of the time, en
the length of time in which an action takes place.
A las tres. At three o^ clock.
A dos diss de estar aqui.
Al mes justo de esta conversaci6n
se celebraron las bodas.
Llegar^ a Paris en dos diss.
Estari de vuelta en echo dias.
Creo que ni en veinte aSos me
morir^.
Al dia siguiente. On the next day.
After being here two days.
Exactly a month after this conver-
sation the wedding took place.
I shall reach Paris in two days.
He will be back in a week.
J believe that I shall not die in
twenty years.
192 SPANISH GRAMMAR
3. With expressions of distance, a signifies away.
A do8 pasos. Two steps away.
I«a ciudad estA a media milla. The city is half a mile away.
222. Ante — Delante de — Antes de.
Ante means before an authority, in the presence of\ or figuratively
it denotes preference ; delante de, before^ in respect to place ; antes
de, before^ in respect to time.
ante el juez, before the judge ante la naci6n, before the nation
ante la belleza, in the presence of ante todo, before all
beauty
delante de 41, in front of him delante de la casa, before the house
antes de junio, before June antes de la noche, before night
223. Bajo — Debajo de. Bajo, under or below^ usually in figura-
tive sense ; debajo de, under or below ^ in physical position.
bajo el general Reyes, under Gen- bajo nna oondici6n, on (lit. undef)
eral Reyes one condition
diez grades bajo cero, ten degrees debajo de la mesa, under the table
below zero
224. Detr&s de — Tras — Despu^s de. Detr&s de refers to physi-
cal position, behind \ tras to succession, after ^ behind \ despu^s de,
after^ in respect to time.
Detrib de la pnerta. Behind the door.
Las poblaciones unas tras otras se The towns ^ one after another^ sur-
rlndieron. rendered,
Cerr6 tras si la puerta. He shut the door behind him,
Huri6 la madre, y tras ella, a los The mother died^ and after her^ in
pocos dias, el padre. a few days, the father.
]>espu6s de las diez. After ten o'^ clock,
225. £n — Encima de — Sobre. £n means in or on\ encima
de, on top of ox above \ sobre, on, physically and figuratively.
Vive en Cidiz. He lives in Cddiz.
La oomida estA en la mesa. The dinner is on the table.
Una Umpara colgante encima de A hanging lamp above the table.
la mesa.
PREPOSITIONS 193
Bstaba de pie sobre la silla. He was standing on the chair,
Una oonferencia sobre Ceryantes. A lecture on Cervantes,
Le prestd mil duros sobre una He loaned him a thousand dollars
finca. on an estate,
226. Desde means since, from^ often a correlative with hasta, to,
desde Valencia hasta ULsA'nA^from desde entonces, since then
Valencia to Madrid desde ahoxsijfrom now
desde a}M,from there
227. Hasta, until, till, as far as, refers to both time and place.
Hasta el 15 del mes. Until the J^th of the month.
He aoompaS6 hasta la puerta. He accompanied me as far as the
door,
a, Hasta is frequently used as an adverb in the sense of even,
Hasta Paris cansa. Even Paris wearies,
Hasta es bonita. She is even pretty.
Hasta cinco hombres me encon- As many as five men met me,
traron.
228. Entre, between, among, makes also adverbial expressions in
the sense of half,
entre aquella mujer y yo, between entie los drboles, among the trees
that woman and me. (Note the entre llanto y risa, half crying,
pronoun in subject form.) half laughing
229. Para — Por divide the many meanings of English for and
by. Para denotes destination or purpose ; por, exchange or reason-
El tren para Chicago. The train for Chicago.
Una mesa para la cocina. A table for the kitchen.
Pagu4 un duro por el libro. I paid a dollar for the book.
Tom6 su sombrero por el mio. / took your hat for mine.
Por m6ritos de guerra ha obtenido For meritorious service he has
la cruz de San Fernando. obtained the cross of San Fer-
nando,
No lo digo por ml. / do not say it for my ow7i sake.
194 SPANISH GRAMMAR
1. Note also, concerning para,
£s alta para su edad. She is tall for her age.
Ley6 la carta para sf . He read the letter to himself.
Decir para si. To say to one^s self
Dejar para maSana. To leave for to-morrow.
La lecci6n para maiXana. ^ The lesson for to-morrow.
Estar para partir. To be about to leave (more com-
mon, estar k panto de partir).
2. Por is used in expressions of —
a. Time, usually indefinite :
por la noche, at night por entonces, about that time
maSana por la maSana, to-morrow por la Nayidad, about Christmas
morning
b. Place, implying movement through:
Volar por el aire. To fly through the air.
Pasar por la calle. To go through the street.
I Por d6nde se va ? Which way does one go ?
Por alll. In that direction.
Por aquf. In this direction.
(i) Hence por combines with the prepositions debajo de, delante
de, detris de, encima de, and entre, after verbs of movement.
Tir6 la pelota por encima de la He threw the ball over the wall.
tapia.
He di6 un pnntapie por debajo de He gave me a kick under the
la mesa. table.
c. Oaths and exclamations :
I Por Dios 1
I Por vida mla I Upon my life !
I Bien por mi sobrino I Good for my nephew /
d. Part of body or object concerned :
La cogi6 por la mano. He took her by the hand.
e. In certain verbal expressions very similar to English :
enyiar por el mddico, to send for preguntar por alguien, to inquire
the doctor for anybody
ir por came, to go for meat tomar por esposa, to take as wife
PREPOSITIONS 195
f. In numerous adverbial and cx)njunctive expressions :
por . . . que, however (followed by subjunctive mood)
por malo que sea, however bad he is
por mis que digan, however much {whatever) they may say
por decirlo asl, so to say per el estilo, of that style
por mayor, at wholesale por desgracia, by misfortune
3. For por after passive verb see sections 270, 2 ; 272, d:.
4. In regard to para and por with infinitives, see section 106,
5 and 6.
230. Double Prepositions are a peculiarity of Spanish :
1. After verbs denoting movement.
Cogi6 al muchacho por debajo de He caught the boy under the arms,
los brazos.
El agua mana de entre las peSas. The water issues from among the
rocks.
2. Para con appears in ideas of conduct, English toward.
deberes para con los padres, duties indulgencia para conmigo, indul-
toward one's parents gence toward me
3. De a (see section 157, i).
un puesto de a real la pieza, a five-cent stand (a booth or stand where
articles are sold at a uniform price)
231. Prepositions complete the meaning of verbs in various
ways. The same verb has different meanings according to the
preposition used after it, an important thing for students to note.
pensar (without preposition before pensar de, think of have an opin-
an infinitive), intend ion about
pensar en, think of meditate on
a. A verb which requires a preposition before a noun object re-
quires the same preposition before a clause that may depend on it.
No consiento en la proposici6n. I do not consent to the proposition.
No consiento en que Vd. se vaya, I do not consent to your going.
He enter6 de que eran naturales de He informed me that they were
Madrid. natives of Madrid,
196 SPANISH GRAMMAR
232. Conjunctions. The simple conjunctions uniting coordinate
clauses are
y, and ni, nor
0, or perOy mas, sine, but
1. Y reverts to e before words beginning with i or hi, except
before questions and words beginning with the diphthong ie.
espaSol e ingl^, Spanish and nieye y hielo, snow and ice
English I y In^s ? and Inez ?
madre e hija, mother and daughter
a, Spanish often uses y at the beginning of a sentence or phrase
merely as a mark of emphasis.
Y I usted aqul ? Why^ you here f
I Y si no Uega a tiempo 1 Suppose he doesn't come on time /
2. becomes u before a word beginning with or ho.
lino u otro, one or the other mujer u hombre, woman or man
siete u echo, seven or eight
3. Mas, but^ is more rhetorical than pero, and is sometimes used
for euphony.
Para si no qiieria grandezas : mas For herself she did not desire
para su hijo todo le parecla poco. titles; but for her son every-
thing seemed to her little,
4. Sino, but^ is used after a negative.
No es espaSol sino portagu6s. // is not Spanish but Portuguese,
De nadie tiene que hablar sino de He can talk about nobody but
esta mujer. this woman.
5. English but as a preposition in the sense of only is generally
no . . . mks que.
No tenemos m^ que un huevo. We have but one egg,
a. No . . . mds que is common with hacer: No hace mds que
dar un silbido, He only hisses.
233. Simple conjunctions introducing dependent clauses are
como, asy as soon as
pues, since
cuandOy when
que, that
mientras, while
8i,tf
CONJUNCTIONS
197
I. Pttes is frequentiy used as an adverb.
Pnes a mi no me digas.
Pnes JO, aqui es donde m^ he
parado.
Pnes si somos casi paiaanos.
Esta noche no ir6. — i Pnes ?
Conque liabl6 mal de mi. — Pnes.
We//j don 7 tell me,
Well^ as forme ^ here is where I
have stopped most,
Well^ we are surely almost fellow-
countrymen,
"/ shall not go to-night, ^^ ^^How
is that V
" So then he spoke ill of me,
'' He surely did:'
2. Que, that^ besides forming other conjunctions (see below),
has many peculiar uses.
a. It is required after affirmations or oaths before adverbs and
clauses, though redundant in English.
Dice que si.
Creo que no.
Claro que no.
A sabiendas de que no.
8e fu6 a la calle, supongo que a re-
correr los sitios donde estuviera.
He says yes or He says so,
I believe not.
Plainly no.
Knowing the contrary.
He has gone out on the street^ I
suppose to go over the places
where he had been,
I Por Dios 1 que no es yerdad. By God, it is not true,
b. Que often has comparative force, impl)dng progressive or
continuous action.
His esperanzas muertas que muer-
tas. #
Mejor que mejor.
Corria que no andaba.
Tarde que temprano.
Cone que corre.
Perd estaba sentado, cavila que
cayila.
c, A que implies a bet.
A que no sabe Yd. i cuintos aSos
My hopes deader and deader.
Better and better.
She ran rather than walked.
Sooner or later.
It runs faster and faster,
Peru was seated, thinking and
thinking.
tiene?
d. For que as an intensifier see section 214.
/ bet you don''t know how old hi
is.
198
SPANISH GRAMMAR
234. Conjunctions formed from adverbs and prepositions by the
addition of que are
antes (de) que, before
asf que, as soon as, so that
, . \althous[h
bien que J *
desde que, since (time)
despu6s que, after
hasta que, until
luego que, as soon as
mientras que, while
para que, in order that, so that
porque, because
pues que
puesto que
supuesto que
ya que
sin que, without
>for, since (reason)
235. Conjunctions formed from prepositional phrases by the
addition of que are
tn case
a medida que, as
fmodo
de 'I manera )- que, so that
[suerte
a fin de que, in order that
con tal (de) que, provided that
dado que 1 .
en caso de que j
and others.
236. Correlatiyes.
apenas . . . cuando, scarcely , . . when
Apenas habia andado doscientos Scarcely had I gone two hundred
pasos, cuando quince o veinte pcu:es when fifteen or twenty
hombres rodearon mi coche. men surrounded my coach.
asf . . . como
tanto . . . como
lo mismo . . . que
Bebieron vino y comieron dulces
asf los enfermos como los sanos.
Tanto en el patio como en las salas
hay flores y plantas.
Hubiera sido mejor para BspaSa
asf como para Venezuela.
Lo mismo los f railes que los caba-
Ueros.
ni . .
both . . . and
as well , . , as
They drank wine and ate goodies,
both the sick and the welL
Both in the court and in the rooms
there are flowers and plants.
It would have been better for
Spain as well CLsfor Venezuela,
Both the friars and the gentlemen.
ni, neither . . . nor
Ni Juan ni Pepe tienen raz6n.
Neither fohn nor foe is right.
CONJUNCTIONS 1 99
no bien . . . cuando (ciiando often omitted), no sooner . . . than
No bieir dej6 de hablar Rain6n No sooner did Ramdn stop speak-
cuando me leyant^. ing than I arose,
no 86I0 . . . sino (que), not only . . . but also
No sdlo vino a mi cuarto sino que He not only came to my room but
me Ueyd al suyo. took me to his own,
* * ' . . \ either , . , or
bien ... bien J
locnra santidad. Either madness or sanctity,
bien todo es cilculo, bien en- Either all is calculation or she
laza la prosa de yiyir y la poesfa unites the prose of life and the
de BUS ensueSos en una perfecta poetry of her dreams into per-
armonia. feet harmony,
ora . . . ora, now , . . now
Ora por cartas, ora citAndonos. Now by letters^ now by appoint-
ments
sea . . . sea^ , ^,
> whether , , , or
ya . . . ya j
Sea por impulso propio, sea por Whether by one^s own impulse
sugestiones ajenas. or by the suggestions of others,
Ya me quites la vida, ya me la Whether you take my life or grant
dejes. it to me,
237. Interjections are more numerous and important in Spanish
than in English.
I. Divine names as exclamations are common, and are not usu-
ally regarded as profane :
1 Dios I Gracious I \ V&lgame Dios I Bless me !
\ Por Dios ! For goodness^ sake / \ Jesus I Heavens /
I Dios mlo I Dear me / Jestis, Maria y Jos6 (after a sneeze)
I Ay Dios mio ! Oh dear me / \ Virgen santlsima ! Mercy me I
\ Dios te oiga I fust listen / \ Ay Maria 1 Goodness /
a. Similarly, { demonio 1 |diantrel |diablol The deuce I
200
SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. Peculiar to Spanish :
Caramba I
Carayl
Caracoles I
Canastosl
Canario!
OapiU!
Fuegol
and others.
Caramba qu^ suerte 1
Qa6 caramba de yiaje es 6at 1
Caramba contigo !
3. Ordinary interjections are
OhI lahl
Ay!
Hal (exultation)
He 1 (shock, start)
£a ! (encouragement)
Ea, ea ! (impatience)
Huy ! (pain, disgust)
Ola 1 or I Hola 1 (recognition or
discovery)
Ole I (approval)
Puf ! (aversion)
Ufl (weariness)
Ca ! and | quia I (denial or doubt)
Bah I (incredulity or contempt)
Ah I Esteban. |Holal Manolol
id verse en el espejo, no pudo
menos de lanzar un | ah 1 de
admu:aci6n.
I Chist I habla bajo.
EstA sufriendo un ataque de melan-
colla. — I Quia! contest6 el me-
dico. Lo que tiene esta seSora es
un c61ico.
> Gosh /
The dickens /
Gosh, what luck /
What dickens of a trip is that !
The deuce take you !
OhI
Oh / alas / ah /
Ha/
Eh!
Come /
ComCy come /
Ouch I phew /
Ah ! oh I hello /
Bully I bravo I
Ugh!
Oh ! poh /
No! nonsense!
Pshaw !
Hush !
Hey, Stephen ! Say, Manolo !
On seeing himself in the mirror,
he could not help uttering an
ah ! in admiration.
Hush ! speak low.
She is suffering an attcu:k of mel-
ancholy. Nonsense! answered
the doctor. The trouble with
this lady is the colic.
INTERJECTIONS
20I
I Va bien el yiolin ? — ] Ca I Hay
yeces que lo romperia I
Dicen que Alsina ha perdido en
Bolsa. — I Uf I Es natural.
I Ba I I a trabajar I
Dos dias revu^lcase en la cama
lanzando {ayes I doloridos.
Violin practice going nicely f No /
There are times when I would
like to smash it.
They say that Alsina has lost on the
exchange, Poh! ThaVs natural.
Come / get to work /
For two days he turns in his bed
uttering cries of pain.
4, Some imitations of natural sounds are
I^Jlaughter
I ajajA I
ijel ij<
jcatapliiml splash
5. Used to animals :
I Arret
{Alza! \ Get up!
I Andal
] pum, pum I pistol shot, blows of
any sort
jzasl smash
I (To cats) I
Puss ^ puss I
Scat /
I Miz miz I
I Zape 1
I T^ ' }(^° **°es) Here I here I
I So I I jo ! \ cho I Whoa /
6. Imperatives frequently become interjections :
Pshaw ! go away /
Come / do /
. - . r (incredulity)
1 Anda I -^ ;. ^ r' .
* \. (importunity)
1
^ «« ■ ^ «« ■ r (command)
Callal iCallel-^ \ , ,./
I
\ (incredulity)
I Diga !
{Oyel lOigal
I Mira I \ Mire Vd. 1
I Quita 1 \ Qultese Vd. 1
I Toma I
I Vamos I ] Vaya I
I Viva I
Shut up / keep still. ^
Nonsense /
Say! do 'tell!
Listen! hear^ hear!
Look! listen!
Get out ! let me alone !
Why ! here, take it !
Come on !
Hurrah !
Down with him ! kill him !
\ Muera I
I Vaya ! is the commonest of these, and the hardest to render
by a single word. Study the examples :
I Vaya I abur. Well, good-by,
{Carta de tu tiol Y |vaya si es Letter from your uncle ! And it ^s
gordal
] Vaya una hora de yenir I
] Vaya si le conozco I
a fat one !
This is a pretty hour to come !
I should say I do know him !
202 SPANISH GRAMMAR
7. Nouns and adjectives may become interjections :
I Al asesino I Murder / \ Cuidado I Take care I look out /
I Al ladr6n I Stop thief! \ Firme I Steady /
I Alto I Halt/ jFuegoI Fire/
I Bravo I Good/ j Socorro I Help/
\ Ojo I J Mucho ojo I Attention/ With care/ (Used sometimes on ship-
ping cases containing breakable merchandise.)
8. Personal pronouns are connected with adjectives used as in-
terjections by the preposition de ; which is also true of \ Ay ! with
nouns or pronouns.
I Necio de ml I Fool that I am /
I Pobrecita de ella I Poor little girl /
I Ay de mi I Woe is me /
\ Ay de los yencidos I Woe to the conquered /
9. Hombre, mujer, chico, hijo, hija, are frequent in conversation
for emphasis or protestation. | Hombre ! is used even to women
and by women to each other, SeSor appears in expressions not
addressed to a particular individual : \ Pues, seSor, no esperaba es-
capar tan bien, Well^ sir^ I did not expect to get off so easily,
EXERCISE 35
I. We saw the man run through the street. 2. Having neither
brothers nor sisters, he is an only son. 3. Christopher Columbus
did not go to discover the new world but to seek a new way to the
Indies. 4. I shall know at the end of the month. 5. The wedding
was fixed for the beginning of December. 6. They followed the
shadow along the walls. 7. Federico had learned the facts in two
days. 8. He looked at them over his spectacles. 9. Buyers had
come even from England. 10. There was nobody in the dining-
room but her and her mother. 11. I bet they don't dare tell me
so. 12. I was sure that you were going to say that. 13. I trust
that they will put me back soon. 14. I have scolded an innkeeper.
Why? where? when? how? Because where, when I eat, they
serve badly, I get out of patience. 15. I do not know anything in
PREPOSITIONS 203
regard to the affair. 16. They came around the city. 17. He would
come about Christmas if you asked ^ him. 18. Come under the bridge.
19. On account of the weather, he brought a wrap. 20. On the
next day he wanted to return. 21. We wish to reach home in a
fortnight 22. A week after learning this, he had a letter from his
partner. 23. He learned that they would come before October.
24. The President has put the army under the command of Gen-
eral Grant. 25. Aix)ut that time the army was below the city.
26. What shall we do with the boy who stands before us ? 27. He
went from Caracas to La Guaira in a few hours. 28. I leave for
Spain about the middle of next month. 29. He knows a good deal
for his age. 30. He said to himself, " I shall get out of here be-
fore night'* 31. Send for a doctor. 32. She went for medicine.
33. Has anybody inquired for me during my absence? 34. The
enemy came out from among the trees. 35. Go and distribute this
money among the poor. 36. Ferdinand and Isabella had no male
children that lived to inherit the kingdom. 37. He neither trans-
lated the sentence nor knew the sense of it 38. He produced but
one great work. 39. She did nothing but sing all day. 40. I made
ten or eleven mistakes in that exercise. 41. Being able not only to
hear but also to see very well, I was satisfied. 42. They are not
French but Russian. 43. After they came, the army departed for
the Peninsula. 44. Hearing the noise, we jumped out of bed.
45. Coming from under the bridge, the man said he was not an
enemy but a fisherman. 46. Who says yes ? 47. Before he ob-
tained the prize, he worked both night ^ and day.^ 48. Since I have
seen you, business goes much better. 49. It was the signal that
the enemy was approaching.
^ Use imperfect subjunctive of pedir.
3 Adverbial ; insert de.
CHAPTER XIV
VERB FORMS
238. The changes in form which a verb undergoes are classified
by voice, mood, tense, number, and person. The Spanish verb
makes these changes by means of endings and auxiliaries. Their
systematic arrangement is called conjugation.
239. Verbs are divided into three classes according to the end-
ings of the infinitive :
I. -ax II. -«r III. -ir
But the -er and -ir verbs differ in only four forms ; namely, the
infinitive, the first and second persons plural of the present indica-
tive, and the second person plural of the imperative.
240. Regular Verbs.
Infinitive Mood
present tense
comprar, ^o buy vender, to sell vivir, to live
Participles
PRESENT (gerund)
comprando, buying vendiendO| selling viviendo, living
PAST
comprado, bought vendido, sold vivido, lived
Sing. I. compro
Indicative Mood
present tense
J buy vendo I sell
I do buy I do sell
I am buying I am selling
204
vivp / live
I do live
I am living
REGULAR VERBS
205
2. compras you buy
you do buy
you are buying
3. compra he buys
he does buy
he is buying
Plur. I. compra^os we buy
we do buy
we are buying
2. comprAis you buy
you do buy
you are buying
3. compran they buy
they do buy
they are buying
vendes you sell
you do sell
you are selling
vende he sells
he does sell
he is selling
vendemos we sell
we do sell
we are selling
vend^is you sell
you do sell
you are selling
vend en they sell
they do sell
they are selling
vives you live
you do live
you are living
vive he lives
he does live
he is living
vivimos we live
we do live
we are living
vivls you live
you do live
you are living
viven they live
they do live
they are living
Nbgativb Form
no compro, I do not buy no yendo, I do not sell no yIyo, I do not live
etc. etc. etc.
^Compra Yd.?
Do you buy f etc.
Sing. I. compraba
2. comprabas
3. compraba
Intbrrogativb Form
i Vende Vd.?
Do you sellf etc.
IMPERFECT TENSE
vend la
iViveVd.?
Do you live f etc.
/ was buying
I used to buy
you were buying vend las
you used to buy
he was buying vend la
he used to buy
Plur. I. comprAbamos we were buying
we used to buy
2. comprabais you were buying vendiais
,you used to buy
they were buying vendian
they used to buy
vivir like vender
/ was selling
I used to sell
you were selling
you used to sell
he was selling
he used to sell
vendiamos we were selling
we used to sell
3. compraban
you were selling
you used to sell
they were selling
they used to sell
206
SPANISH GRAMMAR
PRETERIT TENSE
Sing. I. compr^, / bought
2. compraste, ^^« bought
3. compr6, he bought
Plur. I. compramos, we bought
2. comprasteis,^£?« bought
3. compraron, they bought
vendl, I sold vivir like vender
vendiste, ^^« sold
vend id, he sold
9
vendimos, we sold
vendisteis, you sold
vendieron, they sold
Nbgativb Form
no compr^, / did not buy, etc. no vendl, / did not sell, etc.
Interrogative Form
^Comprd Vd.? Did you buy? etc. ^Vendi6 Vd.? Did you sellf etc.
FUTURE TENSE
Sing. I. comprar^, I shall buy
2. comprards, ^£?w will buy
3. comprarA, he will buy
Plur. I. compraremos, we shall buy
2. comprar^is,^^« will buy
3. comprarAn, they will buy
vender ^, / shall sell
vivir ^, J shall live
and same endings as for comprar
added to the infinitive
CONDITIONAL
Sing. I . compT3ii&, / should buy vender isi, / should sell
2. comprar las, _y^« would buy
3. comprar la, he would buy
Plur. I. comprar lamo8,a/^j^^«/^/^ftf>'
2. comprar lai8,j/^« would buy
3. comprar Ian, they would buy
vivir la, / should live
and same endings as for comprar
added to the infinitive
2d Sing, compra, buy
2d Plur. comprad, buy
Imperative Mood
vende, sell
vended, sell
vive, live
vivid, live
For the negative, use corresponding person and number of the pres-
ent subjunctive : no compres, do not buy ; see section 87.
REGULAR VERBS
Subjunctive Mood
present tense
207
compre
vend a
vivir like render
compres
vend as
throughout
subjunctive
compre
vend a
compretnot vendamot
compr^is
vendAis
compren
vend an
IMPERFECT TENSE
First Form
Second Form
comprase
vendiese
comprara
vendiera
comprases
vendieses
compraras
vendieras
comprase
vendiese
comprara
vendiera
comprAsemos
vendi^mos
compriU'atnos
vendidramos
compraaeis
vendieseis ^
comprarais
vendierais
compraaen
vendiesen
compraran
vendieran
FUTURE TENSE (HYPOTHETICAL)
comprare
vendiere
comprares
vendieres
comprare
vendiere
compriiremos
vendi^remos
/
comprareis
vendiereis
compraren
vendieren
Note. Translations of the subjunctive mood, being likely to cause
misconceptions, are not given.
241. Compound Tenses. The compound tenses of all verbs are
formed from the past participle and the various tenses of the auxil-
iary verb haber, to have.
Infinitive (present perfect)
haber comprado, to have bought
Participle (present perfect or perfect gerund)
habiendo comprado, having bought
268 SPANISH GRAMMAR
Indicative Mood
PRESENT PERFECT (pres. ind. of haber + past participle)
he comprado, / have bought^ etc.
PLUPERFECT (impcr. ind. of haber + past participle)
habia comprado, / had bought ^ etc.
PRETERIT PERFECT (preterit ind. of haber + past participle)
hube comprado, / had bought^ etc.
FUTURE PERFECT (fut. ind. of haber + past participle)
habr6 comprado, / shall have bought^ etc.
CONDITIONAL PERFECT (conditional of haber + past participle)
habrfa comprado, / should have bought^ etc.
Subjunctive Mood
PRESENT PERFECT (pres. subj. of haber + past participle)
haya comprado, etc.
PLUPERFECT ist FORM (imper. subj. -se form of haber + past participle)
hubiese comprado, etc.
PLUPERFECT 2d FORM (imper. subj. -ra form of haber + past participle)
hnbiera comprado, etc.
• FUTURE PERFECT (fut. subj. of haber + past participle)
hubiere comprado, etc.
Note. The student, in forming compound tenses according to this
scheme, must take care to use the correct form of the past participle ;
as he yendido, I have sold\ he escrito, I have written ; etc.
842. Orthographic Changes. As a Spanish verb throughout its
conjugation maintains the sound of the final consonant of the radical,
\
ORTHOGRAPHY OF VERBS
209
it is necessary at times to change the spelling to preserve the sound.
See section 7 for changes in spelling.
a. The following table shows changes of spelling which occur in
both regular and irregular verbs.
Verbs whose infinitives
END WITH
CHANGE
BEFORE
IN
Examples
I. car
c to qn
1st person
sacaiy to draw out
2. gar
g togu
e
preterit
llegar, to arrive
3. gwu^
gutogii
indie, and
ayerigiiar, to ascertain
4. zar
z to c
allpres.subj.
lanzaiy to throw
5. gcr
gtoj
coger, to catch
6. gir
gtoj
dirigir, to address
7. quir
qu to c
and
1st person
delinquir, to transgress
8. guir
gu tog
present
distingair, to distinguish
9. consonant
c to z
indie, and
veneer, toconqueryfalldue
before ceiyCir
a
allpres.subj.
esparcir, to scatter
10. Vowel be-
have zc
conocer, to know
fore cer, cir
lucir, to shine
I. Preterit indie, saqu^, sacaste, etc.
2.
\\
\\
3.
ft
tt
4.
tt
tt
5.
Present
tt
6.
tt
tt
7.
«
tt
8.
tt
tt
9-
tt
tt
tt
tt
10.
tt
tt
tt
tt
Present subj. saque, etc.
llegu^, llegaste, etc. ** ^* Uegue, etc.
averigii^y averiguaste, etc. " " averigiie, etc.
lanc^, lanzaste, etc. " " lance, etc.
cojOy coges, etc.
dirijo, diriges, etc.
delinco, delinques, etc.
distingo, distingues, etc.
venzo, vences, etc.
esparzo, esparces, etc.
conozcOy conoces, etc.
luzco, luces, etc.
coja, etc.
dirija, etc.
delinca, etc.
distinga, etc.
venza, etc.
esparza, etc.
conozca, etc.
luzca, etc.
Note. Important exceptions to 10 are tnecer, to rock ; cocer, to cook^
to boil] etnpecer, to damage, with forms according to 9: while hacer,
to make ; decir, to say, are irregular, see section 250.
2IO
SPANISH GRAMMAR
b» Unaccented i cannot stand between two vowels, but is changed
to y. This occurs whenever an ending containing the diphthong ie
or 16 is added to a verb-stem ending in a vowel ; as,
Creer, to believe
Preterit Indicative Imperfect Subjunctive
cref first form
creiste creyese, etc.
creyd
creimos second form
creisteis creyera, etc.
creyeron
Present Participle
creyendo
Future Subjunctive
creyere, etc.
Many verbs ending in -uir have similar changes ; see section 248.
c. Verbs whose stems end in 11 or a lose the i of the diphthongs
ie and 16 ; as, engulllr, to devour, and taSer, to play (a stringed
instrument) : ^
/
Preterit Indicative
enguUf
tflflf
enguUiste
taftiste
engulld
tafid
engullimos
taftimos
enguUisteis
t^iftisteis
enguUeron
tafSeron
Present '.
Participle
engiillendo
taftendo
Imperfect Subjunctive
first form
engullese taftese
second form
engullera taflera
Future Subjunctive
enguUere tafiere
(I) Likewise after j of the preterit stems of decir, -ducir, and traer,
the 1 of the diphthongs ie and 16 disappears ; see the verbs, section 250.
d. Most verbs ending in -iar and -uar accent the weak vowel of
the termination in the ist, 2d, and 3d persons singular and the 3d
ORTHOGRAPHY OF VERBS
211
plural of the present indicative and present subjunctive, and the
2d singular of the imperative.
Present Indicative
envfo
envfas
envfa
enviamos
envidis
envfan
Bnyiar, to send
Present Subjunctive
envfe
envfes
envfe
enviemos
envidis
envfen
Imperative
envfa
enviad
Present Indicative
contiixilo
continilas
continda
continuamos
continudis
continiian
Continiiar, to continue
Present Subjunctive
continile
continues
continde
continuemos
continudis
continden
Imperative
continua
continuad
Some important verbs which do not accent the vowel are
cambiar, exchange limpiar, clean remedial, remedy
diferenciar, differentiate principiar, begin All verbs in -guar (see
estudiar, study presenciar, witness section 242, a, 3)
e. The past participles of verbs of the -er and -ir conjugations whose
Stems end in a, e, or require a written accent on the termination to
show that the adjacent vowels do not form a diphthong with a conse-
quent shift of spoken accent.
caido
leido
corroldo
Note. Common verbs conjugated like the models in section 242 are
Radical change indicated thus, (1) (ue)
a, I. acercarse, approach
fabricar, manufacture
proYOcar, provoke
suplicar, beg
tocar, touch
YOlcar (ae)y overturn
212
SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. cargar, lotui
colgar (ue), hang
entregar, deliver
ivi%%Bi Judge
3. apaciguaTi pacify
fitigaBXf /ofge, invent
4. alcanzar, reach
almorzar (ue), breakfast
calzar, put on {shoes etc,)
empezar (ie), begin
5. acoger, receive
eaoogeiy choose^ select
6. afligirse, worry
oorregir (i), correct
elegir (i), elect
8. aegiiir (i) follow
9. torcer (ue), twist
10. agradecer, thank
carecer, lack
crecer, grow
negar (le), deny
^gai.pay
pegar, sticky strike
xogar (ae)y oj^
menguar, lessen
santiguar, make sign of cross ^ bless
forzar {Xit)^ force
gozar, enjoy
rezar, /nj;/
tiopezar (le), stumble
reooger, /iV>& »/, collect
pxoteger, protect
exigir, demand
regir (i), rule
See section 248, 2
nncir, ^<7^^
merecer, deserve
parecer, j^rm
pennanecer, remain
(There are about 200 verbs having this termination. Many are formed
from adjectives, thus :
durOy hard\ endurecer, harden
▼erde, green ; enverdecer, become green
Such verbs are called inceptive verbs.)
b. leer, rectd 'goseetf possess
• Pxoveer, provide^ has past participles provefdo and pioviato.
c. bolUri boil
mullir, beat soft
brnfiiii polish
cellir (i), gird
refill (i), scold
d. The following verbs accent the vowel :
confiar, trust
criar, raise^ educate
gniar, guide
variaTi vary
acentuar, accent
ef ectuar, effect
RADICAL-CHANGING VERBS
213
243. Principal Parts. Radical-changing and irregular verbs are
conveniently memorized by referring their forms to six principal
parts, as follows :
Infinitive Present Past. Present Preterit Preterit
Participle Participle Indicative Indicative Indicative
1st sing. 1st sing. 3d sing.
gives gives
gives
(from whole in-
fimtive)
future
conditional
(from stem of
infinitive)
PRESENT
INDICATIVE
(except zst sing.)
IMPERFECT
INDICATIVE
IMPERATIVE
gives
COMPOUND
TENSES
PRESENT
SUBJUNCTIVE
IMPERFECT
AND FUTURE
SUBJUNCTIVE
(This scheme is not an absolute guide, as there are
some exceptions, but it is an aid to memory.)
244. Radical-Changing Verbs are those whose irregularities
consist chiefly in a change of the radical vowel when it is accented
or when it precedes certain other vowels. The following may serve
as models, divided for convenience into classes.
Class I. Verbs having a change of e to ie and o to ue when the
stem is accented.
I. Pensar, to think
Prin. PARys Pensar, pensando, pensado, pienso, pens^, pensd
Pres. Ind.
pienso
piensas
piensa
pensamos
pensdis
piensan
Impf. Ind.
pensaba
etc.
Imperat.
piensa
.pensad
Pres. Subj.
piense
pienses
piense
pensemos
pens^is
piensen
Impf. Subj.
1st form 2d form
pensase pensara
etc, etc.
FuT. Ind.
pensard
etc.
Conditional
pensarfa
etc,
FuT. Subj.
pensare
etc.
Pret. Ind.
pens^
pensaste
pens6
pensamos
pensasteis
pensaron
214
SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. Contar, to count
Prin. Parts Contar, contando, contado,
Pres. Ind. Impf. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj.
cuento
cuentas
cuenta
contamos
cont^s
cuentan
contaba
etc.
cuenta
contad
cuente
cuentes
cuente
contemos
contds
cuenten
cuento, cont^, contd
FuT. Ind, Pret. Ind,
contard cont^
etc, contaste
cont6
Conditional contamos
contarfa
etc.
contasteis
contaron
Impf. Subj.
1ST FORM
contase, etc.
2.Ti FORM
contara, etc.
FuT. Subj.
contare, etc.
3. Perder, to lose
Prin. Parts Perder, perdiendo, perdido,
Pres. Ind. Impf. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj.
perdfa
etc, pierde
pierdo
pierdes
pierde
perdemos
perd^is
pierden
perded
pierda
pierdas
pierda
perdamos
perd^s
pierdan
pierdo, perdf, perdid
FuT. Ind. Pret. iNDb
perder^
etc.
Impf. Subj.
1ST form 2D form
perdiese, etc.
perdiera, etc.
Conditional
perderfa
etc,
FuT. Subj.
perdiere, etc.
perdf
perdiste
perdid
perdimos
perdisteis
perdieron
4. Morer, to move
Prin. Parts Mover, moviendo, movido, muevo, movf, movid
Pres. Ind. Impf. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj.
muevo
mueves
mueve
movemos
movdis
mueven
movfa
etc.
mueve
moved
mueva
muevas
mueva
movamos
movdis
muevan
Impf. Subj,
1ST form
moviese, etc.
2D form
moviera, etc.
FuT. Ind.
moverd
etc.
Conditional
moverfa
etc,
FuT. Subj.
moviere, etc.
Fket, Inu
movf
moviste
movid
movimos
movisteis
movieron
RADICAL-CHANGING VERBS
215
1. like pensar are
acertar, hit the mark
alentar, encourage
apretar, squeeze
atrayesar, cross
calentar, warm
cerraii shut
confesar, confess
despertar, wake
empezar, begin
encomendaTy recommend
2. Like contar are
acordarse, remember
acostane, go to bed
almorzar, take breakfast
apostar, wager^ bet
colgar, hang
consolai, console
costaTi cost
3. Like perder are
ascender, ascend
atender, heed
defender, defend
4. Like mover are
doler, pain^ ache
gobemar, govern
hit\ax^ freeze
manif estar, show, inform
merendar, take lunch
neyar, snow
quebrar, break
regar, irrigate, water
remendar, mend, patch
sentarse, sit down
temblar, tremble
encontrar, meet
foizaif force
mostrar, show
probar, t/y, test
recordar, remind
rodar, roll
rogar, ask, beg
descender, descend
encender, kindle, light
entender, understand
soltar, let go, loosen
sonar, ring
soSar, dream
tronar, thunder
YOlaXfJly
Tolcar, upset
extender, extend
yvtUstf pour^ shed
lloyer, rain morder, bite torcer, twist
245. Belonging to Class I are certain verbs with peculiarities :
I. Errar, to err, has ye in place of ie to avoid that spelling at
the beginning of a word.
pRiN. Parts Errar, errando, errado, yerro, errd, errd
Pres. Ind. Pres. Subj. Imperat.
yerro yerre
yerras ycrres yerra
yerra yerre _—
erramos erremos
errdis errdis errad
yerran yerren — _.
2l6
SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. a, Jufi^ar, to piay, has ue when the stem is accented. For
spelling of present subjunctive and first person singular preterit^
see section 242, a, 2.
Prin. Parts Jugar, jugando, jugado, juego, jugu^, jugd
Pres. Ind. Impf. Ind. Impbrat.
jugaba
juego
juegas
juega
jugamos
jugdis
juegan
etc.
juega
jugad
Pres. Subj.
juegue
juegues
juegue
juguemos
jugudis
jueguen
Impf. Subj.
1ST FORM
jugase, etc.
2D FORM
jugara, etc.
FuT. Ind.
jugar^
etc,
COKDITIONAL
jugarfa
etc,
FuT. Subj.
jugare, etc.
Prkt. Ind.
jugu^
jugaste
jug<5
jugamos
jugasteis
jugaron
b, Agorar, to augur, and other verbs having go in the stem,
as degollAT, to behead, and avergonzar, to shame, will require the
diaeresis when this syllable breaks to ue under the accent. Other-
wise like contar.
Prin. Parts Agorar, agorando, agorado, agiiero, agor^, agord
Pres. Ind. Pres. Subj. Imperat.
agiiero agiiere
agiieras agiieres aguera
agiiera agiiere
agoramos agoremos
agordis agor^ agorad
agiieran agiieren
c, Desosar, to bone, and desovar, to spawn, have an h inserted
before ue in the accented syllable.
Pres. Ind.
deshueso
deshuesas
deshuesa
desosamos
desosdis
deshuesan
Pres. Subj.
deshuese
deshueses
deshuese
desosemos
desos^is
deshuesen
Impbrat.
deshuesa
desosad
RADICAL-CHANGING VERBS
217
3. a, Disoemir, to discern, being derived from cemer, has the
vowel-changes of peider but the endings of the -ir conjugation in
the first and second plural, the present indicative, the second plural
imperative, and the infinitive.
Prin. Parts Discemir, discerniendo, discemido, disciemo, discemf,
discemid
pRES. Ind.
disdemo
disdemes
disderhe
discemimos
discemfs
disdemen
Pres. Subj.
disdema
disdemas
disdema
discemamos
discemfs
disdeman
Imperat.
disdeme
discemid
b. Concemir, to concern, has the peculiarities of discemir, but is
defective, being used only in the third person singular and plural
of each tense.
4. a. Volver, to return, has an irregular past participle but is
otherwise like mover.
Prin. Parts Volver, volviendo, vuelto, vudvo, volvf, volvi<5
Like volver are
devolver, give back
envolvery wrap up
revolver, stir
absolver, absolve
diBolver, dissolve
resolver, resolve
solver, loosen
b. Oler, to smell, has hue when the stem is accented, because no
word should begin with ue.
Prin. Parts Oler, oliendo, olido, hudo, olf, olid
Pres. Ind.
hudo
hueles
huele
olemos
oHis
huden
Pres. Subj.
huela
huelas
huela
olamos
oldis
huelan
Imperat.
huele
oled
2l8
SPANISH GRAMMAR
246. Class n. Verbs whose stem-vowel e becomes ie when
accented, and i before an accented syllable containing ie, 16, or a ;
or whose stem-vowel o becomes ue or u under the same circum-
stances.
I. Sentir, to feel
Prin. Parts Sentir, sintiendo, sentido, siento, sentf, sintid
Pres. Ind. Impf. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj. Fut. Ind. Pret. Ind.
siento
sentfa
sientes
sentfas
siente
sentfa
sentimos
sdntfamos
sentfs
sentfais
sienten
sentfan
siente
sentid
sienta
sientas
sienta
sintamos
sintiis
sientan
Impf. Subj.
1st form 2d form
sintiese sintiera
etc, etc.
sentir^ sentf
etc, sentiste
sintid
Conditional sentimos
sentirfa sentisteis
etc, sintieron
Fut. Subj.
sintiere
etc.
2, Dormir, to sleep
Prin. Parts Dormir, durmiendo, dormido, duermo, dormf, durmi6
Pres. Ind.
duermo
duermes
duerme
dormimos
dormfs
duermen
Impf. Ind.
dormfa
etc.
Imperat.
duerme
dormid
Pres. Subj.
duerma
duermas
duerma
durmamos
durmdis
duerman
Impf. Subj.
1ST form 2D form
durmiese durmiera
etc, etc.
Fut. Ind. Pret. Ind.
dormir^ dormf
etc. dormiste
durmi6
Conditional dormimos
dormirfa
etc,
Fut. Subj.
durmiere
etc.
dormisteis
durmieron
I. Like sentlr are
adyertir, warn
arrepentirse, repent
conyertir, convert
consentir, consent
diyertir, amuse
herir, strike^ wound
heryir, boil
Inyertir, invest
mentir, lie
pref erir, prefer
referir, relate
resentirse, resent
RADICAL-CHANGING VERBS
219
2. Like dormir, but with irregular past participle, is moiir, to die,
Prin. Parts Morir, muriendo, muerto, muero, morf, murid
a. The past participal muerto is used with active meaning instead
of matado when referring to human beings ; as, Han muerto al ca-
pita, They have killed the captain,
3. Adquirir, to acquire^ and inquirir, to inquire^ have ie when
the stem is accented and i when unaccented.
Prin, Parts Adquirir, adquiriendo, adquirido, aTdquiero, adquirf,
Pres. Ind.
adquiero
adquieres
adquiere
adquirimos
adquirfs
adquieren
adquirid
Pres. Subj.
adquiera
adquieras
adquiera
adquiramos
adquirdis
adquieran
Imperat.
adquiere
Other forms
regular
adquirid
247. Class in. Verbs whose stem-vowel e becomes i when
accented, or before an accented syllable containing ie, 16, or a.
I. Pedir, to request^ ask for
Prin. Parts Pedir, pidiendo, pedido, pido, pedf, pidid
Pres. Ind. Impf. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj. Fut. Ind. Pret. Ind.
pido
pedfa
pides
pedf as
pide
pedfa
pedimos
pedfamos
pedfs
pedfais
piden
pedf an
pide
pedid
Impf. Subj.
IST FORM
pidi<
etc.
pida
pedir^
pedf
pidas
etc.
pediste
pida
pidid
pidamos
Conditional
pedimos
piddis
pedirfa
pedisteis
pidan
etc,
Fut. Subj.
pidieron
[era
pidiere
c.
etc.
220
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Like pedir are
competir, compete
concebir, conceive
derretir, melt
despedirse, take leave
tx^^f forward, ship
gemir, groan
impedir, prevent
medir, measure
rendine, surrender
See
repetir, repeat
seryir, serve
Testir, dress
comgir, correct'\
eleeir, elect > ^. "^^ ^
nir,mle J section 242. «. 6.
oeSiTy gird "
xeSir, scold
teffir, dye
See section 242, c.
2. Seguir, to follow^ and its derivatives are like pedir, but with
orthographic changes according to section 242, tf, 8.
pRiN. Parts Seguir, siguiendo, seguido, sigo, seguf, siguid
PRES. Ind.
Impf. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj.
segufa siga
etc, sigue sigas
siga
sigamos
seguid sigdis
sigan
Impf. Subj.
xst form 2d form
siguiese, etc, ^guiera, etc.
Like seguir are
conseguir, jji#^^^^</ '^«tw^^\x^ pursue
sigo
sigues
sigue
seguimos
segufs
siguen
FuT. Ind.
seguir^
etc.
Conditional
seguirfa
Prbt. Ind.
seguf
seguiste
siguid
seguimos
seguisteis
siguieron
etc,
FuT. Subj.
siguiere, etc.
proseguir, prosecute
3. Brgnir, to erects may have either ie (written ye) or i when
the stem is accented.
Prin. Parts Erguir, irguiendo, eiguido, . V, eiguf, irguid
Pres. Ind.
yergo, irgo
yergues, irgues
yergue, irgue
erguimos
ergufs
yerguen, irguen
Pres. Subj.
yerga, irga
yergas, irgas
yerga, irga
irgamos
irgdis
yergan, irgan
Imperat.
yergue, urgue
Other forms like
seguir
erguid
RADICAL-CHANGING VERBS
221
4. Verbs ending in -eir belong to this dass, but lose one i when
two i's come together. Note the many forms with written accent
Reir, to laugh
Prin. Parts Refr, riendo, refdo, rfo, ref, rid
, Imperat. Pres. Subj. Fut. Ind,
Pres. Ind.
Impf. Ii
rfo
refa
rfes
etc.
rie
refmos
refs
rfen
rfe
refd
rfa
rfas
rfa
riamos
ridis
rfan
Impf. Subj.
1st form 2d form
riese riera
etc, etc.
rdr^
etc.
Conditional
reirfa
etc,
Fut. Subj
riere
etc.
Tret. Ind.
ref
refste
rid
refmos
refsteis
rieron
Like refr are
engrelr, make conceited sonrelr, smile
Frelr, fry^ has irregular past participle frito, as well as fref do.
248. Verbs ending in -uir have a y added to the stem-vowel u
except before i ; and i unaccented between two vowels is changed
to y.
I. Hnir, to run away ^ flee
Prin. Parts Huir, huyendo, huido, huyo, huf, huyd
Pres. Ind.
huyo
huyes
huye
huimos
hufs
buyen
Impf. Ind. Imperat.
hufa
hufas huye
hufa
hufamos
hufais huid
hufan
Pres. Subj,
huya
huyas
huya
huyamos
huyiis
huyan
Impf. Subj.
1st form 2d form
huyese huyera
0tc, etc.
Fut. Ind.
huir^
etc.
Conditional
huirfa
etc,
Fut. Subj.
huyere
etc.
Prbt. Ind.
huf
huiste
huyd
huimos
huisteis
huyeron
222
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Like huir are
atribair, attribute
comXmx fjinish
constrnir, construct
contribuir, contribute
destituir, remove from office
destmir, destroy
distribair, distribute
ezdnir, exclude
incluir, include^ inclose
influiry influence
instruir, instruct
obstrttir, obstruct
restituir, restore
snstituir, substitute
2. Argiiir requires the diaeresis before i but not before y.
pRiN. Parts Argiiir, arguyendo, argiiido, arguyo, argiif, arguyd
Impf. Ind. Argiifa, etc,
249. Irregular Past Participles. Some verbs otherwise regular
have irregular past participles :
abrir
to open
abierto
cubrir
to cover
cabierto
descubrir
to discover
descubierto
escribir
to write
escrito
frelr
tofiy
freido, frito
imprimir
to print
impreso
oprimir
to oppress
oprimido, opreeo
prender
to take^ arrest
prendido, preso
proveer
to provide
proveido, provisto
romper
to break
rompido, roto
suprimir
to suppress
suprimidOy sapreso
«. The form roto is used when the verb is transitive, otherwise rom-
pido.
Ha roto la pierna. He has broken his leg.
He rompido con mi novia. I have broken with my sweetheart;
b. The forms frito, opreso, preso, provisto, snpreso, are preferred as
adjectives. With haber the regular form is used, though frito and pro-
yisto may occur.
Pescado frito. Fried flsh.
Parr6n esti preso. Parrdn is captured.
Ha prendido el fuego en el convento. The fire spread to, or broke out in^
the convent.
IRREGULAR VERBS
223
250. Irregular Verbs may be conveniently divided into two
groups according to their preterits. In one group, the preterits,
like those of regular verbs, are accented on the ending in the first
and third persons of the singular; the preterits of the second
group accent the stem in the first and third singular. The arrange-
ment is alphabetical in each group.
Group I.
Prbs. Ind.
asgo
ases
ase
asimos
asfs
asen
Asir, to grcLsp
Prin. Parts Asir, asiendo, aside, asgo, asf, asi6
Impf. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj.
asfa asga
etc, ase asgas
asga
— -^ asgamos
asid asgdis
asgan
Impf. Subj.
1st form 2d form
asiese asiera
etc. etc.
FUT. Ind.
Pret. Ind.
asir^
asf
etc.
asiste
asid
Conditional
asimos
asirfa
asisteis
etc.
asieron
FuT. Subj.
asiere
etc.
Caer, to fall
Prin. Parts Caer, cayendo, cafdo, caigo, oaf, cayd
Prbs. Ind. Impf. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj. Fut. Ind.
caigo cafa caiga caer^
caes etc. cae caigas etc.
cae caiga
caemos calgamos Conditional
ca^is caed caigdis caerfa
caen caigan etc.
Impf. Subj.
1ST form 2D form
cayese cayera
etc. etc.
Fut. Subj.
cayere
etc.
Pret. Ind
caf
cafste
cayd
cafmos
cafsteis
cayeron
Note that a written accent is necessary on the 1 of the past participle
and of the second singular and first and second plural of the preterit
224
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Prbs. Ind.
doy
das
da
damos
Hai.q
dan
Dar, to give
Prin. Parts Dar, dando, dado, doy, df, did
Impf. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj. Fut. Ind.
daba
etc.
da
dad
d^
des
d^
demos
dels
den
1ST FORM
diese, etc.
Impf. Subj.
2D form
diera, etc.
dard
etc.
Conditional
darfa
etc,
Fut. Subj.
diere, etc.
Ir, to go
Prin. Parts Ir, yendo, ido, voy, fuf, fud
Pkbs. Ind.
voy
vas
va
vamos
vais
van
Impf. Ind.
iba
ibas
etc.
Imperat.
ve
vamos
id
Pres. Subj.
vaya
vayas
vaya
vayamos
vay^s
vayan
Impf. Subj.
1st form 2d form
fuese, etc.
' Fut. Ind.
ird
irds, etc.
Conditional
irfa
irfas, etc,
Fut. Subj,
fuere, etc.
Pret. Ind.
df
diste
did
dimos
disteis
dieron
Pret. Ind.
fuf
fuiste
fud
fuimos
fuistds
fueron
fuera, etc,
Xrae, to go away
Prin. Parts Irse, yendose, ido, me voy, me fuf, se fud
Olr, to hear
Prin. Parts Ofr, oyendo, ofdo, oigo, of, oyd
Pres. Ind.
oigo
oyes
oye
ofmos
ofs
oyen
Impf. Ind.
ofa
etc.
Imperat.
/
oye
ofd
Pres. Subj.
oiga
oigas
oiga
oigamos
oigdis
oigan
Impf. Subj.
1ST FORM
oyese, etc.
2D FORM
oyera, etc.
Fut. Ind.
oird
etc.
Conditional
oirfa
etc,
Fut. Subj.
oyere, etc.
Pret. Ind.
of
ofste _
oyd
ofmos
ofsteis
oyeron
Note the many written acx^ents, occurring on i when stressed after o.
IRREGULAR VERBS
225
Salir, to go out, leave
Prin. Parts Salir, saliendo, salido, salgo, salf, sali6
Pres. Ind.
salgo
sales
sale
salimos
salfs *
salen.
Impf. Ind.
salfa
etc.
Impbrat.
sal
salid
Pres. Subj.
saiga
saigas
saiga
salgamos
salgdis
salgan
Impf. Subj.
1st form 2d form
saliese, etc.
FuT. Ind. .
saldrd
saldrds, etc.
Conditional
saldrfa
saldrfaS) etc.
FuT. Subj.
saliere, etc.
PRET. Ind.
salf
saliste
salid
salimos
salisteis
salieron
saliera, etc.
Ser, to be
pRiN. Parts Ser, siendo, sido, soy, ^uf, fud
pREs. Ind.
soy
eres
es
somos
sois
son
Impf. Ind.
era
eras
era
dramos
erais
eran
Imperat.
sd
sed
Pres. Subj.
sea
seas
sea
seamos
sedis
sean
FuT. Ind.
1ST form
fuese, etc.
Impf. Subj.
2D form
fuera, etc.
etc.
Conditional
serfa
etc.
Fur. Subj.
fuere, etc.
pRET. Inix
fuf
fuiste
bi€
fuimos
fuisteis '
fueron
Valer, to be worth
Prin. Parts Valer, valiendo, valido, valgo, valf, valid
Pres. Ind.
valgo
vales
vale
valemos
valdis
valen
Impf. Ind. Impbrat.
valfa
etc, val^rvale
valed
Pres. Subj.
valga
valgas
valga
valgamos
valgdis
valgan
Impf. Subj.
1ST form 2D form
valiese, etc.
Derivatives are
equivaler, to be equal to
valiera, etc.
FuT. Ind.
valdrd
etc.
Conditional
valdrfa
etc,
FuT. Subj.
valiere, etc.
preyaler, avail
pRET. Ind
valf
valiste
valid
valimos
valisteis
valieron
^26
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Prbs. Ind.
veo
ves
ve
vemos
veis
ven
Ver, to see
Prin. Parts Ver, viendo, visto, veo, vf, vi<5
IMPF. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj. Fut. Ind.
vefa
etc.
ve
-7
ved
vea
veas
vea
veamos
vedis
vean
Impf. Subj.
XST FORM
viese
etc.
2D FORM
viera
etc.
vcrd
\ etc.
Conditional
verfa
etc,
Fut. Subj.
viere
etc.
Prbt. Ind.
vf
viste
vi6
vimos
vistds
vieron
The derivative proveer, to provide^ is regular but has also the ir-
regular past participle provisto.
Yacer, to He
Prin. Parts Yacer ; yaciendo ; yaddo ; yazco, yazgo, or yago ; yacl ;
yacid
Pres. Ind. Impf. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj. Fut. Ind, Pret. Ind.
yazco, yazgo, yacfa yazca, yazga, yacer^ yacf
or yago etc, yace yaga etc, yadste
yaces oryaz etc, yadd
yace yadmos
yacemos Conditional yadsteis
yac^is yaced yacerfa yaderon
yacen etc.
Impf. Subj,
Fut. Subj
1ST FORM 2D FORM
yaciese yaciera
yadere
etc, etc.
etc.
Gtoup n. The preterits in this group have unaccented e and o
in the first and third persons of the singular because the spoken
accent falls on the stem ; the stem-vowel is usually different from
the stem-vowel of the infinitive.
IRREGULAR VERBS
227
Andar, to go
Prin. Parts Andar, andando, andado, ando, anduve^ anduyo
pRES. Ind. Impf. Ind. Impbrat. Pres. Subj. Fut. Ind. Pret. Ind.
ando
€tc.
andaba
etc.
./
anda
andad
ande andar^ anduve
etc, etc, anduviste
anduvo
Conditional anduvimos
andarfa anduvisteis
etc, anduvieron
Impf. Subj.
1st form 2d form
anduviese, etc, anduviera, etc.
Pres. Ind.
quepo
cabes
cabe
cabemos
cab^is
caben
Fut. Subj.
anduviere, etc.
Caber, to be contained in, hold
Prin. Parts Caber, cabiendo, cabido, quepo, cupe, cupo
Imperat. Pres. Subj.
— — quepa
cabe quepas
quepa
quepamos
cabed quepdis
quepan
Impf. Ind.
cabfa
etc.
Fut. Ind. Pret. Ind.
cabr^ cupe
etc, cupiste
cupo
Conditional cupimos
cabrfa cupisteis
etc, cupieron
Impf. Subj.
xst form
cupiese, etc.
2D form
cupiera, etc.
Fut. Subj.
cupiere, etc.
Pres, Ind.
Impf. In
digo
deda
dices
etc.
dice
dedmos
decfs
dicen
Decir, to say
Prin. Parts Decir, didendo, dicho, digo, dije, dijo
Imperat. Pres. Subj. Fut. Ind. Pret. Ind
diga dir^ dije
digas dirds, etc, dijiste
diga dijo
digamos Conditional dijimos
digiis dirfa dijisteis
digan dirfas, etc, dijeron
di
dedd
Impf. Subj.
Fut. Subj.
dijere, etc.
1ST FORM 2D FORM
dijese, etc, dijera, etc.
The present indicative third singular has the special indefinite form
diz, // is said.
228 SPANISH GRAMMAR
The derivatives bendedr, to bless, and maldecir, to curse, differ
from decir as follows :
Past Part. Imperative (2D sing.) Fut. Ind.
bendecido bendice bendedr^, etc.
maldeddo maldice maldedr^, etc.
Other derivatives are like decir except in the imperative singular :
Imperative (2D sing.)
oontradecir, contradict contradice
dMdtdi, gainsay desdice .
prededr, predict predice
-dncir (STEM now obsolete)
Condacir, to conduct, drive
Prin. Parts condudr, condudendo, conduddo, conduzco, conduje,
condujo
pRES. Ind. Impf. Ind. Impbrat. Pres. Subj. Fxtt. Ind. Pret. Ind.
conduzco conduda conduzca condudr^ conduje
conduces etc, conduce conduzcas etc, condujiste
conduce conduzca condujo
condudmos conduzcamos Conditional condujimos
conduds condudd conduzcdis condudrfa condujisteis
conducen conduzcan etc, condujeron
Impf. Subj. Fut. Subj.
1ST form 2D form
condujese condujera condujere
etc, etc. etc.
Derivatives are
dediicir, deduce producir, produce
ediicir, bring out redncir, reduce
induciiy induce reprodadr, reproduce
introduciiy introduce traducir, translate
IRREGULAR VERBS
229
Estaiy to be
Prin. Parts Estar, estando, estado, estoy, estuve, estuvo
Pres. Ind. Impf. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj. Fut. Ind. Pret. Ind.
estoy estaba est^ estar^
estds etc. estd est^s etc.
estd est^
estamos estemos Conditional
est^ estad est^is estarfa
estdn est^n etc.
estuve
estuviste
estuvo
estuvimos
estuvisteis
estuvieron
Imp^. Subj.
xst form 2d form
estuviese, etc, estuviera, etc.
Fut. Subj.
estuviere, etc.
Haber, to have
Prin. Parts Haber, habiendo, habido, he, hube, hubo
Pres. Ind.
he
has
ha
hemos
hab^is
han
Impf. Ikd.
habfa
etc.
Imperat.
(h^
habed
Impf. Subj.
Pres. Subj.
haya
hayas
haya
hayamos
hay^s
hayan
Fut." Ind.
habr^
habrds, etc.
Conditional
habrfa
habrfas, etc.
Pret. Ind.
hube
hubiste
hubo
hubimos
hubisteis
hubieron
1ST FORM
hubiese, etc.
2D FORM
hubiera, etc.
Fut. Subj,
hubiere, etc.
Note. Though chiefly used as an auxiliary verb, haber remains as a
finite verb in such expressions as
£1 malhechor fu6 habido.
I Haya paces I
I Bien haya !
I Hal haya !
The criminal was appreherided.
Stop quarreling!
Blessed is he /
Curses on hint.
The imperative combines with the adverbs aqui, ahi, and aM.
Personal pronouns are appended to the verb: thus, H6ine aqui,
Here I am ; H^tenos aM, There we are.
Some grammarians deny the derivation of h^ from haber, and
attribute it to ver.
230
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Hacer, to make, to do
Prin. Parts Hacer, hadendo, hecho, hago, hice, hizo
pREs. Ind.
hago
haces
hace
hacemos
hac^is
hacen
Impf. Ind.
hacfa
etc.
Imperat.
haz
haced
Pres. Subj,
haga
hagas
haga
hagamos
hagdis
hagan
Impf. Subj.
1ST FORM
hiciese, etc.
FuT. Ind.
har^
hards, etc.
Conditional
harfa
harfaS) etc,
FuT. Subj.
hidere, etc.
Pret. Inix
hice
hidste
hizo
hidmos
hidsteis
hideron
2D FORM
hidera, etc, ,
The derivative satisf acer, to satisfy, retains the original f of the Latin :
Prin. Parts Satisf acer, satisfadendo, satisf echo, satisf ago, satisfice, satisfizo
Poder, to be able, can
Prin. Parts ' Poder, pudiendo, podido, puedo, pude, pudo
Pres. Ind. Impf. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj. Fut. Ind. Pret. Ind.
puedo podfa wanting pueda podr^ pude
puedes etc, puedas podrds, etc, pudiste
puede pueda
podemos podamos
pod^is poddis
pueden puedan
Impf. Subj.
1st form 2d form
pudiese, etc, pudiera, etc,
Poner, to put
Prin. Parts Poner, poniendo, puesto, pongo, puse, puso
Imperat. Pres. Subj.
ponga
pon pongas
ponga
pongamos
poned pongdis
pongan
Conditional
podrfa
podrfas, etc,
Fut. Subj.
pudiere, etc.
pudo
pudimos
pudistds
pudieron
Pres. Ind.
pongo
pones
pone
ponemos
pon^is
ponen
Impf. Ind.
ponfa
etc.
Fut. Ind.
pondr^
pondrds, etc.
Impf. Subj.
1ST FORM
pusiese, etc.
2D FORM
pusiera, etc.
Conditional
pondria
pondrias, etc,
Fut. Subj.
pusiere, etc.
Pret. Ind.
puse
pusiste
puso
pusimos
pusistds
pusieron
IRREGULAR VERBS
23?
A few derivatives are
anteponer, put before ezponer, expose
^mponer, compose, mend imponer, impose
disponer, dispose oponer, oppose
xecomponer, mend
proponer, propose
suponer, suppose
Reponer, to reply, is used chiefly in the preterit, repuso.
Querer, to wish, desire; to love
Prin. Parts Querer, queriendo, querido, quiero, quise, quiso
PRES. Ind. Impf. Ind^ Imperat. Pres. Subj.
quiero
quieres
quiere
queremos
querdis
quieren
querfa
etc.
quiere
quered
quiera
quieras
quiera
queramos
querdis
quieran
Impf. Subj.
1st form 2d form
quisiese
etc.
quisiera
etc.
FuT. Ind.
querr^
querrds, etc.
Conditional
querrla
querrfas, etc,
FuT. Subj.
quisiere
etc.
Pret. Ind.
quise
quisiste
quiso
quisimos
quisisteis
quisieron
Saber, to know
Prin. Parts Saber, sabiendo, sabido, s^, supe, supo
Pres. Ind.
s^
sabes
sabe
sabemos
sabds
saben
Impf. Ind. Imperat.
sabfa
etc. sabe
sabed
Pres. Subj.
sepa
sepas
sepa
sepamos
sepdis
sepan
FuT. Ind.
sabr^
sabrds, etc.
Conditional
sabrfa
sabrfas, etc.
Impf. Subj. Fut. Subj.
1ST form 2D FORM
supii^ra y supiere
supiese
etc.
Pret. Inr
supe
supiste
supo
supimos
supisteis
supieron
etc.
etc.
232
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Tener, to have
Prin. Parts Tener, teniendo, tenido, tengo, tuve, tuvo
Pres. Ind.
tengo
tienes
tiene
tenemos
tenuis
tienen
Impf. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj.
tenfa
etc.
ten
tened
tenga
tengas
tenga
tengamos
tengdis
tengan
Impf. Subj.
1st form 2d form
tuviese tuviera
etc, etc.
Derivatives are
abstenerse, abstain
atenerse, stick to^ heed
contener, restrain
FuT. Ind.
tendr^
tendrds, etc.
Conditional
tendrla
tendrfas, etc,
Fut. Subj,
tuviere
etc.
Pret. Ind,
tuve
tuviste
tuvo
tuvimos
tuvistds
tuvieron
detener, stop
entretener, entertain
mantener, maintain
obtener, obtain
retener, retain
sostener, sustain
Traer, to bring
Prin. Parts Traer, trayendo, trafdo, traigo, traje, trajo
Pres. Ind. Impf. Ind. Imperat. Pres. Subj. Fut. Ind. Pret. Ind.
traigo trafa
traes
trae
traemos
tra^is
traen
etc, trae
traed
Impf. Subj.
1ST FORM
trajese
etc.
Derivatives are
atraer, attract
contraer, contract
traiga
traigas
traiga
traigamos
traigdis
traigan
traere
etc.
Conditional
traerfa
etc,
Fut. Subj.
traje
trajiste
trajo
trajimos
trajisteis
trajeron
SD FORM
trajera
etc.
trajere
etc.
distraer,
distract
eztraer,
extract
IRREGULAR VERBS
233
Venir, to come
Prin. Parts Venir, viniendo, venido, vengo, vine, vino
Pres. Ind. Impf. Ind. Imperat. Prbs. Subj. Fut. Ind. Pret. Ind.
vengo venfa venga
vienes etc, ven vengas
viene venga
venimos vengamos
vendr^
vendrds, etc.
venfs venid vengdis
vienen vengan
Impf. Subj.
1ST form 2D FORM
viniese viniera
etc, etc.
Conditional
vendrfa
vendrfas,^/^.
Fut. Subj.
viniere
etc.
vine
viniste
vino
vinimos
vinisteis
vinieron
Important derivatives are
ayenir, reconcile
conyenir, tigree
preyenir, wam^ anticipate
proyenir, take rise from
sobreyenir, come unexpectedly
subyenir, c^sist
251. Defective Verbs, having only certain forms in use, are —
I. Placeri to please^ usually found only in the third person singu-
lar.
Pres. Part. Prbs. Ind.
pladendo place
Impf. Ind. Pres. Subj.
placfa plega, or
plegue, or
plazca
Fut. Ind.
placerd
Conditional
placerfa
Pret. Ind.
plugo, or
placid
Impf. Subj. Fut. Subj.
1st form 2d form
pluguiese, or pluguiera, or pluguiere
pladese pladera
«
2. Raer, to erase. This verb, but little used, is conjugated like
caer with the addition in the present subjunctive of the forms raya,
rayas, etc.
234 SPANISH GRAMMAR
3. Roer, to gnaw.
Prbs. Ind.
Pres. Subj.
roo, roigo, royo
roa, roiga, roya
roes
roaSy roigas, royas
roe
roa, roiga, roya
roemos
etc.
rodis
roen
a. The derivative corroer, to corrode^ avoids the forms with -ig-
or -y-.
4. Ten verbs ending in -ir are commonly used only in those
forms which have i in the ending. Hence they lack the present
indicative singular and third plural, the present subjunctive, and
the imperative singular. Otherwise their conjugation is regular.
These vejbs are
abolir, to abolish despavorir, to become frightened
agnerrir, to make warlike embafr, to impose upon
arrecirse, to become numb empedernir, to harden
aterirse, to become numb garantir, to guarantee
desmarrirse, to become sad manir, to become tender
252. Impersonal Verbs denote the action of an unspecified sub-
ject, generally it in English, but not referring to any person or
thing. Such verbs in Spanish use the infinitive, the participles, and
the third person singular of the various tenses.
I. Impersonal verbs denoting phenomena of nature are
amanecer, to dawn : amanece, // is dawning
anochecer, to get dark or night : anochece, // is getting dark
deshelar, to thaw : deshiela, /'/ is thawing
granizar, to hail: graniza, // hails
helar, to freeze : hiela, it is freezing
llOTer^ to rain : llueye, // is raining
neyar, to snow : nieva, it is snowing
relampagnear, to lighten : relampaguea, it lightens
tronar^ to thunder: tmena, it thunders
IMPERSONAL VERBS 235
2. Other impersonal verbs are
acontecer^ to happen : acontece, it happens
bastar, to be enough : basta, it is enough
constar, to be evident : conatai it is evident
conyenir, to suit : conyienei it suits
importar, to matter: importa, /'/ matters
suceder, to happen : sucede, // happens
Haber, hacer, estar, and ser may also be used impersonally.
253. Haher Impersonal. For the sake of the translation, a com-
plete conjugation of haber used impersonally is here given.
Infinitive haber, be ; as, no pnede haber, there cannot be
Pres. Part. habiendo, there being
Past Part. habido, there having been
Indicative Mood
Present hay, there is, there are
Imperfect habia, there was, there were
Preterit hubo, there was, there were
FwTURE habrA, there will be
Conditional habria, there would be
Pres. Perf. ha habido, there has been
Pluperfect habia habido, there had been
Pret. Perf. hubo habido, there had been
FuT. Perf^ habrA habido, there will have been
CoNDiT. Perf. habria habido, there would have been
Subjunctive Mood
Present haya, let there be haya habido
Imperfect ist hubiese hubiese habido
2D hubiera hubiera habido
Future hnbieie hubiere habido
a. With expressions of time ha is used instead of hay: poco
tiempo ha, a short time ago,
254. Passive Voice. The passive voice of a Spanish verb is
formed from the auxiliary set and the past participle of the verb.
236
SPANISH GRAMMAR
The past participle must agree in gender and number with the
subject. For other auxiliaries see section 270, i,a.
Infinitive
Prbs. Part.
Past Part.
Present
Imperfect
Preterit
Future
Conditional
Imperative 2D Sing.
ser llamadOi /^ 6e called
siendo Uamado, being called
sido llamado, been called
Indicative Mood
807 UamadOi / am called
eres \\axnaA.%you are called
68 llamado, he is called
ella 68 llamada, she is called
8omo6 llamados, we are called
80i8 llamadiMi, you are called
son llaiiiado8', they are called
era Uamado, / wc^ called
eras Uamado, you were called^ etc.
fui llamado, / was called^ etc.
eer^ llamado, / shall be called^ etc.
eeria llamado, / should be called^ etc.
8^ llamadOi be called
Present
Imperfect ist form
2D form
Future
2D Plur. eed llamadoe, be called
Subjunctive Mood
8ea llamado, etc
fneee llamado, etc
fuera llamado, etc
fuere llamado, etc.
Pres. Perf.
Pluperfect
Pret. Perf.
FuT. Perf.
CoNDiT. Perf.
Present
Imperfect ist form
2D form
Future
Compound Tenses
indicative mood
he eido llamadOi / have been called^ etc
habia eido Uamado^ / had been called^ etc.
hube sido llamado, / had been called^ etc.
habr6 sido llamado, / shall have been called^ etc.
habria sido llamado, I should have been ccUled^ etc
subjunctive mood
haya sido Uamado, etc
hubiese sido llamado, etc
hubiera sido llamado, etc.
hubiere sido llamado, etc.
REFLEXIVE VERBS 237
255. Reflexive Verbs.
Infinitive leyantar86| to get up
Pres. Part, leyantibidose, getting up
Past Part. leyantadO| (^gof) up
Present Indicative
Sing. I. me leyanto, I get up Plur. i. nos leyantamos, «/^^^/ «^
2. te leyantas, you get up 2. os leyantdis, you get up
3. se leyanta, he gets up 3. se leyantan, they get up
Vd. 86 Vfs^dJcAjBi^ you get up Vds. se \s^b:dXj8:cl^ you get up
Imperf. Ind. me leyantaba, / was getting up, etc.
Pret. Ind. me leyant^, I got up^ etc.
FuT. Ind. me leyantar^, / shall get up, etc.
Conditional me leyantarfa, / should get up, etc.
Pres. Perf. Ind. yo me he leyantado, / have got up, etc.
Neg. yo no me he leyantado, I have not got up, etc.
Interr. ^ se ha leyantado Vd. ? did you get up ? etc.
Neg. Interr. £ no se ha leyantado Vd.? did you not get up f etc.
Imperative Mood
Sing. 2. leyintate, get up For the negative, supply corre-
Plur. 2. leyantaos, get up sponding persons frpm the
present subjunctive.
Present Subjunctive as Imperative
Sing. 2. que te leyantes,^^/ up no te leyantes, don'' t get up
(formal) ley&ntese \6,.^get up no se leyante Vd., don't get up
3. que se leyante, let him que no se leyante, let him not get
get up up
Plur. I. leyant^monos, let us get no nos leyantemos, let us not get
up up
2. que OS leyant^is,^^/ up no os leyant^is, don* t get up
(formal) leyintense Yda., get up no se leyanten Vds., donH get up
3. que se leyanten, let them que no se leyanten, let them not
get up get up
Other forms of reflexive verbs are formed in a similar way.
The pronouns precede the verb except the infinitive, the present
238 SPANISH GRAMMAR
participle, and the positive imperative, to which the pronoun is
appended. A written accent is required whenever, by the addition
of this extra syllable, the spoken accent is thrown farther back
than the second syllable from the end of the word. Before nos
the final 8 of the first person plural, and before os the final d of
the second person plural, are dropped.
1 nus, leyantemos -|- nos gives leyant^onos
leyantad -|- os gives leyantaos
Tint
id -|- 08 gives idos, from irse, to go away
256. Impersonal Reflexive.
Present Indicative
se me ocurre, it occurs to me se nos ocorre, it occurs to us
se te ocurre, // occurs to you se os ocurre, // occurs to you
86 le ocurre, // occurs to him^ her se les ocurre, // occurs to them
se le ocurre a Vd., // occurs to you
Present Perfect Indicative
se me ha ocurrido, // has occurred to me, etc.
Preterit Indicative
se me ocuni6, // occurred to me, etc.
257. Reciprocal Verb. The plural of some reflexive verbs may
be called reciprocal because they represent the action as occurring
between two or more individuals.
, amarse, to love each other
Present Indicative
nos amamos, we love each other
OS amAia,you love each other
se aman, they love each other
The persons concerned may be defined as to gender and num-
ber by the use of el uno el otro, la una la otra, etc.
Juan 7 Maria se aman el uno a la John and Mary love each other,
otra.
Las mujeres se aman unas a otras. The women love each other.
PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION 239
258. Periphrastic Conjus:ation. (Progressive Form.)
Present Indicative
estoy cantando, / am singing
estib cantando,^^!^ are singing
estA cantandOi he is singing
estamos cantandOi we are singing
estAis cantandOi you are singing
estibi cantando, they are singing
Imperfect Indicative
estaba cantando, / was singings etc.
Preterit Indicative
estnye cantando, / was singings etx:.
Other tenses and moods are formed in a similar way.
Instead of estar other verbs may be used as the auxiliary, espe-.
dally ir. See section 275.
Present Indicative
voy siendOi / am getting
yas MVL<^%you are getting
ya siendo, he {if) is getting
yamos siendo, we are getting
yrsAa sidfAOf you are getting
van siendOi they are getting
Imperfect Indicative
iba siendo, / was getting, etc.
Preterit Indicative
ful siendOi I was getting, etc.
EXERCISE 36
I. Make lists of —
1. Irregular past participles.
2. Present participles with change of stem-vowel.
3. Irregular futures and conditionals, ist person singular.
4. Irregular imperatives.
240
SPANISH GRAMMAR
5. Preterits having an unaccented termination in the ist and
3d person singular ; as, tuve, tuvo.
6. Present indicatives, ist person singular, having the letter g
as the last letter of the stem, and the corresponding present sub-
junctive ; as, tengo, tenga.
II. Study the irregular verbs according to the following scheme by
substituting each verb in turn.
I
we
they^
f
\sein
vendo
sellX vendemos
venden
I was sellings vendla
we
they]
I ^
he
they}
have sold^
he vendido
hemos vendido
han vendido
vendl
sold\ vendi6
vendieron
I shall ] r vender^
we shall -sell\ venderemos
they will] [vender&n
sell
(familiar), vende
(formal), venda Vd.
let him
let us
let them
sell
que ^1 venda
vendamos
que vendan
he sells, vende
do you sell? ^ vende Vd. ?
he used to sell, vendla
have you sold? i ha vendido Vd. ?
did you sell? i vendi6 Vd. ?
I should
he would
we should
venderia
selH venderia
venderlamos
, , „ f (familiar) no vendas
don^t selP ^ ^
[ (formal) no venda Vd.
(he wishes) me to sell, que yo venda
in order that he might sell, para que vendiese or vendiera
(J ordered) him to sell, que fl vendiese or vendiera
CHAPTER XV
SYNTAX OF VERB. TENSES
259. Agreement. A verb must agree in person and number
with its subject.
Yo estudio; td jnegas. I study j you play.
Bran las once de la maSana. // was eleven in the morning,
260. Person. If the subject has different persons, the verb will
have the first person in preference to the second or third, and the
second in preference to the third.
IJ^l y yo ibamos en el mismo tren. He and I were traveling in the
same train,
Ella cree que t6 y yo nos entende- She believes that you and I have
mo8. an understanding.
Til y Juan no os amAie. You and John do not love each
other,
a, A relative pronoun, as the subject of a verb, has the same person
as its antecedent. See section 164, 5.
1x6 yo qne soy mis joven. / will go who am younger,
Td eres nn pastelero que siempre You are a trimmer who always
quieres quedar bien con todo el wants to be on good tenns with
mundo. everybody,
261. Number. A compound subject requires a plural verb.
El vino y el aceite se yenden bien. Wine and oil sell well,
I. But if the verb precedes the compound subject, it sometimes
agrees with the first noun only.
Se yende mucho vino y aceite. Much wine and oil are sold,
241
f
242 SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. A singular noun or pronoun is frequently used to sum up a
series, in which case the verb is singular.
Caf^, caiKa de azticar, algod6n, ta- Coffee^ sugar-cane^ cotton^ tobacco^
baco 7 cochinilla, todo se produce and cochineal^ all are easily pro-
con fadlidad. duced.
a. Two or more singular subjects, closely related in thought but not
connected by a conjunction, may be followed by a singular verb.
La profesidn, el paitido politico, la The profession, the politics, the
yida entera de muchos hombres whole life of many men depend
pende de casos fortuitos. on chance circumstances.
3. Two or more neuters take a singular verb ; hence, two infin-
itives with a singular verb is common. If, however, it is desired to
emphasize each idea by way of contrast, the article is used before
each neuter, followed by a plural verb.
Seria dificil el moralizar y evan- To make moral these peoples and
gelizar a estas gentes. Christianize them would be
difficult.
Saber teologia y no saber montar To know theology and not to know
desacreditaba a D. Luis a los how to ride discredited Louis
oj08 de su primo. in the eyes of his cousin.
El oir y el entender no son lo Hearing and understanding are
mismo. not the same.
4. Words connected by ni ... ni, ... 0, or similar connec-
tives may take a plural or a singular verb according to sense, but
require different verbs to show the person when the person differs
in the several clauses.
Ni uno ni otro es mi padre. Neither one is my father.
Bra un joyen de una belleza que ni He wa^ a young man of a beauty
la penitencia ni la agonia hablan which neither fasting nor the
podido eclipsar. hour of death had been able to
eclipse,
Vd. es loco 70 lo soy. Either you are crazy or I am,
5. Collective nouns may be followed by either a singular or a
plural verb, according as the whole or its component parts are
uppermost in mind.
USE OF TENSES
243
El dla de su salida acadieron a On the day of his departure many
saludarlo muchas personas. Gran persons came to pay their re-
parte fu^ con ^1 hasta la Gnaira spects, A large number went
7 no se apartaron hasta perder de with him as far as La Guaira,
yista el barco que lo conducla a- and did not disperse until the
la Habana. vessel which was taking him
to Havana was lost from sight,
6. With ser the subject rather than the predicate noun deter-
mines the number ; but if the subject is separated from the verb
while the predicate noun comes close after it, the verb may agree
with the predicate noun in both person and number.
Sns colecciones eran una marayilla. His collections were a marvel,
£1 alquiler de esta casa son mil The rent of this house is one thou-
pesetas al aSo. sand pesetas a year.
Son los cuadros de Murillo lo que Murillo^s paintings are what I
m&s me gusta en Seyilla. like best in Seville,
But, Los cuadros de Murillo es lo que mis me gusta en Sevilla.
262. Present Tense, i. The Spanish present tense indicative,
generally used as in English, may also represent an action which
began in the past but is still continuing in the present English
has the present perfect.
I Desde cuAndo est& Vd. aqui ? Since when have you been here f
Estoy aqui desde ayer. I have been here since yesterday,
Sesenta aSos lleyo siryiendo al rey. / have spent sixty years serv-
ing the king.
a. After the impersonal verb hace with expressions of time, the pres-
ent tense is frequent.
Hace dias que no la yeo. // is days since I have seen her,
Hace dos meses que estoy aqui. I have been here for two months,
2. In lively narrative, the present is sometimes used instead of the
preterit
Estaban ciegos de c61era. Me en- They were blind with anger, I
tero del motive de la disputa, learned the cause of the dispute
les digo que unos y otros estin and told them they were both
equivocados y se ponen furiosos wrongs and they got angry ai
contra mi. me.
244 SPANISH GRAMMAR
3. The present also appears for the future, especially in offers.
Si quieres que me maiche, magana If you wish me to go, I will leave
salgo para Barcelona, 7 espero to-morrow for Barcelona and
alii a embarcar. wait there to embark,
Se lo doy a Vd. por doa pesetas. I will give it to you for two pesetas,
4. The present tense is employed in certain idiomatic expressions, as
A poco mis se muere. He almost died,
Tropezd y por poco se cae. He stumbled and almost fell,
263. Imperfect, Preterit, and Present Perfect compared and
contrasted in their regular uses, see sections 63, 65, and 73.
264. Imperfect Indicative, i. The imperfect tense, indicative,
has the force of the English pluperfect when used with expressions
of time denoting a continuance of the action.
Hacia dos aSos que estaba en / had been in Madrid two years,
Madrid.
2. The imperfect indicative may appear in place of the condi-
tional.
Una de las cosas que hacia, si He- One of the things which I should
gara a tocarme un buen premio, do, if I happened to win a good
era regalarle al portero el panta- prize, would be to give the j an-
16n mio de cuadros. . itor my checked trousers,
265. Preterit Perfect, or past anterior, indicative, is used after
conjunctions which denote time, as apenas, scarcely, asi que, as
soon as; despu^s que, after; etc:
Mi amo apenas me hubo visto Scarcely had my master seen me
cuando me llam6 por mi nombre. when he called me by name,
Despu^s que hubieron salido del After they had left the apartment.
aposento.
a. The simple preterit is generally employed instead of the compound
preterit.
Asi que se march6 el medico. As soon as the doctor had gone.
USE OF TENSES 245
b. The conjunctions compounded with que lose their first element if
the participle stands first.
Bchado que hubo pie a tierra. As soon as he had set foot on the
ground,
Salido que hubieron del aposento. After they had left the apartment,
Sentado que se hubo ella. When she had seated herself
266. Future. The future indicative may denote probability.
SerAn las doce. // is probably twelve o^ clock,
^Vd. sabrA bastante contabilidad I suppose you know bookkeeping
y tendrA buena letra ? NOySeSor, and write a good hand f No^
no la tengo muy buena ni muy sir^ I don V write a very good
mala siquiera. No s^ leer. hand nor even a very bad one,
I canH read,
a. The future tense is frequent in rhetorical questions that are con-
sidered undeniable by the speaker.
I HabrA desgracia mayor ? Can there be a greater misfortune ?
iQu^ ojos I08 de aquella niSal ^^What eyes that girl has! ^"^ ^^Can
— I Serin mis hermosos que los they be handsomer than yours ?^^
suyos? pregunt^. I CLsked,
b. For haber de and ir a as paraphrases for the future, see sections
107, 3; and 60.
267. The Future Perfect has uses corresponding to those of the
simple future.
I Qu^ asombro habrA sido el de Vd. 1 What astonishment yours must
have been !
268. The Conditional may be employed like the future, to denote
probability, when referring to past time.
Serian las tres de la madrugada. // was probably three in the morn-
ing'
Podrla tener a la saz6n catorce He might have been at that time
aSo8. fourteen years old,
Juan no yino. Estaria enfermo. fohn did not come, I suppose he
was sick,
269. Impersonal Verbs. Verbs that are used only in the third
person singular are called impersonal. See section 252
246 SPANISH GRAMMAR
1. Verbs denoting phenomena of nature are impersonal in both
Spanish and English.
Llneye. It is raining.
Va a helar. // is going to freeze,
Estd neyando. // is snowing,
2. Ser with adjectives and a few nouns is common in the im-
personal use.
£s justo. // is right,
Fu^ claro. // was evident,
Fuersa es confesar. // must be confessed,
3. Spanish has many impersonal expressions which correspond
to personal expressions in English. The person concerned in the
action of the Spanish verb is expressed by the indirect object
A mi no me importa. / donH care, (Lit // doesnH mat-
ter to me.)
No me conyiene vender. // doesnH suit me to sell.
Le toca a Vd. hablar. // is your turn to speak.
4. Many reflexive verbs are used impersonally. As the person
concerned is expressed by the indirect object pronoun, these verbs
may be said to have an impersonal conjugation. See section 256.
Se me figura. / imagine,
Se me olyida. I forget,
Se no8 ociirre. There occurs to us.
I Qu6 se te ofrece ? What is the matter?
A D. Luis se le figoraba que iba Louis fancied that he was going
a deslustrar su gloria. to blast his reputation,
EXERCISE 37
I. The color, the drawing, the composition, all revealed a genius
of the first rank. 2. You and I are going to Madrid. 3. Who says
so ? I, who have seen you take off your hat 4. The old man and
you were seated before the door. 5. The doctor, the notary, and
the priest were present at the party. 6. Eating and drinking are
SYNTAX OF VERBS 247
indispensable. 7. Neither John nor Paul has arrived. 8. Either
she will write or I will. 9. Many people came to say good-by, and
some wept. 10. I have been up^ more than two hours. 11. You
are probably a friend of the Spanish consul. 12. When I met you,
I had been there half an hour. 13. It was only six months that
they had been married. 14. We have always been friends from
childhood. 15. He was probably forty years old when he took
command^ of the army. 16. As soon as he had finished his speech
the audience shouted, " Bravo, bravo." 17. After the captain had
gone ashore, the sailors stopped working. 18. There were many
strangers who had come to attend the fair. 19. I promised that
neither I nor any oT my friends would raise insurrectionary' par-
ties. 20. It is more than a year since I have spoken to him. 2 1. I
have forgotten the lesson. 22. It did not occur to me to say any-
thing. 23. He imagines he is* a great orator. 24. It does not
matter to me what he says. 25. It is very fine weather to-day:
the sun is shining and there is no dust. 26. There was no moon
that night. 27. If it rains, it will be very muddy in the streets.
28. Was it very cold when you were in the country ? 29. In the
summer it dawns early and grows dark late. 30. I do not know
what education he is likely to have, nor what books he may have
read. 31. I suppose he is coming to-morrow morning. 32. She is
to deliver the work next Monday evening. 33. Have you been
waiting long ? 34. The candidate had many friends in the audience,
but a large nimiber did not applaud his speech. 35. The salary of
this position is two thousand dollars a year. 36. We are the ones
who have the greatest interest in this project.
^ leyantado. * Omit.
^ Supply the definite article. ^ Use infinitive.
CHAPTER XVI
PASSIVE VOICE. PARTICIPLES
270. Passive Voice. The passive voice indicates that the action
is performed upon the subject ; as, The dog was kicked by the boy.
The person performing the action is called the agent ; as, boy in
the example.
1. In Spanish the passive voice is formed by the combination
of the auxiliary verb ser and the past participle of the verb, which
must agree in gender and number with the subject. See section
254 for conjugation.
a. Other verbs than ser are sometimes joined with the past participle
in the formation of the passive voice ; as, quedar, hallarse, encontrarse,
verse, andar, ir.
Qaeda ezplicado en la pigina ao. // is explained on page 20,
Las tiopas se h^laban mandadas The troops were commanded by
por buenos oficiales. good officers.
En el fondo del lienzo se veia pin- In the background of the canvas
tado otro cuadro. was painted another picture.
Van inclnidas muchas f otograffas Many photographs are included
en el diccionario. in the dictionary.
2. The agent in Spanish is introduced by por; or, in case the
action is mental, by de.
C^ar fu6 asesinado por Bmto. Casar was assassinated by Brutus.
C^sar fu^ respetado de todos. Ccesar wets respected by all,
271. The passive voice is little used in Spanish. On the other
hand, it is commonly employed in English for the following pur-
poses:
248
PASSIVE VOICE 249
(i) To give prominence to the thing acted on by placing it at the
beginning of the sentence as the subject of the passive verb.
(2) To make a statement indefinite.
Now Spanish, using the active voice, obtains the same results as
follows :
1. By reason of the personal a (see section 134) which allows
the object to stand first in the sentence.
A Carlos V sigue Felipe II. Charles V is succeeded by Philip II,
2. Indefiniteness is obtained by the use of the third person plu-
ral. (See section 196.)
Me llamaron a las cinco. / wcls called at five o'clock,
Sintid que le tocaban en la espalda. He felt himself touched on the
shoulder,
3. By substituting the reflexive verb ; see section 272.
272. Reflexiye Substitute for Passive. As a substitute for the
passive voice, the reflexive verb is most important.
Puede decirse. // may be said,
Se ban mandado los efectos por el The goods have been shipped by
vapor Caracas. the steamer Caracas,
Se daba la orden de ataque. The order for attack was given,
Di^ronseles las mejores armas. The best arms were given them,
a. As with the true passive, the agent may be introduced by por after
a reflexive verb.
Finn6se la concordia primero por The agreement was signed first by
^1 y despu^s por el rey. him and afterwards by the king,
b. The reflexive substitute for the passive occurs frequentiy in signs
and general statements.
Se yende la casa. The house is for sale,
Se prohibe fumar. Smoking forbidden,
Aqui se habla espaSol. Spanish spoken here,
Se dice. // is said, {People say. They say,)
Se alquila. For hire (or renf).
250
SPANISH GRAMMAR
273. Impersonal Reflexive. The reflexive verb used imperson-
ally as a substitute for the passive voice conveys an idea of indefi-
niteness. Se, in the popular mind, acquires almost the meaning of
somebody ox people.
Se nos pregunta por correo.
Se procesa a los criminales.
Se me busca a mi.
Se va a salir de la iglesia.
We are asked by mail. (Lit. // is
asked us by mail.)
The criminals are prosecuted,
I am being looked for.
People are about to come out of
the church.
274. Present Participle. The present participle, or gerund, has
many uses. It never changes its form ; and may have a subject
different from that of the principal verb. It may denote —
1. Time.
Nos conocimos siendo niSos.
2. Manner.
V6 oorriendo.
3. Means.
En otros siglos hnbiera logrado su
prop6sito pagando un asesino.
4. Cause.
No yendo nosotros, snpongo qne no
iris tti.
Siendo ella bonita y Luciano dis-
tinguido, hacian una buena
pareja.
We became acquainted when we
were children.
Go on the run.
In other centuries he would have
achieved his purpose by paying
an c^sc^sin.
Since we are not goings I suppose
you will not go.
As she was pretty and Lucian
distinguished^ they mcuie a fine
couple.
5. The only preposition used with the gerund is en ; which then
means after.
En muriendo ella, saldris de aqul. After she dies ^ you will get out of
here.
PRESENT PARTICIPLE 251
6. The gerund must not be used as an adjective. Spanish has
many adjectives derived from the Latin present participle in ante
or ente, which take its place.
una cesta colgante, a hanging basket
agna corriente, running water
a. If no adjective exists to express the idea, a relative clause must be
employed.
Remito a Vd. cuatro cajas que con- / send you four boxes containing
tienen cien fusiles. a hundred rifles,
275. Periphrastic Conjugation. The present participle is used
with verbs to denote progressive action, whenever it is desired to
emphasize the progressive character of the act. The weak English
progressive is usually the corresponding simple tense form.
She is singing, Ella canta.
She was singing. Ella cantaba.
But, Ella estaba cantando en el She was singing at the time when
momento en que entr^. / stepped in.
The verb estar most frequently occurs as the auxiliary in the
periphrastic conjugation ; but other verbs, as hallarse, encontrarse,
venir, andar, quedar, are employed and give great precision to the
idea. With verbs denoting movement ir is especially common. The
present participle with these words is closely allied to its use in ex-
pressing manner. For the progressive conjugation see section 258.
Pedro estd oonstruyendo una tapia. Peter is building a wall.
He estado arreglando la liabitaci6n. / have been putting the room in
order,
Gonf orme ella iba leyendo la carta, As she continued reading the letter
se iba poni^ndose p^ida. she kept growing paler andpaler,
Los reUmpagos fueron siendo me- The flashes of lightning kept get-
nos frecuentes. ting less frequent.
La casa de Cerinola yenla cayendo The house of Cerinola had been
desde tiempo del padre de Luis. decaying since the time of Louis'^
father,
Un dia el pintor andaba recorriendo One day the painter was visiting
laa iglesias de Madrid. the churches of Madrid.
252 SPANISH GRAMMAR
276. Past Participle. With aiixiliary verbs the Spanish past
participle forms compound tenses and the passive voice. See sec-
tions 241, 254.
1. With haber, the past participle is invariable ; with other verbs
it agrees with the subject
Ha escrito la carta. He has written the letter,
Tengo la carta que ha escrito. / have the letter which he has
written,
^ - lescrita la carta. The letter is written,
QnedaJ
Fu6 escrita la carta. * The letter was written,
2. Tener may be used, with transitive verbs only, as an auxiliary
when attention is directed to the state of the direct object rather
than to the process indicated by the verb. The participle then
agrees with the direct object.
Lo que mis daSaba a la diyisi6n What most harmed the division
eran unas piezas que los carlis- was a couple of guns which the
tas tenlan situadas en un cerrillo. Carlists had located on a knoll,
I Cdmo decirle que la tengo en- How tell her that I keep her de-
gaSada? ceivedf
a. Llevar is sometimes used like tener as an auxiliary verb.
Llevo escrita la carta. / have got the letter written,
3. Ser cannot be the auxiliary with an intransitive verb.
Han ido. They are gone.
Ha muerto. He is dead,
4. Some past participles have an active meaning ; but they are
usually applicable only to human beings.
Un hombre muy leido. A well-read man,
Es cansado. He is tiresome,
dL^dAwX<\Q^ grateful parecido, similar^ like
atreyido, bold porfiado, obstinate
callado, silent sentido, sensitive
diyertido, merry sutnSiO^ patient
and many others.
PARTICIPLES 253
5. The past participle may be used absolutely; in which case
it usually stands first in the clause. English commonly requires in
the corresponding construction that the present participle of an
auxiliary precede the past participle.
Dicho esto, salid. Having said this, he went out,
A mi, muerta la seSora Condesa, As for me, now that the countess
nada me pnede interesar de is dead, nothing in that house
aqnella casa. can interest me,
6. The means whereby the action of a past participle is carried
out is usually introduced by de.
La tierra esti cubierta de nieye. The earth is covered with snow,
Ftt^ cargado de hierros. He wets loaded with irons,
7. The prepositions antes de, despu^s de, loego de, and para
may govern an absolute participial construction, in which the noun
is often in reality the subject of a passive verb.
]>e8pu^8 de cerradas las puertas, After the doors were closed the
empez6 la conferencia. lecture began,
Lnego de yuelto le yf. After he returned I saw him.
Las ideas no eran para xeyeladas The ideas were not {such as) to be
a su sobrina. revealed to his niece,
EXERCISE 38
I. His opinion was listened to with profound respect. 2. The
lady was agreeably surprised by the visit. 3. I complain and I am
told that I ought not to complain. 4. Behind my back I hear my-
self called. 5. The lands have been sold at auction two months
ago. 6. There were seen on both sides two long narrow counters.
7. On a table in the center were placed the works recendy pub-
lished and the reviews. 8. The letter for you was sent to Madrid.
9. The letter lay inclosed in a little secret drawer. 10. Everything
has been sold very dear. 11. Not a bill is paid without my con-
sent. 12. People say that it is the fashion. 13. The doors are
closed at six o'clock. 14. This house for rent. 15. It may be said
that I haven't a single moment of rest. 16. Segovia was founded
254 SPANISH GRAMMAR
by the Phoenicians. 17. The walls were adorned with religious
engravings. 18. The trees are now covered with leaves. 19. The
French king was made a^ prisoner by the Spaniards. 20. A sharp
dispute had the community divided. 21. As he passed the bank
he thought of * the money which he had deposited there. 22. The
days are getting shorter. 23. It is raining. 24. I am getting tired
of my residence in this place. 25. We have been working all day.
26. It is snowing at present. 27. She was* talking to Sancho
when she entered the room. 28. I prefer to earn wages* by sew-
ing. 29. You ought to be ashamed to work like a peon when you
are the richest man in the village. 30. As the teacher was sick,
we had no lessons to-day. 31. By traveling one learns many
things. 32. After the performance was finished® we left the thea-
ter. 33. She is an amusing actress, very similar to her father.
34. They would rob me of^ the treasure after it was discovered.
35. He has the gold coins hidden in his garden. 36. Why did you
come in when I was busy? 37. Having reached his village, he
found that his parents were dead. 38. He earned this money by
working all summer. 39. As he had no friends in the city, he did
not remain there long. 40. Because he was a bold man by nature,
he did not hesitate. 41. The sick man was taken to the hospital
and his life was saved. 42. The question having been read,® the
assembly discussed it for more than an hour.
1 Omit 2 en. * Use venir.
* Say a wage, * Absolute past participle.
CHAPTER XVII
INFINITIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS
277. Infinitive Mood. See Lesson XIX, Part I, for discussion of
this mood before reading the following additions.
1. Infinitives completing the sense of impersonal verbs or of
predicate nouns and adjectives stand without a connecting preposi-
tion.
Importa saber. // is important to know,
Es f&cil equivocarse. // is easy to be mistaken,
Es Ustima perder el tiempo. // is a pity to waste time,
a, li the dependent verb has a subject expressed by a noun, or by a
pronoun other than the indirect object pronoun, it is better to replace the
infinitive by a clause having the verb in the subjunctive mood.
Tiempo es de partir. // is time to leave,
Tiempo es de que til te vayas. // is time for you to leave.
Me es imposible salir. // is impossible for me to go out,
Es imposible que salgan los niSos. // is impossible for the children
to go out,
2. An infinitive connected with an adjective by the preposition
de often has a passive force. Such verbs are usually reflexive.
Esta fruta es buena de comer. This fruit is good to eat,
Es digno de notarse. // is worth noting,
3. Infinitives often stand alone after relative and interrogative
pronouns in cases where some auxiliary like poder or debet can be
introduced.
No tengo a quien dirigirme. / have nobody to whom to apply.
No s6 qu6 decir. / do not know what to say,
255
256
SPANISH GRAMMAR
4. With the indefinite pronouns algo, nada, mucho, poco, and
nouns denoting something indefinite, infinitives may stand after
the connective que.
Nada tengo que decir.
Deja macho que deeear.
El mancebo esperaba cantidades
que anotar.
/ have nothing to say.
It leaves much to be desired.
The clerk was waiting for figures
to take down.
5. Infinitives are sometimes used as imperatives, frequently in-
troduced by a, and often in exclamations which repeat a previous
statement.
|Sa! despejar, que Y07 a echar la
llave.
I Pnes a dormir, caballeros !
I Pagarme Vd. a ml 1
Come / Clear out, I am going to
lock up.
Well, sirs, to bed! .
You pay me!
278. Subjunctiye Mood. The subjunctive mood conveys an idea
of indefiniteness. Hence, in addition to the uses of the dependent
subjunctive already given, Lessons XX and XXI, there are the fol-
lowing. The verbs of dependent clauses take the subjunctive,
I. When they depend on questions, or on any construction, im-
plying restriction or a negative :
^ Quite asegura que sean ciertas
estas noticias ?
To no tenia persona que me aconse-
jara.
No creo que ningiin griego haya
estado tan contento como 70 lo
estaba.
Who vouches for it that this news
is truef
I had nobody to advise me,
I do not believe any Greek has
been as satisfied as I was.
2, After impersonal expressions unless these state a certainty :
Ee posible que sea ella mi madras-
tra.
Mejor es que no juguemos a los
naipes.
I Qu^ importa que yo e8t6 mejor
peor?
// is possible that she may become
my stepmother.
It is better for us not to play cards.
What does it matter whether I am
better or worse f
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
257
But, Es cierto que ningana obra de // is certain that no work of such
semejante antigiiedad se ha con- antiquity has been preserved so
seryado tan bien. well,
3. In indefinite relative clauses and those with an indefinite an-
tecedent :
f Har6 lo qne Vd. me mande.
I Hay qnien pneda salyarla ?
/ will do whatever you command
me.
Is there anybody who can save
herf
Quiero an mnchacho qne lleye esta / want a boy to take this letter to
carta al correo. the post-office,
4. In clauses presenting alternatives :
Ta me qnites la yida, ya me la
dejes, moriris ahorcado.
Tnyi^mos no dlnero, fuese de
dia de noche, ardiese la tierra
bajo el sol del yerano, estu-
yiese cnbierta de una vara de
nieye.
Whether you take my life or grant
it to me^ you will die on the
gallows.
Whether we had money or not,
whether it was day or night,
whether the earth wets burning
beneath the summer sun or
whether it was covered by a
yard of snow.
5. In any clause which implies indefiniteness, concession, or the
like, and' is introduced by an adverb of doubt, a conjunction, or a
conjunctive phrase; after the same conjunction may appear the
indicative if the clause denotes certainty :
Voy a referir cosas que acaso Vd.
ya sepa.
Con ana condicidn me callo, y es
que no te yayas de mi lado.
No hay desgracia en el mundo, por
grande que sea, que no pueda ser
mayor.
Busqu6 un sitio donde pudiera dor-
mir.
/ am going to relate things which
perhaps you already know.
On one condition I will be silent,
and that is that you do not
leave me.
There is no misfortune in the
world, however great it may
be, which cannot be greater,
I looked for a place where I might
sleep.
258
SPANISH GRAMMAR
6. After superlatives or negatives if tiie writer wishes to make
the statement more modest or less sweeping :
No hay la menor of ensa en que yo
la acompaSe.
Nada indicaba qae tuyiese tan
grande animosidad contra mi.
Esta seri la dltima carta qae yo
escriba a Vd.
There is not the slightest offense
in my accompanying you.
Nothing indicated that he had
such great animosity toward
me.
This is the last letter that I shall
write you.
7. In both principal and subordinate clauses of many expres-
sions denoting indifference, are found the present, the imperfect,
and the future tenses of the subjunctive :
Sea como sea.
Fuera como fuese, las circtmstan-
cias le favoreciesen.
Quienquiera denota persona inde-
terminada, algtmo, sea el qae
fuere.
Valga lo que yaliere.
Venga lo que viniere.
Be it as it may.
However it was, circumstances
would favor him,
Quienquiera denotes an indefinite
person, any one, whoever it
may be.
Take it for what it may be worth.
Come what may.
279. Unreal Conditions expressed by the imperfect subjunctive
may have the imperfect subjunctive in the conclusion as well as in
the condition, especially if the condition is placed first with the omis-
sion of si. The second clause must then be connected by y or que.
Si te hubieras ido no hubieras pre-
senciado esta victoria.
Pidiera ella mi protecci6n y (or
que) yo se la dispensara.
If you had gone you would not
have witnessed this victory.
Should she ask for my protection,
I would give it to her.
a. The imperfect subjunctive may appear in the conclusion of a con-
dition which is not expressed.
I Qui^n creyera que en esta forma
estaba oculto un dios ?
Vierais entonces un cuadro sublime.
Who would believe {if anybody
saw me) that in this form was
hidden agodf
You would then have seen (if
you had been there) a sublime
picture.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 259
b. The simple tenses are often used instead of the compound tenses
as in the last preceding example.
280. The Imperfect Subjunctive of the -ra form, being derived
from the Latin pluperfect, was formerly used as a pluperfect in-
dicative and occasionally appears in poetry or in imitations of the
older form.
Pasaran ya tres semanas desde Three weeks had passed since our
nuestra llegada. arrival.
El arte migica que su padre le The magic art which his father
enseSara. had taught him,
281. The Future Subjunctive, also called the hypothetical sub-
junctive, is used in clauses implying a supposition. It is now found
only in legal style or antiquated phrases.
Cuando an comerciante encargare When a merchant intrusts to his
a su mancebo la recepci6n de clerk the reception of merchan-
mercaderias y ^te las recibiere dise and the latter receives it
sin reparo sobre su cantidad without examination as to its
calidady surtiri su recepci6n los quantity or quality^ its accept-
mismos efectos que si la hubiere ance shall entail the same con-
hecho el principal. sequences as if the proprietor
had done it,
Al que leyere. To him who may read (found in
the preface of books).
Si alguno llamare a la puerta, le If anybody should knock at the
abriris. door^ you will open to him,
a. The present indicative after si, or the present subjunctive after a
conjunctive phrase implying uncertainty, now replaces the hypothetical
subjunctive.
Si alguno llama a la puerta, le abriris, or En caso que alguno llame a
la puerta le abriris.
282. Wishes may be expressed,
I . By the simple independent subjunctive :
\ Dios me lo perdone I God pardon me for it.
26o SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. By the subjunctive dependent on ojaU or plega a Dies with
or without a connecting que :
I OjalA disfrntemos otros machos May we enjoy many other years /
aSos!
I Plega a Dios que sea recompen- May it please God that he be re-
sado ! warded,
a, OjaU may even stand alone when referring to a previous verb.
Vi todo, hasta la posibilidad de que / saw everything^ even the possi-
^1 se defendiera, me desarmara bility that he might defend him-
y me matase. { OjaU 1 self disarm me, and kill me. I
wish he might,
3. By the imperfect subjunctive when contrary to reality or con-
sidered impossible of attainment :
I Fuese ya maSana y estuyidsemos Would that it were the morrow
en la batalla I and that we were in the battle.
Such wishes may be introduced by ojali, pluguiera a Dios, asi,
qui^n, si.
a, I Ojali no hubiera ido 1 O that I had not gone /
I Ojali fuesen todos los pueblos O that all towns were like this /
como ^te 1
b, I Pluguiera a Dios que aun vi- Would to God that he were still
yiese I alive I
I Pluguiese a Dios que asi f uera I Would to God that it were so I
c, I Asi esta picara fatiga me per- / wish this confounded weariness
mitiese a mi bromear tam* would permit me also to make
bi^ni jests/
d, Qui^n implies the first person singular :
I Qui^n supiera escribir ! / wish I knew how to write /
I Qui^n pudiera volar ! / wish I could fly /
I Qtti^n fuera seSora para Uevar / wish I were a lady to wear such
tal traje ! a gown /
e, I Si bastara querer I If only wishing were enough /
I Si viera Vd. qu^ viejo y feo I wish you could {or You ought to)
estd ! see how old and ugly he is j
/
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 26 1
EXERCISE 39
{Before attempting this exercise the student should review Lessons
XIX, XX, and XXI, of Fart I)
I. He found little or nothing to admire. 2. It is time to go.
3. It is time that John should come. 4. It would be good for you
to take him out to get^ a little air. 5. My father demands of me
that I should stay here with him at least two months. 6. She
wished a good situation for her daughter which would get her out
of financial difficulties.^ 7. My father and his friends are delighted
that I am not completely ignorant of country affairs. 8. It is
strange that there should be no time to write to you. 9. I have
told him not to speak to me again. 10. Get another to play the
piano. II. It is not good for man to be alone. 12. If you had
listened to me, this would not have happened. 13. Even if it were
so, why had he not come ? 14. It is possible that mamma will not
allow us to talk to each other alone. 15. As there is nobody herQ
who will do me that service, I will introduce myself. 16. It is
necessary for me to have a Spaniard accompany me. 17. As soon
as it is night I will go and get you. 18. I thank you greatly that
you have had the kindness to pick it up. 19. Do you believe
that he will come ? 20. I was afraid that Sancho would not come
the second night. 21. It does not matter to me that she does not
know me. 22. It is not evident that the jewel is yours. 23. I re-
member as if it were a thing of yesterday. 24. Ojald comes from
the Arabic, "if God wills," by* which is denoted a keen desire
that a thing should happen. 25. O that I may see him alive!
26. I wish I might live a thousand years. 27. May he come soon.
28. I wish this tooth would stop aching. 29. No boat has come
in, that I know of.* 30. Although it was late, he decided to enter
the theater. 31. The table was set for all those who might come.
32. I want a boy to go to New York. 33. Do you know anybody
1 tomar. • con.
' financial difficulties = apuxos. ^ Omit.
262 SPANISH GRAMMAR
who speaks Spanish ? 34. Whether he comes or not, he will pay
for^ the ticket 35. If Carlos himself had come to ask me for the
money, I should have refused it. 36. It is to be supposed that he
had nothing to do. 37. At your age, iUnesses, however severe they
may be, are easily cured. 38. Alas 1 gracious goodness, I wish I
were that 1 39. The girls trembled, although it was impossible that
Dofta Blanca had heard them. 40. He dreamed of Europe where
he would see theaters and civilized people. 41. However strong
he may be, it is possible that he lose. 42. Would I find anybody
who would help me ? 43. There is no church in the dty which we
have not visited. 44. Whether he goes to Europe or stays at home,
it is the same to me. 45. However that may be, I do not hesitate
in saying that I believe him. 46. It is the least that he can do.
47. Francisco, learning that his father was asleep, in order that the
latter might not hear him and wake up, went on tiptoe to his room.
48. Perhaps the young man might have come earlier by asking per-
mission of his master to leave on^ the morning train, but he did
not wish to do so.
1 Omit. * con.
CHAPTER XVIII
IDIOMATIC USES OF VERBS
283. Andar — ir — pasearse.
as to walky go, move ; ir, to go ;
for pleasure.
La miquina no anda.
AnduYO cinco legiiaa.
La tierra anda.
Voy a pie, a caballo, en coche, en
tranyia, en ferrocarril.
Me paseo
Doy un paseo
Doy una vuelta
Se pasea en coche todas las tardes.
Andar denotes mechanical motion,
pasearse, to take walks or drives
The, tnachine does not go.
He walked five leagues.
The earth moves,
I go on foot ^ on horseback^ in a
carriage^ in the street car, on
the railway,
I take a walk.
He drives every afternoon.
284. Caber is from the root of the English word capable,
No cabe duda. There is no doubt.
Si cabe. Jf it is possible.
Caber en, to hold, to be contained, takes for its subject the name
of the thing contained.
The trunk will not hold the clothes.
The piano will not go through the
window.
Can you get in ? Is there room
for you f
Los yestidos no caben en el badl.
No cabe el piano por la ventana.
^CabeVd.?
285. Caer, to fall.
caer bien, to be becoming
El traje cae bien a la muchacha. The suit is very becoming to the
girl,
263
264 SPANISH GRAMMAR
caer a, to open on
La yentana cae a la calle. The window opens on the street,
caer en, to catch on, to comprehend
No cae en ello. He does not comprehend it,
(Ta caigo 1 Now I catch on,
286. Conocer — saber, to know, Conocer refers to persons and
things ; saber, to ideas.
Conozco al Sr. Diaz. / know Mr, Diaz,
I Conoce Vd. la mfisica ? Do you recognize the music f
I Sabe Vd. esta lecddn ? Do you know this lesson f
I Sabe Vd. qui^n es ? Do you know who it is f
a, Conocer also means to make one^s acquaintance, Le conoci ea
Sevilla, / made his acquaintance in Seville, Hence un conocido,
an acquaintance,
b. Saber a means to taste of.
La 80pa sabe a petr61eo. The soup tastes of kerosene,
287. Dar, to give^ appears idiomatically in over 200 expressions.
dar la hora, to strike the hour
Van a dar las ocho. // is going to strike eight,
dar los bnenos dias, to wish one good morning
dar un paso, to take a step
dar cnerda a un reloj, to wind up a clock
dar a, to open on, to lead to
Esta puerta da al patio. This door opens on the court,
dar con, to happen on, to find
I Has dado con ella ? Have you found her f
On the other hand, English ^V^ in the sense of to make a present
is regalar ; to grant favors, conoeder ; to deliver or hand, entregar.
Hi padre me regal6 un relo] de oro. My father gave me a gold watch.
Me concedi6 el permiso de yisitar He gave m.e permission to visit
el Castillo. the castle,
Le entregu^ el telegrama. I gave him the telegram.
VERBAL IDIOMS 265
288. Echar, to throw or toss.
ifchame Vd. esa lApiz. Toss me that pencil,
echar el caf^, to pour the coffee
echar una carta al biiz6n (or al correo), to mail a letter
echar llaye a la pnerta, to lock the door
echar (de) menos, to miss
echar de yer, to notice
echar a perder, to spoil
Una alfombra riqulsima echada a A magnificent rug spoiled.
perder.
echarse a, to begin
El seilor se echd a reir. The gentleman began to laugh,
289. Faltar, to he huking — sobrar, to be superfluous^ to be enough
and mare, to be left.
Sobran palabras y falta sentido. Too many words and a lack of
' sense.
No faltaba mis (a frequent expres- That caps the climax.
sion, often used with present
signification).
a. Note the use of the imperfect subjunctive in the following :
Poco faltaba para que cayera. He nearly fell.
Por pocOy adyerbio con que se da Porpoco,an adverb, by which one
a entender que apenas falt6 nada is given to understand that
para que sucediera una cosa. something almost happened.
290. Hacer, to do or make.
hacer caso de, to pay attention to^ to mind
No hagas caso de h&t. Never mind that fellow.
hacer daSo, to hurt, to be injurious
Hace daSo a los ojos leer en una // hurts the eyes to read in a dark
sala oscura. room.
hacer falta, to need (with indirect object of person concerned)
A Juan le hace falta un sombrero. fohn needs a hat.
He hace falta un paraguas. / need an umbrella.
Hace falta tinta. There is no ink. {Ink is needed^
266 SPANISH GRAMMAR
hacer el papel, to play the part
hacer preguntas, to ask questions
hacer lo posible, to do one^s best
Hizo lo posible para ganar el premio. He did his best to win the prize.
For hacer with infinitives, see section 104, r.
Hace construir una casa. He is having a house built,
hacer por (*+ infinitive), try
Haga Vd. por venir. Try to come.
a, Hacerse to become. The past participle, hecho, often as an ad-
jective ; as, ropa hecha, ready-made clothing.
£ncontr6 a su hermanita hecha una He found his little sister grown
soberbia moza. into a fine-looking young lady,
Estaba alii con la boca hecha un He stood there with his mouth
agua. watering.
b, Hace impersonal, see section 58.
Hace frio. // is cold {pi the weather).
Hace un ano. A year ago,
291. Poder, to be able^ can, tnay^ denotes physical ability. Eng-
lish sometimes uses can in the sense of mental ability, which in
Spanish is saber.
S^ nadar, pero no puedo nadar hoy, / can swim (that is, / know how
estando malo. to swim\ but I cannot swim, to-
day because I am sick,
Poder also implies permission, may.
^ Se puede entrar ? May one come in f
poder mis, to be more powerful
Veremos qui^ puede mAs. We will see who can {do) most, or
is most powerful.
no poder mds, can do no more
No puedo m&8. I can't {do any) more, I am played
out,
a mis no poder, to the utmost of one's ability
Ri^ndose a mis no poder. Laughing to split his sides.
no poder menos de, cannot help
£1 padre no pudo menos de Uorar. The father could not help crying.
VERBAL IDIOMS 267
292. Poner, to put, place — meter, to put into.
Pone la espada sobre la mesa. He places the sword on the table.
Hetid el dineio en el bolsillo. He put the money in his pocket.
El sol se pone. The sun sets.
Una puesta de sol. A sunset.
La gallina pone hueyos. The hen lays eggs.
ponerse de pie, to stand up
ponerse pilido, to turn pale
ponerse a, to starts to begin
Se puso a trabajar. He began to work.
meterse en, to meddle
Se mete en todo. He meddles in everything; i.e. a
jack-of-all'trades.
293. Prestar, to lend.
Y^ ^ ^ . \to borrow un prdstamo, a loan
tomar prestado J '
Me pidi6 prestado mi paraguas. He borrowed my umbrella.
Tom4 prestado este libro a Carlos. / borrowed this book of Charles.
Busc6 nn pr^tamo sobre su sortija He sought a loan on his diamond
de brillantes. ring.
294. Senrir, to serve.
I Para qu< sinre eso ? What is thcU good for?
Wo sirve para nada. // is good for nothing.
£1 me sirvid de gnia. He served me as a guide.
senrir (+ infinitive), //?Ay^
Slrrase Vd. dedrme. Please tell me.
Le suplicamos a Vd. se sirva ase- We beg you kindly to insure this
gurar este envio. shipment.
seryirse de, to use
I Por qu4 no se sirve Vd. del gnia ? Why donU you use the guide f
295. Ser de denotes source or origin, as well as the idea of prop-
erty expressed by English belong.
Es de Sevilla. He is from Seville.
La finca es de mi tio. The estate is my uncle's or belongs
to my uncle.
268 SPANISH GRAMMAR
Ser de also means to become of,
I Qn^ lia sido de ellos ? What has become of them f
^ Qn^ ya a aer de mis hijas ? What is going to become of my
daughters f
a. Become with more specific meaning, denoting a change of
state, get^ is expressed by hacerse, llegar a ser, venir a ser.
8e ha hecho abogado. He has become a lawyer,
Llegd (or Vino) a ser general. He became a general.
With adjectives, ponerse and volverse are frequent
La seSora se puso p^ida. The lady turned pale.
Se volvi6 loco. He became crazy.
Other ways of expressing become are
(i) The progressive form of the verb ; as Va siendo tarde or ha-
ci^ndose tarde, It is getting late. See section 258.
(2) The inceptive verbs in -ecer (see sect. 242 , note, a, i o, p. 2 1 2) :
obscurecer, to get dark ; enflaquecer, to become thin^ i.e. ponerse flaco.
296. Tener appears in idioms referring to the body or mind,
which are usually expressed in English by the verb to be,
I Qn^ tiene Vd. ? What is the matter?
Tengo dolor de cabeza, or Me duele / have a headache,
la cabeza.
tener
to be
Referring to the body. Referring to the mind,
gana or ganas, f . eagery have a desire
miedo, m. afraid
prisa, f. in a hurry
yergiienza, f. ashamed
raz6n, f. right
no tener raz6n, to be wrong
tener inconyeniente, m. to have an objection
Note. As the words used with tener are nouns, very is rendered by.
macho.
Tengo mncho calor y mncha sed. / am very hot and very thirsty.
'calor, m. warm
frlo, m. cold .
r r tener
hambre, f. hungry ^ ,
sed, f. thirsty
sueSo, m. sleepy
VERBAL IDIOMS 269
For tener referring to age, see section 53, ^.
I CnAntos aSos tiene el cMco ? How old is the boy f He is eleven
Tiene once aSos. years old.
For tener que, musty with an infinitive, see section 107, i.
Tenemos que despedimos. We must take leave,
297. Valer, to be worth,
I Cudnto vale ? How much is it worth ?
Mis yale saber que haber. Better wisdom than property.
Mis vale que yo no venga. / had better not come.
No hay pero que valga. There is no objection that counts,
valerse de, to avail one's self of ^ to use
Se vale de su fuerza. He uses his strength,
EXERCISE 40
{The student is expected to find the expressions in the preceding
pages y not in the vocabulary^ i. He wished him good morning.
2. The clock is going to strike seven. 3. It has just struck nine.
4. My room looks out on a court. '5. Charles busied himself in
winding the many clocks. 6. My mother gave me some Spanish
books. 7. He took a step backward. 8. Your new suit is very be-
coming to you. 9. Let's go for a walk. I prefer to drive. 10. My
watch* does not go well ; it is slow.^ 11. Yours is fast, it seems to
me. 12. The steamer travels very fast to-day. 13. It hurts me to
sit in a draft. 14. He has become a lawyer. 15. After his absence
of nine years, he found his sister grown into a handsome young
lady of seventeen. 16. They did their best to win the game, but
they were played out. 17. Better late than never. 18. It is worth
little. 19. This room does not hold three hundred persons. 20. He
cannot play the piano to-day because he has hurt his finger. 21. I
cannot play because I never learned. 22. Can you speak Spanish
well.^ 23. May one come in? 24. I do not know him, nor do I
know who he is. 25. Please pour the coffee. 26. Where do I mail
1 to be slowy atrasar (a verb) ; to befast^ adelantar.
270 SPANISH GRAMMAR
this letter ? 27. We missed you at the performance. 28. Who played
the leading part ? 29. These photographic plates are spoiled. 30. I
have spoiled another plate in the developer. 31. Please post these
letters for Chicago for me. 32. Why don't you use the dictionary ?
^;^, What is the machine good for ? 34. It is used to develop pho-
tographic plates. 35. Peter has borrowed my pencil 36. He came
to borrow my g^n. 37. He obtained a loan on the estate. 38. One
letter is lacking in the word, and another is superfluous. 39. Of
my fortnight in Madrid five days are left^ 40. Do you know your
lesson ? I know it by heart. 41. It lacked a little of the time when*
the afternoon train would leave. 42. This faithful old servant
helped his master* to walk when he did not know how and later
when he could not. 43. The lady has had flowers brought from
her garden. 44. Have you hurt yourself ? 45. He could not help
following his steps. 46. He was much ashamed and turned red.
47. What will become of my children ? 48. My friend, Don Gena-
ro's son, has become a doctor. 49. If you get sick, send for him.
50. That man will never become president. 51. Never meddle in
other people's business. 52, I am getting hoarse from* so much
shouting. 53. If you do not need it, we will keep it till Thursday.
54. If I need money, he gets it for me.' 55. We have done our
best to leam how to write Spanish well.
■
^ Use aobrar : supply me. ' Indirect object
^ para que ; omit o/^Ae time. * con.
APPENDIX I
List of Verbs with Peculiarities of Conjugation
Veibs whose sole peculiarity consists in an orthographic change such as is indicated
in section 242 a^ inceptive verbs, etc., are not included in this list
abnegar, renounce : 244, i ; 242, a, 2
abolir, abolish : 251, 4
abrir, open : /./. /rr., 249
absolver, absolve : /./. t'rr., 245, i
abstenerae, abstain : 250 (/. tener
abstraer, abstract : 250 (/. traer
acertar, hit the mark : 244
aclocarsey stretch out, brood : 244,
2 ; 242, at I
acordaiy resolve, remind, tune;
acordarse, remember : 244, 2
acoatar, lay down : 244, 2
acrecentar, increase : 244, i
adestrar, guide : 244, i
adherir, adhere : 246, i
adormir, make drowsy : 246, 2
adquirir, acquire : 246, 3
aducir, adduce : 250 ^ -dacir
advertir, observe, advise : 246, i
agorar, divine, prognosticate : 245,
aguerrir, inure to warfare : 251, 4
alebrarse, squat, cower : 244, i
alentar, breathe, encourage : 244, i
aliquebrar, break the wings : 244, i
almorzaiy breakfast: 244, 2; 242,
alongar, lengthen : 244, 2 ; 242, a, 2
amoblar, furnish : 244, 2
amolary whet : 244, 2
amoyer, remove, dismiss : 244, 4
andar, go, walk: 250
27;
antedecir, foretell : 250 ^. deck
anteponer, put before, prefer: 250
cf, poner
anteyer, foresee : 250 (/! ver
apacentar, graze : 244, i
apercoUar, collar, snatch : 244, 2
aplacer, please : 251, i
apostaiy bet, post : 244,2; apostar,
post troops, reg.
apretar, squeeze, press : 244, i
aprobar, approve : 244, 2
argiiir, argue : 248, 2
airecirse, become benumbed : 251, 4
arrendar, rent, hire : 244, i
arrepentirae, repent : 246, i
ascender, ascend : 244, 3
aaentar, seat, set down : 244, i
aaentiiy assent, acquiesce : 246, i
aaerrar, saw : 244, i
asir, seize, grasp : 250
asolar, level to ground, raze : 244, 2
asoldar, hire : 244, 2
asonar, assonate, be in assonance:
244,2
atender, attend, mind : 244, 3
atenerae, abide, hold: 250 cf. tener
atentar, try : 244, i ; atentar, attempt
a crime, reg.
aterirse, become rigid with cold:
25i»4
aterrar, fell : 244, i ; aterrar, terrify,
reg.
272
SPANISH GRAMMAR
atestar, cram, stuff : 244, i ; atestar,
attest, reg.
atraer, attract: 250 cf. traer
atrayesaiy cross : 244, i
atribuir, attribute : 248
atronar, make a thundering din,
stun : 244, 2
ayanzar, advance : 242, </, 4
ayenir, reconcile : 2^0 cf. venir
ayentar, fan, winnow : 244, i
ayergonzar, shame : 245, 2, b
bendecir, bless : 2^0 cf, deck
bienquerer, esteem, wish well : 250
cf querer
bruSir, burnish : 242, c
bullir, boil : 242, c
caber, be contained : 250
caer, fall : 250
calentar, warm, heat : 244, i
cegaiy blind : 244, i
ceSir, gird : 242, c
earner, sift : 244, 3
cerrar, close : 244, i
cimentar, found, establish : 244, i
circuir, encircle : 248
clocar, cluck : 244, 2
COCer, boil, bake : 244, 4 ; 242, a, 10,
note
colar, strain, filter : 244, 2
colegir, collect : 247 ; 242, a, 6
colgar, hang up : 244, 2 ; 242, ^, 2
comedirse, behave : 247
comenzar, commence : 244, i ; 242,
a, A
competir, compete : 247
complacer, please, content: 251, i
componer, compose: 2$o cf poner
comprobar, verify, confirm : 244, 2
concebir, conceive : 247
concemir, concern : 245, 3, b
concertar, concert, regulate : 244, i
concluir, conclude : 248
concordar, accord, agree : 244, 2
condescender, condescend : 244, 3
condolerse, condole : 244, 4
conducir, conduct: 250 cf -dncir
conf erir, confer : 246, i
confesar, confess : 244, i
confluir, join : 248
conmoyer, move, affect : 244, 4
conaeguir, obtain, attain : 247, 2
consentir, consent : 246, i
consolar, console : 244, 2
consonar, be in consonance, rime :
244,2
constituir, constitute : 248
constroir, construct : 248
contar, count, tell : 244, 2
contender, contend : 244, 3
contener, contain : 250 ^ tener
contorcerse, be distorted, writhe:
244,4; 242,^,9
contradecir, contradict : 2^0 cf decir
contraer, contract \ 2^0 cf traer
contrahacer, counterfeit: 250 cf
hacer
contraponer, oppose, compare : 250
cf poner
contrayenir, contravene : 2^0 cf
venir
contribuir, contribute : 248
controyertir, controvert : 246, i
conyenir, agree, fit: 250 cf venir
conyertir, convert : 246, i
corregir, correct : 247 ; 242, <j, 6
corroer, corrode : 251, 2, a
costar, cost : 244, 2
creer, believe : 242, b
cubrir, cover: 249
dar, give : 250
decaer, decay: 2^0 cf
decir, say: 250
caer
APPENDIX I
273
dedncir, deduce ; 2$oc/, -dodr
defender, defend : 244, 3
def erir, defer : 246, i
degollar, behead, cut the throat:
245, 2, d
demoler, demolish : 244, 4
demostrar, demonstrate : 244, 2
dentar, tooth, indent ; teeth : 244, i
deponer, depose, depone: 250 cf.
poner
derretir, melt : 247
derrocar, pull down, demolish : 244,
2 ; 242, a, I
dermir, cast down, destroy : 248
des : Jor verbs compounded with this
prefix^ see the simple verbs
descender, descend : 244, 3
deslelr, dilute : 247, 4
desolar, make desolate : 244, 2
desollar, flay : 244, 2
desosar, remove bones : 245, 2, c
desoyar, spawn : 245, 2, c
despertar, awaken : 244, i
desterrar, exile : 244, i
destituir, deprive, remove from
office : 248
destmir, destroy : 248
detener, detain : 2^0 cf. tener
detraer, detract: 250 cf. traer
deyolyer, give back : 245, 4, a
diferir, defer, delay, differ : 246, i
digerir, digest : 246, i
diluir, dilute : 248
discemir, discern : 245, 3, a
discordar, disagree, be discordant :
244,2
disentir, dissent : 246, i
disminnir, diminish : 248
disolyer, dissolve : 245, 4, a
disonar, be in dissonance : 244, 2
disponer, dispose : 250 (/I poner
distender, distend : 244, 3
distraer, distract : 250 ^. traer
distribuir, distribute : 248
diyertir, divert : 246, i
dolar, plane, smooth (wood, etc.) :
244,2
doler, pain, grieve : 244, 4
dormir, sleep : 246, 2
edncir, educe, bring out: 2 socf. -dodr
elegir, elect : 247 ; 242, a^ 6
embalr, impose, deceive : 251, 4
embestir, invest, attack : 247
emparentar, be related by marriage :
244,1
empedemir, harden, make inveter-
ate: 251,4
empedrar, pave : 244, i
empeller, urge, push : 242, c
empezar, begin : 244, i ; 242, a, 4
emporcar, sully, befoul : 244, 2 ; 242,
a^ I
encender, light, kindle : 244, 3
en : for verbs compounded with this
prefix, see the simple verbs
encontrar, meet, find : 244, 2
engrelr, elate, puff up : 247, 4
engroaar, fatten, strengthen : 244, 2
enhestar, erect, set upright : 244, i
enmendar, amend, correct : 244, i
enaangrentar, cover with blood :
244, 1
entender, hear, understand : 244, 3
enterrar, inter : 244, i
entortar, make crooked ; deprive of
one eye : 244, 2
entre : for verbs compounded with
this prefix i see the simple verbs
envolyer, involve, wrap up, compli-
cate : 245, 4, a
equiyaler, equal, be equivalent : 250
cf valer
274
SPANISH GRAMMAR
erguir, erect : 247, 3
errar, err, wander : 245, i
escarmentaTy g^ve warning example,
learn by experience : 244, i
escocer, smart: 244,4; 242, a, 10, note
escribir, write :/./. irr.^ 249
esforzaiy strengthen ; esforzarse, at-
tempt: 245, 2 ; 242, ay 4
estar, be : 250
estatuir, establish: 248
estregar, rub, scour, grind : 244, i ;
242, aj 2
estreSir, bind, restrain: 247,1; 242,^
excluir, exclude : 248
ezpedir, expedite, despatch : 247, i
ezponeiy expose : 2<p cf. poner
extender, extend : 244, 3
extraer, extract : 2^0 cf. traer
ferrar, put on iron points, etc.: 244, i
fluir, flow : 248
foliar, blow with bellows : 244, 2
forzar,- force : 244, 2 ; 242, a, 4
fregar, rub, cleanse : 244, i ; 242, a, 2
frelr, fry : 247, 4
garantir, guarantee : 251, 4
gemir, groan, moan : 247, i
gobernar, govern : 244, i
gruir, cry like cranes : 248
grttfiir, grunt : 242, c
haber, have: 250
hacendar, transfer property : 244, i
hacer, do, make : 250
heder, have a stench, stink : 244, 3
helar, freeze : 244, i
henchir, stuff, cram : 247, i
hender, cleave, split : 244, 3
herbar, dress skins : 244, i
herir, wound : 246, i
herrar, shoe (horses), brand (cattle) :
244, 1
heryir, boil, bubble : 246, i
holgar, rest, cease working : 244, 2 ;
242, a, 2
hollar, trample on, tread on : 244, 2
huir, flee : 248
imbuir, imbue : 248
impedir, impede : 247, i
imponer, impose i 2^0 cf, poner
imprimir, print : p.p. trr., 249
improbar, disapprove, censure :
244,2
incensar, perfume, incense : 244, i
incluir, include : 248
indisponer, indispose, disincline :
250 cf. poner
inducir, induce : 2$o cf. -dadr
inferir, infer : 246, i
infemar, torment : 244, i
influir, influence : 248
ingerir, graft, insert : 246, i
inquirir, inquire : 246, 3
instituir, institute : 248
instruir, instruct : 248
interdecir, interdict: 250 cf dedr
interponer, interpose: 250^. poner
intenrenir, intervene : 250 ^ venir
introducir, introduce : 2$ocf. -dudr
inyemar, winter : 244, i
inyertir, invert, spend, invest:
246, 1
inyestir, invest, gird : 247, t
ir, go: 250
jugar, play : 245, 2, a
leer, read : 242, d
Hover, rain : 244, 4
maldecir, curse : 2^0 cf decir
malherir, wound seriously : 246, i
malquerer, dislike, abhor: 250 cf
qnerer
malsonar, make cacdphony : 244, 2
maltraer, maltreat: 250 cf traer
manifestar, manifest : 244, i
APPENDIX I
275
manic f mellow, mature meat : 251, 4
mantener, maintain : 2$o c/. tener
meceii rock, lull, mix: 242, a, 10, note
medir, measure : 247, i
melar, boil to honey, deposit honey
(of bees) : 244, i
mentar, mention : 244, i
mentir, lie : 246, i
merendaiy lunch : 244, i
moblar, furnish : 244, 2
moler, grind : 244, 4
morder, bite : 244, 4
morir, die : 246, 2
mostrar, show : 244, 2
moyeiy move : 244, 4
negaiy deny : 244, i ; 242, a^ 2
nevar, snow: 244, i
obstmir, obstruct : 248
obtener, obtain : 250 ^. tener
oil, hear: 250
oler, smell : 245, 4, fi
oponety oppose : 2$o cf, poner
oprimir, oppress : 249
pedir, ask : 247, i
pensar, think, mean, believe : 244, i
perdeiy lose, spoil, destroy : 244, 3
persegiiir, pursue, persecute : 247, 2
penrertiry pervert : 246, i
placer, please : 251, i
plaSir, lament, bewail : 242, c
plegar, fold : 244, i ; 242, a, 2
poblar, found, people, fill : 244, 2
podeiy be able, can : 250
poner, put: 250
poseer, possess : 242, 6
posponer, place after, postpone:
250 c/, poner
predecir, predict: 2$o c/. decir
predisponer, predispose: 250 (/.poner
pref erir, prefer : 246, i
prender, arrest, catch : 249
preponer, put before, prefer: 250
cf. poner
presentir, forebode, foresee : 246, i
presuponer, presuppose: 250 cf.
poner
preyalerse, prevail : 2$o c/. valer
preyenir, forestall, prevent : 250^
venir
preyer, foresee : 2$o cf. ver
probar, prove, try, taste : 244, 2
producir, produce : 2^0 cf, -ducir
proferir, utter, pronounce : 246, i
promoyer, promote : 244, 4
proponer, propose : 250 ^. poner
proaegiiir, pursue, prosecute : 247, 2
proyeer, provide : 242, b ; 249
proyenir, proceed : 2^0 cf. venir
quebrar, break : 244, i
querer, wish, like : 250
raer, scrape, grate, erase : 251, 2
rarefacer, rarify -. 2^0 cf hacer
re : for verbs compounded with this
prefixy see the simple verbs
recordar, remind : 244, 2
referir, relate, refer : 246, i
regar, water : 244, i ; 242, a^ 2
regimentar, form into regiments:
244, I
regir, rule, direct : 247, i ; 242, a, 6
regoldar, belch, eruct : 244, 2 ; 245,
2, b
relr, laugh : 247, 4
remendar, repair, patch : 244, i
rendir, subdue, render; rendirse,
surrender: 247, i
renoyar, renovate, renew : 244, 2
reSir, quarrel, scold : 247, i ; 242, c
repetir, repeat, recite : 247, i
requebrar, court, make love : 244, i
requerir, investigate, require, re-
quest: 246, I
276
SPANISH GRAMMAR
resolrer, resolve: /./. im, 245,
4, tf
resolUM:, respire : 244, 2
rerentar, burst : 244, i
rodar, roll : 244, 2
roer, gnaw: 251, 3
rogar, entreat, ask : 244, 2 ; 242, a, 2
saber, know : 250
salir, go out, come out: 250
salpimentar, season with pepper
and salt : 244, i
sarmentar, gather prunings of vine :
244,1
Batisfacer, satisfy : 250 ^. hacer
segar, reap : 244, i ; 242, a, 2
seguir, follow ; 247, 2
sembrar, sow : 244, i
sementar, sow : 244, i
sentar, seat, set, suit : 244, i
sentir, feel, regret : 246, i
ser, to be : 250
Berrar, saw : 244, i
seryir, serve : 247, i
BObre : for verbs compounded with this
prefix^ see the simple verbs
sofrelr, fry slightly : 247, 4
solar, floor, pave, sole : 244, 2
soldar, solder, mend : 244, 2
soler, be wont, be accustomed :
244.4
BOltar, untie, loosen : 244, 2
solyer, loosen:/./. */r., 245, 4, a
sonar, sound : 244, 2
sonrelr, smile : 247, 4
sonrodarse, stick in the mud : 244, 2
8o2ar, dream : 244, 2
sosegar, appease, rest : 244, i ; 242,
a, 2
sostener, sustain : 2^0 cf. tener
soterrar, put underground, bury :
244, I
sub : for verbs compounded with this
prefix, see the simple verbs
sugerir, suggest : 246, i
superponer, superimpose : 250 cf.
poner
Buperyenir, supervene : 25o^.yeiiir
suponer, suppose : 2^0 cf poner
suprimir, suppress : 249
sustituir, substitute : 248
sustraer, subtract : 2^0 cf traer
taSer, ring, peal, touch : 242, c
temblar, tremble : 244, i
tender, stretch : 244, 3
tener, have, hold : 250
tentar, feel, try : 244, i
teflir, tinge, dye, stain : 247, i ; 242, c
torcer, twist, bend : 244, 4 ; 242, a, 9
tostar, toast : 244, 2
traducir, translate : 2^0 cf -dudr
traer, bring : 250
trans or tras : for verbs compounded
with this prefix f see the simple verbs
traresar, cross : 244, i
trocar, exchange, barter : 244, 2 ;
242, a, I
tronar, thunder : 244, 2
tropezar, stumble : 244, i ; 242, a, 4
Taler, be worth : 250
Tenir, come : 250
yentar, blow : 244, i
yer, see : 250
yerter, pour, shed : 244, 3
yestir, dress, clothe: 247, i
volar, fly, rise, blow up : 244, 2
yolcar, overturn : 244, 2 ; 242, a, i
yolyer, return, come back : 245, 4
yacer, lie : 250, 1
ynxtaponer, put in juxtaposition :
2^0 cf poner
za (m) bullirse, dive : 242, c
zaherir, reproach, censure : 246, i
APPENDIX II
1. Verbs followed directly by a dependent infinitioe without a connectiny
preposition are —
aconaejar, advise, counsel
acostnmbrarse, be accustomed
afirmar, affirm, declare
asegurar, assure, claim
aseyerar, assert
celebrar, be glad
oonfesar, confess
conyenir, suit
creer, think, believe
deber, should, ought
declarar, declare
dejar, let, allow, permit
desear, desire, wish
determinar, determine
escuchar, listen to
esperar, hope
figurarse, imagine
fingir, pretend
gnstar, like, please
hacer, make
imaginarse, imagine
impedir, prevent, hinder
intentar, try, attempt
jnrar, swear
lograr, succeed in
mandar, order
m&a vale, it is better
merecer, deserve
mirar, look at, watch
necesitar, need, want
negar, deny
notificar, notify
ocurrir(8e)y occur (to one)
odiar, hate
oil, hear
osar, dare
parecer, seem
pensar, intend
permitir,. permit
poder, be able
preferir, prefer
presumir, presume
pretender^ claim, try
procurar, try
prohibir, prohibit
prometer, promise
proponer, propose, purpose
querer, wish
recomendar, recommend
reconocer, acknowledge, confess
recordar, remember
saber, know how, be able
sentir, feel, hear, regret, be sorry
servirse, please, be so kind as
significar, mean, signify
soler, be wont
sostener, maintain ; affirm
sugerir, suggest
temer, fear
tocar, be one's turn
yaler mAs, be better
ver, see
277
278
SPANISH GRAMMAR
2. Verbs that require a btfore a dependent if^mtive are —
abandoiiar(se), give (one's self) up to
acceder, accede, agree
acercarse, draw near, approach
acertar, happen
acomodarse, conform one's self
acudir, hasten
adherir(se)y stick to
aficionarse^ become addicted
ajustarse, agree, combine
alcanzar, reach, attain, succeed
andarse, undertake, busy one's self
with
animar, encourage
aplicarse, apply one's self
aprender, learn
apre8urar(se), hasten, hurry
arriesgarse, risk one's self
aspirar, aspire
atreverse, dare
autorizar, authorize
aventajar, excel, surpass
aventurarse, venture
ayudar, aid, help
circunscribir(8e)y confine (one's self)
comenzar, commence, begin
comprometer(se), engage, agree
condenar, condemn
condescender, condescend
conducir, lead, conduct
confonnarsey conform, agree
consagrar(se)y devote (one's self)
conspirar, conspire
continuar, continue
contrariar, oppose
contribuir, contribute
convidar, invite
conyocar, convoke
cooperar, cooperate
correr, run
dar, give
decidir(se)y decide, determine
dedicar(se)y dedicate (one's self)
desafiar, challenge
descender, descend
deshacerse, try hard ; kill one's self
in
destinar, destine
detenerse, stop, tarry
detenninar(8e)y determine
disponer(8e)y prepare, get ready
distraerse^ amuse one's self
diyertirse, amuse one's self
echar(se)y exercise ; begin
empezar, begin
enseSar, teach
entrar, start
entretener(8e), entertain (one's self)
enyiar, send
esforzar(se), attempt, endeavor
excitar, excite
ezhortar, exhort
exponer(se)y expose (one's self)
f altar, fail
forzar, force
ganar, excel, surpass ; win, gain (by)
habitiiar(se), accustom (one's self)
humillar(8e), humiliate (one's self)
igualar, equal
impelery impel
incitar, incite
incliiiar(8e), incline, induce
inducir, induce
inspirar, inspire
inyitar, invite
ir, go
jugar, play (at)
liinitar(se), limit (one's self)
llegar, come, succeed
APPENDIX II
279
mandar, send
matarse, kill one's self
meterse, undertake
iiioyer(se)y impel (one's self)
negarse, decline, refuse
Obligar(se)y oblige (one's self)
ofrecer(8e)y offer, present (one's self)
oponerse^ oppose, be adverse
pararse, stop
pasar, proceed, pass
per8uadir(se), persuade (one's self)
poner(se), put one's self, begin
preparar(se), prepare, make ready
presentarse, present one's self
probar, try
proceder, proceed
proYOcary provoke
quedar(se), remain
reducir(se), reduce one's self,
bring (one's self) down
referirse, refer
reliU8ar(se), refuse
renunciar, renounce
resignarse, resign, submit
resistirse, struggle, resist
resolTer(8e)y resolve, decide
romper, break out in
aacar, draw out, extract, invite
salir, go {or come) out
sentarse, be seated, sit down
soltar, start
8ometer(se), submit (one's self)
temer, fear
tender, tend
tirar, tend, be inclined
tomar, return; . . . again
urgir, urge
yencer(8e), outdo, excel, surpass
yenir(se), come, happen
volar, fly
TOlver, return ; . . . again
3. Verbs that require con before a dependent infinitive are —
amenazar, threaten
bastar, be sufficient, be enough
contar, count on
contentarse, content one's self
divertirse, amuse one's self
soSar, dream
4. Verbs that require de btfore a dependent infinitive are-
ab80lyer(8e), absolve (one's self)
aburrirse, be vexed, wearied
acabar, finish, end
acordarse, remember
acusar, accuse
admirarse, wonder
afligirse, lament, repine
agraviarse, be grieved, piqued
ahogarse, be suffocated
alegrarse, rejoice, be glad
apercibirse, perceive
aprovecharse, profit
arrepentirse, repent
arrieagarse, risk one's self
asustarse, be terrified
ayergonzarse, be ashamed
cansar(se), tire, grow weary
Cesar, cease
concertar, agree, covenant
concluir, conclude
confesarse, confess'
contentarse, be satisfied
28o
SPANISH GRAMMAR
ciiidar(se), take care not to, keep
from
cnlpar, blame
dar, give
debar, owe, ought
dejar, leave off, cease, fail
desacostmnbrarse, lose the custom
de8ani]nar(8e), discourage, be dis-
couraged
descansar, tire, weary
descuidar, neglect
de8de3ar(se), disdain, be disdainful
de8e8perar(8e)y despair
desistir, desist
detenerse, stop, tarry
dignarse, deign
di8Ciilpar(8e), excuse
diBgustar(se)y disgust, be displeased
dispensar, excuse
distraerse, distract (one's self)
disuadir, dissuade
dudar, doubt, hesitate
echar(se)y come to
encargaiBe, take upon one's self
enorgullecerse, take pride
entristecerse, become sad
ezcu8ar(se)y excuse (one's self)
faltar, fail
fa8tidiar(8e), weary, be weary
fatigar(se)y tire, be tired
felicitar(Be), congratulate (one's
self)
gozar(se), enjoy
guardarse, avoid, guard against
haber, have
hablar, speak, mention
hartarse, satiate one's self, be satis*
fied
impacientarse, be impatient
incomodarse, be annoyed
indignarse, be indignant
jactarse, boast
jurat, swear
ju8tificar(8e), justify (one's self)
ofenderse, be offended
olyidar(se), forget
per8iiadir(se), persuade
pesar, be sorry
picarse, be vexed
preciarse, boast
priyar(8e), deprive, be deprived
quejarse, complain
relrse, laugh
reventar, burst
sentirse, feel
ser, be
sonreirse, smile
sospechar, suspect
sufrir, suffer
temblar, tremble
terminal, finish
tratar, try, endeavor
Talerse, avail one's self of
yenir, come, have just
vivir, live
5. Verbs that require en brfore a dependent mfinitwe are —
acertar, succeed (in) apresurarse, hasten
acordar, agree aventajar, excel, surpass
adelantar(Be), advance in balancear, hesitate, waver
adie8trar(8e), train (one's self) can8ar(se), tire, grow weary
andar, undertake complacerse, take pleasure
APPENDIX II
281
condescender, condescend
confiar, confide, trust in, hope
confonnarse, agree
consentity consent
consistir, consist
consumirsey be consumed
continuar, continue
conTenir(se)y agree
cooperar, cooperate
cuidarse, take pains
dar, come to
deleitarse, delight
deshacerse, try hard to ; kill one's
self in
detenerse, stop
detenniiiarse, determine
distraerse, amuse one's self
dirertirse, amuse one's self
ejercitar(se), exercise (one's self)
empeSarse, try, insist
emplear(8e)y employ (one's self)
engaSarse, be mistaken
entenderse, agree
entreteiier(se), amuse (one's self)
equirocarse, be mistaken
e8forzar(se), attempt, endeavor
esmerarse, to take great pains
fijarse, pay attention
ganar, excel, surpass, bear
gaatar, spend
gozar(8e), take pleasure
incidar^ fall into (as an error)
insistir, insist
iiistrair(se)y instruct (one's self)
matarse, kill one's self
meditar, meditate
mezdarse, meddle with
moderarse, moderate one's self
molestarse, put one's self out
obstinarse, persist in
ocupar(8e), busy (one's ;self)
parar, stop
particiilarizarse, specialize
pensar, think
perder^ lose
persererar, persevere
persistir, persist
promimpir, burst forth, break out
qiiedar, agree
recrear(se), divert (one's self)
romper, break out (into)
sobresalir, excel
tardar, delay
terminar, end (by)
titubear, hesitate
trabajar, work
yacilar, hesitate
Teiicer(se), outdo, surpass, excel
rengarse, avenge one's self (by)
Tenir, agree
6. Verbs having por btfore a tUpendent infinitive are —
acabar, end by
afanarse, toil
apnrarse, exert one's self
dejar, leave to be ...
estar, yet to be . . . {see next section)
hacer, try
incomodarse, put one's self out
matarse, try hard {see next section)
morirse, be djring to
quedar, remain to be ...
piignar, strive, struggle
rabiar, be crazy to
reyentar, be bursting to
trabajar, work
282
SPANISH GRAMMAR
71 Same verh$ dut vary m idiom or m oa ning ac c o rdin g to the construction
btfore a dupendoit iitfinitio e are —
acabar de, finish ; have just . . .
acahar por, end with ; . . . finally
No acaba de llorer. It does not
stop raining.
El seHor acaba de salir. The gen-
tleman has just gone out
Habfan acabado par tomane mncho
cariSo. They had finally become
very fond of each other.
acertar a^ happen ; succeed
acertar en, hit it right
Aquel dla acert6 a ser domingo.
That day happened to be Sun-
day.
Acert^ en suponerlo. I was correct
in supposing so.
acostnmbrar {dtfrc^ infinitive)^ be in
the habit of
acostnmbrarse a, get the habit of
No acostnmbro mentir. I am not
in the habit of lying.
Acost^mbrate a guardar silencio.
Acquire the habit of being silent.
dar a, give to
dar de, serve with food, etc.
dar en, insist on
Me di6 a entender. He gave me to
understand.
El Obispo da de almorzar a doce
pobres. The bishop serves break-
fast to twelve poor men.
Dl de comer a mi caballo. I fed my
horse.
El burro di6 en rebuznar. The ass
insisted on braying.
deber {dir, infin.), ought, should
deber de, must {supposition)
Debemoseatndiar. We should study.
Debe de hacer frio. It must be cold.
dejar (dir. infin,)^ allow, permit
dejar de, fail, neglect ; stop
D^jale correr. Let him run.
Dej6 de complir con su promesa.
He failed to keep his promise.
Manuel dej6 de silbar. Manuel
stopped whistling.
echar(se) a, begin, start
echar a perder, spoil
echar de yer, notice
El vapor echa a andar lentamente.
The steamer begins to move
slowly.
La came se echa a perder. The
meat is spoiling.
^No echas de yer las sombras?
Don't you observe the shadows .^
estar para, be about to
estar por, yet to be . . . ; be inclined
to
Estil para morir. He is at the point
of death.
La sala estil por barrer. The room
is yet to be swept.
Estoy por romperle la cabeza. I am
inclined to break his head.
matarse a, kill one's self by
matarse por, try hard
Se mata a trabajar. He is killing
himself with work.
APPENDIX II
283
Juan se mataba por ganar el pre-
mio. John tried hard to win the
prize.
pensar {dir, in/in,), intend
pensar en, think of
Piensa ofrecerles una comida. He
intends to offer them a dinner.
La reina pensaba en elegir un
ministro. The queen was think-
ing of choosing a minister.
renir a, come to
Tenir de, come, to have just . . .
Tenir en, grant (used in legal style
and decrees)
Venga Vd. a rerme. Come and see
me.
Vino a ser rey. He became king.
Vengo de cumplir un yoto. I have
just fulfilled a vow.
Vengo en decretar lo siguiente. I
decree the following.
SPANISH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
a to, at, on, from, sign of the personal afecto m. affection
accusative
abajo below, down
abandonar to abandon, leave
abierto /./. <7/"abrir ; open
abonar to credit
abrigar to shelter, protect
abrigo m, shelter, wrap^ overcoat
abril m. April
abrir to open
abuelo -a m. and f. grandfather,
grandmother ; m.pL grandparents
acA hither, here
acabar to end, finish ; acabar de to
have just
aceptar to accept
acerca de about
Acido -a sour
acompaSar to accompany, go with,
sympathize with
aconsejar to advise
acostar to lay down, put to bed ;
refl. to lie down, go to bed
actisaci6ny. accusation
acttsar to acknowledge
adelante forward ; en adelante hence-
forth
ademds (de) besides
adids good-by
adjunto inclosed, herewith
admitir to admit
adquirir to purchase ; acquire
aduana /. custom-house
aeroplanOy m, aeroplane
afirmar to affirm
afligirse to worry
af."><>=afectisimo most affectionate
agosto m, August
agradecer to thank, be grateful for
agua /. water
aguardar to wait for, await
Aguila/ eagle
ahl there
ahora now
aire m. air ; aire libre open air
ajeno -a another's, other people's
al to the
albaSil m. mason
aldea /. village
aldeano m. villager
alegrarse to be happy
alegre happy, joyous, merry
alegria /. joy
alejarse to withdraw, go away
alemAn-ana German
Alemania /. Germany
alfombra / carpet
algo something, an3rthing, somewhat
alguien some one, somebody
algdn cf. alguno
alguno -a some, any ; pi. some, cer-
tain, a few; no . . . alguno not
. . . any
alhaja f. jewel
aliento m. encouragement
alimento m, food
alma / soul
285
286
SPANISH GRAMMAR
almac^n m. store, warehouse
almohada /. pillow
almoneda /. auction
almorzar to breakfast
almuerzo m. breakfast
alquilar to rent, hire
alrededorde around
alto -a high, tall, loud
altura /. height
almnbrar to illuminate, light
alU there, thither
alll there
amanecer to dawn
amar to love
amargo-a bitter
amarillo-a yellow
ambos -as both
America /. America
americano -a American
amigo -a m. and/, friend
amiguito -a m. andf, little friend
amistad / friendship
ancho-a broad, wide; (»^i^») breadth,
width
anchura /. breadth, width
andar to go, walk, run {as a watch)\
travel
animal m, animal
anoche last night
anochecer to become night, get dark
anteayer the day before yesterday,
two days ago
anterior previous
antes before, beforehand ; antes de
before
anticipar to anticipate
anunciar to advertise
aSo m, year ; tener . . . afios to be
. . . years old ; Afio Nuevo New
Year
apetito tn. appetite
aplastado-a flat
apoderarse to seize
apreciable estimable, kind
aprender (a) to learn (to)
aquel -ella adj. that, the former
aqu^l, aqn^lla, aqu^Uo, that one,
that, the one, the former
aqni here
irabe Arab
irbol tn. tree
aritm^tica f. arithmetic
armonla /. harmony
aroma f. perfume, aroma
arpa f. harp
arreglar to arrange, regulate, see to
arriba above, up
arroyo m. stream
artlculo tn. article
ascensor tn. elevator, lift
asegurar to insure
asemejar to resemble
asesinar to murder
asl as, so, thus ; asf como as well as
asiento m, seat
asistir to be present
asno -a m. andf. ass, donkey
Aspero -a rough
asunto tn. matter, affair, business
atacar to attack
atenci6n f. attention
at> = atento attentive, kind
aim still, yet; accented after verb a6n
annque although, even if
ausente absent
ayentura f. adventure
arerfa f. damage
ayer yesterday; antes de ayer day
before yesterday
ayudar to help
azucar tn. sugar
azul blue
SPANISH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
287
bailor to dance
bajar to go down ; take down ; get
out
bajo -a low
balc6n m. balcony
banca /. banking
banco m. bank
bando m, band, side
barato -a cheap
barco m, boat, ship; barco de vela
sailing ship
bastante enough, sufficient; suffi-
ciently, quite, rather
batalla /. battle
batil m, trunk
beber to drink
bebida /. drink
bestia /. animal
biblioteca /. library
bien well, comfortable
billete m, bill, bank note, ticket
bianco -a white
blando-a soft
bobo m. fool, booby
boca /. mouth
bolsillo m. pocket
bondad f, goodness, kindness
bonito -a pretty
bordado m. embroidery
bordar to embroider
bosque m, woods
brazo m, arm
.bueno -a good, well
biiey m, ox
buscar to seek, look for
buz6n m. letter-box
cabalgar to ride
caballero m. gentleman, sir
caballo m. horse
caber to be contained
cabeza / head
cabo m, end ; llevar a cabo to carry out
cada adj. each, every ; cada ono (-a)
each, each one
caer to fall ; refl. to fall down
caf^ m. coffee
caja / box
calentar to warm, heat
calidad /. quality
caliente hot, warm
calor m. heat, warmth ; tenet calor
to be warm {as a person) ; hacer
calor to be warm {as the weather)
callarse to hush, be silent
calle /. street
cama y. bed
camarero m. waiter
camarote m. stateroom
cambiar to change ; to exchange
cambio m, change ; exchange
camello m. camel
caminar to journey, walk
camino m, road, way
campana /. bell ; mantelpiece
campanula /. small bell
campesino -a m. and/, countryman,
countrywoman
campo m. field, country; casa de
campo country house
cansado -a tired; {with ser) tiresome
cansar to tire, fatigue
cantante m. and/, singer
cantar to sing
caS6n m. opening of chimney, flue
capital m. capital {money);/ capital
{city)
capitiln m. captain
cara /. face
caramba good gp-acious
carb6n m. coal
cardinal m. cardinal
288
SPANISH GRAMMAR
eargar to load, charge ; to debit
cariflo m» affection
Carlos m, Charles
came f. flesh, meat ; came de vaca
beef
carnero m, sheep, mutton
caro -a dear, expensive
carta /. letter
cartero m. postman, letter-carrier
casa /. house ; en caea at home ; a
caea home ; en casa de see section
33. «
casar to marry ; casaree con to marry,
be married to
casi almost
caso m. case ; en case que in case
castellano -a Castilian ; el casteUano
Spanish
catillogo m. catalogue
catedral /. cathedral
causa /. cause ; a causa de on ac-
count of
ceguedad /. blindness
celebrar to l^e glad
c^lebre celebrated
cena /. supper
cenar to have supper, sup
centavo m. centavo, cent
centenar m. a hundred
centteimo-a hundredth
central central
centro m. center
cerca near
cerdo m. pig, pork
cerrado -a closed, shut
cerrar [ie) to shut, close
certificar to register
ciego -a blind
cielo m, heaven, sky
ciento, cien, one hundred *
cierto -a certain, a certain
citar to mention
ciudad /. city
claro -a bright, light, clear
class /. class, kind, sort
clima m. climate
cobijar to shelter
cobrar to cash, receive money
cobre m. copper
cocina /. kitchen, cooking
coche m. carriage
cochero m. driver, coachman
coger to catch, gather
colegio i». school
colgar to hang
colocacidn /. place, job
Col6n m. Columbus
color m, color
comenzar to commence
comer to eat, dine
comerciante m. merchant
comercio m, commerce
comida f, dinner, meal
comisi6n /. commission
comisionista m, commission mer-
chant
como as, like; while; oomoqne when
c6mo how
c6modo -a comfortable
compaSero -a m, andf. companion
compaSia/. company
completo -a complete
componer to compose, make up,
mend
comprador m. buyer
comprar to buy
comprender to understand
compuesto p.p, ^t/* componer
com^ common; porlooomibi com-
monly
con with, toward ; para con toward ;
con tal que provided that
SPANISH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
289
concnrrir to attend
conde m, count
conducir to conduct, lead, guide
confesar to confess
confiar to confide
confuBO -a confused, embarrassed
coimiigo with me
conocer to know, be acquainted with
conocido m. acquaintance
conozco/r^j. indie, istsing. ofwosicet
COnqiie so then, see section 214, 9
conquista /. conquest
conquistador m, conqueror
conqiiistar to conquer
consentir (en) to consent (to)
considerar to consider
consigo with himself, herself, etc,
consiguiente m. consequence; por
conaigttiente consequently
consistir to consist
constar (de) to consist (of)
consultar to consult
consumidor m, consumer
contado : al contado for cash
cental {ue) to count, tell, relate;
contar con count on
contener to contain
contento-a satisfied
contestacidn f, answer
contestar to answer
contigo with you, with thee
continuar to continue
contra against
contrario-a contrary
conyertir to convert
conyidar to invite
copiar to copy
copla f. couplet, verse, stanza
copo m. flake
Cordillera /. mountain range
corregir to correct
correo i». mail, post-office
correr to run
corriente present {month), instant,
current
cortado -a cut, broken
cortar to cut
corte f. court, capital, Madrid
cort^s polite, courteous
corto -a short
COsa f, thing, affair ; matter
coser to sew
costa /. coast
costar to cost
crecer to grow
creer to believe, think ; pres, part,
creyendo
criada f. maid servant
criado m. servant
CriBt6bal m. Christopher
.c.*» = corriente
cuadro m, picture
cual which ; el (la) cual who, which,
whom
cudl interrog. adj. and pron. which,
what
ciialqiiier(a) any
cuando when; cuindo when, /;f/^rr<c7^.
cuanto -a how much, as much, all
the, all that ; coantos, coantas, //.
how many, as many, all the, all
that ; coanto antes as soon as pos-
sible ; en cuanto as soon as
cudnto -a interrog, and exclam, how
much ; //. how many ; cuinto tiem-
po how long; cu&ntos alios tienes
how old are you
cuarto m, room
Cuba /. Cuba
cubano-a Cuban
cubriT to cover ; /./. cabierto
cuchara /. spoon
290
SPANISH GRAMMAR
cnchillo m, knife
cuenta /. accounti bill
cuerda/ rope
cuero m. leather
cuerpo m. body
cnesta : i cuestas on one's back
Ciiesti6n /. question
cuidar to take care of
cmnpleaflos m, birthday {anniver-
sary)
cumplimiento m, fulfillment
cumplir to fulfill, complete
cnSado -a m, and f, brother-in-law,
sister-in-law
cnyo -a whose, of which
cheque m, check
chico m, boy ; adj. small
chimenea /. fireplace
chiBpa /. spark
chisporrotear to burn and throw out
sparks
D. = don Mr.
daflo tn. harm ; hacer dallo to hurt
dar to give, face, hit, strike {of a
clock) ; dar vnelta turn
de of, from, since
debajo de under ; beneath
debar to be {morally) obliged to,
ought, owe, should
decir to say, tell
dedo m. finger
dejar to leave, allow, let
del of the, from the ; del cual of whom
delante in front, before
demAs othei^ rest
demasiado -a cuij, too much, too
many ; cuiv, too, too much
dentro inside, within
dependiente m. clerk
derecho -a right, straight
desagradabia disagreeable
descansar to rest
descanso m, rest
deacnbrir to discover
descnento m, discount
desde from, since ; desde . . . hasta
from ... to ; desde que since
desear to desire, wish
desembarcar to disembark, land
desembolBO m, expenditure
deseo i». desire
desgracia f, misfortune
desgraciado -a unfortunate
desmentir to behe
desnudar to undress
despacio slowly
despacho m. office ; deiq^acho de bi-
lletes ticket office
despedirse rejl, to take leave
despertar {ie) to awake, wake up;
refl. to awake
despiite afterward ; despn^s de prep.
after; despa^s que conj. after
detallado itemized
detener to stop
detenninar to determine
detiAs behind
denda /. debt
deyolyer to return, g^ve back
dla m. day ; de dia by day ; echo dias
a week ; quince dias a fortnight
diario -a daily ; a day
dice pres. indie » 3d sing, of^tdt to say
diciembre i». December
dicho -a said, the said
dich080-a happy
diente m. tooth
diffdl difficult
difunto-a deceased
diga pres, subj. ^dtdi
SPANISH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
291
digO pres. indie, ist sing, o/dedi
dijeron /«/. indie, 3d pi. ^decir
dinero tn. money
Dios m. God
direcci6n /. address
directo -a direct, through
dirigir to direct ; refl. address, turn,
direct one's self
discfpulo -a m. andf. pupil, scholar
discusi^n f. discussion
disgusto tn. trial, displeasure
disimular to excuse, pardon
dispensar to excuse
dispuesto ready, disposed
distancia /. distance
distinto-a different
diyertir refl. to amuse one's self,
have a good time
diyidir to divide
Dn. = don
DSa. = doSa
docena /. dozen
doler to ache
dolor m. pain, ache, grief ; dolor de
cabeza headache
domingo tn. Sunday
don, doSa, m. andf. Mr., Mrs., Miss ;
don Quijote Don Quixote
donde where, in which ; en donde
where, in which
d6nde interrog. where
donnir to sleep ; refl. to fall asleep
d08 two ; I08 (las) dos both
dosel tn. canopy
dnda /. doubt
dndar to doubt
dueSo tn. master
dulce sweet
dnque tn. duke
dnro -a hard, severe
dnro in. dollar
e and
echar to throw, cast, pour {as water) ;
re/l. to throw one's self down, lie
down ; echar en el correo to mail
edici6n /. edition
edificio m. building
educaci6n /. education
efectos m. effects, goods
ejemplar tn. copy
ejercicio m. exercise
ej^rcito m. army
er(la, lOy los, las) the, that, the one,
those ; el que who, whom, he, who,
eU.
m he, him, it
el^ctrico-a electric
elefante -a m. andf. elephant
elegante elegant
eleyado-a high
ella she, her, it
ello it
ellos, ellaSy they, them
emperador tn. emperor
empezar to begin
emplear to employ, use
emprender to undertake
en in, into, on
encantar to delight
encargar to order ; encargarse de to
take charge of
encender to light, kindle
encina /. (evergreen) oak tree
encontrar to meet, find ; enoontrar-
se con to meet
encnentro tn. encounter
enemigo -a tn. and f enemy ; cuij.
hostile
enero tn. January
enfermedad / illness, sickness
enfermo -a ill, sick
enorme huge
292
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Enrique m, Henry
enseSar to teach, show
ensuciar to get dirty
entender to understand; reft, to
agree
entero -a entire, whole, firm
entonces then
entrada/! entrance
entrar to enter, go into; hacer entrar
to show in, admit
entre between, among
entregar to deliver, hand over
enyiar to send
enyidiar to envy
equipaje m. baggage, luggage
eran imperf. indie, 3d pL of ser
es pres, indie, 3d sing, of Bet
escalera /. stairs
escoger to select, choose
escribir to write
escrito /./. <7/*eflcribir
escuchar to listen
escuela /. school
ese (esa, eso, esos, esas) that
(those) ; 68e ete. that one ete. ; eso
that which you say
espalda /. back
EspaSa/ Spain
espa&ol -ola Spanish
Espa&ol -ola m. and f Spaniard,
Spanish woman
especiilaci6n /. speculation
espejo m, mirror
esperanza /. hope
esperar to hope, wait (for), expect
espiritu m. spirit, mind
esposo -a m. andf. husband, wife
esquina /. corner
estaci6n /. station, season
estado m. state
Estados Unidos m.pL United States
estar to be
estatua /. statue
este (esta, esto, eatos, estaa) adj.
this (these), the latter ; 68te etc.
pronoun
eate m. east
eatimaci^n /. esteem
eatimada favor {letur)
eatimar to value
eatdmago m, stomach
estrechar to press
eatrecho -a narrow
eatudiar to study
ezacto-a exact
ezclamar to exclaim
ezcnsar to make excuses
dzito m. outcome, result, issue, suc-
cess
expirar to expire
ezplicar to explain
ezpliqne Vd. explain {pres, subj, of
explicar)
eztranjero -a m. andf stranger, for-
eigner
eztraSar to surprise
eztremo m, end
f Abrica /. factory
fabricar to make, manufacture
f Acil easy
facilidad /. ease, facility
factura /. invoice
facturar to check {baggage)
faltar to lack
familia /. family
favor m, favor ; hacer el favor to do
the favor
febrero m. February
f echa /. date
felicitar congratulate
feliz happy
SPANISH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
293
f 60 -a ugly, homely
ferrocarril m, railway
fiel faithful
fiesta /. feast, festival, festivity
figura /. figure, form
figurar to figure; refl, to fancy,
imagine
fijar to fix ; fijarse en to notice, ob-
serve
fijo fixed
flor / flower
Flor /. Flora
fonda /. inn, restaurant
f ormar to form
fortaleza m, fortress
f ortuna /. fortune
francos -esa French
Francia /. France
franco -a frank
franqueo m, postage
franqueza /. frankness
frase /. sentence
frente /. front, forehead ; frente a
opposite
fresco -a fresh, cool ; al fresco in the
open air
frfo -a adj. cold
frfo m. cold ; tengo frlo I am cold ;
bace fiio it is cold
frontera /. frontier, border
fmta /. fruit
fmto m, fruit, crops
fnego m. fire
fuente /. fountain, spring
fuera impf. subj. jd sing, of ix to
go
fnera de apart from, outside of
faerte strong, mighty, powerful
fnmar to smoke {as tobacco)
funda /. cover, case
fnndar to found, build
gallina / hen
ganar to earn, make [money), gain,
win ; ganar a to surpass
garganta / throat
gas m. g^s
gastar to spend, waste
gasto m. expense
gatito -a m. andf, kitten
gato -a m. andf. cat
general m. general
g^nero m. goods
geograf ia /. geography
girar to draw [drafts)
giro m, turn, revolution; draft, or-
der ; dar giro to set in movement
gitano m. gypsy, tramp
gracias thanks, I thank you; dar
graciaa anticipadas to thank in
advance
gramAtica f grammar
gran cf grande
grande great, big, large, g^nd
gritar to shout
grito tn. shout
guante m. glove
guardar to keep, protect
guardia /. guard ; m. policeman
guarismo m. numeral, cipher, figure
guerra / war
guerrero m. warrior
gustar to taste, please; me gusta
lUke
gusto m. taste, pleasure
ha pres. indie, jd sing, of haber
haber to have, be ; hay there is, there
are ; haber de to have to
habitaci6n /. room
habitar to live in, inhabit
hablador-ora talkative
hablar to speak, talk
294
SPANISH GRAMMAR
hacer to make, do; liacer talta to
be needed; hace fiio it is cold;
bace ana bora y media an hour and
a half ago; cuinto tiempo hace
how long is it
hacia toward(s)
hacha f. ax
hallar to find ; refl, to be
hambre / hunger ; tener hambre to
be hungry
hasta to, up to, until, as far as, even
hay there is, there are {cf, baber)
hecho /./. of bacer
herencia /. inheritance
hermano-a /in. a;f<//. brother, sister
hermoso -a beautiful, handsome,
fine
hierba /. grass
hierro m. iron
hija /. daughter
hijito -a m, and f, little son, little
daughter
hi jo -a tn, andf. son, daughter; m,
pi. sons, children
historia /. history
hogar m, hearth, home
hoja /. leaf
hola hello
hombre m. man
bora /. hour ; qu6 bora es what time
is it ; a qu4 bora when
horno m, oven
hoy to-day
hubo there was, there were ((/*. baber)
huele pres. indie. 3d sing. of^oUn
to smell
hueyo m. tgg
hnmilidad /. humility
ida going; billete de Ida y vnelta
excursion ticket
idioma m. language
ignal equal
imperio m. empire
importancia /. importance
importante important
importar to be of importance, con-
cern, amount to; no importa no
matter
importa m. amount, value
imposible impossible
inca m. Inca
incendio m. fire, conflagration
indinar to incline
inclttso included
inconYeniente : no tener inoonyeniente
to have no objection
indemnizar to indemnify
indicar to point out, show
indio-a Indian, Hindu
informes m.pl. information
ingeniero m. engineer
Inglaterra /. England
ingles -esa English
Ingles -esa m. and f. Englishman,
Englishwoman
instante m. instant ; al inatante in-
stantly
instniir to instruct
mstmmento tn. instrument
inteligente intelligent
intenci6n /. intention
intense -a intense
interns m. interest
interesante interesting
interesar to interest
interior interior, internal
inyiemo m. winter
ir to go, go on, continue ; refl. to go
off, go away
italiano-a Italian
izqoierdo-a left
SPANISH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
295
jab^n m. soap
jamis ever, never ; no . . . jamis
never
jaqueta /. jacket
jardfn m. garden
Jorge m. George
Jos^ m. Joseph
joyen young
joven m, and/, {young) man, woman,
youth
Juan m. John
Juana /. Jane
Jnanito m. Johnny
jueyes m. Thursday
jnez m. judge
jugar to play
jirnio m, June
junto -a together ; junto a near
justamente exactly
kil6metro m. kilometer
la /. the, that, the one, she, her, it ;
//. the, those, they
la p^rs. pm. her, it ; //. them
labio m. lip
ladera /. side, flank
lado m. side
lAgrima / tear
lAmpara /. lamp
lana f. wool
l£piz m. pencil
largo -a long ; n. length
listima /. pity
layar to wash
le him, it, you ; to him (her, it, you)
lecci6n / lesson
leche / milk
leer to read
lejos far
lengua f. tongue, language
lento -a slow
les to them, to you
letra f. draft ; letter of credit
leyantar to raise ; refl. to rise, get
up
ley / law
libertad/. liberty
libra f, pound
libre free
librero m. bookseller
libro m, book
lim6n m. lemon
Undo -a pretty
listo -a ready
lo the, it, him, you, so ; lo que that,
which, what ; lo cual which
lodo m. mud
lomo m, back
Londres London
longitud /. length
I08 the, them, you; I08 que those
who (whom) ; los snjros his own
lucha /. struggle
luego directly, soon, next; luego que
as soon as
lugar m. place
lugare&o -a m. and/, villager
luna /. moon
limes m. Monday
luz /. light
llamar to call, knock, ring; refi. to
be named
llano -a level
llaye / key
llegada /. arrival
llegar to arrive
Ueyar to bear, carry, take, wear;
llevar a cabo to carry out
Uorar to weep, cry
Uoyer to rain
296
SPANISH GRAMMAR
maceta / flower-pot
madera /. wood
madre / mother
iaadiiro-41 ripe
mal badly, poorly; noun m. evil,
harm ; cuij. cf, malo
maleta f. handbag, valise
male -a bad, ill, sick
mamA /. mamma, mother
mandar to command, order, send
manera /. manner, way
mano /. hand
mantenimiento m. support
manteqnilla /. butter
manzana /. apple
maSana /. morning, to-morrow;
m ^fl^wA por la maBana to-morrow
morning; pasado maftana day after
to-morrow
mar m. orf, sea
marchar to march, go ; refl, to go
away
marearse to get seasick
Maria/. Mary
marido m. husband
martes m, Tuesday
marzo m. March
mas but
mAs more, most, plus ; no . . . mis
qae only
matar to kill
mayo m. May
mayor greater, greatest ; elder,
older, oldest; por mayor wholesale
me me, to me
medicina /. medicine
m^ico m, physician, doctor (of
medicine)
medio -a half, a half, middle; por
medio de by means of
medir to measure
mejicano-a Mexican
M^jico m, Mexico
mejilla/ cheek
mejor better, best
memoria f, memory
mencionar to mention
menor smaller, smallest; younger,
youngest ; por menor retail
menos less, least; a menoa que unless
menudo : a menado often
mercader m. tradesman
mercaderia /. merchandise
merino -a merino
mes m, month
mesa / table, desk
metal in. metal
metro m, meter
mi my
mi me
miedo m. fear ; tener miedo de to be
afraid of
mientras while
mi^rcoles m. Wednesday
mil (one) thousand; noun m, thou-
sand
militar m. soldier, ofiicer
milla/. mile
mill6n m. million
mina /. mine
mineral m. mineral, ore
minuto m. minute
mlo -a my, mine
mirar to look
mismo -a self, himself etc.\ same,
very; mismo qae same as
mitad /. half
moda/ fashion; demoda fashionable
mddico -a moderate
modo m. way, mode, manner
modulaci6n /. modulation
molestar to annoy, trouble, disturb
SPANISH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
297
molestia /. trouble
momento m, moment
moneda/. coin
montaSa /. mountain
monte m, mountain, woodland
morir (»<) to die ; refl, to die, be dying
motiyo m, reason
mover to move, actuate
moTimiento m, movement
mozo -a m, and f, youth, lad, lass;
waiter, waitress
mnchacho -a m, andf, boy, girl
muchlsimo -a (fr, macho) very much
macho -a much, a great deal, very
maeblem. article (piece) of furniture;
//. furniture
maerte /. death
majer /. woman, wife
mala / mule
mando m. world ; todo el mando ev-
erybody
may very
nacer to be bom
nacionalidad /. nationality
nada nothing, anything, any respect ;
no . . . nada nothing
nadar to swim
nadie no one, nobody, any one, any-
body; no . . . nadie nobody, not
anybody
naranja /. orange
nariz /. nose
nave f. ship ; nave (0/ church)
Navidad /. Christmas Day
nayio m. vessel
necesidad f, necessity
necesitar to need, want
negar to deny
negocio m. business, affair
negro -41 black
neyar to snow
ni nor, or ; ni . . . ni neither . . .
nor; ni . . . tampoco not . . . either,
nor . . . either
nieto -a m. andf. grandson, grand-
daughter
nieye f. snow
ningono -a no, none ; no . . . ningano
not any
ni&o -a tn. andf. child, (small) boy,
girl
no not, no
noche /. night ; estanoche to-night;
de noche by night
Nochebaena /. Christmas Eve
nombramiento m, appointment
nombrar to appoint
nombre tn. name
norte m. north
norte^americano-a North American
nos us ; to us, to ourselves
nosotros -as we, us
noticias /. //. news
noyedad /. novelty ; occurrence
noyiembre m. November
naestro -a our, ours
naeyo-a new
n^mero tn. number; gran ndmero
a large number, many
nanca never, ever ; do . . . nonca
never, not ever
or
objeto tn. object
obligar to oblige, compel
obra /. work
obscarecer to get dark
obscaridad /. darkness
obscaro-a dark
octabre tn. October
ocaltar to hide
298
SPANISH GRAMMAR
oculto-a hidden
ocupaci^n/. occupation
ocnpado -a busy, occupied
ocnpar to occupy
odiar to hate
oeste m. west
ofreoer to offer
Oido m. hearing, ear
Oiga pres. subj. of oir
olr to hear
OJO m, eye
Oler to smell ; oler a to smell of
Olfato m. sense of smell
Olor m. odor
olyidar to forget
onza f. ounce
6pera f, opera
operaci6n /. operation
opinar to opine, be of the opinion
opini6n f, opinion
6ptiino -a best, excellent
opnesto -a opposite, opposed
orador m. orator
orar to pray
orden /. order
ordinal ordinal
6rgano m. organ
oriental Oriental
origen m. origin
original original
ore m, gold
08 you
osar to dare
osciiro dark
otoSo tn. autumn
otro -a other, another
oyeja f. sheep
oye (^. olr) hear
Pablo tn. Paul
paciencia /. patience
padre m. father, priest ; //. fathere,
parents
pagar to pay
pagar6 m. promissory note
pAgina/. page
page m, payment
pagu^ pret, indie, ist sing, of pagar
pala m. country, region, land
pijaro m. bird
palabra /. word
palabrota {Jr. palabra)/. coarse ex-
pression, harsh word
palacio m. palace
palma /. palm tree
pan m. bread
panadero m. baker
pantalones m. trousers
paSo m. cloth
paSoelo handkerchief
papA m. papa, father
papel m. paper ; papel secante blot
ting paper
paqnete m. package
para for, to, in order to ; para qa«
in order that, that
paragnaa m. umbrella
pararse to stop
parecer to seem ; refl. resemble ; qu6
le parece what is your opinion
parecido -a similar
pared /. wall
pariente-a m. and/, relative, relation
parque m. park
parte /. part, direction; por todaa
partes everywhere; la mayor parte
most
participar to inform
partida /. lot ; game
partir to depart, leave
pasado-a past, last; pasado maftane
day after to-morrow
SPANISH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
299
pasar to pass, pass through, pass
over, spend {time)
paso m, step ; dar on paao take a step
pasto m. forage, food ^
patinar to skate
paz /. peace
P. D. = posdata postscript
pecho m. breast, chest
pedido m. order {of goods)
pedir to ask for; pedir a to ask of
Pedro m, Peter
pegar to stick
pelear to fight
peligro m, peril, danger
peligroso -a dangerous
pelota /. ball
pensar to think, intend, mean {fol-
lowed directly by an infinitive)^ pen-
sar en to think of, recall ; pensar de
to think of, form an opinion of
peer worse, worst
pequeSo -a little, small, slight
percibir to perceive
perder to lose ; perder a to ruin
p^rdida /. loss
perfuxnerla / perfumery
peri6dico m. newspaper, periodical
perjuicio m, injury
permitir to permit
pero but
perro m. dog
persona /. person, anybody
personaje m. personage
pertenecer to belong
pesar to weigh
pescado m, fish
peseta/, peseta (nearly twenty cents)
peso m. weight; dollar
piano m, piano
pie m. foot; de pie standing
piedra / stone
piel f skin, hide
piema /. leg
piso m. story, floor
pizarra f slate, blackboard
placer m, pleasure
piano -a level
planta /. plant
plata /. silver
plato m. plate
pluma /. pen, feather; pluma tintexo
fountain pen
pobre poor
poco -a little ; an poco a little ; pocoa
-AS few; poco ba a short while
ago ; a poco in a short time
poder {ue) to be able, can, may
polo m, pole
poner to put, place, set {a table)^ lay
{eggs) ; refl. to put on {clothing)^
become, beg^
por for, through, by, along, on ac-
count of, per ; por alli over there ;
por la maftana in the morning ; por
eso therefore ; por qa6 why
porqne because
por qu^ why
portador m. bearer '
poseer to possess, own
posible possible
postal postal
p.p.^ = proximo pasado
practicar to practice
precio m. price
preciso -a necessary
preferir to prefer
pregunta / question
pregtintar (a) to ask {question)
presencia /. presence
presentar to present, introduce
presente present
presidente m, president
300
SPANISH GRAMMAR
pr^stamo tn, loan
prestar to lend
primayera / spring
priiiier(o) -a first
primo -a m. andf, cousin
prfncipe m. prince
principiar to begin
prisa /. hurry ; tener piiaa to be in a
hurry ; de piiaa quickly, fast
probar to prove, test; try on {gar-
ments)
producir to produce
profeaor m, professor, teacher
prohibir to forbid, prohibit
prometer to promise
pronto soon, quickly
propina /. tip, gratuity
propio -a own
pToteger to protect
pr6ximo -a next ; pr6zi]iio pasado last
month, ultimo
ptiblico -a public ; noun m. audience
pueblo m, people, town
puerta /. door, gate
puerto tn, port, harbor
pnes since, well, why ; so, then
pujar to bid
punto m, point, element
que, el (la, las, los, las) que, who,
which, that; lo que that which,
what
que conj, that, for, than, as ; t«ner
que to have to, must
qu^ interrog. andexclam, what, what a
quedar to remain; refl, to remain,
stay ; quedarse con to keep
quemar to bum
qoerer to wish, want, like, try ; que-
rer a to love, like ; qaerer decir to
mean, signify
qnerido -a dear
qoien who, whom, he who, him who
qni^n interrog, who, whom
qnitar take from, take off
quizAs perhaps
ramo m, branch
rancho m. ranch
raro -a strange, odd, queer
rate m, while ; ratito little while
rayo m. ray, beam
raxdn f. reason, right ; tener rax6n
to be right
rebajar to allow a discount
reboznar to bray
recapitular to recapitulate
recibir to receive
redbo m. receipt
recobrar to recover
recordar to recall, remind
redondo -a round ; mesa redonda table
d*h6te
reducir to reduce
referir to relate, utter
regalar to g^ve, present
regale m. present, gift
regar (/>) to water, irrigate
regatear to bargain
registrar to search, examine
regresar to return
regreso m, return
reir to laugh ; relrse (de) to laugh (at)
reloj m. watch, clock
remesa /. remittance
remitir to remit
repetir to repeat
repoear to rest
representar to represent '
reptiblica / republic
repuso , rejoined
reapetuoso-a respectful
SPANISH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
301
responder to respond, answer ; ret-
ponder de to answer for, be respon-
sible for
resultar to result
retrato m. portrait, picture
rey m, king ; //. monarchs -
rezar to pray
rico-a rich
riegan water, irrigate {from regar)
rincdn m. comer
rfo m. river
riqueza /. riches, wealth •
rodar to roll
rodilla /. knee ; de lodillas on one's
knees
Rodolfo m. Rudolph
rogar to ask, entreat
rojo-a red
ropa /. clothing, clothes
ruido m, noise
S.S.Q.B.S.M.(P.) = 8egiiro(na)
seryidor (-ora) que besa sub
manos (pies)
siibado m. Saturday
saber to know, know how, learn, be
able ; saber k to taste of
sabor m. flavor
sacar to take out, get
sala /. room; sala de dase class-
room ; sala de espera waiting-room
saiga pres. subj. ^salir
salida/. going out, departure ; salida
del sol sunrise
salir to come out, go out, issue, leave
saltar to jump
salud /. health; Men de salad in
good health
saludar to greet
saludo m\ greeting
sano -a healthful, well
santo -a holy, saint
sastre m, tailor
satisfacer to satisfy, please
se himself, herself, itself, one's self,
yourself, themselves, yourselves ;
( = le, les) to him, to her, to it, to
them, to you
secar to dry ; refl. to wipe one's self
sed /. thirst ; tener sed to be thirsty
seguida: en segoida next, immedi-
ately
seguir to follow, succeed, keep on
segdn prep, according to ; conj. ac-
cording as, as
segundo m. second
seguridad /. security, safety
seguro-a secure, sure, firm ; noun m,
insurance
selva /. forest
sello m. stamp
semana/. week ; la semana que viene
next week
semejante such a
sentado seated, sitting
sentar to set, seat ; fit, suit ; re/i, to
sit down, be seated
sentldo m. sense
sentimiento m. feeling, grief, sorrow
sentir to feel, perceive; be sorry,
regret
seSor m. sir, gentleman, Mr.
SeSor m. Lord
seSora /. madam, lady, wife, Mrs.
seSorita /. young lady, miss
sepa pres. subj. of^tHOKt
separar to take
se(p)tiembre m. September
ser to be
serie /. series
servicial obliging
seryicio m. service
302
SPANISH GRAMMAR
servidor -ora m. a/f^/. servant ; ser-
▼idor de Vd. at your service
servir (i) to serve ; servirse de to
make use of ; sirvase Vd. please,
be kind enough ; para qu6 sirve
what is it used for
seyero -a strict, severe
Sevilla /. Seville
si if; whether {in indirect questions) ;
why, indeed {in exclamations)
si yes
si himself, herself, itself, yourself,
one's self, themselves, yourselves
siempre always, ever, still
siga pres. subj. of seguir
siglo m. century
significar to signify, mean
siguiente following
silbar to whistle
silencio m, silence
silla /. chair, saddle
sin without
singular m. singular
sino but, except; no . . . sino only
sistema m. system
sitiar to besiege
sitio m. place
sobrado -a great
sobre on, above ; sobre todo above all,
especially
sobre m. envelope
sobrino -a m. and f. nephew, niece
sol m. sun
soldado m. soldier
solo -a alone, solitary
s61o adv. only, merely
sombrero m. hat
son they are {from ser)
sonar to sound, ring
sonido m. sound
sonrelr to smile
sordo -a deaf
Sr.| S(ff.y = sefior
Snr.y SSfa.y = seHoia
SrtS. = sefiorita
su his, her, its, their, your, one's ; sn
. . . de Vd. your
suave smooth
subir to go up, take up : get in
substancia /. substance
suceder to happen, follow {in order)
suelo m. floor, ground
sueSo m. sleep; tener snetlo to be
sleepy ; en suefios in dreams
sufrir to suffer
suma /. sum, amount
suministrar to supply
superficie f surface
superior upper
suplicar to beg, entreat
surtido m, stock, assortment
sustituir to substitute, take one's
place
sur m. south
suyo -a your, yours
tabaco m, tobacco
tacto m. touch
tal such, such a ; an tal a certain ;
oon tal que provided that ; tal vez
perhaps ; qa6 tal how, what kind
of
tambi^n also, too
tampoco as little, neither, nor . . .
either
tanto -a as much, so much ; tantos
-as as many, so many ; tanto . . .
oomo as (so) much ... as
tanto adv, so much, so
tardar to delay ; no tardar& en venir
it will not be long before he
comes
SPANISH-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
303
tarde late
tarde f, evening, afternoon
tarjeta /. card ; tarjeta de yisita vis-
iting card
taza f, cup
te you, thee
t^ m, tea
teatro m. theater
techo m, ceiling
tela /. cloth, fabric
temer to fear
temprano early
tenderse to be spread
tenedor m. fork
tener to have, hold ; tener que to
have to
tercio-a third
terminar to finish, end
Terranoya Newfoundland
terreno m, land
tesoro m, treasure
ti you, thee
tlayi aunt
tiempo m, time; weather; cuAnto
tiempo hace how long is it
tienda f, shop, store
tienen pres, indie. 3d pi. ^ tener
tiemo-a tender
tierra f. earth, land
tinta /. ink
tfo -a m. and/, uncle, aunt
tirar to throw; (of colors) shade
tiza /. chalk
toalla /. towel
tocar to touch, ring, play (a musical
instrument) ; knock {on a door) ;
be one's turn
todayla still, yet
todo-a all, every; «. all, everything;
todo el dfa all day ; todas las noches
every night
tomar to take
tomo m. volume
tonto -a m. and/, goose, fool
torre f. tower
trabajar to work
trabajo m. work
traer to bring
traiga pres. subj. of\XB»z
traje m. suit, costume
transportar to transport
tranyia m. tramway, street car
tratar to treat, have dealings (with)
trato m. bargain
tren m. train
trineo m,. sleigh
triste sad, gloomy, dismal
tronco m. trunk of a tree
tu thy, your
td thou, you
tuyo -a thine, yours ; el tujro ete.
thine, yours
u or
dltimo-a last
nniyersidad f. university
lino -a one ; unos -as some, any,
about ; k la una at one o'clock
usted (//. astedes) you
dtil useful
V. (usted) you; W. (ustedes) you
//.
yaca f. cow
yaler to be worth; mAs vale it is
better
yalor m. valor, courage ; value, val-
uables, securities
yalle m. valley
yan {cf. ir) they are going
yapor m. steam; steamer
yara / yard
304
SPANISH GRAMMAR
rarUr to vary, change
yario -a various, different
raso m, glass
yaya prgs. subj. of it
Vd. (ttsted) you; Yds. (nttedes)
you//.
yecino -a m, and/, neighbor
redar to forbid
Tela /. candle ; sail
yelar to watch
yelocidad /. speed
yencedor m, victor
yencer to conquer ; . win ; fall due
yendedor m. seller
yender to sell
yenga pres, subj. ofytnit
yenir to come, happen
yenta / sale
yentana /. window
yer to see
yerano m. summer
yerdad /. truth; ^no es verdad? isn't
it so?
yerdadero -a true, real
yerde green
y^rdiira /. verdure
yerificarse to take place
yestido m, garment, clothes, suit
yestir (/) to dress, clothe ; tr^. to
dress one's self
yez /. time ; otra vez again ; una vex
once
yiajar to travel
yiaje m. journey, travel, trip
yiajero m. traveler
yida /. life, living
yiejo-a old
yiena {cf, venir) he comes
yiento m. wind
yiemes m. Friday
yiaible visible, to be seen
yiaita /. visit
yiaitar to visit
yiata /. sight, view
yiato -a /./. o/yex to see
yistoso -a showy
yiudo -a m. and f. widower, widow
yiyir to live
yolar to fly
yoluntad /. will
yolyer to turn, return, come back;
volver a again, see section 107, 5 ;
refl. to turn around
yos you
yosotros -as you, ye
yoy pres» indie, ist sing, of ir 1 go
yox /. voice
yuelta /. turn, return ; a vuelta de
correo by return mail; estar de
vuelta to be back, have returned ;
dar vuelta to turn
yiiestro -a your, yours
y and
ya already, now, see section 209, r;
ya no no longer, no more
yo I
zapato m. shoe
zas smash
ENGLISH-SPANISH VOCABULARY
Note. Radicatchanging verbs are indicated thus : sentir (ie)
a, an, un, una
about {approximately) cerca dc ; [pf)
de ; {with regard to) respecto &
aboye adv. arriba ; prep, sobre, en-
cima de
absence ausencia/.
absent ausente
accent acento in.\ vb. acentuar
accept aceptar
accompany acompafiar
according to segiin
account cuenta /. ; on acooant a
cuenta; on account of a causa de
ache doler (»<)
acknowledge reconocer; acknowl-
edge the receipt (of) acusar recibo
(de)
acquaintance {person) conocido ;
{knowledge) conocimiento m. ;
make acquaintance conocer
act hecho m.\ vb. hacer
actress actriz/.
address direcci6n/. ; vb, saludar
admire admirar
adorn adomar
advance adelantar
advertise anunciar
advice consejom.; give advice aeon*
sejar
advise aconsejar (a)
affair asunto m.
affectionate carinoso -a ; very (most)
affectionate afectisimo -a, af.™® -» .
afoot d pie
afraid: be afraid (of) tener miedo
(de)
after /^. despues de ; conj. despu^s
que
afternoon tarde/
again otra vez, de nuevo, volver a
age edad/.
ago: a long time ago hace mucho
tiempo; mucho tiempo ha; see
section 64, a.
agree (to) convenir (en) ; {get along
together) entenderse
agreeable agradable
ahead delante; straight ahead dere-
cho por adelante
air aire m. ; open air aire libre, al
fresco
Alfred Alfredo m,
alive vivo -a
all todo -a ; all day todo el dia
allow dejar, permitir; {a discount^
conceder
almost casi
alone solo
along 4 lo largo de
aloud alto ; en voz alta
already ya
also tambi^n
305
3o6
SPANISH GRAMMAR
although aunque
aluminam aluminio m,
always siempre
A. M. de la mafiana
America America/.; North America
la America del Norte
American oiij. americano -a, norte-
americano -a
among entre
amount importar ; ascender {u) (a) ;
importe m.
amphitheatre anfiteatro m.
amusing divertido -a
and y, {before i- or hi-) e
angry enojado -a, irritado -a, enfada-
do -a ; be angry enojarse, irritarse,
enfadarse
animal animal tn.
Anna Ana/
anniversary aniversario m.
another otro -a
answer responder ; (/^ a lettef) con-
testar (a) ; {noun) contestacion/
antiquity antigiiedad/
any (one) alg^no-a; {after negatives
or expressions suggesting negation)
ninguno -a, alguno -a after noun ;
in any way {after neg. etc.) en nada
anybody alguien; {after neg. etc.)
nadie ; anybody who see sec. i66, 3
anything algo, alguna cosa; {after
neg. etc.) nada
appear aparecer, {seem) parecer
applaud aplaudir
apple manzana/. ; apple tree manza-
no m. ; apple orchard manzanar m.
appoint nombrar
appraise apreciar
approach acercarse (a)
April abril m.
Arabic drabe
arch arco m.
argue argtiir
arise levantarse
arithmetic aritm^tica/
arm brazo m.
army ej^rcito m.
around alrededor de
arrival llegada/.
arrive (at, in) llegar (a)
art arte/
article articulo m.
as como ; as ... as tan . . . como ; as
soon as luego que, tan pronto como
ascertain averiguar
ashamed : to be ashamed tener ver-
g^enza
ashore a (en) tierra
Asia Asia/
ask {question) preguntar ; {beg^ re-
quest) pedir (1), rogar {ue) ; ask of
pedir a ; ask for pedir
assembly asamblea/
at a, ( = in) en
attack acometer
attend concurrir (a) ; asistir (a)
attention atenci6n/
auction subasta/
audience los oyentes ; asistencia/
August agosto tn.
aunt tia/
autumn otoflo m.
avoid evitar
await esperar
awake despertarse {ie)
tLWXy {wit A expression of distance) a
before noun ; cu adverb with verbs j
see the verbs
bachelor solter6n m.
back {of person) espalda/ ; {of ani-
mal) lomo m.
ENGLISH-SPANISH VOCABULARY
307
bad malo -a; bad cold fuerte res-
friado; it's too bad es Ustima
badly mal
bag saco m. ; traveling bag maletay.
baker panadero m.
ball pelota/. ; play ball jugar a la
pelota
bank banco m.
bark ladrar {of dogs)
basis tipo m,
bathe baiiarse
be {permanently or inherently) ser ;
{position or temporarily) estar ; be
cold tener fiio {of a person or ani-
mal) ; estar frio {of an inanimate
objett) ; hacer frio {of the weather)
bear one's self portarse
beard barba/I
beautiful bello -a, {handsome) her-
moso -a
beauty hermosurayi
because porque
become ser; hacerse, ponerse
bed Camay. ; go to bed acostarse {ue)
bedroom habitaci6n/.
beef came de v?iC2if
before {position) ante, delante de ;
{time) antes de ; adv. {formerly ^ be-
forehand) antes ; conj. antes que
beg {request) pedir (/), rogar {ue)
begin empezar {ie ;) principiar
believe creer
bell campana/I ; campanillayi ; bell
tower campanario m.
belong ser de, pertenecer
beloved amado -a ; querido -a
below abajo
besiege sitiar
best mejor
bet see section 233, 2, c,
betrothed novio -a m^. andf
better mejor
between entre
Bible Biblia/
bill {account) cuenta/". ; {bank-note)
billete m. ; bill of fare lista de co-
midasy.
bird pijaro m. ; avey
birthday dia de cumpleafios, cum-
pleanos m.
bite morder {ue)
bitter amargo -a
black negro -a
blackboard pizarray
blind ciego -a
blow {comet) tocar; the wind blows
hace (hay) viento
blue azul
board pensi6ny
boarding-house casa de huespedesy
boat barco m.
bold atrevido -a
Bolivian boliviano -a
book libro m.
bookkeeping teneduria de librosy
bookstore libreriay
bom : be bom nacer
borrow pedir (tomar) prestado -a
bosom seno m.
both los dos, ambos ; both . . . and
asi . . . como
box cajay
boy muchacho m. ; {young boy)
nino m.
brand marcay
brave valiente
Brazilian brasileno -a
bread pan m,
breakfast almuerzo m. ; take (have)
breakfast almorzar {ue)
breathe respirar
bridge puente m.
3o8
SPANISH GRAMMAR
brief breve
bright claro -a ; {of colors) vivo -a
bring traer; bring down bajar ; bring
np subir
broad ancho -a
broken roto -a
brook arroyo m,
brother hermano m, ; brother-in-law
cufiado m.
brown moreno-a
brush cepillo m. ; vb. acepillar
build construir
building edificio m. ; caser6n m,
bum quemar; intr, arder; bum up
(^rdown) quemarse
burnish brufiir
bushel use English word^ w. accent
business negocio m. {usually plural)
busy ocupado -a
but pero, mas ; [after negcUive) sino
butter mantequilla/.
button bot6n m,
buy comprar
buyer comprador m.
by {with pcusive verbs) por,de; {near)
junto d, cerca de, al lado de ; by
day de dia; by my watch en mi
reloj
calculation c&Iculo m.
call Uamar
camel camello m.
can poder {ue) ; {know how) saber
candidate candidato m,
candle vela/.
cap gorray.
capital capital »»., {city)f\ {letter)
mayiisculay.
captain capitan m.
car : street car tranvia m.
card taijetay.
care cuidado m,
Carlist carlista m.
carriage coche m.
carry off llevar, llevarse ; arrastrar
cart carro m.
case caso m. ; in case en case que ;
{pillow) funda/I
cash al contado
cash-drawer caja de caudales/.
Castilian castellano -a
cat gato -a m. andf
catalogue catdlogo m.
catch coger; {tctke) tomar; catch cold
coger un resfriado
cathedral catedral/.
cattle ganado m.
cause causa/*. ; motivo m,
ceiling techo m,
celebrate celebrar
celebrated celebre
celebration fiesta/.
cent centavo tn.
center centro m.
central central
century siglo m.
certain : a certain cierto -a ; un tal
chair silla/.
change cambiar ; {ideas) variar de
charge cobrar, llevar
Charles Carlos m^
charming encantador -ora
cheap barato-a
child nifio -a m, andf ; children ni-
nos m, pi, ; {sons and daughters)
hijos m. pi.
childhood ninez/
choose escoger
Christmas Navidad / ; Christmas
Eve Nochebuena/.
Christopher Crist6bal
church iglesia/.
ENGLISH-SPANISH VOCABULARY
309
circular circular
citizen ciudadano m.
city ciudad/.
ciyilized civilizado -a
class clase/
clean limpiar; adj. limpio -a
climb subir
clock reloj (de pared, de mesa) ; at
six o'clock a las seis; what time
is it qu^ hora es
dose cerrar {ie)
closed cerrado -a
closet alacena/.
doth tela/. ; pafio m,
dothes ropa/. ; vestidos m*
Ck>. s££ company
coach coche m,
coat levita/. ; {boy^s coat) chaqueta
/; {overcoat) gabin; {evening or
dress coat) frac m»
coffee caf^ m.
coin moneda/.
cold adj\ frio -a ; noun frio m. ; (i7/-
ness) resfriado m.\ be cold tener
frio ; {of the weather) hacer frio
collar cuello m.
collection colecci6nyi
colony colonia/.
color color m.
Columbus Colon
comb peine m.\ vb. peinar
come venir ; comes viene ; come in
entrar ; come out salir ; come up
subir ; come back volver ; come
down bajar
comfortable c6modo -a
command mandar ; mando m.
community comunidad/.
company compania/ ; Co. cM
comparable comparable
complain quejarse (de)
completely completamente
composition composici6nyi
conceal ocultar
concert concierto m,
condude concluir
condition estado m.
confess confesar
confident : be confident confiar (en)
conquer veneer; conquistar
consent consentir {ie) (en) ; consen«
timiento m.
consequently por consig^iente
consist constar (de)
constantly cada vez
consul c6nsul m,
consumer consumidor m.
contain contener {compound of X»wst)
content, contented, contento -a, sa-
tisfecho -a
continent continente m,
continue continuar
copy copia/. ; {of a book) ejemplar m,
cork corcho m,
comer rinc6n m.\ {of street) esquina/
comet cometay.
correct corregir (/)
correctly correctamente
Comnna la Corufia
cost costar {ue)
cotton algod6n m,
count contar {ue) \ count on contar
con
counter mostrador m.
countess condesa/
country pais m. \ {native land) patria
f ; {as distinguished from the city)
campo m. ; country house casa de
campo
countryman campesino m,
court {yard) patio m,
cousin primo -a m. andf
3IO
SPANISH GRAMMAR
cover cubrir,/./. cubierto
cow vacayi
criminal criminal
cross atravesar (ie) ; pasar
cry gritar, dar voces; (weep) Uorar
Cuba Cuba/
Cuban iu(/. cubano -a
cuff pufio m.
cup taza./, ; {wine cup) copa/
cure curar, sanar
currency moneda/.
custom-house aduana/.
cut cortar
cutlery cuchillerfa/.
daily diario -a, todos los d{as, cada
dia
dance bailar
danger peligro m.
dangerous peligroso -a
dare atreverse (a)
dark o(b)8curo -a
darkness o(b)scuridad/.
date fecha/ ; vd. fechar
daughter hija/.
dawn amanecer
day dia m. ; good day buenos dias
dead muerto -a
deaf sordo -a
deal : a great deal of mucho -a ; vd.
tratar
dear {beloved) querido -a, care -a ; {ex-
pensive) caro -a, costoso -a; dear
Sir muy Senor mio ; dear Madam
muy Sefiora mia
death muerte/
debt deuday.
debtor deudor m.
December diciembre m,
decide determinar
dedicate dedicar
deed hecho m,
deep profundo -a, hondo -a
defend defender (/>)
defense defensa/
delight : . be delighted pasmarse
deliver entregar
demand exigir
denominator denominador m.
denote denotar
dense dense -a
depart partir
departure salida/
deposit depositar
desire desear ; deseo m.
despair desesperarse
destroy destmir
develop {photo.) revelar
developer revelador
diameter diametro m.
diamond brillante m.
dictionary diccionario m.
die morir {ue)yp.p. muerto
different distinto -a
difficult dificil
diligence diligencia/.
dine comer
dining-room comedor m.
dinner comida/.
dirty sucio -a
discharge despedir (i)
discount descuento m,
discover descubrir
discovery descubrimiento m.
discuss discutir; tratar
displease dar un disgusto a
dispute disputa/.
distinguish distinguir
distribute distribuir ; {mail) repar-
tir
divide dividir
do hacer
ENGLISH-SPANISH VOCABULARY
3"
dog perro m,
dollar {in Spain) dure m., {in Amer-
ica) peso m.
domestic {of a country) nacional
door puerta/.
dose dosis/*.
doubt duday. ; vb, dudar
down abajo
dozen docena/.
draft {air) corriente/. ; {money) giro
m,
draw sacar
drawer caj6n m. ; little drawer cajon-
cita/.
drawing dibujo m.
dream sofiar {ue) (con) ; suefio m.
dress vestir (/) ; inir, vestirse (/)
drink beber
driver cochero m,
drop {let go of) soltar {ue) \ {let fall)
dejar caer
drown ahogarse
dry secar ; {wipe) enjugar
during durante
dust polvo m,
duty deber m.
each cada ; each other el uno (al) otro
eagle iguila/.
ear oreja/I ; {hearing) oido m, •
early temprano -a ; pronto -a
earn ganar
earth tierray^
east este m,
easy ficil
eat comer
education instrucci6nyi
egg huevo m.
either ... -or o . . . o ; not . . . either
tampoco
elbow codo m»
electric el^ctrico -a
elevated elevado -a
elevation elevaci6n/.
elevator ascensor m.
else : something else otra cosa
embrace abrazar
emerald esmeralday.
emotion emociony*.
emperor emperador m.
employ emplear
employee empleado -a m. andf.
end extremidady.; extremo m.\ fin m,
ending terminaci6n/.
enemy enemigo -a m. andf.
England Inglaterra/.
English ingles -esa
engrave grabar
engraving estampa/.
enough bastante, suficiente
enter entrar (en)
envelope sobre m,
equal igual ; vb. valer, equivaler (a)
establish establecer
estate finca/.
Europe Europa/.
even adv. aun ; even if aunque
evening tarda/*.; good evening bue-
nas noches
ever {always) siempre ; {in a ques-
tion) jamis, alguna vez; {with
pronouns or adverbs) see section
197 ; not ever no . . . nunca, no
. . . jam&s
every (one) todo -a ; cada (uno -a) ;
every night todas las noches;
every time cada vez
everybody todos (//.), todo el mun-
do m.
evident: be evident consta {imper-
sonal)
exchange cambio m. ; vb. cambiar
312
SPANISH GRAMMAR
exercise ejercicio m.
expect esperar
expensive costoso -a ; caro -a
express expreso m.
extend extender {ie)
extraordinary extraordinario -a
extreme extremado -a
eye ojo m.
face carayC ; vb. estar f rente a
fact seg section 206, 2 ; hecho m.
factory fdbrica/.
fair feria/.
faithful fiel
fall caer ; fall down caerse ; {of prices)
sufrir una baja
false falso -a
family familia/.
far lejos ; as far as hasta
fashion moda/.
fast {Jirm) firme, seguro -a ; {swift)
veloz, ligero -a ; be fast {as a watch)
adelantar, estar adelantado
fast adv. {firmly) fuertemente, firme-
mente ; {rapidly) aprisa, de prisa
fatal fatal
father padre m. ; pap4 m.
fault culpa/
favor favor m.\ vb. favorecer; {a
Utter) grata, apreciable, estimada
fear temer
feather pluma/!
February febrero m,
federal federal
feel sentir {ie) ; intr. sentirse
feeling sentimiento m*
fellow ^se
Ferdinand Fernando
fever fiebre/
few, a few, pocos -as; unos (-as)
cuantos (-as)
finally al fin
find hallar ; {meet) encontrar {ue)
fine bueno -a
finger dedo m.
finger-nail una (de dedo)/.
finish acabar; concluir
fire {in the abstract) fuego m. ; {burn-
ing wood or coal) lumbre/ ; {con-
flagration) incendio m. ; {to fire a
gun) disparar
firm casa/; {firm name) firma/;
adj. firme
first primer(o) -a ; {in compound oi<
dinals) primo -a
fisherman pescador m.
fist puno m.
fit sentar {ie)^ caer, estar
fix fijar
flag bandera/
fleet escuadra/
floor suelo m. ; {story) piso m.
flower flor/
fly volar {ue)
fog neblina/ ; niebla/
foggy : it is foggy hay neblina
folks see section 98, c.
follow seguir (/)
food alimento m.
foolish bobo -a ; tonto -a
Ifoolishness tonterfa/
foot pie m. ; on foot a pie
for {for the sake of in exchange for)
por; {destincUion) para
forbid prohibir
forehead f rente/
foreign extranjero -a ; foreign coun-
try el extranjero
forest monte m. ; bosque m.\ selva/
forget olvidar {often used as imper-
sonal reflexive^ see section 269, 4)
fork tenedor m.
ENGLISH-SPANISH VOCABULARY
313
formidable formidable
fortnight quince dias
found fundar
fraction quebrado m.
fragrant oloroso -a, fragrante
France Francia/.
Frances Francisca/.
French francos -esa
fresh fresco -a
Friday viemes m.
fried frito-a
friend amigo -a m, and/,
frighten espantar, asustar ; be fright-
ened asustarse
from dey desde ; from . . . to de . . .
a, desde . . . hasta
front : in front of delante de
fruit fruta/.
fry frelr, /./. frito
fur piel/
furniture muebles m.pl,
further mis alia
game partida/
garden jardin m,
garment vestido m,
gasoline gasolina/.
generally generalmente
genius genio m.
gentleman sefior tft. ; caballero m.
geography geografia/*.
George Jorge m.
German alem&n -ana
get {obtain) conseguir (/), obtener;
{from) sacar; {go after) buscar;
{supply) proporcionar, facilitar ;
{become) hacerse, ponerse ; get up
levantarse; getinsubira; get out
bajar; salir
j;ift regalo m.
girl muchacha/i; ninayC
giye dar
glad alegre, contento -a ; I am glad
(to) me alegro (de) ; tengo mucho
gusto (placer) (en); lo celebro
mucho
gladly de buena gana
glance miradayi
glass vaso m.
glore guante m.
go Ir ; {of a machine) andar ; go away
marcharse, partir; go out salir ; go
up subir ; go into entrar (en) ; go
to bed acostarse {ue) ; go on.ocurrir
God Dios m,
gold oro m.
good bueno -a ; be good for nothing
no valer nada, no servir para nada
good-by adi6s; good-by for a while
hasta luego; good-by until we see
each other again hasta la vista;
say good-by despedirse (1)
goodness bondad /. ; (lo) bueno n,
goods g^nerosi mercancias, efectos
{all may be used in the singular)
Gothic godo -a
govern gobemar {ie)
governor gobemador m. ; {Moorish)
alcaide m.
grammar gram&tica/.
granddaughter nieta/.
grandfather abuelo m.
grandmother abuela/
grandparents abuelos m.pL
grandson nieto m.
grant otorgar, conceder
great graR(de) ; a great deal mucho-a
greatly infinito
greatness grandeza/.
Greece Grecia/.
Greek griego -a
green verde
314
SPANISH GRAMMAR
greet saludar
ground suelo m.
grow crecer ; grow dark oscurecer
guide guia m, {pgrscn),/, (book or
thing)
gun escopeta/.
hair pelo m.
half mitad/. ; adj. medio -a ; a half
or half a medio -a
hand mano/.; vb. entregar; come to
hand venir a (mis) manos
handful pufiado m.
handkerchief paiiuelo m.
handsome hermoso -a ; guapo -a
happen acontecer, suceder
happy f eliz
harbor puerto m,
hard duro -a ; {difficult) dif{cil ; adv,
diligentemente, mucho
harm mal m. ; {damage) dafio m*
hasten apresurarse
hat sombrero m.
hate odiar, aborrecer
Havana la Habana
have aux. haber; {possess^ hold)\jt-
ner ; have to tener que, haber de
he ^1 ; he who el que, quien
head cabeza/I
health salud/ ; be in good (better)
health estar bien (mejor) de salud
healthful saludable
healthy sano -a
heap mont6n m,
hear o{r, sentir {ie)
heart coraz6n m, ; by heart de me-
moria
heat calor m,
heaven cielo m.
heir heredero m,
help ayudar; socorrer
Henry Enrique m.
here aqui, aca
hereupon en esto
hesitate vacilar, dudar
hidden oculto-a
hide ocultar, esconder
high alto -a ; elevado -a
highway carretera/.
him ^1, le, lo
his su, sus ; suyo, etc.
historian historiador m.
history historia_/I
hoarse ronco -a ; get hoarse enron-
quecer
holiday fiesta/
Hollander holand^s -esa
holy santo -a
home {to one's home) a casa ; at home
en casa
honor honra/.
hope esperar; esperanza/
horrible horrible
horse caballo m.
horseback : on horseback a caballo
hospital hospital m.
hot caliente
hotel hotel m. ; fonda/.
hour hora/.
house casa/.
how como ; how much (many) cuan-
to -a (-OS, -as)
huckster revendedor m.
humor humor m.
hundred ciento
hunger hambre/
hungry hambriento -a ; be hungry
tener hambre
hunt buscar
hurriedly con prisa
hurry prisa/; be in a hurry tener prisa
husband esposo m, ; marido m.
ENGLISH-SPANISH VOCABULARY
315
ice hielo m.
idea ocurrencia/. ; idea/.
if si
ignorant ignorante
ill enfermo -a, malo -a ; adv. mal
illness enfermedad/.
illuminate alumbrar
imagine imaginar ; figurarse
immediately en seguida
imperfect imperfecto -a
importance importanciayi
important importante
impure impuro -a
in en; (w/Mm) dentro de ; {after a
superlative) de
incalculable incalculable
incline inclinar
inclined inclinado -a
inclose encerrar (i>)
independence independencia/.
independent independiente
India la India
Indian indio -a
indicative indicative m,
indispensable indispensable
inexplicable inexplicable
infantry infanterfa/.
influence influencia/.
inform participar, avisar
inherit heredar
ink tinta/.
innkeeper posadero m. ; hostelero m.
inquire preguntar (por)
instant instante m. ; {of the pres-
ent month) del corriente, del pre-
sente
instead of en lugar de ; en vez de
instruction instrucci6n/I
insult insultar
insurance seguros m»
insurrection insurrecci6nyC
intend pensar {ie)t tener la intenci6n
de
intended destinado -a
interest interns m. ; vb. interesar
interesting interesante
introduce presentar
invention invenci6n/
invest invertir (/)
invite convidar, invitar
iron hierro m.
Isabella Isabel/.
island isla/
it ^1, ella, ello, lo, la
Italian italiano -a
Jane Juana/
January enero m,
jewel alhaja/
Jolin Juan m.
journey viaje m,
judge juez m,
July Julio m.
jump saltar
June junio m.
just adv. justamente, exactamente ;
to have just acabar de
keen vivo -a
keep guardar
key llave/
kilo kilo, kilog^amo m.
kilometer kil6metro m.
kind clase / ; especie / ; adj. bon-
dadoso -a; apreciable or atenta
(carta) ; be kind enough tener la
bondad (de) ; servirse (1)
kindness bondad/.
king rey m.
kingdom reino m,
kiss besar
kitchen cocina/
3i6
SPANISH GRAMMAR
knife cuchillo m, ; {clasp-knife) na-
vaja/. ; {penknife) cortaplumas m.
knock llamar, tocar
know {be acquainted with) conocer \
{be aware of know how^ be able)
saber ; I know conozco or si ; let
them know conozcan or sepan
lack faltar
lady sefiora/.
lamp lamparay.
land terreno m. ; //. tierras/.
language idioma m. ; {style of lan-
guage) lenguaje m.
large gran(de). See section 46, 2.
last ultimo -a, postrer(o) -a; last
week la semana pasada ; vb. durar
late tarde
Latin latin m. {the language) ; adf
latino -a
laugh reir ; laugh at reirse de «
laundress lavandera/.
law ley/.
lawyer abogado m. _,
lazy perezoso -a ; harag&n -ana
leader jefe m.
leaf hoja/
leap year afio bisiesto m.
learn aprender (a) ; {news) saber
least menos; at least a (por) lo me-
nos
leave dejar, abandonar; {depart)
partir ; {go out) salir ; take leave
despedirse (/)
left izquierdo -a ; on the left a la iz-
quierda
leg piema/
lend prestar
length longitud/. ; largo m,
less menos
lesson lecci6n/
let {leave) dejar ; {permit) permitir ;
{rent) alquilar, arrendar {ie) ; {to
express will) present subj. with
que or without
letter carta/; {of alphabet) letia/
letter-carrier cartero m.
level nivel m,
liberal liberal
liberty libertad/ ; take the liberty
permitirse
library biblioteca/
lie mentir {ie)
lie down acostarse {ue)
lieutenant teniente m.
life vida/
light luz/ ; vb. alumbrar, iluminar ;
{kindle) encender {ie)
lighten relampaguear
like querer (a), gustar (de) ; I like me
gusta {lit* it pleases me) ; cuiv,
como
likely see section 266
line linea/ ; rengl6n m,
listen escuchar; {exclamation) {oye I
little poco -a ; {small) pequeno -a ;
chico -a
live vivir
living vida/
lock cerrar a Have, echar Have a
locked cerrado -a a Have
London Londres m,
long largo -a ; a long time mucho
tiempo; see tardar; as long as
mientras, mientras que
look (at) mirar; {appear) parecer;
look for buscar; look like pare-
cerse a
lose perder {ie)
loud alto -a
love amar; querer (a)
lovely precioso -a
ENGLISH-SPANISH VOCABULARY
317
low bajo -a
lower inferior
luck suerte/
lucky dichoso -a
machine maquina^.
madam senora/.
magazine revista/.
mail correo m. ; vb. echar al correo
male var6n m. ; {of animals) macho
man hombre m. ; his men los suyos
mania mania/*.
manner manera/! ; modo m,
manufacture fabricar
many muchos -as
march marchar
March marzo m,
market mercado m,
marry casarse (con)
Mary Marfa/.
master amo m.
match f6sforo m.; vb. caer bien
con
matter importar
may poder ; tener permiso (de)
May mayo m.
meal comiday.
mean {to intend) pensar {ie) ; {to sig-
nify) significar, querer decir
measure medir (/) ; medida/
meat came/.
medicine {science of) medicina f \
{drug) medicamento m.
Mediterranean mediterrineo
meet encontrar {ue) \ encontrarse
con
mend remendar («>), componer; re-
componer
merchandise mercancias/.
merchant comerciante tn,
message recado m.
meter metro m,
metric m^trico -a
Mexican mejicano -a
Mexico M^jico m,
middle medio -a
mile milla/
military militario -a
milk leche/
million miil6n m.
mind espiritu/.
mine mio; el mio etc,\ {minerals)
mina/.
minimum mfnimo m.
minute minuto m.
mirror espejo m,
miser avariento m.
Miss (la) senorita ; {before given
names) dofia
mistake error m. ; faltay. ; be mis-
taken, make a mistake, equivocarse
moderate m6dico -a
moment momento m.
Monday lunes m.
money dinero m*
month mes m,
moon luna/*.
Moorish moro -a
more m&s
moreover ademis
morning mafiana/. ; to-morrow morn-
ing mafiana por la mafiana ; good
morning buenos dias
most mds; {very) muy
mother madre/.
mountain montafia/.
mouth boca/.
move moverse {ue)
Mr. (el) senor; {before given names)
don
Mrs. (la) seiiora; {before given names)
dofia
3i8
SPANISH GRAMMAR
much mucho -a ; very moch much{-
simo -a ; so (as) much as tanto -a
. . . como ; too mach demasiado
mud lodo m. ; {miref slime) fango
m.
mule mulo -a m. andf. {the fern, form
is generally used)
music miisica/.
must tener que, haber de ; {moral
obligation) deber ; {conjecture)
deber de
mustache bigotesm.//.
mutton camero m.
my mi, mis ; mio -a (-os, -as)
nail clavo m. ; finger nail ufia (de
dedo) f.
name nombre m.'y {surname) apellido
m. ; my nam6 is me Uamo
napkin servilleta/.
narrow estrecho -a
nation naci6n/.
national nacional
native natural m. andf.
nature naturaleza/.
nave nave/!
near cerca de, junto a
nearly casi
necessary necesario -a ; be necessary
ser necesario, ser preciso, ser
menester
neck cuello m. ; pescuezo m.
necktie corbata/
need necesidad f ; vb. necesitar ;
hacer falta
neglect dejar de
neighbor vecino -a m. andf
nephew sobrino m.
never nunca, jamis
new nuevo -a
newcomer reci^n venido -a
news noticia/. ; noticias/.//.; qurf
. . . de nuevo
newspaper peri6dico m,
next pr6ximo -a, siguiente ; next
month el pr6ximo mes, el mes que
viene (entra) ; the next page la pi-
gina siguiente
niece sobrina/.
night noche/. ; last night anoche ;
by night de noche
no no
no one, none, ningun(o) >a
nobody nadie
noise ruido m.
nominally nominalmente
nor ni
north norte m. ; adj. norte
North American norte-americano -a
nose nariz/.
not no ; not . . . either ni . . . tampoco
notary escribano m.
note notar ; be noted notarse
nothing nada
November noviembre m.
now ahora
number ndmero m. ; {nunural) gua-
rismo m.
numeration numeraci6nyi
nut nuez/
oblige obligar
obliging servicial
obtain obtener
occupy ocupar . .. ,^
occur ocurrir - 'i-^r-
o'clock fem. def art. ; at six o'clock
a las seis ; see section 78 •" •
October octubre m.
of de; {with verb of separaHok)^^*^
offer ofrecer; oferta/. :
office despacho m. ; {position) cargo
ENGLISH-SPANISH VOCABULARY
319
often muchas veces ; a menudo
oil aceite m.
old vie jo -a, anciano -a; {ancient) an-
tiguo -a ; older {of persons) mayor ;
be years old tener afios
on en ; {on top of) sobre, encima de ;
on time a tiempo
once una vez ; at once en seguida
one un(o) -a ; one or another uno (-a) u
otro (-a), alguno (-a) que otro (-a) ;
that one aquel etc.
only unico -a; adv. s61o; no . . . m&s
que ; no . . . sino
openabrir,/./. abierto ; open air j^^ air
opinion opini6ny.
Opportunity oportunidady.
opposite opuesto, contrario; adv.
en frente ; prep, frente a
or o ; u {bef. o- or ho-) ; not ... or no
. . . ni
orange naranja/.
orator orador m.
order {command) ordeny.; {commer-
cial) pedido m. ; vb. pedir (/), man-
dar ; in order to para ; in order that
para que
origin origen m.
original original
other {another) y otro -a; {the rest)
demis
ought deber
our nuestro-a
ours nuestro ; el nuestro etc.
out fuera; {outside) afuera; go out
salir
outdoors afuera, fuera de casa
oyer {upon) sobre; {above) encima
de ; {to the other side of) al otro
lado de ; over there por alii
overcoat sobretodo m. ; abrigo m. ;
gabdn m.
owe deber
own propio -a ; mismo -a
owner dueno -a m. andf
oz buey m.
pace paso m.
pack envasar, empaquetar
package paquete m.
page pAgina/
painting cuadro m.
pale p&lido -a
Panama el Panami
paper papel m. ; {newspaper) peri<S-
dico m.
pardon perd6n m.] vb. perdonar
parents padres m. pi.
Paris Paris
park parque m.
parlor sala/.
part parte/. ; vb. separarse
partner socio m.
party tertulia/.; {political^ partido m,
pass pasar
past adj. pasado -a ; at half past one
o'clock a la una y media
past (lo) pasado n.
patience : get out of patience deses-
perarse
Paul Pablo m.
pay pagar ; {pay a visit) hacer
payment pago m.
peace paz/.
pearl perla/.
pen pluma/
pencil Idpiz m.
peninsula peninsula/.
penknife cortaplumas m.
peon pe6n m.
people pueblo m. ; {persons) gente/
pepper pimienta/.
per cent por ciento
320
SPANISH GRAMMAR
perfect perfecto -a
performance repre8entaci6nyi
perhaps tal vez, quizes
permission permiso m. (de)
permit permitir
person persona/.
personage personaje m.
personal personal
Pern el Perti m.
Peter Pedro m.
Philip Felipe m,
Philippines Filipinas/.//.; in the
Philippines en Filipinas
philosophy filosofia/
PhCBnicians fenicios m.//.
photographic f otogrdfico -a
physician medico m.
piano piano m,
pick up recoger
picture cuadro m.; {portrait) re-
trato m,
piece pedazo m. ; {of music, etc.)
pieza/. ; {of furniture) mueble m, ;
{coin) moneda/"., pieza /".
pillar pilar m,
pillow almohada/.
pink clavel m,
pity piedad/. ; misericordia/. ; lis-
tima/. ; it is a pity es Idstima
place sitio m.\ plaza/.; lugar m.\
vb. colocar, poner
plain vega/
plan proyecto m,
plate platom. ; {photographic) placa/
play jugar {ue) (a); {on a musical
instrument) tocar
please gustar, agradar; {be kind
enough) h&game Vd. el favor (de),
tenga Vd. la bondad (de)
pleasure gusto m. ; placer m.
plural plural m.
plus mis
P. M. {till dark) de la tarde ; {after
dark) de la noche
pocket bolsillo m,
poem poesia/.
point punto m.
pole {of the earth) polo m. ; north
pole polo norte
polite cort^s
political politico -a
politician politico m,
pond estanque m.
poor pobre
population poblaci6n/
pork came de cerdo m,
portable port&til
porter portero m.
position colocaci6n/ ; puesto m,
possess poseer
possibUity posibilidad/
possible posible
post {letters) echar al correo
postman cart^ro m,
post-ofSce correo m. ; casa (admi-
nistraci6n) de correos/.
potato patata/ ; {in most parts of
Spanish America) psLpsif
pound libra/.
pour echar
practical positivo -a
praise alabar
pray rezar; orar
prefer preferir {ie)
presence presencia/.
present regalo m. ; presente m. ; vb.
presentar ; present with regalar ;
be present asistir (a) ; at present
al presente
president presidente m,
press prensa/
pretty bonito -a ; Undo -a
ENGLISH-SPANISH VOCABULARY
321
preyent impedir (/)
price precio m,
priest cura m,
principal principal
print imprimir, /./. impreso
prisoner prisionero m, ; cautivo m.
prize premio m,
probability probabilidad/.
probably probablemente ; see section
266
produce producir
production elaboraci6n /. ; produc-
c\6nf.
profound profundo-a
project proyecto m.
promise prometer
propose proponer
proprietor duefio m,
protect proteger
prove probar (ue)
provided that con tal que
province provincia/.
public publico m.
publish publicar; be published pu-
blicarsCi salir a luz
punish castigar
pupil discfpulo -a m. and/.
purchase compra/. ; vb. comprar,
adquirir
pure puro -a
purse bolsa/ ; bolsillo m.
push empujar
put poner; put out {afire or light)
apagar ; put in meter ; put back
reponer ; put on poner
quality calidad/.
quarter cuarto fn.\ at a quarter past
one o'clock a la una y cuarto
question preguntay. ; (discussion)
cuesti6n/.
rag trapo m.
rail {railway) ferrocarril m,
rain Hover {ue) ; Uuvia/.
raise levantar
rank orden/.
rare raro -a
rascal brib6n m.
reach alcanzar; {touch) tocBX \ {ex-
tend) tender {ie), extender {i€)\
{arrive at) Uegar a
read leer
ready listo -a
realm reino m.
reason rzz6nf.
recall recordar {ue)
receipt recibo m,
receive recibir
recently recientemente, reci^n
recognize conocer
recommend recomendar {ie)
red rojo -a, Colorado -a, encamado -a
refrigerating = to make ice
refuse negarse {ie)
regard : in regard to referente 4
regards recuerdos m. pL
regiment regimiento m,
register certificar
regret sentir {ie)
relate contar {ue) ; referir {ie)
relative pariente m.
religious religioso -a
remain quedar, quedarse ; restar
remember acordarse {ue) (de) ;. re-
cordarse {ue)
reminder recuerdo m,
remit remitir
rent alquilar
repeat repetir (/)
reply contestar
republic republica/.
resemble parecerse (a)
322
SPANISH GRAMMAR
reaerra reservar
reside vivir, tener su casa
residence residencia/.
respect estimaci6n f. ; respeto m.
respectable respetable, estimable
rest descansar; {support) apoyar;
descanso m.
restaurant fonda/.
retinue comitiva/.
return volver («^), regresar ; {give
back) devolver {ue) \ [interest) de-
vengar; {of mail, steamer, etc.)
vuelta f.
reveal revelar
review revista/!
ribbon cinta/.
rich rico -a
ride ir en coche, tranvfa, etc. ; cami-
nar ; {horse) montar a caballo
right justo -a ; {cts compared to left)
derecho -a ; on the right a la de-
recha ; be right tener raz6n
ring tocar {person) ; sonar {ue)
{thing)
ring sortija/! ; anillo m.
ripe maduro -a
rise levantarse ; {of sun, moon, etc.)
salir ; {of prices) alzar
rob robar
roll rodar {ue)
Roman romano -a
Rome Roma/.
roof techado m.
room cuarto m. ; habitaci6ny! ; bed-
room alcoba/. ; bathroom cuarto de
baiio m. ; classroom sala de clase
/ ; dining-room comedor m . ; state-
room camarote m.; {space) lugar
m., espacio m.
rose rosa/.
run correr ; ran away huir
Russian ruse -a m. andf
sad triste
sale seguro -a
said : he said dijo
sailor marinero m.
saint san(to) -a m. andf. ; saint's day
dia del santo m., dias m. pi.
salary sueldo m,
sale venta /. ; be for sale venderse
salt sal/.
same mismo-a
satisfied contento -a; be satisfied
quedar contento
Saturday sibado m.
save salvar
say decir
scandalous scandaloso -a
scarcely apenas
school escuela/ ; {high) colegio m.
scold refiir (/)
scratch lacerar
sea mar m.
seam costura/. ; {in metal) junta/
search registrar
season estaci6n/
seat asientom. ; be seated estar sen-
tado
second seg^ndo m.
secret secreto m.
secure seguro -a
see ver
seed semilla/
seek buscar
seem parecer, fig^rarse
select escoger
self mismo -a
sell vender
senator senador m.
ENGLISH-SPANISH VOCABULARY
323
send enviar, mandar
sense sentido m,
sentence frase/.
September se(p)tiembre m.
serious serio -a ; {dangerous) grave,
peligroso -a
servant criado -a m. andf.
serve servir (1) ; serve as servir de
service servicio m. ; at your service
para servir a Vd.
set sentar (i>) ; {of the sun^ moon,
^etc.) ponerse; (set the table etc.)
poner
several varies -as '
severe severe -a .
SeviUe Sevilla/
sew coser
sexton sacristin m,
shadow sombra/*.
shake {hands) estrecharse
share {of stock) accion/.
sharp recio -a
shave af eitar, rasurar ; intr, af eitarse,
rasurarse
sheep ovejay. ; carnero m.
sheet sibana/.
shine lucir, brillar; the sun shines
hace (hay) sol
shipment envio m,
shirt camisa/.
shoe zapato m.
shoot disparar
short corto -a ; a short while (time)
ago poco tiempo ha
should {ought to) deber
shout gritar ; grito m.
show ensefiar ; {point out) indicar ;
mostrar; representacion/".
shut cerrar {ie) ; culj. cerrado -a
SicUy SicUia/.
sick enfermo -a ; be sick estar malo
side lado m.
sign firmar ; {advertising) letrero m,
signal sefial/
silk seda/.
silky sedoso -a
sill alf^izar m,
silver plata/.
similar parecido -a
since prep, desde ; conj. desde que
sing cantar
sir sefior m. ; caballero m.
sister hermana/.
sit down sentarse {ie) ; be sitting
estar sentado
situated situado -a
situation colocaci6n/!
skate patinar
skillful experto -a, hibil
slate pizarra/.
sleep suefLo m. ; dormir {ue) ; go to
sleep, fall asleep, dormirse
sleepy : be sleepy tener sueiio
slow lento -a, atrasado -a ; be slow
{as a watch) atrasar, estar atra-
sado -a
slowly despacio
small pequefio -a, chico -a
smell oler ; smell of oler a ; it smells
huele
smoke humear, echar humo ; smoke
tobacco fumar tabaco
snow nevar {ie) ; nieyef
so tan ; so much (many) tanto -a, tan-
tos -as ; so ... as tan . . . como ; he
said 80 lo dijo ; and so y por eso,
y asi
soap jab6n m.
soldier soldado m.
solid s61ido -a
324
SPANISH GRAMMAR
some alg^no -a ; //. algunos -as, unos
-as
somebody, some one, alguien ; algu-
no -a
something algo, alguna cosa ; some-
thing else otra cosa
son hijo m.
song canci6nyC
soon pronto, presto, temprano; as
soon as luego que, tan pronto como,
en cuanto
sorry afligido -a, triste ; be sorry sen-
tir (i>)
soul alma/.
sound sonido m.
soup sopa/.
south sur m.
South America la America del Sur
Spain Espafia/.
Spaniard espanol -ola m. andf.
Spanish espafiol -ola; {the Spanish
language) el castellano, el espafiol
speak hablar
special especial
spectacles quevedos m.
speech discurso m.
spend {money) gastar ; {time) pasar
Spoon cuchara f, ; teaspoon cucha-
rita/.
spring {season) primavera/
squash calabaza/
stairs escalera/. ; {steps) escal6n m.
stamp sello m.
stand up ponerse de pie ; be stand-
ing estar de pie
state estado m.
station {of railway) estacion/
stay quedar, quedarse ; stay in bed
guardar cama
steal robar
steamer vapor m.
steel acero m,
step paso. m.
stick pegar
still todavia; aun (<7raiin)
stocking media m,
stone piedra/
stop {movement) detenerse, pararse *,
{leave off) dejar (de) ; cesar (de)
story cuento m. ; historia/.
straight derecho -a
strange extrafio -a, particular
stranger extranjero -a m. andf. ;
{unknown) desconocido -a m. and
f. ; {from out of town) forastero -a
m, andf.
street calle/.
street-car tranvfa m,
strength fuerza/.
stripe ray a/.
strong fuerte
study estudio m.\ vb. estudiar
subscribe suscribirse (a)
success ^xito m.
suchy such a, tal
suffer sufrir
sugar aziicar m.
suit traje m. ; it suits conviene
suitable a prop6sito (para)
summer verano m.
stm sol m.
Sunday domingo m.
supper cena/. ; have supper cenar
support mantener
suppose suponer ; see section 266
sure seguro -a
surface superficie/.
surprise sorprender
surround rodear
sweet dulce ; sweets dulces m. pi.
swim nadar
system sistema m.
ENGLISH-SPANISH VOCABULARY
325
table mesa/.
tablet tableta/
tailor sastre m.
take tomar ; ( carry ^ conduct) Uevar ;
take off quitar ; take out sacar
talk hablar
tall alto -a
tank tanque m.
taste g^sto m. ; vb. g^star ; inir, sa-
ber a
tea t^ m.
teach ensenar
teacher profesor -a m, andf. ; maes-
tro m,
tear lagrrima/.
tear romper,/./, roto
teaspoon cucharita/.
telegraphy telegraffa/.
tell decir, contar {ue)
term {word) vozf. ; terms condicio-
nesf.pl,
than que ; de {before numerals) ; del
que, de la que, etc. (before depend-
ent clauses)
thank dar (las) gracias (a), agrade-
cer; thank you gracias
that rel. que
that dent, ese -a -o ; aquel, aquella,
aquello
that conj. que ; {in order that) para
que
that one aquel, aqu^Ua
the el, la, los, las, lo
theater teatro m.
their su, sus ; el (la, los, las) . . . de
ellos (ellas)
them los, les, las ; ellos, ellas
then entonces
there alii, alld ; {near person ctd-
dressed) ahf ; over there por alii ;
there is (are) hay
therefore por consig^iente ; por esto
(eso)
they ellos, ellas
thick espeso -a
thief ladr6n -ona m. andf
thing cosa/.
think pensar {ie) ; {believe) creer,
opinar ; think of pensar en ; think
about pensar de
thirst sed/.
thirsty : be thirsty tener sed
this dem. este -a (-os, -as, -o) ; this
one pm. ^ste, ^sta, etc.
those who los que etc.
thousand, one thoasand, mil
throat garganta/*.
through por; through ticket billete
directo m.
throw echar, arrojar ; {throw a bally
stone ^ etc.) tirar
Thursday jueves m.
ticket billete m,
till prep, hasta ; conj. hasta que
time tiempo m. ; hora/. ; {multiplica-
tion) vez f ; what time is it qu^
hora es ; the first time la primera
vez; on time a tiempo; have a
good time divertirse {ie) ; be be-
hind time estar atrasado
time-table itinerario m.
tin estano m.
tired cansado -a
title titulo m.
to a, hasta ; {in order to) para
tobacco tabaco m.
to-day hoy
together junto -a
to-morrow maflana; day after to-
morrow pasado maiiana ; to-morrow
morning mafiana por la maflana
ton tonelada/.
326
SPANISH GRAMMAR
to-night esta noche
too (a/so) tambi^n ; too (mach) dema-
siado -a ; it's too bad es listima
tooth diente m.
toothache: he has a toothache le due-
len los dientes (///. the teeth ache
to him)
toward(8) hacia
towel toalla/
tower torre/.
town pueblo m. ; ciudad/. ; pobla-
ci6n/.
trade comercio m, ; mercado m.
train tren m.
traitor traidor -ora m. andf,
tramp gitano m.
translate traducir
trayel viajar, caminar
traveling-bag maleta/ j
treasure tesoro m.
treat tratar
tree irbol m,
tremble temblar (;>) (de) ; estreme-
cer
trial ensayo m.
trip viaje m.
trousers pantalones m.pl.
true verdadero -a; {faithful) fiel; it
is true es verdad, es cierto
trunk haul m.
trust fiarse (en)
truth verdad/
try {test) probar {ue) ; {tempt) tentar
{ie) ; {endeavof) tratar (de), procu-
rar, esforzarse {ue) (a)
Tuesday martes m.
Tunis Tiinez
turn {turn around) volverse {ue) ; {be-
come) ponerse, hacerse ; {a comer)
dar vuelta a ; turn out well salir
bien
twice dos veces
type tipo m,
typewriter mdquina de escribir/I
ugly f eo -a
umbrella parages m,
uncle do m.\ oncle(8) and aant(s)
tios m. pi.
understand comprender; entender
{ie)
unfortunate desdichado -a, desgra-
ciado -a
unhappy infeliz
United States Estados Unidos m.
pi.
unity unidad/.
unless a menos que
unpermitted no permitido
until prep, hasta ; conj. hasta que
up arriba
us nos, nosotros -as ; to us nos
use usar, emplear, servirse (/) de
useful litil
usual comiin
usually por lo comiin; de postum-
bre
vacant vacante
valise maleta/.
vapor vapor m.
various vario -a
vary variar (de)
vegetable legumbre/I
verse copla/.
very muy; mucho
vest chaleco m.
village aldea/.
visit visitar; visita/.
voice vozf.
volume tomo m. ; volumen m.
vowel vocal m.
ENGLISH-SPANISH VOCABULARY
327
wages Jornada/!
wait (for) esperar, ag^ardar
waiter mozo m. ; camarero m.
wake (up) despertar (/>)
walk andar ; ir ; paseo m. ; take a
walk dar un paseo, ir a paseo
wall muro m. ; {inner wall of house)
pared/! ; {of fortification) muralla/!
want {lack) carecer de ; {wish) que-
rer, desear
war guerra/.
warm caliente, cilido -a ; I am warm
tengo calor ; it is warm hace calor ;
warm water agua caliente
warn advertir {ie)
wash lavar
wash-basin jofaina/. ; palangana/.
watch reloj m, ; vb. mirar
watchman guardia m.
water agua/.
wax ccrsif.
way camino m. ; direcci6n/! ; {man-
ner) manera/! ; modo m. ; not . . .
in any way no ... en nada
we nosotros -as
wealth riqueza/!
wealthy rico -a, opulento -a
weapon arma/!
wear llevar
weather tiempo m. ; be good weather
hacer buen tiempo
wedding boda/
Wednesday mi^rcoles m.
week semana/! ; in a week en ocho
dias ; in two weeks en quince dfas
weep Uorar
weigh pesar
weight peso m.
well bueno -a ; bien de saludy adv.
bien
west oeste m.
wet mojado -a ; get wet mojarse
wharf muelle m,
what pm. rel. lo que ; interrog. qu^ ;
{which) cuil; what is mine lo mfo
whateyer is neuter article with adj.
wheel rueda/!
when cuando ; interrog. cuindo
wheneyer cuando, cuandoquiera que,
siempre que
where donde ; interrog. d6nde
whether si ; {after dudar etc.) que
which que, el cual, el que ; interrog,
cual
while {time) tiempo ; conj. mientras,
mientras que
white bianco -a
who que, el cual, el que, quien ;
interrog. quien
whose cuyo -a ; interrog. de qui^n
wicked malo -a
wide ancho-a
widow viuda/!
widower viudo m.
width anchura/! ; ancho m.
wife mujer/. ; senora/! ; esposa/!
will {be willing) querer {ie) ; other-
wise will denotes future time
win ganar
wind viento m.
window ventana/!
windy : it is windy hace (hay) viento
wine vino m.
winter inviemo m.
wire hilo m.
wish querer (/>), desear
with con
without sin
woman mujer /! ; young woman
joven/.
wood madera/". ; {variety of wood)
palo m, ; {firewood) lefia/.
328
SPANISH GRAMMAR
wool lana/.
word palabra/*.
work trabajo m. ; (literaty or artistic
production) obray! ; vb, trabajar
world mundo m.
worth : be worth valer
wrap abrigo m,
write escribir,/./. escrito
writer el que escribe; (author) es-
critor
wrong : be wrong no tener raz6n
yard corral m, ; patio m. ; (measure)
vara/.
year afio tn, ; leap year afio bisiesto
yellow amarillo -a
yes si
yesterday ayer
yet todavfa, aun (or aun) ; as yet
hasta ahora
3rield dar
young joven; jrounger menor
your tu ; vuestro -a ; su, el (la, los,
las) . . . de Vd.
INDEX
Figures refer to sections
A, after verbs of motion, loi ; io6, 5, ^
before direct personal object, 57 ;
134
with infinitives, 106, i ; Appen-
dix II, 2
A — en, 221
A lo que, 167, 3, tf
A yer, 106, i, a
absolute superlative, 146
acA, 208, a
acabar de, with infinitive, 107, 4
acaso, 213
accent, 8
written, 9
accusative case, see direct object
adjectives
agreement, 28 ; 140
apocopation, 46 ; 137
as adverbs, 148
as nouns, 147
comparison, 47
comparison, irregular, 48 ; 142, 6
comparison of equaUty, 50
comparative, use, 142
compound, 138
expressing dimension, 155
gender, 29; 135
meaning, before or after noun, 139
modifying two nouns, 140
plural, 30
position, 52; 139
superlative, 145
superlative absolute, 146
adverbs, 208 ft.
in -mente, 83 ; 2 1 1, a
position, 216
agent after passive verb, 270, 2
agreement of verb with its subject
259 if.
after relative, 164, 5 ; 260, a
al, with infinitives, 62, b ; 106, 2
algp, 182; 210,3; 277»4
alguno, 179, 2 ; 180 ; 181, note ; 185
algmio que otro, 179, 5
" all," 192
alll, 208, a, b
alphabet, i
andar, 283
ante — delante — antes, 222
approximation, 160
aqtti, 208, a, b
arithmetical signs, 1 54
articles, see definite article and
indefinite article
asi, in wishes, 282, 3, c
aug^entatives, 132
bajo — debajo, 223
bastante, 214, 6
'* become," 295
bien, 216,^
" both," 186 ; 236
'*but," 232
caber, 284
cada vez, 142, 3
caer, 285
capitalization, 12
cardinal numerals, 39 ; 149
''certain," 194
dento, 39,<; 137,3; 152,^
con with infinitives, 106, 3 ; Appen-
dix II, 3
329
330
SPANISH GRAMMAR
conditional, 77 ; 268
conditional clauses contrary to fact,
112; 279
conjugation, 1 5 ; Chapter XIV
conjunctions, 232 ff.
conocer, 286
conque, 214,9
consonants, 5
spelling for consonant sounds, 7
correlatives, 236
cosa, 160; 176, 2; 182; 183
cnal, relative pronoun, 168
cu&l, interrogative pronoun, 174
cu^ . . . cuAl, indefinite correlatives,
168, I
cualquiera, 197, 3
cuAn, 177,3
cuando, 165,^; 209,^
cuanto, relative pronoun, 170
cuanto — tanto, 142, i
cuAnto, interrogative pronoun, 175
cuatro, 149, 3
cuyo, relative pronoun, 169
ciiyo, interrogative pronoun, 172,
dar, 287
dates, 40, r, d
days, 43
de, before collective numerals, 1 52, d
between words in apposition, 128,
3; 237»8
denotes agent, 270, 2
denotes means, 276, 6
denotes possession, 33
with infinitives, 106, 4 ; 277, 2 ;
Appendix II, 4
dea, 157,^; 230
deber de, 100, f; Appendix II, 7
decir, followed by noun clause, 104, a
definite article
as demonstrative, 162, 6
for possessive adjective, 56, b\
161, 2
forms, 21 ; 123
omission, 126; 179, i
repeated, 141
uses, 26; 124
dejar
with infinitive, 104, b
deJar de, 100, c
demonstratives, 34 ; 162
de I08 que, de estot que, = **the
sort of," 162, 6, r, </
dimensions, 155
diminutives, 132, 2 ; 214, 8
diphthongs, 3
direct object, 57 ; 134; 203, 2
distance, 156
divisions of day, 45
donde, 165, a; 208,/
"each," 189; 190
echar, 288
'* either," 187 ; 236 ; 261, d
el, feminine, 123, a
el cual, 167
el que, 108; 162, 6; 167
el que, after comparatives, 143
" else," 183
en, 221; 225; 274, 5
en ^sta, 162, 4
estar, 25
conjugation, 250
ethical dative, 204
"ever," 197
"every," 191
exclamations, 177
faltar, 289
family names, 113, 2, note
"few," 185
" former . . . latter," 162, 3
fulano, 196, 4
gender, 20; 129
gerund, 274
" give," 287
INDEX
331
gnnde, 46, 2 ; 137, i
gttsta, 99
■
haber
auxiliary, 70 ; 71; 276
conjugation, 250
finite verb, page 229, note
impersonal, 253
haber de, with infinitive, 107, 3
hacer
with infinitive, 104, c
idiomatic uses, 58 ; 64 ; 290
hacia, 208, ^
hasta, 226; 227
hay que, with infinitive, 107, 2
h^me aqul, see haber, 250
idiomatic expressions, 23
(The following references to idioms in
Part 1 are given in order of occur-
rence to facilitate review.)
una lecci6n de espafiol, 23
una carta en espafiol, 23
Buenos dlas, £c6mo esti Yd.? 24
estA bueno, 25, ^
no hay, 31
I CuAntos libros hay ? 31
I no es verdad ? 38, d
adi68, 38, e
hasta luego, 38, e
I A cuAntos estamos ? 40, d
I Cu&ntos afios tienes ? 53, b
hace buen tiempo, 58, a
hay sol, 58, b
I Tiene Vd. calor ? 58, c
iQuiere Vd.? 58,^
^ Qu6 quiere decir ? 58, e
Aqni se habla espafiol, 61
I C6mo 86 llama Yd. ? 61
Me quito el sombrero, 62
al levantarme, 62, b
hace ocho dlas, 64, a^ b
I Qu6 hay de nuevo ? 64, c
Muchas giacias, sefior, 64, d
No hay de qu6, 64, d
todos los dlas, 66, b
todo el mundo, 66, b
^Qu^ hora es? — Son las seis me-
nos cuarto, 78
Tiene Yd. su casa, 85
Servidor de Yd., 85
Sfrvase Yd., 93
HAgame Yd. el favor de repetir, 93
Tenga Yd. la bondad de cerrar la
puerte, 93
I Qu6 le parece ? 99
a mi me gusta mucho, 99
I Le gustan las manzanas ? 99
Tengo que despedirme, 107, i
Hay que hablar, 107, 2
Ha de venir, 107, 3
Acabo de llegar, 107, 4
Yuelve a gritar, 107, 5
imperative mood, 86 ; 87 ; 277, 5
imperfect subjunctive as a pluper-
fect, 280
imperfect tense, 65 ; 264
impersonal verbs
conjugation, 252 ; 253 ; 256
substitute for passive, 272 ; 273
use, 269
indefinite article
form, 127
use, 128
omission, 128 ; 149, i
indefinite feminine, 201
indefinite pronouns, 178 ff.
indefinite subject, 196
indirect object, 56
infinitive mood, 55; Lesson XIX;
277 ; Appendix II
inversion of verb, 115
intensification of statements, 214
interjections, 237
interrogative pronouns, 171 ff.
interrogative sentences, 17
"it," 199
332
SPANISH GRAMMAR
la, indefinite, 201
le — lo — la — 1««, 200
letter-writing, 113
" Uttlc," 185
lleyar, as auxiliary, 276, 2, a
lo, neuter article, 125
neuter pronoun, 206
lo coal, 167, 3
lo d« ay«r, 162, 5, r
lo que, 167, 3
lo que, for cu&nto, 1 77, 3, a
lo que 08, 167, 3,^
" long," referring to time, 209, d
m&8, 144
measure, 158
medio, 106,1,^; 151, f
-mente, 83 ; 211
meter, 292
methods of address, 198
mismo, 139, 5, 6 ; 205 ; 209, d
months, 42
" most," as a noun, 145, 7
mucho, 96; 184 ; 210, 2 ; 277, 4
muy, 96; 210, 1
nada, 182; 210, 3; 277, 4
negation, 18; 212
negative indefinite expressions after
comparatives, 142, 4
neuter article, 125 ; 208, d
neuter pronouns, 206
ni, 212, 4; 236
ningUDO, 179, 2 ; 180 ; 181, note
no, 212
position, 118; 212
redundant after comparatives,
142, 5
nouns
gender, 20; 129
number, 22 ; 130
idiomatic use of plural, 133
idiomatic use of singular, 66, c
compound, 131
numerals
cardinal, 39 ; 149
ordinal, 40 ; 1 50
fractional, 151
collective, 152
multiplicative, 153
0, 232, 2
ojaU, 282
" other," 188
otro, 183; 188
para, 229 ; 230, 2
with infinitives, 106, 5
parte, 151, a; 208,^
participle, 67
absolute constructions, 276, 5, 7
past, 69 ; 249 ; 276
present, 68 ; 274
passive voice, 270 ; 271
substitutes for, 271 ; 272; 273
perfect tense, 70
use, 73
periphrastic conjugation, 258; 275
personal a, 57
personal endings, 14
personal pronouns, 36 ; 79 j 80 ; 81 ;
82 ; 198 ; 200
position of objective pronouns,
81 ; 207
position with present participle,
68, ^z
position with imperative, 91 ; 92
prepositional (disjunctive) forms>
82 ; 202
redundant, 203
two object pronouns, 94 ; 203
= " some " wit^ hay, 95 ; 179* 4
pluperfect tense, 71
poco, 185 ; 277, 4
poder, 291
poner, 292
por, 217; 229; 270,2; 272, a
with infinitives, 106, 6
INDEX
333
position of adjectives, $2 ; 139
of adverbs, 117; 212; 216
of infinitive, 120, a
of predicate adjective, 116
of subject of participle and infini-
tive, 131
of subject pronoun, 1 19
possession denoted by de, 33
possessive adjectives, 37 ; 97
possessive pronouns, 98 ; 161
prepositions, 217 to 231
before clauses, 231
before infinitives. Appendix II
double, 230
prestar, 293
preterit tense, 63
radical changes, 63, c
use, 63; 65, tf; 73,2
price, 157
progressive action, 25S; 275
propio, 205, a
pues, 233, I
punctuation, 11 ; page loi, note i
qae
conjunction, 233, 2 ; 234 ; 277, 4 ;
279
* qoe, 233, 2, c
to intensify, 214, 3
relative pronoun, 75; 165
for cttando, 165, ^
qu^, interrogative pronoun, 173;
^ 174. «
in exclamations, 177, i ; 128, 6
qu* de, 177, 2
qu6 tal, 176, I
quh tantc, 176, 4
qtt«rer, 58,^
quien, relative pronoun, 166
quito, interrogative pronoun, 172
in wishes, 282, 3, ^
qni^n . . . qui^n, indefinite correla-
tives, 166, 5
qnisiera, 112,^
radical-changing verbs, 54 ; 89 ; 244
to 247
rates, 159
reci^n, 211, 2
reciprocal verbs, 190; 257 .
reflexive verbs, 59 ; 60 ; 61 ; 92 ;
255
impersonal, 256; 273
substitute for passive, 272
relative pronouns, 7 5 ; 108; 163 ff.
saber, 286; 291
"said," 19s
86 la escribi, 94, c
seasons, 44
ser
as auxiliary, 254 ; 270, i ; 276, 3
as auxiliary, substitutes for, 370,
i,tf
idiomatic uses, 295
impersonal, 269, 2
ser and estar, 25
ser de, with infinitive, 107, 6
servir, 294
si, 112,^; 214, 4
in wishes, 282, 3, e
si, 212, 6
si que, 214, 2
•ino, 232, 4
■obrar, 289
subjunctive mood, 88 ; 109 ; 278 ff.
as imperative, 90 ; 91
future tense, 281
imperfect tense, 1 10 ; 279 ; 280
in dependent clauses, 109 ; 278
in unreal conditions, 112; 279
in wishes, 90, 2 ; 282
sequence of tenses after, 1 1 1
with adverbs of doubt, 213
"such," 193
suffixes, 132, 4
superlative, 47 ; 48 ; 145 ; 146
absolute, 146
syllabication, 10
334
SPANISH GRAMMAR
tanto
to intensify, 214, 5
with comparatives, 142
tanto (tan) . . . como, 50
tardar en, 209, ^, (i)
tener
as auxiliary, 276, 2
idiomatic uses, 53,^; 58, r; 85; 296
tener que, with infinitive, 107, i
tenses, use
future, 76 ; 266
future perfect, 267
imperfect, 65 ; 264
perfect, 70 ; 73
pluperfect, 71
present, 16; 262
preterit, 63 ; 65, a ; 73, 2
preterit perfect, 265
sequence of, 1 1 1
"than," 49; 143
" the . . . the," correlatives, 142, i
time of day, 78
todo, 191; 192; 203, a; 212,5
triphthongs, 4
t6, 36, a
uno a otro, 190
uno u otro, 187
uno y otro, 186; 190
unos, 179, 3
with numbers, 149, 2
Usia, 198, I, a
ttsted, 36, a; 80, a; 198
verb
forms, 238 ff. For particular verbs y
see lisii Appendix I
compound tenses, 120; 241
defective, 251
impersonal, 252; 253; 269
impersonal reflexive, 256; 273
inceptive, 242, note, a^ 10, page
212; 295, ^z (2)
in -iar and -uar, 242, d
in -uir, 248
irregular, 250
irregular past participles, 249
orthographic changes, 242
passive voice, 254 ; 270; 271
passive voice, substitutes for, 271 ;
272; 273
periphrastic conjugation, 258; 275
principal parts, 243
radical-changing, 244 if.
reciprocal, 190; 257
reflexive, 255 ; 272
See also tenses, participle, subjunc-
tive mood, etc.
verbal idioms, 283 to 297
yez, 41
volver a, with infinitive, 107, 5
VO8, 198, 2, a
vosotros, 36, a; 198, 2
vowels, 2
wishes, 90, 2 ; 282
word-order, 114
valer, 297
yaya, 237, 6
y, 232, I
ya, 209, c
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
BERKELEY
Return to desk from which bonowed.
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below.
MAR 2 6 1953
(Ef5)(i'f®fl?[i®Ki imm\m
LD 21-100m-7,'52(A25288l6)476
>
YR 36287
U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES
,
633500
»
UNIVERSITY OF CAUFOMOA UBRARY
.1^
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11